Catalogo Tolomatic

Pneumatic Products
MAXIMUM DURABILITY
Table of Contents
ABOUT TOLOMATIC BC3 BAND CYLINDER
A Legacy of Innovation . . . . . . . . . . . ABT_4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_2
Endurance Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . ABT_5 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_4
More Solutions. Built to Last . . . . . . . . ABT_6 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_5
Custom, Modified & Standard Product BC310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_6
Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABT_8 BC315
1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_8
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABT_10 BC320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_10
The Rodless Advantage . . . . . . . . . . ABT_12 BC3 ReCiRCulating Ball
aBt
BeaRing Rodless CylindeR Tube Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_12
MXP
Rodless Cylinder Comparison . . . . . ABT_13 Foot Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_13
BC2
The Tolomatic Difference . . . . . . . . . ABT_14 Dual 180° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carrier BC3_14
BC3
Auxiliary Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_16
BC4
MXP BAND CYLINDER
ls
Auxiliary Dual 180° Carrier . . . . . . . . BC3_17
N Internal Bearing Features . . . . . . . . MXP_2
Mg
Contents
Single End Porting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_18

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_2
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_4
S1-1Solid Bearing Features . . . . . . . . . MXP_4

Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_5
CC
BC310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_6
BC315 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_8
BC320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_10
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_19
Tube .Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_12
Foot .Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_13
PB
P Profiled Rail Features . . . . . . . . . . MXP_6
Dual .180° .Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_14
Mxp band cylinder

Auxiliary .Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_16
Auxiliary .Dual .180° .Carrier . . . . . . BC3_17
abt
Shock Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_21

Single .End .Porting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_18
engR
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_19
Shock .Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_21
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_8
Application .Data .Worksheet . . . . . BC3_23
Mxp
Selection .Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_24

Application .Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_25
N internal bearing
Application Data Worksheet . . . . . . . BC3_23

Service .Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_27
S solid bearing Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_28
Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_9
P profiled rail
bc2
www.tolomatic.com
www.tolomatic.com BC3_1
BC3_ 1
Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_24

bc3
N Moment and Load Capacity . . . . MXP_10

Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_25
bc4
S Moment and Load Capacity . . . . . MXP_12

Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_27
ls
contents P Moment and Load Capacity . . . . MXP_14

Mg
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_28
N Internal Bearing Features . . . . . .MXP_2
S Solid Bearing Features . . . . . . . . .MXP_4
Load Deflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_16

P Profiled Rail Features . . . . . . . . . .MXP_6
Introducing MXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MXP_8
cc
Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MXP_9
N Moment and Load Capacity . . MXP_10
S Moment and Load Capacity . . MXP_12
P Moment and Load Capacity . . MXP_14
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_17
Load Deflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_16
pb
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_17
Cushion & Shock Absorber . . . . . MXP_18
BC4 BAND CYLINDER

Tube Clamp Requirements . . . . . MXP_19
N Internal Bearing Dimensions . MXP_21
engr
S Solid Bearing Dimensions . . . . MXP_26
Cushion & Shock Absorber . . . . . . . MXP_18

P Profiled Rail Dimensions . . . . . MXP_31
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_2
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_36
Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_38
Adjustment Procedures . . . . . . . . MXP_40
Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_41
Tube Clamp Requirements . . . . . . . MXP_19

Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_44
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_4
www.tolomatic.com MXP_1
MAXIMUM DURABILITY
N Internal Bearing Dimensions . . . . MXP_21 BC406 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_6

S Solid Bearing Dimensions . . . . . . MXP_26 BC410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_8
P Profiled Rail Dimensions . . . . . . . MXP_31 BC412 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_10
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_36 1.1
BC415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_12
Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_38 Long Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_14
BC4 Internal BearIng
aBt
Adjustment Procedures . . . . . . . . . . MXP_40 rodless CylInder Auxiliary Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_16

MXP
Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_41

BC2
Single End Porting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_18

Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_44
BC3
Foot Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_19

BC4
Tube Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_20

ls
BC2 BAND CYLINDER Contents

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_2
Floating Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_21

Mg
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_2
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_4
BC406 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_6
BC410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_8
BC412 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_10
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_22
CC
BC415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_12
BC420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_14
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_4
BC425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_16
Long .Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_18
1-1
PB

Single .End .Porting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_22
Foot .Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_23
Tube .Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_24
Carrier Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_5

Floating .Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_25
engr
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_26

BC2 Solid Bearing

aBt
BC205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_6
Service .Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_33
rodleSS Cylinder
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_34

MXP
BC210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_8
BC2

BC212 & 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_10
BC3
Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_29

BC220 & 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_12
BC4
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_30
lS
Mg
ContentS
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_2
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_4
Carrier .Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_5
Tube Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_16
CC
BC205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_6
Foot Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_17

BC210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_8
BC212 .& .15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_10
BC220 .& .25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_12
PB

Tube .Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_16
Foot .Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_17

Floating .Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_18
engr
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_20
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_20
Service .Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_27
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_28

Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_27
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_28
ABT_2 1.800.328.2174
Table of Contents
Linear
1.1 Slide Track Cable Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_19
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_2 TC05, TC07, TC10 . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_20
LS LINEAR SLIDE TC15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_21
ABt
RoDLESS CyLINDER LS05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_4
Automatic Tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_22
MXP
ABT
LS10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_6
CC07,10,15,20,25 . . . . . . . . . . . CC_23
BC2
Auxiliary Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_8 CC30,40,52,50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_24
BC3
LS Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_10 CC/Brake Combination . . . . . . . . . . CC_25
BC4
LS
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_11 CC15, CC20, CC25 . . . . . . . . . . . CC_26
CC30, CC40, CC52 . . . . . . . . . . . CC_27
MG
Proximity Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_13
MXP
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_28
CC
Shock Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_14

CoNtENtS
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_2
LS05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_4
CC Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . CC_30

PB
LS10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_6
Auxiliary .Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_8
LS .Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_10
Application Data Worksheet . . . . . LS_15

Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_11
ENGR
CC/Brake Selection Guidelines . . . CC_32

Proximity .Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_13
Shock .Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_14
Application .Data .Worksheet . . . . . . LS_15
Selection .Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_16
Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_16

TC Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . CC_35

Service .Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_17
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_18
www.tolomatic.com LS_1
Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . BC4_32 CC Application Guidelines . . . . . . . CC_36

Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_17 Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . CC_38
BC2
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_18 Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_39
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_40
Mag Coupled Cylinder & Slide

1.1
PB & PB2 Rod Cylinder Slides
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_2
PB Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_2
BC3
MG & MGS MaGnetically coupled MG Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_4
aBt
PB, PB2 Rod cylindeR
ABt
RodleSS cylindeR/Slide SlideS PB & PB2 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_3
MXp
MG Specs, Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . MG_5
MXP
PB Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_4
Bc2
Bc2
MGS Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_6
Bc3
PB Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_6
Bc3
MGS Specs, Dimensions . . . . . . . . . MG_7
Bc4
Bc4
PB Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_6
MG Foot Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_8
lS
lS
BC4
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_8
MG Floating Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_9
MG
MG
PB2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_9
contentS
cc
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MG_2 contentS
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_10
cc
MG .Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MG_4 PB Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_2
MG .Specs, .Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . .MG_5 PB & PB2 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . PB_3
MGS .Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MG_6 PB Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_4
PB2 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_10

MGS .Specs, .Dimensions . . . . . . . . . .MG_7 PB Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_6
pB
MG .Foot .Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MG_8 PB Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_6
PB
MG .Floating .Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MG_9 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_8
MGS Proximity Sensor . . . . . . . . MG_12

Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_10 PB2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_9
MGS .Proximity .Sensor . . . . . . . . MG_12 PB2 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_10
enGR
MGS .Shock .Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . MG_13 PB2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_11
PB2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_11
enGR
Application .Data .Worksheet . . . . . MG_15 PB2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_12
MG .Selection .Guidelines . . . . . . . . . MG_16 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_14
MGS Shock Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . MG_13

MGS .Selection .Guidelines . . . . . . . MG_17 Application Data Worksheet . . . . . . PB_16
Application .Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . MG_18 Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_17
MG .Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_19 Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . PB_18
PB2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_12

MGS .Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_20 Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_19
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_20
www.tolomatic.com MG_1
Application Data Worksheet . . . . . MG_15

www.tolomatic.com PB_1
LS
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_14
MG Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . MG_16
Application Data Worksheet . . . . . PB_16
MGS Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . MG_17
Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_17
Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . MG_18
Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . PB_18
MG Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_19
Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_19
MG
MGS Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_20
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_20
Cable Cylinders
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_2 Engineering Resources
CC Cable Cylinder Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENGR_2
abt
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_4 EnginEEring rEsourcEs

ABt
rodless Cylinder
MXP
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_5 Conversion Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENGR_7
CC
MXP
bC2
Double Acting Cable Cylinder . . . . . . CC_6 Terms / Conditions of Sale . . . . . . ENGR_9

Bc2
bC3
CC05, CC07, CC10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_7

Bc3
bC4
CC15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_8
Contents
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_2
Bc4
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_4
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_5
Double .Acting .Cable .Cylinder . . . . . . CC_6
ls
CC20, CC25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_9

. . . . .CC05, .CC07, .CC10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_7
. . . . .CC15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_8
. . . . .CC20, .CC25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_9
Ls
. . . . .CC30, .CC40, .CC52 . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_10

. . . . .CC50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_11
MG
Single .Acting .Cable .Cylinder . . . . . . CC_12
CC30, CC40, CC52 . . . . . . . . . . . CC_10

. . . . .SA07, .SA10, .SA15 . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_13
. . . . .SA20, .SA25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_14
. . . . .SA30, .SA40, .SA52, .SA50 . . . . . . CC_15
Mg
Double .Purchase .Cable .Cylinder . . . . . . CC_16

. . . . .DP15, .DP20, .DP25 . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_17
PB
CC
CC50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_11
. . . . .DP30, .DP40, .DP52 . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_18
Track .Cable .Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_19
. . . . .TC05, .TC07, .TC10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_20
cc
. . . . .TC15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_21
Automatic .Tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_22
Pb
. . . . .CC07,10,15,20,25 . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_23
Single Acting Cable Cylinder . . . . . CC_12

. . . . .CC30,40,52,50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_24
CC/Brake .Combination . . . . . . . . . . . CC_25
. . . . .CC15, .CC20, .CC25 . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_26
PB
. . . . .CC30, .CC40, .CC52 . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_27

enGr
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_28
CC .Selection .Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . CC_30
SA07, SA10, SA15 . . . . . . . . . . . CC_13

CC/Brake .Selection .Guidelines . . . . CC_32
TC .Selection .Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . CC_35
Engr
CC .Application .Guidelines . . . . . . . . CC_36

Application .Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_38
Service .Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_39
SA20, SA25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_14

Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_40 contEnts
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENGR_2
www.tolomatic.com CC_1
Conversion Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENGR_7
Terms / Conditions of Sale . . . . . . ENGR_9
SA30, SA40, SA52, SA50 . . . . . CC_15

www.tolomatic.com ENGR_1
ENGR
Double Purchase Cable Cylinder . . . CC_16

DP15, DP20, DP25 . . . . . . . . . . . CC_17
DP30, DP40, DP52 . . . . . . . . . . . CC_18
www.tolomatic.com ABT_3
A legacy of innovation in solving customer needs.
It started with a custom solution. Durable products, built to last with
abt
ABT
Tolomatic’s first product, the Float-A-Shaft®, marked the beginning of
Tolomatic’s innovative product solutions for the industrial automation
market. Burton Toles, Tolomatic's founder, designed the Float-A-Shaft
to greatly improve the efficiency of bagger/sealing machinery used in the
flour and milling industry. The unique right-angle gear box permitted quick
MXP
MXP
product changeover and is still used today by the thousands!
On the same bagger/sealer

machine, customers also wanted a
low-cost simple mechanism to lift
BC2
BC2
and sort bags. Again, the Tolomatic
solution proved to be a winner with
the invention of the cable cylinder –
the world’s first rodless product. Thus For every product we make–like
BC3
BC3
began Tolomatic’s product innovation the MXP actuator featured above–
legacy: unique and robust automation Tolomatic’s design philosophy is the same:
component solutions to solve customers’ build the most durable and reliable linear actuator
machinery motion challenges. available for use in industrial applications. Every design
decision is driven to make our products the best in every
BC4
BC4
aspect: performance, value, and life. From seals to finish, we make
it right for your application. We call this design philosophy “Endurance
Technology.” Customers call it “assurance.”
Tolomatic Milestones
• Founded in 1954 by Burton Toles – “Your products are built like a tank and run like a deer.” – Actual customer quote
LS
LS
invented the first right-angle gearbox that
floats along the shaft.
• Designed the first rodless cylinder in 1955 – Real data. Real specs. Real world.
today cable cylinders ship to over 40 countries! Products operate in the real world, not in a lab under a
MG
MG
• Introduced the BC2 in 1985 – the world’s controlled environment. Complex and extreme motion
best selling pneumatic rodless cylinder. profiles are often the norm. This is why Tolomatic
rigorously tests products in a variety of operating
• Tolomatic entered the electric linear motion conditions and provides complete performance
and controls market in 1992 with its first
information.
CC
CC
electric actuators.
• First certified in 1995 Tolomatic is current Tolomatic wrote the book on actuator life. Visit www.
with ISO 9001:2008 certification. tolomatic.com/resources to view white papers on
• In 2004 the top global auto producer selected optimizing service life, selecting the best lead screw and
Tolomatic as its sole worldwide supplier of how to avoid sizing mistakes. Want the facts? Turn to
PB
PB
servo actuators for robotic welding. Tolomatic.
• Tolomatic has an expanding portfolio
of patents for actuators, mechanical Thousands of customers ... working in material
assemblies and manufacturing processes. handling, packaging, medical, food & beverage and
ENGR
ENGR
automotive ... rely on Tolomatic products to get the job Go to www.tolomatic.com/resources and get the facts
• Today Tolomatic automation components,
numbering in the hundreds of millions, done. Do what they do – turn to Tolomatic for your from Tolomatic. Download our latest white papers, guides
continue to perform flawlessly in critical machinery motion and automation needs. and technical bulletins.
applications throughout the world.
ABT_4 1.800.328.2174 www.tolomatic.com ABT_5

abt
MXP
BC2
BC3
BC4
Power Transmission Pneumatic Actuators Electric Actuators
• Float-A-Shaft® and • Largest selection of rodless • Rodless screw and belt

Slide-Rite® right-angle cylinders in band, cable, designs solve a wide range
LS
gearboxes turn power and magnetically coupled of moment, load, precision,

around any corner. styles with a wide range of speed, and performance
load capacities. We’re the requirements.
• Caliper disc brakes in only company that offers
MG
mechanical, hydraulic, all three types of rodless • A broad range of rod

pneumatic and spring- cylinders. style actuators. Offered
applied models offer a with acme, ball or roller
wide variety of industrial • Rod slides for maximum screws for the force, life
stopping power. force in short stroke and repeatability required.
CC
packages, perfect for Guided actuator models are

• Disc cone clutches with high conveyor stops or load available.
torque output and non-slip, lifting applications.
dependable performance. • Integrated rod style
PB
actuators IMA integrates a

servo motor with ball & roller
screw technologies to deliver
a powerful compact actuator.
ENGR
The ICR SmartActuator

integrates servo motor and
drive with an actuator to
create an all-in-one solution.
ABT_6 1.800.328.2174
More solutions. Built to last.
ABT
MXP
BC2
BC3
BC4
Drives & Motors Customized Products Service & Technical Support
• Servo controllers, drives • Industry leading quick • Fast service and full techni-
and motors provide smooth, turnaround on custom cal support.
LS
quiet operation and high modifications to Tolomatic
performance. standard products. • All pneumatic & power
transmission catalog prod-
• Stepper controllers, drives • Linear motion solutions ucts are built-to-order
MG
and motors, including the with custom design and in the stroke
new ACS drive/controller to prototype services. length you
achieve precise positioning at specify in
economical prices. • Your Motor Here program 5 days, elec-
matches a Tolomatic tric catalog
CC
actuator to customer products in
motor and supplies the 15 days
in-line or reverse-parallel
motor adapter device free • Sizing & selection software
PB
of charge, mounted and and CAD
shipped with the actuator. available online at
www.tolomatic.com
ENGR
ACTUATOR
SIZING
Custom, modified and standard product solutions.
CUSTOM CAPABILITIES MATERIAL HANDLING PACKAGING MEDICAL Food & Beverage AUTOMOTIVE
abt
ABT
MXP
MXP
BC2
BC2
Tolomatic’s custom model shop can create Conveying machinery with built-in lane Modular bagging system fills and seals a Angiographic-fluid-delivery system Custom designed high force corrosion Servo actuators used in resistance spot
first-piece prototypes with the industry’s diverters offer a compact footprint with wide range of materials and bag sizes. combines motion control technology with resistant actuator for volumetric filling. welding (RSW) increase weld quality.
BC3
BC3
fastest turnaround times. optimal performance. physician-interactive control.
Custom Solutions are Customer Challenge: Customer Challenge: Customer Challenge: Customer Challenge: Customer Challenge:
Standard Business The traditional method of using tie rod A leader in packaging technology was Power injection systems used in the A designer and manufacturer of volumetric A leading automotive manufacturer was
BC4
BC4
Hundreds of customers partner with cylinders to operate diverters required faced with the problem of compensating angiography technique to diagnose filling equipment for the food / beverage creating a state-of-the-art automotive
Tolomatic to solve unique automation too much space to fit in space-restrictive for inconsistent bag dimensions on its coronary disease did not offer the industry desired to deploy electric actuators assembly facility using electric technology.
application challenges. We are geared production areas. modular bag filling and sealing system. ability to vary the fluid flow rate during to improve performance and minimize Specifications demanded a servo actuator
Irregularly sized bags required manual injection. A medical company was
to handle design requests–from our product waste. The challenge was to with precise performance to create the
setup and were slowing the production looking to improve this technology by
Model Shop (for fast prototypes) all the Tolomatic Solution: provide an electric actuator that could highest quality welds possible. The actuator
LS
LS
process which required high-speed giving the physician more control of the
way through our ISO 9001:2008 certified Tolomatic recommended a series of meet the demanding force, speed and needed to be compatible with leading robot
accuracy and flexibility. process and streamline the complexity
manufacturing facility. Over 33% of our total pneumatic rodless band cylinders that could duty cycle requirements with stainless steel manufacturer equipment with minimized
of equipment setup. Reliable, consistent
business is based on products not found in be easily retrofitted into production lines by construction and IP69K protection. setup and provide zero maintenance
Tolomatic Solution: performance was a key factor.
our standard catalog. offering a variety of mounting options. The operation over the life of the actuator.
MG
MG
manufacturer’s customers were pleased Tolomatic supplied a series of customized Tolomatic Solution:
With a mind-set toward innovation, years of with the space saving results and durability electric screw drive actuators that precisely Tolomatic Solution: An entirely custom electric actuator was Tolomatic Solution:
positioned the incoming bags before Tolomatic designed a customized rod screw
solid industry experience, and fast response of the machines. The result was an increase developed by Tolomatic. The solution Working closely with the customer,
insertion into the filling/sealing line. Two actuator to provide the rigidity, precision
times, Tolomatic can help you get the job of repeat customers for included a round-bodied actuator made Tolomatic developed ServoWeld®, a
actuators adjust the vertical position and and repeatability required for the injection
CC
CC
done. If you are looking for linear motion the manufacturer. from 316 stainless steel that made it ideal custom servo actuator with an integral
two others center the bags in the tray. system. The compact design is capable of
solutions–pneumatic or electromechanical– for the wash down operating environment. motor. The actuator required no air cooling
The results: variations in bag lengths and performing the necessary consistent thrust
and you cannot required for fluid delivery. Physicians are In addition, Tolomatic deployed high force (a common trait of weld actuators) with
find a catalog widths are automatically compensated and long life roller screw technology, zero maintenance. Completely compatible
able to easily control and monitor the fluid
product, get with for eliminating filling, sealing and leakage heavy duty bearings and corrosion with the top robot manufacturer weld guns,
PB
PB
delivery keeping
Tolomatic. You problems and increasing resistant seals while adapting ServoWeld technology proved efficient,
their focus on
will experience production. the actuator motor mount to durable and helped the customer
diagnosis and
what we mean by treatment. the customer’s choice achieve their 5-star crash
Excellence in of wash down rating goal.
ENGR
ENGR
Motion. MODIFIED MXP-S motor.
CUSTOM 2 DIRECTION
ELECTRIC ACTUATOR
CUSTOM STAINLESS
STEEL ELECTRIC
ACTUATOR
CUSTOM ELECTRIC GSWA
ACTUATOR
Turn to Tolomatic for the best motion control and linear motion solutions for your applications.
ABT_8 1.800.328.2174 www.tolomatic.com ABT_9
Applications
abt
MXP
BC2
Application Description:
BC3
A manufacturer of battery chargers needed a method of taking

sheet metal off of pallets and placing onto the assembly line. Speed
is critical and end-of-stroke position must be consistent, thus,
Tolomatic pneumatic products were chosen for this system.
BC4
Application Requirements:
• Fast response, 1 part must be reoriented and moved each 3
seconds
• Movement from end-of-stroke to end-of-stroke with consistent
LS
positioning
Application Description: • Low cost

A manufacturer of ceramic blocks needed a method of stacking • End-of-stroke adjustment
and moving heavy blocks for final packing. Speed, and power
MG
are critical; end-of-stroke position must be consistent. Tolomatic

pneumatic products were chosen for this system. Tolomatic Solution:
This application uses a Tolomatic PB2 Rod Cylinder Slide, attached
to a BC3 Band Cylinder with adjustable shocks. This actuator
Application Requirements: assembly moves the vacuum grid attachment that holds the sheet
CC
• Fast response; 1 block must be moved and stacked each 3 metal.

seconds
positioning
• High power; able to move 43 lb. ceramic blocks
PB
• Low cost
Tolomatic Solution:
ENGR
This application uses a Tolomatic BC3 Band Cylinder. The BC3

was chosen because its high bending moment capacity allows it to
support the high overhung load at the distance required.
ABT_10 1.800.328.2174
Applications
ABT
MXP
BC2
BC3
Application Description: Application Description:
BC4
A manufacturer needed a method to stamp information on a plastic A manufacturer of automated spray booths needed actuators to
case. open and close the doors on the spray booth. The doors were
already guided and supported.
Application Requirements:
LS
• Fast response, less than 1 second Application Requirements:
• Fast response; doors to open (close) within 2 seconds
positioning • Movement from end-of-stroke to end-of-stroke with consistent
positioning
• Relatively high force applied
MG
• Low cost
• End-of-stroke cushioning
Tolomatic Solution:
This application uses a single Power-Block2 and custom adapter
plate with customer’s heat stamper. Tolomatic Solution:
CC
This application had used a competitor’s band cylinder in previous
designs. The BC4 was chosen because it had the same envelope
as the other band cylinder yet offered lower cost, with longer
cylinder life. Because thousands of these spray booths are being
made, the spray booth manufacturer was able to create a better PB
product and improve its bottom line.
ENGR
Applications
With over 50 years of proven application experience,
Tolomatic pneumatic products are key components in
the following industries and applications:
abt
Industry Applications
Installations
• Material Handling
• Packaging • Part Transfer
MXP
• Automotive • Part Advancement

• Food and Beverage • Part Sorting
• Material Handling & • Cutting
Conveying
BC2
• Elevators
• Plastic Injection Molding
• Palletizing
• Metal Processing
• Door Closure
• Paper and Textiles
• Conveyors
BC3
• Medical
• Robotics
• Electronics
• Machine Tools
• Printing
• General Automation
• and More …
BC4
• and More …
The rodless advantage

LS
Tolomatic rodless Band Cylinders Consider this: A rodless band cylinder contains its
get the job done in less space than stroke within the cylinder itself. A 2" bore cylinder
with a 24" stroke can provide a 43% space savings
rod style cylinders
MG
when compared to an equivalently sized rod cylinder.

Space Required for Rod Cylinder & Load
In addition, the load is supported throughout the
entire stroke so there is minimal load deflection when
LOAD LOAD compared to rod style cylinders.
LOAD LOAD With a Tolomatic Band Cylinder, there is no concern

CC
about rod rotation. Also, because rodless cylinders

Band Cylinder have equal piston areas in both directions, the cylinder
Space Savings Space Required for Band Cylinder & Load experiences zero load variation in either direction.
Go rodless and save space!
PB
rod Style vs rodless Feature comparison

Tolomatic
Feature Rodless Rod Style
ENGR

Integrated Load Support ✔ —
Space Saving Design ✔ —

Piston Seals Isolated from Load ✔ —

Internal Air Cushioning ✔
✔
ABT_12 1.800.328.2174
Rodless Cylinder Comparison
ABT
Use this table as a quick reference to help understand the differences and similarities of each product line
ST = Standard Feature OP = Optional Feature – = Not Available
MXP
Feature MXP-N MXP-S MXP-P BC4 BC2 BC3 LS MG MGS CC
Stainless Steel
ST ST ST ST ST ST ST – – –
Band
Internal Air
ST ST ST ST ST3 ST – – – ST
BC2
Cushioning
Internal
Polyurethane – – – – – – – ST – –
Bumper
External
BC3
Shock OP OP OP OP OP1 OP OP – OP –
Absorbers
Adjustable
Shock OP OP OP – OP1 OP – – – –
Absorbers
BC4
Caliper Disc
– – – – – – – – – OP
Brake
Foot Mounts OP OP OP OP OP OP – OP – –
Tube Supports OP OP OP OP OP OP OP – – –
LS
Floating Mount OP OP – OP OP – – OP – –
Auxiliary
OP OP OP OP OP OP OP – – –
Carrier
Dual 180°
– – – – – OP – – – –
MG
Carrier
Proximity
– – – – – – OP – OP –
Sensors
Long Carrier – – – OP – – – – – –
Multi-Ported
CC
ST ST ST ST ST1 ST ST – ST OP
Head
Single End
OP4 OP4 OP4 OP – ST ST – – –
Porting
Sensors /
OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP2
PB
Switches
LS05: Composite,
Carrier Engineered Engineered Engineered Engineered Recirculating Composite Sintered
Profiled Rail – –
Bearing Type Resin Resin Resin Resin Ball Bearing LS10: Bronze OR
Ball Bearing Ball Bearing
ENGR
Piston Isolated
– ST ST – ST ST ST ST ST ST
From Load
Extruded
Aluminum ST ST ST ST ST ST ST – – –
Tube
1Not available for the BC205 2Switches are not available for cable cylinders with steel tube 3BC205 features external bumper 4Not available for the MXP16
The difference
customer service
abt
• JUST A PHONE
CALL AWAY -
Expect prompt,
courteous replies
to all of your
MXP
application and
product questions.
Check us out at
1-800-328-2174
BC2
• 5 DAYS BUILT-TO-ORDER - pneumatic

BC3
products assembled, tested and out the door

in five days or less.

Our products will be there when you need
them. Depend on Tolomatic!
BC4
technical and application support

LS
• COMPLETE INFORMATION
AVAILABLE ONLINE -
www.tolomatic.com - your
definitive source for everything
MG
you need to know about

3D models Tolomatic and our products.
and
2D drawings • Sizing and selection support -
on the web step by step instructions,
• Available in specifications and performance
CC
data for every pneumatic

all common
product.
formats.
PB
ENGR
ABT_14 1.800.328.2174
Mxp band cylinder
ABT
MXP
N Internal Bearing
S solid bearing
P profiled rail
BC2
BC3
BC4
LS
Contents
MG
N Internal Bearing Features . . . . . . MXP_2
S Solid Bearing Features . . . . . . . . MXP_4
P Profiled Rail Features . . . . . . . . . . MXP_6
Introducing MXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_8
CC
Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_9
N Moment and Load Capacity . . MXP_10
S Moment and Load Capacity . . MXP_12
P Moment and Load Capacity . . . MXP_14
Load Deflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_16
PB
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_17
Cushion & Shock Absorber . . . . . MXP_18
Tube Clamp Requirements . . . . . MXP_19
N Internal Bearing Dimensions . MXP_21
ENGR
S Solid Bearing Dimensions . . . . MXP_26

P Profiled Rail Dimensions . . . . . . MXP_31
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_36
Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_38
Adjustment Procedures . . . . . . . . MXP_40
Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_41
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_44
www.tolomatic.com MXP_1
MAXIMUM DURABILITY
N internal bearing … MAXIMUM DURABILITY
Endurance Technology features are
designed for maximum durability to
provide extended service life. non-wear band retention
•Magnetically retained bands are not subject to
The MXP-N pneumatic rodless cylinder is exactly what you expect from the
wear as are mechanically retained systems
abt
ABT
industry’s number one rodless supplier. Featuring durable stainless steel bands, • Immediate band engagement and release
permanently lubricated internal bearing and low breakaway pressure the MXP-N results in less drag on piston for lower
is a low cost solution for dust wiper breakaway force during initial carrier movement
stainless steel bands applications with limited • Formed end cap and
• Both interior sealing band load and bending moment side dust wipers keep
and exterior dust internal bearings requirements. Built-to- contaminants from entering
MXP
MXP
band made of • Design order in stroke lengths up
the cylinder’s internal area
fatigue resistant maximizes to 206 inches.
stainless piston
steel bearing Adjustable cushions
surface • Easy screw adjustment for smooth deceleration
area for less pressure on bearing surfaces, protecting actuator from high stress at end-of-stroke
BC2
BC2
less pressure results in less wear
• Adjustable cushions with retained stainless steel
• Permanent lubrication for low friction and needle screw for increased safety
Stainless steel is
durable, flexible and extended bearing life
CORROSION RESISTANT
• Internal location provides protection from NOTE: Boxed letters
indicate ordering codes
external contaminants, extending life
BC3
BC3
• Does not stretch like bands made of rubber or
polymer materials Options
• Stainless steel sealing bands resist blow out Auxiliary Carrier DW
during pressure spikes that may occur during • 2X higher Fz (load) capacity
high velocity cushioning • High bending moment capacity
BC4
BC4
Floating Mount FL
• Compensates for non-parallelism between
MXP band cylinder and externally guided load
high strength piston
LS
LS
• Single piece extrusion Tube clamps tc
internal for piston bracket and • Used for intermediate support
Magnets carrier reduces failure • Flush with bottom of actuator
points to retain low profile
• Standard feature • Drop-in, adjustable mounting locations
that allows sensor • Piston bracket neck
MG
MG
installation on left, cross-sectional area is Foot Mounts f m
positive right or bottom of up to 28% greater than • For end mounting of MXP band cylinder
position the extrusion competitive designs, • Use to bottom or side mount actuator
seals providing increased
retained durability Shock Absorbers aL sL
Dust Band •Sturdy U-cup
CC
CC
25mm PISTON BRACKET aH sH
base section MINIMUM CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA (mm2)
• Retained dust band assures positive 160 • Allows increased operating speed and load
keeps contaminants positioning of • Self-compensates for load or speed changes
from entering the seal lip for better
150
25% 28% • Minimizes impact load to equipment
cylinder interior, sealing and less 140 Greater Greater
greater • Fixed or adjustable position shocks
protecting comp seal wear
PB
PB
Porting choices onents for reduced 130
direct mount • 4-ported heads are standard to allow air maintenance and • Made of custom
•Head bolts are tapped increased uptime formulated poly
120 Single-End Porting s
for direct mounting connections on sides, end or bottom • Convenient single-end air connection
urethane for 110
(not available on MXP16)
• Single-end porting allows convenient one end pliable, wear 100
air connection
ENGR
ENGR
resistant seal lip TOLOMATIC Brand Brand
MXP “O” “F” Switches
inch or metric mounting • NPT, Metric Parallel (ISO-G/BSP) & Metric • Wide variety of sensing choices: Reed, Solid
• Your choice of inch (US standard) or metric Taper (Rc/BST) available on both metric and State PNP or NPN, all available normally open
fasteners for carrier and head bolt mounting inch (US standard) mount actuators or normally closed
• Flush mount, drop-in installation, anytime
• Bright LEDs, power & signal indication
• CE rated, RoHS compliant
MXP_ 2 1.800.328.2174 www.tolomatic.com MXP_ 3

S Solid Bearing … MAXIMUM DURABILITY
designed for maximum durability to non-wear band retention
provide extended service life.
•Magnetically retained bands are not subject to
wear as are mechanically retained systems
stainless steel bands positive • Immediate band engagement and release
abt
ABT
position The MXP-S pneumatic rodless cylinder is exactly dust wiper results in less drag on piston for lower
• Both interior sealing band what you expect from the industry’s number one breakaway force during initial carrier movement
and exterior dust seals • Formed end cap and
rodless supplier. Featuring durable stainless steel side dust wipers keep
band made of bands, field replaceable engineered bearings and a
fatigue resistant •Sturdy U-cup contaminants from entering
large carrier mounting pattern the MXP-S is a great the cylinder’s internal area
stainless base section solution for applications that require increased Mx
MXP
MXP
steel assures positive bending moment capacity. Built-to-order in stroke
positioning of lengths up to 206 inches. Adjustable cushions
seal lip for better
sealing and less • Easy screw adjustment for smooth
seal wear deceleration protecting actuator from high
stress at end-of-stroke
Stainless steel is
• Made of custom
BC2
BC2
durable, flexible and
formulated poly • Adjustable cushions with retained stainless
CORROSION RESISTANT
urethane for steel needle screw for increased safety
• Does not stretch like bands made of rubber or pliable, wear NOTE: Boxed
polymer materials resistant seal lip letters indicate
ordering codes
• Stainless steel sealing bands resist blow out
BC3
BC3
during pressure spikes that may occur during
high velocity cushioning
Options
large flexible Auxiliary Carrier DW
Mounting pattern • 2X higher Fz (load) capacity
retained dust band • Carrier gives more load stability • High bending moment capacity
BC4
BC4
• Retained dust band keeps contaminants from • Compatibility with existing BC2
entering the cylinder interior, protecting components applications Floating Mount FL
for reduced maintenance and increased uptime • Compensates for non-parallelism between
• More fastening options MXP band cylinder and externally guided load
LS
LS
Tube clamps tc
non-binding bearing arms • Used for intermediate support
• Bearings are tensioned • Flush with bottom of actuator
indirectly, providing bind to retain low profile
internal free adjustment • Drop-in, adjustable mounting locations
Magnets
MG
MG
•Standard feature that Foot Mounts f m
allows sensor installation • For end mounting of MXP band cylinder
on left, right or bottom • Use to bottom or side mount actuator
of the extrusion
Shock Absorbers aL sL
CC
CC
aH sH
isolated piston trapezoidal bearings • Allows increased operating speed and load
• Unique design isolates the piston from the • Trapezoidal design maximizes • Self-compensates for load or speed changes
applied load, extending the service life of bearing surface area for less • Minimizes impact load to equipment
the piston seals pressure on bearing surfaces; • Fixed or adjustable position shocks
PB
PB
less pressure results in less wear
Porting choices • Engineered bearing material has Single-End Porting s
direct mount • 4-ported heads are standard to allow air low static and dynamic friction • Convenient single-end air connection
•Head bolts are tapped with low wear properties for long (not available on MXP16)
for direct mounting connections on sides, end or bottom
lasting, smooth operation
ENGR
ENGR
• Single-end porting allows convenient one end Switches
air connection • Bearings are field replaceable for
extended service life • Wide variety of sensing choices: Reed, Solid
inch or metric mounting • NPT, Metric Parallel (ISO-G/BSP) & Metric • Piston remains isolated even when the State PNP or NPN, all available normally open
• Your choice of inch (US standard) or metric Taper (Rc/BST) available on both metric and or normally closed
carrier is deflected under load
fasteners for carrier and head bolt mounting inch (US standard) mount actuators • Flush mount, drop-in installation, anytime
• Piston bracket and carrier feature single • Bright LEDs, power & signal indication
piece extrusions, reducing failure points • CE rated, RoHS compliant

P profiled rail … MAXIMUM DURABILITY
Low carrier height
• Reduces overall cylinder envelope Adjustable cushions
The MXP-P pneumatic rodless cylinder is exactly what you
• Easy screw adjustment for smooth
abt
ABT
expect from the industry’s number one rodless supplier. • Large mounting pattern for high load stability
Recirculating ball bearings Featuring durable stainless steel bands, a reliable recirculating deceleration protecting actuator
ball bearing design and smooth, low breakaway pressure the from high stress at end-of-stroke
•Recirculating ball bearings are
used to reduce friction and extend MXP-P is the best solution for applications with high load • Adjustable cushions with retained
actuator life and bending moment requirements. Built-to-order in stainless steel needle screw for
stroke lengths up to 206 inches. increased safety
MXP
MXP
• Ball bearings with a grease pocket
between ball elements, reduces fric-
tion, noise and maintenance
• Large permissible moment loads non-wear band retention
• Low profile recirculating ball bearings •Magnetically retained bands are not
BC2
BC2
• High speed operation, low heat subject to wear as are mechanically
generation retained systems
• High precision, smooth, low friction • Immediate band engagement and
motion release results in less drag on piston
for lower breakaway force during initial carrier
BC3
BC3
movement
retained
Dust Band
• Retained dust band NOTE: Boxed letters
keeps contaminants indicate ordering codes
from entering the
BC4
BC4
cylinder interior,
protecting comp
Options
onents for reduced Auxiliary Carrier DW
dust wiper maintenance and • 2X higher Fz (load) capacity
• Formed end cap and increased uptime • High bending moment capacity
side dust wipers keep
LS
LS
contaminants from entering
internal magnets the cylinder’s internal area Tube clamps tc
•Standard feature that allows • Used for intermediate support
sensor installation on the open • Flush with bottom of actuator
side or bottom of the extrusion to retain low profile
isolated piston
MG
MG
• Drop-in, adjustable mounting locations
• Unique design isolates the piston from the applied load,
extending the service life of the piston seals Foot Mounts f m
positive • For end mounting of MXP band cylinder
stainless steel bands position • Use to bottom or side mount actuator
• Both interior sealing band seals Shock Absorbers aL sL
CC
CC
and exterior dust •Sturdy
band made of U-cup aH sH
fatigue resistant
Porting choices direct mount stainless base • Allows increased operating speed and load
• 4-ported heads are stand •Head bolts are tapped steel section • Self-compensates for load or speed changes
ard to allow air connections for direct mounting assures • Minimizes impact load to equipment
positive
PB
PB
on side, top or end • Fixed or adjustable position shocks
positioning of seal lip
• Single-end porting allows for better sealing and Single-End Porting s
convenient one end air less seal wear • Convenient single-end air connection
connection Stainless steel is
inch or metric durable, flexible and • Made of custom
(not available on MXP16)
• NPT, Metric Parallel mounting CORROSION RESISTANT
formulated polyure
ENGR
ENGR
(ISO-G / BSP) & Metric Taper • Your choice of inch Switches
• Does not stretch like bands made of rubber or thane for pliable, wear • Wide variety of sensing choices: Reed, Solid
(Rc / BST) available on both (US standard) or metric resistant seal lip
polymer materials State PNP or NPN, all available normally open
metric and inch (US standard) fasteners for carrier and • Piston remains isolated even when the carrier is deflected or normally closed
mount actuators head bolt mounting • Stainless steel sealing bands resist blow out under load • Flush mount, drop-in installation, anytime
during pressure spikes that may occur during • Piston bracket and carrier feature single piece extrusions, • Bright LEDs, power & signal indication
high velocity cushioning reducing failure points • CE rated, RoHS compliant

Introducing the MXP band cylinder – designed to
outlast every rodless cylinder on the market
The MXP pneumatic rodless cylinder • Durable Bearings. Three bearing choices to match your application
is exactly what you expect from the needs. Profiled rail design reduces friction and extends actuator life. Solid
industry’s number one rodless supplier. bearing design reduces stress concentration for optimum performance.
abt
Designed with our exclusive ENDURANCE Internal bearing design is permanently lubricated for long, trouble-free
TECHNOLOGY SM features, the MXP service.
delivers superior performance to meet
the most demanding applications. • Durable Bands. Stainless steel bands are stronger and will not
MXP
Nobody knows rodless like Tolomatic, and elongate like elastomer (non-metallic) bands, providing reliable sealing
the MXP proves it. over the life of the actuator.
BC2
BC3
BC4
LS
MG
N-INTERNAL BEARING S-SOLID BEARING P-Profiled RAIL

CC
• Low cost solution for applications with • Increased Mx moment capacity • Recirculating ball bearing design offers
limited load and bending moment reduced friction for reliable service life
requirements • Large bearing surface contact area
optimizes stress distribution on • High load and bending moment
PB
• Lowest breakaway pressure bearing for long service life capacities

• Best in many vertical applications • Large carrier mounting pattern for • Low profile to fit your application
more load stability and compatibility
• Permanently lubed internal bearing with existing BC2 applications • High precision bearings feature
ENGR
smooth, low breakaway motion

• Engineered bearing material does not
require additional lubrication
• Solid bearings are field replaceable
MXP_ 8 1.800.328.2174
select the performance you need
Choose from: • Three Bearing Models • Six Bore Sizes • Built to Your Specified Stroke Length!
Moment & Load Capacity Comparison
Graph for model comparison, data from MXP40, 38mm (1.5") bore
2,000 224
N-m
ABT
1,800
Mx
Fz
My
MXP
1,600
Mz
MAX. Fz [LOAD] (lbs.)

MAX. BENDING MOMENT (in-lbs)
1,400 Fz
BC2
1,200
1,000 112
N-m
BC3
800
736
BC4
600
400
225
LS
200
195
Mx My Mz Fz
0
N S P
MG
Tolomatic
MXP Band
Cylinder
Model
CC
Bearing
Type Internal Bearing Solid Bearing Profiled Rail
Moment
PB
Capacity Moderate Moderate + Mx High
Isolated
Piston No Yes Yes
Ideal • Guided Loads • Side Loads • High Moment Loads
ENGR
Applications • Vertical Orientation • Impact Loads • High Speeds with

Heavy Loads
• High Precision
Product Page MXP_2 Page MXP_4 Page MXP_6
Details
www.tolomatic.com MXP_ 9
moment and load capacity N Internal bearing
standard Maximum Bending Moments Max. Load Thrust

BORE Mx My Mz Fz (at 100 PSI)
Inch 0.63 in 3 in-lbs 35 in-lbs 5 in-lbs 30 lbf 30.7 lbf
16
Metric 16 mm 0.3 N-m 4.0 N-m 0.6 N-m 133 N 136 N
abt

25
Inch 1.25 in 36 in-lbs 318 in-lbs 120 in-lbs 115 lbf 123 lbf
32
MXP
40
Metric 38 mm 6.2 N-m 65 N-m 17.6 N-m 867 N 786 N
Inch 2.00 in 98 in-lbs 1,017 in-lbs 172 in-lbs 270 lbf 314 lbf
50
Metric 50 mm 11.1 N-m 115 N-m 19.4 N-m 1,201 N 1,397 N
BC2
63
Ratings are the maximum values for shock-free, vibration-

free operation in a typical industrial environment.
BC3
The moment and load capacity of the Contact Tolomatic for assistance in selecting the most
appropriate actuator for your application.
actuator’s bearing system is based
on an L10 life of 200,000,000 linear
inches of travel. Life of the actuator
BC4
will vary for each application depend-

ing on the combined loads, motion
parameters and operating conditions.
The load factor (LF) ratios for each
LS
application must not exceed a value

of 1 (as calculated below). Exceeding
a load factor of 1 will diminish the
actuator’s rated life.
MG
LF = Mx + My + Mz + Fy + Fz < 1
Mxmax Mymax Mzmax Fymax Fzmax
With combined loads, Lf must

CC
not exceed the value 1.

PB
ENGR
MXP_ 10 1.800.328.2174
32
My & Mz (in-lbs) MOMEN

My & Mz (N-m) MOMEN
My & Mz (N-m) MOMEN
My & Mz (N-m) MOMEN

z
&M
My
25
moment and load capacity
6,000 678
N Internal bearing
My
32
2,000 226 2,000 226
dw auxiliary Maximum452Bending Moments Max. Load Thrust

"D"
carrier 4,000
BORE M
z
Min MxA MyA* MzA* FzA (at 100 PSI)
y y&
1,000 25
M
113 1,000 Inch 0.63 in 113
25
M
5.0 in 3 in-lbs 150 in-lbs 81 in-lbs 60 lbf 30.7 lbf
16 2,000 226
40 M
z
Metric 16 mm 127 mm 0.3 N-m 16.9 N-m 9.1 N-m 267 N 136 N
z
32 M
Inch 1.00 in 6.0 in 9 in-lbs 390 in-lbs 143 in-lbs 130 lbf 78.5 lbf
ABT
25 Mz 25
0 0 0
Metric 25 mm 0
152 0mm 1.0 N-m 0 44.1 N-m 16.2 N-m 578 N 349 N
6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
“D” (inches) DISTANCE BETWEEN CARRIERS Inch 1.25 in
“D” (inches) DISTANCE BETWEEN CARRIERS 7.0“D”
in (inches) DISTANCE
36BETWEEN
in-lbsCARRIERS 805 in-lbs 302 in-lbs 230 lbf 123 lbf
32
Metric 32 mm 178 mm 4.1 N-m 91.0 N-m 34.1 N-m 1,023 N 546 N
MXP
Inch 1.50 in 8.5 in 55 in-lbs 1,658 in-lbs 413 in-lbs 390 lbf 177 lbf
40
ER
S Metric 38 mm 216 mm 6.2 N-m 187 N-m 46.7 N-m 1,735 N 786 N
R RI
CA Inch 2.00 in 8.6 in 98 in-lbs 2,322 in-lbs 707 in-lbs 540 lbf 314 lbf
N
EE
ETW 50
C EB Metric 50 mm 218 mm 11.1 N-m 262 N-m 79.8 N-m 2,402 N 1,397 N
AN
BC2
ST
” DI Inch 2.50 in 13.0 in 120 in-lbs 4,810 in-lbs 808 in-lbs 740 lbf 491 lbf
“D 63
Metric 64 mm 330 mm 13.6 N-m 544 N-m 91.0 N-m 3,292 N 2,184 N
*At minimum “D” distance between carriers see graph below for other distances
With combined loads, Lf must not exceed the value 1. Ratings are the maximum values for shock-free, vibration-
BC3
LF = Mx + My + Mz + Fy + Fz < 1
Contact Tolomatic for assistance in selecting the most
BC4
Mya & Mza vs. Distance
MOMENT (N-m)
0 250 500 750 1,000 1,250
30 Mya MOMENT
63 700
25
LS
50 600
40
20 25 32
500
16
400
15
DISTANCE BETWEEN CARRIERS (in)
DISTANCE BETWEEN CARRIERS (mm)
MG
300
10
200
5
0 2,500 5,000 7,500 10,000
MOMENT (in-lbs)
CC
MOMENT (N-m)
0 50 100 150
30 Mza MOMENT
63 700
25
600
40
PB
25 32 50
20 500
16
15 400
300
10
ENGR
200
5
0 500 1,000 1,500
MOMENT (in-lbs)
Ratings were calculated with 1.) Coupling between carriers is rigid. 3.) Coupling device applies no misaligned loads to
the following conditions: 2.) Load is equally distributed between carriers. carriers.
moment and load capacity S solid bearing

BORE Mx My Mz Fz (at 100 PSI)
16
abt

25
32
MXP
40
Metric 38 mm 31.1 N-m 67.8 N-m 24.9 N-m 1,001 N 786 N
50
BC2
63
Ratings are the maximum values for shock-free, vibration-

BC3
The moment and load capacity of the Contact Tolomatic for assistance in selecting the most
actuator’s bearing system is based
on an L10 life of 200,000,000 linear
inches of travel. Life of the actuator
BC4
will vary for each application depend-

ing on the combined loads, motion
parameters and operating conditions.
The load factor (LF) ratios for each
LS

a load factor of 1 will diminish the
actuator’s rated life.
MG
LF = Mx + My + Mz + Fy + Fz < 1
With combined loads, Lf must

CC
not exceed the value 1.

PB
ENGR
MXP_ 12 1.800.328.2174
My & Mz (N-m) MOMENT

32
z
&M
My
25
6,000 678
S solid bearing
My
32
2,000 226 2,000 226
dw auxiliary
"D" Maximum452Bending Moments* Max. Load Thrust
carrier 4,000
BORE M
z
Min MxA MyA MzA FzA (at 100 PSI)
y y&
1,000 25M
113 1,000 Inch 0.63
M
25 in 113 5.0 in 44 in-lbs 175 in-lbs 175 in-lbs 70 lbf 30.7 lbf
16 2,000 226
40 M
z
Metric 16 mm 127 mm 5.0 N-m 19.8 N-m 19.8 N-m 311 N 136 N
z
32 M
Inch 1.00 in 6.0 in 120 in-lbs 420 in-lbs 420 in-lbs 140 lbf 78.5 lbf
ABT
25 Mz 25
0 0 0
Metric 25 mm 0
152 mm
0 13.6 N-m 0 47.5 N-m 47.5 N-m 623 N 349 N
6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
“D” (inches) DISTANCE BETWEEN CARRIERS 7.0 in 200BETWEEN
“D” (inches) DISTANCE in-lbsCARRIERS 1,050 in-lbs 1,050 in-lbs 300 lbf 123 lbf
32
Metric 32 mm 178 mm 22.6 N-m 119 N-m 119 N-m 1,334 N 546 N
MXP
Inch 1.50 in 8.5 in 550 in-lbs 1,913 in-lbs 1,913 in-lbs 450 lbf 177 lbf
40
ER
S Metric 38 mm 216 mm 62.1 N-m 216 N-m 216 N-m 2,002 N 786 N
R RI
CA Inch 2.00 in 8.6 in 630 in-lbs 2,709 in-lbs 2,709 in-lbs 630 lbf 314 lbf
N
EE
ETW 50
C EB Metric 50 mm 218 mm 71.2 N-m 306 N-m 306 N-m 2,802 N 1,397 N
N
BC2
STA
” DI Inch 2.50 in 13.0 in 1,170 in-lbs 6,760 in-lbs 6,760 in-lbs 1,040 lbf 491 lbf
“D 63
Metric 64 mm 330 mm 132 N-m 764 N-m 764 N-m 4,626 N 2,184 N
BC3
LF = Mx + My + Mz + Fy + Fz < 1
BC4
Mya & Mza MOMENT (N-m)
0 250 500 750 1,000 1,250 1,500 1,750
30
63 700
LS
25
50 600
40
DISTANCE BETWEEN
DISTANCE BETWEEN
CARRIERS (mm)
MG
32
CARRIERS (in)
20 25 500
16
400
CC
15
300
10
PB
200
5
ENGR
0 2,500 5,000 7,500 10,000 12,500 15,000

Mya & Mza MOMENT (in-lbs)
moment and load capacity P Profiled rail

BORE Mx My Mz Fy Fz (at 100 PSI)
Inch 0.63 in 39 in-lbs 339 in-lbs 339 in-lbs 217 lbf 217 lbf 30.7 lbf
16
Metric 16 mm 4.5 N-m 38.3 N-m 38.3 N-m 966 N 966 N 136 N
abt
Inch 1.00 in 126 in-lbs 502 in-lbs 377 in-lbs 449 lbf 449 lbf 78.5 lbf
25
Metric 25 mm 14.3 N-m 56.7 N-m 42.6 N-m 1,996 N 1,996 N 349 N
Inch 1.25 in 226 in-lbs 1,344 in-lbs 1,344 in-lbs 569 lbf 569 lbf 123 lbf
32
Metric 32 mm 25.6 N-m 152 N-m 152 N-m 2,531 N 2,531 N 546 N
MXP
Inch 1.50 in 600 in-lbs 1,913 in-lbs 1,913 in-lbs 736 lbf 736 lbf 177 lbf
40
Metric 38 mm 67.8 N-m 216 N-m 216 N-m 3,274 N 3,274 N 786 N
Inch 2.00 in 811 in-lbs 3,483 in-lbs 3,483 in-lbs 1,014 lbf 1,014 lbf 314 lbf
50
Metric 50 mm 91.7 N-m 394 N-m 394 N-m 4,510 N 4,510 N 1,397 N
BC2
Inch 2.50 in 1,019 in-lbs 5,339 in-lbs 5,339 in-lbs 1,292 lbf 1,292 lbf 491 lbf
63
Metric 64 mm 115 N-m 603 N-m 603 N-m 5,745 N 5,745 N 2,184 N
NOTE: Mating surface of component mounted to carrier Ratings are the maximum values for shock-free, vibration-
must maintain a flatness of at least 0.0015" (0.040 mm) free operation in a typical industrial environment.
BC3

Use sizing software or call Tolomatic

BC4
(1-800-328-2174) with application information. We

will provide any assistance needed to determine the
proper MXP band cylinder.
LS
SPEED FACTOR LINEAR SPEED (mm/sec)

The moment and load capacity of the
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
For applications with high
500
0
actuator’s bearing system is based speed or significant shock 2.50 2.50

MG
on an L10 life of 200,000,000 linear and vibration: Calculated

values of loads and bending 2.00 2.00
SPEED FACTOR
SPEED FACTOR
inches of travel. Life of the actuator moments must be increased by
will vary for each application depend- speed factor from the graph at 1.50 1.50
right to obtain full rated life of

ing on the combined loads, motion profiled rail bearing system. 1.00 1.00
CC
LOW MEDIUM HIGH

parameters and operating conditions. S H O C K A N D V I B R A T I O N
0.50 0.50
The load factor (LF) ratios for each 0 20 40 60 80
LINEAR SPEED (in/sec)
100 120 140

PB
profiled rail lubrication

a load factor of 1 will diminish the Proper lubrication of profiled rail bearing system is essential for normal
actuator’s rated life. operation and achievement of full rated life of MX--P actuators. Lubrication
should be performed at intervals of 4,000,000 inches of travel or once
LF = Mx + My + Mz + Fy + Fz < 1 every year, whichever occurs first. However, operating conditions such as high
ENGR
Mxmax Mymax Mzmax Fymax Fzmax speed or significant shock and vibration may require more frequent lubrication.
Please consult Tolomatic for recommendations.
Recommended grease types:
With combined loads, Lf must 1. Refined mineral oil-based multi-purpose grease with lithium thickening agent.
not exceed the value 1. 2. High-grade synthetic oil-based grease with urea thickening agent.
MXP_ 14 1.800.328.2174

32
z
&M
My
25
6,000 678
P Profiled rail
My
32
2,000 226 2,000 226
dw auxiliary
"D"4,000 Maximum Bending Moments* Max. Load Thrust
carrier 452
BORE M
z
Min MxA MyA MzA FzA FyA (at 100 PSI)
y&
My
1,000 25 113 1,000 Inch 0.63
25
M
in 113 5.0 in 79 in-lbs 620 in-lbs 620 in-lbs 434 lbf 434 lbf 30.7 lbf
16 2,000 226
40 M
z
Metric 16 mm 127 mm 8.9 N-m 70.1 N-m 70.1 N-m 1,932 N 1,932 N 136 N
z
32 M
Inch 1.00 in 6.0 in 252 in-lbs 1,610 in-lbs 1,610 in-lbs 898 lbf 898 lbf 78.5 lbf
ABT
25 Mz 25
0 0 0
Metric 25 mm 0
152 mm0 28.5 N-m 1820 N-m 182 N-m 3,993 N 3,993 N 349 N
6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
“D” (inches) DISTANCE BETWEEN CARRIERS 7.0 in 453DISTANCE
“D” (inches) in-lbs 2,202
BETWEEN CARRIERS in-lbs 2,202 in-lbs 1,138 lbf 1,138 lbf 123 lbf
32
Metric 32 mm 178 mm 51.1 N-m 249 N-m 249 N-m 5,063 N 5,063 N 546 N
MXP
Inch 1.50 in 8.5 in 1,208 in-lbs 3,601 in-lbs 3,601 in-lbs 1,472 lbf 1,472 lbf 177 lbf
40
ER
S Metric 38 mm 216 mm 137 N-m 407 N-m 407 N-m 6,549 N 6,549 N 786 N
R RI
CA Inch 2.00 in 8.6 in 1,623 in-lbs 4,966 in-lbs 4,966 in-lbs 2,028 lbf 2,028 lbf 314 lbf
EN
TWE 50
BE Metric 50 mm 218 mm 183 N-m 561 N-m 561 N-m 9,020 N 9,020 N 1,397 N
N CE
BC2
STA
” DI Inch 2.50 in 13.0 in 2,038 in-lbs 9,508 in-lbs 9,508 in-lbs 2,583 lbf 2,583 lbf 491 lbf
“D 63
Metric 64 mm 330 mm 230 N-m 1,074 N-m 1,074 N-m 11,490 N 11,490 N 2,184 N
BC3
LF = Mx + My + Mz + Fy + Fz < 1
NOTE: Mating surface of component mounted to carrier
must maintain a flatness of at least 0.0015" (0.040 mm)
BC4
Mya & Mza MOMENT (N-m)
0 500 1,000 1,500 2,000 2,500 3,000
30
63
LS
700
25
50 600
MG
40
DISTANCE BETWEEN
DISTANCE BETWEEN
CARRIERS (mm)
32
CARRIERS (in)
20 25 500
16
CC
400
15
300 PB
10
200
ENGR
5
0 5,000 10,000 15,000 20,000 25,000 30,000
Mya & Mza MOMENT (in-lbs)
LOAD DEFLECTION P Profiled rail
Deflection about X axis

Mx (N-m)
0 25 50 75 100 125
0.07 1.75
40
0.06 1.50
abt
DEFLECTION (mm)
0.05 1.25
DEFLECTION (in)
0.04 16 1.00
[at 305 mm]

[at 12 in]
0.03 25 32 0.75
MXP
0.02 50 63 0.50
0.01 0.25
0 0
0 200 400 600 800 1000
Mx (in-lb)
BC2
Deflection about Y axis

My (N-m)
BC3
0 100 200 300 400 500 600

0.06 1.50
50
0.05 1.25
63
DEFLECTION (mm)
DEFLECTION (in)
0.04 1.00
25 40
BC4
[at 305 mm]

0.03 32 0.75
16
[at 12 in]
0.02 0.50
0.01 0.25
LS
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
My (in-lb)
Deflection about Z axis

MG
Mz (N-m)
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
0.14 3.5
50
0.12
63 3.0
CC
DEFLECTION (mm)
0.10 2.5
DEFLECTION (in)
0.08 2.0
[at 305 mm]
[at 12 in]
0.06 1.5
40
25 32
PB
0.04 1.0
16
0.02 0.5
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
Mz (in-lb)
ENGR
DEFLECTION TESTING WAS DONE UNDER THESE CRITERIA:

1.) Actuator was properly mounted with distance between mounting plates within recommendations (see Tube Clamp Requirements page mxp_20)
2.) Deflection was measured at 12" from center of carrier as shown
MXP_ 16 1.800.328.2174
Specifications
Size 16 25 32 40 50 63
in 0.63 1.00 1.25 1.50 2.00 2.50
Actual Bore Size
mm 16 25 32 38 50 64
N Internal lb 0.73 1.70 3.58 5.57 11.07 22.59
Bearing kg 0.33 0.77 1.62 2.53 5.02 10.25
ABT
Base S Solid lb 1.07 2.30 4.68 7.64 14.03 30.78
Weight Bearing kg 0.48 1.04 2.12 3.47 6.36 13.96
P ProfileD lb 1.25 2.94 5.89 9.91 17.22 31.64
Rail
MXP
kg 0.57 1.33 2.67 4.5 7.81 14.35
N Internal & lb/in 0.082 0.134 0.233 0.306 0.513 0.879
Weight S Solid kg/mm 0.0015 0.0024 0.0042 0.0055 0.0092 0.0157
per unit
of stroke P ProfileD lb/in 0.102 0.192 0.316 0.491 0.701 1.153
BC2
Rail kg/mm 0.0018 0.0034 0.0056 0.0088 0.0125 0.0206
in 206 206 205 203 203 103
Maximum Stroke Length
mm 5232 5232 5207 5156 5156 2616
Auxiliary Carrier; Min. in 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.50 8.60 13.00
BC3
"D" Between Carriers mm 127.0 152.4 177.8 215.9 218.4 330.2
Maximum Operating PSI 100
Pressure bar 6.9
°F 20 to 140
BC4
Temperature Range
°C -7 to 60
LS
Tips for maximizing band cylinder life
To get the most life out of your MXP band cylinder follow these simple guidelines when
sizing a band cylinder for an application.
Four factors that affect the life of a band cylinder are Load, Speed, Environment and Deceleration. The following tips will
MG
help you select the appropriate band cylinder for a specific application's loads and speeds to maximize actuator life.
1 2 3 4
LOAD: Keep the SPEEd: Environment: keep Deceleration:
load factor less reduce speeds contamination off Decelerate with
than 1 band and moving shock absorbers
surfaces
CC
Applications with multiple High speeds and cycle rates Shock absorbers provide
loads put additional stress on stress the band cylinder's Contamination will decrease the most controlled and
the band cylinder's bearing guidance system more than band cylinder service life. reliable deceleration at the
system. It is important to slower applications. Keeping Service life can be improved end of stroke. Stopping
account for all these loads speeds reduced will optimize by orienting the band and in a controlled fashion will
PB
to make sure the bearing the life of the actuator. bearing system 180 degrees significantly decrease the
system is not over loaded. from the contamination inertia loads on the carrier
Both static and dynamic source. For instance, if solid bearings, extending cylinder
loads need to be addressed. particulates are falling on the life. The best location for
actuator, it is best to try to shock absorbers is at the
ENGR
The formula below can be used orient the band cylinder so center of gravity of the load.
to calculate the load factor: that the band and bearing
system are shielded from the
LF = Mx + My + Mz + Fy + Fz < 1 particulates.
Cushion & Shock Absorber Performance
MXP16 (all bearings) MXP25 (all bearings)
LOAD (kg) LOAD (kg)
27.2
36.3
45.4
18.1
2.7
3.6
4.5
9.1
1.8
.9
1.8
2.7
3.6
4.5
9.1
.5
.5
.9
100 2.5
100 2.5 80 2.0
LIGHT
FINAL VELOCITY (in/sec)
80 2.0
FINAL VELOCITY (m/sec)

LIGHT

abt
CU 1.5

DUTY 60 SH
60 1.5 CU
SH ION DUTY
CUS ION LIM
HIO 40 LIM IT 1.0
CUS N LI IT -A
1.0 NY
40 HIO MIT -C AP
NL
IMIT - AN ON
TIN PL
ICA
HEAVY
- CO YA UO TIO DUTY
PPL US N
NTI ICAT 20 LY .50
NUO ION CY
MXP
U S .50 CL
20 HEAVY LY C ED
DUTY Y CLE
D
10 .25
10 .25 8 .20
8 .20 6 .15
2
6
8
20
BC2
10
6
8
10
20
40
60
80
100
1
LOAD (lb) LOAD (lb)

LOAD (kg) LOAD (kg)
BC3
45.4
27.2
36.3
45.4
90.7
4.5
18.1
18.1
27.2
36.3
2.7
3.6
4.5
9.1
90.7
1.8
9.1
1.8
2.7
3.6
.5
.5
.9
.9
200 5.1 100 2.5

80 2.0
CU
LIGHT SH LIGHT

60 CU 1.5
100 DUTY 2.5 SH ION DUTY

80 2.0 ION LIM
BC4
CU 40 LIM IT 1.0
60 CU SH 1.5 IT -A
SH ION -C NY
ION LIM ON AP HEAVY
40 LIM IT - 1.0 TIN PL
IT - AN HEAVY UO ICA DUTY
CO YA 20 US TIO .50
NT PP
L DUTY LY N
20 INU ICA .5 CY
OU TIO CL
SLY N ED
CY
LS
CLE 10 .25
10 D .25
8 .20 8 .20
6 .15 6 .15
2
4
6
8
20
40
60
80
200
1
10
4
6
8
10
20
40
60
80
100
200
100
LOAD (lb) LOAD (lb)

MG

LOAD (kg) LOAD (kg)
45.4
4.5
181.4
272.2
45.4
18.1
27.2
36.3
90.7
4.5
.5
90.7
18.1
27.2
36.3
1.8
2.7
3.6
9.1
181
272
1.8
2.7
3.6
9.1
.5
.9
.9
CC
200 5.1 200 5.1


100 2.5
100 CU 2.5
80 CU CU 2.0 SH CU
SH SH 80 IO SH 2.0
60 ION ION 1.5 N IO
LIM LIM LIM N 1.5
60 LIGHT LIM
PB
IT - IT - IT IT
40 CO AN 1.0 DUTY -C -A
NT YA ON
LIGHT INU PP 40 TIN NY 1.0
DUTY OU LIC UO AP
SLY ATI US PL
CY ON .50 LY ICA
20 CL HEAVY C TIO
ED 20 YC N
HEAVY DUTY L ED .5
ENGR
10 DUTY
.25
10 .25
1
4
6
8
20
40
60
80
200
400
600
10
100
4
6
8
20
40
60
80
200
400
600
LOAD (lb)
1
100
LOAD (lb)
10
NOTE: If final (impact) velocity cannot be calculated directly, NOTE: When 2 shock absorbers are ordered, the MXP
a reasonable guideline to use is 2X average velocity. will be assembled with NO internal cushion seals.
MXP_ 18 1.800.328.2174
Tube clamp requirements
N internal bearing
MAX DISTANCE BETWEEN CLAMPS (mm) "L"
0 200 400 600 800 1,000 1,200 1,400 1,600 1,800
400 370 LBF MAX
270 LBF MAX
ABT
1,000
200 195 LBF MAX
115 LBF MAX

FORCE ON CARRIER (lbf)
100 63
FORCE ON CARRIER (N)

80
60 65 LBF MAX
MXP
40 50
30 LBF MAX
20
100
40
10 32
8
BC2
6
4
25
10
2
16
BC3
1
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
MAX DISTANCE BETWEEN CLAMPS (in) "L"
NOTE: MXP16
uses MP
(mounting plate)
with included T-nuts
BC4
L L
S Solid bearing
LS
0 200 400 600 800 1,000 1,200 1,400 1,600 1,800
600
520 LBF MAX
400
315 LBF MAX
200 225 LBF MAX 1,000
150 LBF MAX
MG

100
80
70 LBF MAX
60
63
40
35 LBF MAX
CC
20 50 100
10 40
8
32
6
4
PB
25
2
10
16
1
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
ENGR

NOTE: MXP16
uses MP
(mounting plate)
L L
TUBE CLAMP REQUIREMENTS
P PROFILED RAIL
0 200 400 600 800 1,000 1,200 1,400 1,600 1,800
2,000 10,000
1,292 LBF MAX
1,000 1,014 LBF MAX
736 LBF MAX
ABT
800
600 569 LBF MAX
449 LBF MAX

400
217 LBF MAX 1,000
200
100
MXP
80
60
40 63
20 50 100
10 40
BC2
8
6
32
4
25
2 10
16
1
BC3
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
NOTE: MXP16
uses MP
(mounting plate)
BC4
L L
LS
MG
CC
PB
ENGR
MXP_ 20 1.800.328.2174
N-INTERNAL BEARING ACTUATOR DIMENSIONS
M
ABT
A
N
MXP
J
K MXP16 MXP25 MXP32 MXP40 MXP50 MXP63
BC2
A 3.13 3.94 4.89 5.79 6.26 8.42
mm 79.6 100.2 124.1 147.1 159.1 213.8
STROKE J B 0.55 1.11 1.50 1.50 1.97 1.97
+
2A mm 14.0 28.3 38.1 38.0 50.0 50.0
BC3
C 1.55 2.07 2.67 2.98 3.86 4.76
mm 39.3 52.6 67.8 75.8 98.1 120.8
STROKE D 1.18 1.65 2.18 2.52 3.01 3.94
mm 30.0 42.0 55.4 64.0 78.7 100.0
BC4
E 0.83 0.83 1.36 1.61 2.13 2.44
mm 21.0 21.0 34.5 41.0 54.0 62.0
F 0.85 1.10 1.42 1.81 2.25 2.87
mm 21.5 27.9 36.1 46.0 57.2 73.0
LS
G 0.17 0.25 0.38 0.35 0.43 0.53
mm 4.3 6.3 9.7 9.0 10.8 13.5
H #8-32 #10-24 1/4-20 1/4-20 5/16-18 5/16-18

(8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8)
A
MG
mm
M4x0.7 M5x0.8 M6x1.0 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M8x1.25
R (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8)
I 3.78 4.45 5.04 5.87 6.57 9.69
mm 96.0 113.0 128.0 149.0 166.8 246.0
B J 0.59 0.79 0.89 0.63 1.13 1.18
CC
mm 15.0 20.0 22.5 15.9 28.6 30.0
K 1.18 1.57 1.75 3.00 2.25 4.33
mm 30.0 40.0 44.5 76.2 57.2 110.0
E
M 0.63 0.59 0.96 1.05 1.50 1.69
PB
H mm 16.0 15.0 24.5 26.7 38.1 43.0
N #6-32 #8-32 #10-32 1/4-20 5/16-18 3/8-16

(8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8)
C
F mm
M3x0.5 M4x0.7 M5x0.8 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M10x1.5
ENGR
(8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8)

3D CAD AVAILABLE AT Q 0.17 0.28 0.38 0.35 0.43 0.53
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM G
Q F mm 4.3 7.0 9.7 9.0 10.8 13.5
D R 1.18 1.65 2.18 2.52 3.10 3.94
mm 30.00 42.00 55.37 64.00 78.74 100.00
N-INTERNAL BEARING PORTING DIMENSIONS MXP16N, MXP25N, MXP32N
DUAL END PORTING SINGLE-END PORTING

16mm 40mm
END SIDE BORE
BORE ONE THIS
SIDE ONE
ABT
OPP. SIDE
.74 .56
[18.8] [14.3]
MXP
.59 .39 [10.0]

[15.0]
BOTTOM
PORT THREAD CHOICES:

BC2
GP G M5 x 0.7 PARALLEL
NP NPT #10-32 UNF .39 [10.0] Not Available for 16mm BORE
BC3
25mm (OE = Opposite TWO THIS 50mm

END END SIDE TWO
BORE SIDE
End Port)
SIDE OPP. SIDE BORE
ONE THIS
SIDE ONE
OPP. SIDE
BC4
.99 OE .99
.91 .81 .91 OE
[23.2] [25.1] [20.7] [23.2] [25.1] .61
[15.6]
.69 [17.5] .84 [21.3] .69 .44 [11.1]
1.31 [17.5] .84 [21.3]
LS
BOTTOM [33.3] BOTTOM

PORT THREAD CHOICES: PORT THREAD CHOICES: .06
[1.5]
TP Rc 1/8-28 TAPER ST Rc 1/8-28 TAPER OE
GP G 1/8-28 PARALLEL .83 SG G 1/8-28 PARALLEL .83
[21.0] [21.0]
MG
NP 1/8-27 NPTF SN 1/8-27 NPTF

.84 [21.3] .29 [7.3]
.84 [21.3]
32mm 63mm
END END
CC
BORE ONE THIS SIDE TWO THIS SIDE BORE

SIDE ONE SIDE TWO
OPP. SIDE OPP. SIDE
1.37 1.37 1.37 1.37 OE

OE .83
PB
[34.7] [34.7] .65 [34.7] [34.7]

[16.4] [21.0]
1.09 .67 [17.1] 1.09 (2) .67 [17.1]
[27.7] [27.7] 1.07 [27.1]
BOTTOM BOTTOM
ENGR
PORT THREAD CHOICES: PORT THREAD CHOICES:

3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
GP G 1/8-28 PARALLEL 1.09 SG G 1/8-28 PARALLEL 1.09
[27.7] [27.7]
.67 [17.1] .67 [17.1]
Dimensions in inches [brackets indicate dimensions in millimeters]
MXP_ 22 1.800.328.2174
N-INTERNAL BEARING PORTING DIMENSIONS MXP40N, MXP50N, MXP63N
DUAL END PORTING SINGLE-END PORTING TWO THIS

SIDE TWO
40mm OPP. SIDE
END END (OE = Opposite SIDE
BORE ONE THIS
SIDE ONE
SIDE
End Port)
ABT
OPP. SIDE
1.46 1.46 1.46 OE 1.46 OE

[37.0] [37.0] [37.0] .94 [37.0]
[24.0]
.47 [12.0] .89 .83 [21.0] .47 [12.0]
MXP
1.26
[32.0] 1.26 [22.5] 1.08 [27.5]
[32.0]
BOTTOM BOTTOM
TP Rc 1/4-19 TAPER ST Rc 1/4-19 TAPER
BC2
OE
NP 1/4-18 NPTF [32.0] SN 1/4-18 NPTF [32.0]
.47 [12.0] .47 [12.0]
1.10 [28.0]
BC3
50mm
END END
BORE ONE THIS SIDE TWO THIS
SIDE TWO
SIDE
SIDE ONE
OPP. SIDE OPP. SIDE
1.11
BC4
[28.2]
2.06 1.82 2.06 OE 1.82 OE
[52.2] [46.3] [52.2] [46.3] 1.15
[29.1]
1.27 [32.3] .71 [18.0] 1.27 1.27 .71 [18.0]
[32.3] [32.3] 1.48 [37.5]
LS
BOTTOM BOTTOM
PORT THREAD CHOICES: PORT THREAD CHOICES: 1.27
TP Rc 3/8-19 TAPER ST Rc 3/8-19 TAPER [32.3]
OE
GP G 3/8-19 PARALLEL SG G 3/8-19 PARALLEL 1.27
1.27
[32.3]
MG
NP 3/8-18 NPTF [32.3] SN 3/8-18 NPTF
.71 [18.0] .71 [18.0]
1.48 [37.5]
63mm
END END
CC
SIDE TWO
SIDE
SIDE ONE OPP. SIDE
OPP. SIDE
1.24
[31.4]
2.22 2.22 2.22 OE 2.22 1.24 OE
PB
[56.4] [56.4] [56.4] [56.4] [31.4]
1.58 [40.0] .67 [17.0] 1.58 1.58 .67 [17.0]

[40.0] [40.0] 1.46 [37.0]
BOTTOM BOTTOM
ENGR

[40.0]
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT TP Rc 3/8-19 TAPER ST Rc 3/8-19 TAPER OE
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
GP G 3/8-19 PARALLEL SG G 3/8-19 PARALLEL
1.58 1.58
NP 3/8-18 NPTF [40.0] SN 3/8-18 NPTF [40.0]
.67 [17.0] .67 [17.0]
1.46 [37.0]
N-INTERNAL BEARING OPTION DIMENSIONS
AUXILIARY CARRIER, FLOATING MOUNT, FOOT MOUNT, TUBE CLAMPS
Q MXP16 MXP25 MXP32 MXP40 MXP50 MXP63
C P A 3.13 3.94 4.89 5.79 6.26 8.42
mm 79.6 100.2 124.1 147.1 159.1 213.8
AUXILIARY CARRIER
ABT
D 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.50 8.60 13.00

R
mm 127.0 152.4 177.8 215.9 218.4 330.0
A FLOATING MOUNT
TUBE TUBE
CLAMPS B T B
DO NOT CLAMPS 1.27 1.19 2.08 2.55 3.24 3.15
HANG G mm 32.2 30.1 52.8 64.7 82.3 80.0
MXP
BELOW
BOTTOM E F C 1.97 2.66 3.70 4.07 4.66 5.57
OF TUBE mm 50.1 67.5 94.1 103.3 118.4 141.6
H*
E 0.90 1.25 1.50 1.50 3.94 5.20
mm 22.9 31.8 38.1 38.1 100.1 132.0
FLOATING F 0.50 0.63 0.75 0.79 3.15 4.33
MOUNT
BC2
D
MINIMUM mm 12.7 15.9 19.1 20.0 80.0 110.0
DISTANCE
BETWEEN G - - 1.00 1.38 - 1.69
CARRIERS
mm - - 25.4 35.0 - 43.0
STROKE H* 0.17(2) 0.24(2) 0.28(4) 0.28(4) 0.36(2) 0.34(4)
+
BC3
D mm 4.3(2) 6.1(2) 7.1(4) 7.1(4) 9.1(2) 8.7(4)

+
2A FOOT MOUNTS
I 1.26 1.57 2.01 2.52 3.11 3.94
AUXILIARY
CARRIER mm 32.0 40.0 51.0 64.0 78.9 100.0
MOUNTING J 1.57 1.89 2.36 2.91 3.67 4.72
BC4
PLATES mm 40.0 48.0 60.0 74.0 93.2 120.0

MXP16 STROKE MOUNTING
PLATES K 0.16 0.25 0.37 0.47 0.50 0.59
ONLY MXP16 mm 4.0 6.4 9.5 12.0 12.7 15.0
0.50 ONLY 0.22 L 0.31 0.50 0.75 0.94 1.00 1.18
[12.7]
[5.6] mm 8.0 12.7 19.0 24.0 25.4 30.0
LS
1.00
0.28 [25.4] 1.87 M 0.35 0.52 0.91 0.73 1.00 1.06
[7.1] [47.6] mm 8.9 13.3 23.0 18.5 25.4 27.0
2.50
FOOT [63.5] N - 0.41 0.71 0.45 0.69 0.65
MOUNTS A
FLUSH mm - 10.3 18.0 11.4 17.4 16.5
TO FOOT
MG
BOTTOM MOUNTS O 0.18 0.20 0.22 0.28 0.35 0.42

OF TUBE LK mm 4.6 5.2 5.5 7.1 9.0 10.7
O
TUBE CLAMPS
M P - 2.24 2.92 3.26 3.84 5.19
N J mm - 57.0 74.1 82.7 97.5 131.7
CC
FLOATING MOUNT Q - 2.72 3.44 3.81 4.39 5.93

mm - 69.0 87.4 96.7 111.5 150.7
R - 0.71 0.63 0.55 0.55 0.75
FOOT MOUNT C
mm - 18.0 16.0 14.0 14.0 19.0
S - 0.14 0.17 0.15 0.15 0.24
PB
M
TUBE CLAMPS mm - 3.6 4.3 3.8 3.8 6.1
S
T - 0.20 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.42
mm - 5.2 7.1 7.1 7.1 10.7
*MXP16, 25 & 50 use 2 center holes,
ENGR
MXP32, 40 & 63 use 4 corner holes

3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
NOTE: Auxiliary carrier is N-Internal Bearing carrier, see

page MXP_21 for carrier size and mounting dimensions
MXP_ 24 1.800.328.2174
N-INTERNAL BEARING OPTION DIMENSIONS
ADJUSTABLE AND FIXED SHOCK ABSORBERS
ADJUSTABLE SHOCK ABSORBER
MXP16 MXP25 MXP32 MXP40 MXP50 MXP63
ADJUSTABLE G
H
FIXED E G
H A 1.65 2.11 2.91 3.32 4.24 5.21
E
mm 42.0 53.5 73.8 84.4 107.6 132.4
B 1.97 2.61 3.35 3.87 4.87 5.91
ABT
mm 50.0 66.2 85.0 98.4 123.8 150.0
C 1.74 2.44 2.95 3.43 4.09 5.20
mm 44.3 62.0 74.9 87.0 103.9 132.0
D 0.71 0.98 1.25 0.98 1.22 1.26
mm 18.0 25.0 31.8 25.0 31.0 32.0
MXP
J Stroke Adder: Adjustable Shock Absorber
in 0.49 1.06 1.17 0.76 0.81 0.51
mm 12.4 26.8 29.8 19.3 20.5 13.0
NOTE: For each adjustable shock absorber ordered, add Stroke

F J
BC2
Adder value to required stroke to determine configurated actua-
tor stroke.

( )
Adj. Stroke Configurated
Required + Shock x Adder = Actuator
Stroke
Quantity value Stroke
F Example: MXP25N, 500mm stroke required, 2 adjustable shocks
500 + (2 x 26.8) = 500 + 53.6 = 553.6mm
BC3
SHOCK PLATE
E 1.81 2.28 3.17 3.61 4.55 5.65
D mm 46.0 57.9 80.5 91.8 115.6 143.4
BC4
F 3.86 4.92 5.20 6.72*** 6.65 10.29****
mm 98.0 125.0 132.0 170.8*** 168.8 261.4****
G 0.94 1.50 1.32 1.61 2.13 2.44
DD mm 24.0 38.1 33.5 41.0 54.0 62.0
H 0.63 1.18 0.96 1.05 1.50 1.69
LS
mm 16.0 30.0 24.5 26.7 38.1 43.0
I* 0.89 1.57 - - - -
mm 22.5 40.0 - - - -
C CC I** - - 1.75 3.00 2.25 4.33
mm - - 44.5 76.2 57.2 110.0
#8-32 #8-32 #10-32 1/4-20 5/16-18 3/8-16
MG
J
(6) (6) (4) (4) (4) (4)
B BB
A AA mm
M4x0.8 M4x0.8 M5x0.8 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M10x1.5
(6) (6) (4) (4) (4) (4)
*MXP16 & 25 Shock plate has 6 mounting holes
**MXP32, 40, 50 & 63 Shock plate has 4 mounting holes
CC
***MXP40 Shock Stop Plate has impact bolts. Actual plate length
is 5.98" (152mm); Impact bolts, one on each end, add .74"
(18.8mm) to total length
****MXP63 Shock Stop Plate has impact bolts. Actual plate length
is 9.84" (250mm); Impact bolts, one on each end, add .45"
(11.4mm) to total length
PB
FIXED SHOCK ABSORBER
AA 1.65 2.11 2.91 3.32 4.24 5.21
mm 42.0 53.5 73.8 84.4 107.6 132.3
BB 1.95 2.57 3.42 3.87 5.09 5.92
ENGR
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
mm 49.5 65.3 86.8 98.4 129.2 150.3
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM CC 1.17 1.57 2.00 2.44 2.83 3.66
mm 29.8 40.0 50.8 62.0 72.0 93.0
NOTE: Auxiliary carrier is N-Internal Bearing carrier, see DD 0.13 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.50 0.50
page MXP_21 for carrier size and mounting dimensions mm 3.3 6.4 6.4 6.4 12.7 12.7
S-SOLID BEARING ACTUATOR DIMENSIONS
MOUNTING PATTERN MXP16, 25, 32, 50 MOUNTING PATTERN MXP40, 63

M
M
A 3.13 3.94 4.89 5.79 6.26 8.42
B mm 79.6 100.2 124.1 147.1 159.1 213.8
O O
B 0.55 1.11 1.50 1.50 1.97 1.97
ABT
mm 14.0 28.3 38.1 38.0 50.0 50.0

N
N C 1.80 2.30 3.06 3.51 4.44 5.48
A
mm 45.8 58.4 77.8 89.2 112.8 139.1
D 1.18 1.65 2.18 2.52 3.01 3.94
K
J
K mm 30.0 42.0 55.4 64.0 78.7 100.0
MXP
E 1.58 2.18 2.86 3.47 4.01 5.59

L L mm 40.1 55.4 72.6 88.2 104.1 142.0
F 0.85 1.10 1.42 1.81 2.25 2.87
J K mm 21.5 27.9 36.1 46.0 57.2 73.0
STROKE K
+
G 0.17 0.25 0.38 0.35 0.43 0.53
BC2
2A
P
STROKE P mm 4.3 6.3 9.7 9.0 10.8 13.5
H #8-32 #10-24 1/4-20 1/4-20 5/16-18 5/16-18
(8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8)
R R mm M4x0.7 M5x0.8 M6x1.0 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M8x1.25
(8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8)
BC3
I 4.12 5.31 6.02 7.87 7.91 12.11

mm 104.6 135.0 153.0 200.0 200.8 307.5
J 1.18 1.57 1.77 - 1.87 -
mm 30.0 40.0 45.0 - 47.6 -
K - 1.07 1.10 1.63 1.25 1.50
BC4
A
mm - 27.3 28.0 41.3 31.8 38.1
L - 1.00 1.00 1.00 2.50 3.00
mm - 25.4 25.4 25.4 63.5 76.2
B M 1.18 1.18 1.73 2.01 2.59 3.25
LS
mm 30.0 30.0 44.0 51.0 65.8 82.6

E N #8-32 1/4-20 1/4-20 5/16-18 3/8-16 3/8-16
(6) (6) (6) (8) (6) (8)
H mm M4x0.7 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M10x1.5
(6) (6) (6) (8) (6) (8)
C
O - #10-32 1/4-20 5/16-18 3/8-16 3/8-16
MG
F
(2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
G
mm - M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M10x1.5
Q F (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
P - 1/4-20 1/4-20 1/4-20 3/8-16 3/8-16
(2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
CC
mm - M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M10x1.5 M10x1.5

(2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
Q 0.17 0.28 0.38 0.35 0.43 0.53
mm 4.3 7.0 9.7 9.0 10.8 13.5
R 1.18 1.65 2.18 2.52 3.10 3.94
PB
mm 30.00 42.00 55.37 64.00 78.74 100.00

ENGR
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
MXP_ 26 1.800.328.2174
S-SOLID BEARING PORTING DIMENSIONS MXP16S, MXP25S, MXP32S

16mm END
SIDE
BORE ONE THIS
SIDE ONE
ABT
OPP. SIDE
.74 .56
[18.8] [14.3]
.59 .39 [10.0]
[15.0]
MXP
BOTTOM
NP NPT #10-32 UNF
BC2
.39 [10.0] Not Available for 16mm BORE
BC3
(OE = Opposite
25mm END END End Port) TWO THIS
SIDE TWO
ONE THIS
BORE SIDE ONE
SIDE SIDE OPP. SIDE
OPP. SIDE
BC4
.99 OE .99
.91 .81 .91 OE
[23.2] [25.1] [20.7] [23.2] [25.1] .61
[15.6]
.69 [17.5] .84 [21.3] .69 .44 [11.1]
[17.5] .84 [21.3]
1.31
LS
[33.3]
BOTTOM BOTTOM
PORT THREAD CHOICES: PORT THREAD CHOICES: .06
[1.5]
GP G 1/8-28 PARALLEL .83 SG G 1/8-28 PARALLEL .83
MG
[21.0] [21.0]
.84 [21.3] .29 [7.3]
.84 [21.3]
32mm
END END
CC
BORE
ONE THIS SIDE TWO THIS SIDE
SIDE ONE SIDE TWO
OPP. SIDE OPP. SIDE
1.37 1.37 OE
PB
OE 1.37 1.37
[34.7] [34.7] .65 [34.7] [34.7] .83
[16.4] [21.0]
1.09 .67 [17.1] 1.09 (2) .67 [17.1]
[27.7] [27.7] 1.07 [27.1]
BOTTOM BOTTOM
ENGR
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT PORT THREAD CHOICES: PORT THREAD CHOICES:

WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
[27.7] [27.7]
.67 [17.1] .67 [17.1]
S-SOLID BEARING PORTING DIMENSIONS MXP40S, MXP50S, MXP63S

40mm END END
BORE ONE THIS SIDE TWO THIS SIDE
ABT
SIDE ONE SIDE TWO

OPP. SIDE OPP. SIDE
1.46 1.46 1.46 OE 1.46 OE

[37.0] [37.0] [37.0] .94 [37.0]
[24.0]
MXP
1.26 .47 [12.0] .89 .83 [21.0] .47 [12.0]

[32.0] 1.26 [22.5] 1.08 [27.5]
[32.0]
BOTTOM BOTTOM
BC2

[32.0] [32.0]
.47 [12.0] .47 [12.0]
1.10 [28.0]
BC3
50mm END END

SIDE TWO
SIDE
SIDE ONE
OPP. SIDE OPP. SIDE
BC4
2.06 1.82 2.06 OE 1.82 OE

[52.2] [46.3] [52.2] [46.3] 1.15
[29.1]
1.27 [32.3] .71 [18.0] 1.27 1.27 1.11 .71 [18.0]
[32.3] [32.3] [28.2] 1.48 [37.5]
BOTTOM BOTTOM
LS

TP Rc 3/8-19 TAPER ST Rc 3/8-19 TAPER [32.3]
OE
GP G 3/8-19 PARALLEL SG G 3/8-19 PARALLEL 1.27
1.27
NP 3/8-18 NPTF [32.3] SN 3/8-18 NPTF [32.3]
MG
.71 [18.0] .71 [18.0]

1.48 [37.5]
63mm END END

BORE ONE THIS SIDE TWO THIS SIDE
SIDE TWO
CC
SIDE ONE OPP. SIDE

OPP. SIDE
1.24
[31.4]
2.22 2.22 2.22 OE 2.22 1.24 OE
[56.4] [56.4] [56.4] [56.4] [31.4]
PB
1.58 [40.0] .67 [17.0] 1.58 1.58 .67 [17.0]

[40.0] [40.0] 1.46 [37.0]
BOTTOM BOTTOM
[40.0]
ENGR
OE
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT 1.58 1.58
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
NP 3/8-18 NPTF [40.0] SN 3/8-18 NPTF [40.0]
.67 [17.0] .67 [17.0]
1.46 [37.0]
MXP_ 28 1.800.328.2174
S-SOLID BEARING OPTION DIMENSIONS
AUXILIARY CARRIER, FLOATING MOUNT, FOOT MOUNT, TUBE CLAMPS
Q MXP16 MXP25 MXP32 MXP40 MXP50 MXP63
C P A 3.13 3.94 4.89 5.79 6.26 8.42
mm 79.6 100.2 124.1 147.1 159.1 213.8
AUXILIARY CARRIER
TUBE D 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.50 8.60 13.00
ABT
CLAMPS T mm 127.0 152.4 177.8 215.9 218.4 330.0
FLOATING MOUNT
R
A B 1.86 2.52 3.37 4.32 5.04 6.10
TUBE mm 47.3 64.1 85.6 109.7 128.0 155.0
CLAMPS B
DO NOT C 2.31 2.80 3.67 4.26 5.24 6.17
MXP
HANG G mm 58.7 71.0 93.3 108.2 133.1 156.8
BELOW E 0.98 1.25 2.76 3.94 3.94 5.00
BOTTOM E F
OF TUBE mm 25.0 31.8 70.1 100.0 100.1 127.0
H* F 0.47 0.63 1.97 2.95 3.15 3.94
mm 12.0 15.9 50.0 74.9 80.0 100.1
FLOATING
BC2
D G - - - 2.17 - 2.76
MINIMUM MOUNT mm - - - 55.1 - 70.1
DISTANCE
BETWEEN H* 0.18(2) 0.24(2) 0.28(2) 0.28(4) 0.36(2) 0.34(4)
CARRIERS mm 4.5(2) 6.1(2) 7.1(2) 7.1(4) 9.1(2) 8.7(4)
FOOT MOUNT
STROKE AUXILIARY I 1.26 1.57 2.01 2.52 3.11 3.94
BC3
+ CARRIER mm 32.0 40.0 51.0 64.0 78.9 100.0
D
+ J 1.57 1.89 2.36 2.91 3.67 4.72
2A mm 40.0 48.0 60.0 74.0 93.2 120.0
K 0.16 0.25 0.37 0.47 0.50 0.59
mm 4.0 6.4 9.5 12.0 12.7 15.0
BC4
L 0.31 0.50 0.75 0.94 1.00 1.18
MOUNTING mm 8.0 12.7 19.0 24.0 25.4 30.0
PLATES MOUNTING M 0.35 0.52 0.91 0.73 1.00 1.06
MXP16 PLATES mm 8.9 13.3 23.0 18.5 25.4 27.0
ONLY STROKE MXP16 N - 0.41 0.71 0.45 0.69 0.65
LS
mm - 10.3 18.0 11.4 17.4 16.5
0.50
ONLY O 0.18 0.20 0.22 0.28 0.35 0.42
0.22
[12.7] [5.6]
mm 4.6 5.2 5.5 7.1 9.0 10.7
1.00 TUBE CLAMPS
[25.4] 1.87 P - 2.24 2.92 3.26 3.84 5.19
0.28
MG
[47.6] mm - 57.0 74.1 82.7 97.5 131.7
[7.1] 2.50 Q - 2.72 3.44 3.81 4.39 5.93
[63.5] mm - 69.0 87.4 96.7 111.5 150.7
A R - 0.71 0.63 0.55 0.55 0.75
FOOT - 18.0 16.0 14.0 14.0 19.0
MOUNTS FOOT mm
S - 0.14 0.17 0.15 0.15 0.24
MOUNT
CC
FLUSH mm - 3.6 4.3 3.8 3.8 6.1
TO K
BOTTOM O T - 0.20 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.42
L
OF TUBE mm - 5.2 7.1 7.1 7.1 10.7
N J *MXP16, 25, 32 & 50 use 2 center holes,
M
PB
MXP40 & 63 use 4 corner holes
FLOATING MOUNT NOTE: Auxiliary carrier is S-Solid Bearing carrier, see
C
FOOT MOUNT
ENGR
M
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
TUBE CLAMPS S
S-SOLID BEARING OPTION DIMENSIONS
ADJUSTABLE SHOCK ABSORBER
ADJUSTABLE FIXED
E EE MXP16 MXP25 MXP32 MXP40 MXP50 MXP63
A 1.65 2.11 2.91 3.32 4.24 5.21
mm 42.0 53.5 73.8 84.4 107.6 132.4
ABT
B 1.97 2.61 3.35 3.87 4.87 5.91

mm 50.0 66.2 85.0 98.4 123.8 150.0
C 1.74 2.44 2.95 3.43 4.09 5.20
mm 44.3 62.0 74.9 87.0 103.9 132.0
D 0.71 0.98 1.25 0.98 1.22 1.26
MXP
mm 18.0 25.0 31.8 25.0 31.0 32.0

E 1.80 2.391 3.202 3.573 4.534 5.505
mm 45.8 60.81 81.22 90.73 115.14 139.75
F F 4.12 5.81 1 6.76 2 8.613 8.354 12.565
BC2
mm 104.6 147.7 1 171.8 2 218.8 3 212.24 318.95
FF Stroke Adder: Adjustable Shock Absorber

in. 0.62 1.50 1.96 1.70 1.66 1.65
mm 15.7 38.1 49.7 43.3 42.1 41.8
BC3
NOTE: For each adjustable shock absorber ordered, add Stroke Adder
value to required stroke to determine configurated actuator stroke.

( )
Stroke
D
BC4
Example: MXP25S, 500mm stroke required, 2 adjustable shocks

500 + (2 x 38.1) = 500 + 76.2 = 576.2mm

DD AA 1.65 2.11 2.91 3.32 4.24 5.21
LS
mm 42.0 53.5 73.8 84.4 107.6 132.4

BB 1.95 2.57 3.42 3.87 5.10 5.92
C CC mm 49.5 65.3 86.8 98.4 129.6 150.3
CC 1.17 1.57 2.00 2.44 2.83 3.66
MG
mm 29.8 40.0 50.8 62.0 72.0 93.0

B BB DD 0.13 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.50 0.50
A AA mm 3.3 6.4 6.4 6.4 12.7 12.7
EE 1.80 2.391 3.202 3.573 4.534 5.505
mm 45.8 60.81 81.22 90.73 115.14 139.75
CC
FF 4.12 5.81 1 6.76 2 8.613 8.354 12.565

mm 104.6 147.7 1 171.8 2 218.8 3 212.24 318.95
1Carrier is standard MXP25S, 2.30" (58.4mm) high X 5.31" (135.0mm)
long, Impact plates on each end of carrier add .09" (2.4mm) to total
height and .50" (12.7mm) to total length
PB
long, Impact bolts on each end of carrier add .13" (3.4mm) to total
long, Impact bolts on each end of carrier add .06" (1.5mm) to total
ENGR
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT long, Impact bolts on each end of carrier add .09" (2.3mm) to total
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM height and .45" (11.4mm) to total length
5Carrier is standard MXP63S, 5.48" (139.1mm) high X 12.11"
NOTE: Auxiliary carrier is S-Solid Bearing carrier, see (307.5mm) long, Impact bolts on each end of carrier add .45"
page MXP_26 for carrier size and mounting dimensions (11.4mm) to total length
MXP_ 30 1.800.328.2174
P-PROFILED RAIL ACTUATOR DIMENSIONS
M M MXP16 MXP25 MXP32 MXP40 MXP50 MXP63

MOUNTING MOUNTING
PATTERN PATTERN A 3.13 3.94 4.89 5.79 6.26 8.42
B MXP16, 25 MXP32, 40,
50, 63 mm 79.6 100.2 124.1 147.1 159.1 213.8
B 0.55 1.11 1.50 1.50 1.97 1.97
ABT
A N J mm 14.0 28.3 38.1 38.0 50.0 50.0
C 1.81 2.30 3.05 3.53 4.71 5.51
J mm 46.0 58.5 77.4 89.7 119.7 140.0
O O K D 1.19 1.57 2.13 2.52 3.01 2.87
MXP
mm 30.3 40.0 54.0 64.0 78.7 73.0
J
STROKE E 1.78 2.65 3.25 3.85 4.62 5.65
+
2A J mm 45.3 67.4 82.5 97.8 117.4 143.6
STROKE
F 0.85 1.10 1.42 1.81 2.25 2.87
BC2
P* P* mm 21.5 27.9 36.1 46.0 57.2 73.0
DOWEL DOWEL
HOLE (2) HOLE (2) G 0.17 0.28 0.38 0.35 0.43 0.53
mm 4.3 7.0 9.7 9.0 10.8 13.5
S R
H #8-32 #10-24 1/4-20 1/4-20 5/16-18 5/16-18
(8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8)
BC3
mm
M4x0.7 M5x0.8 M6x1.0 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M8x1.25
A (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8)
I 4.33 5.31 6.69 7.87 8.50 12.00
B
mm 110.0 135.0 170.0 200.0 216.0 304.8
BC4
J 1.57 1.57 1.07 1.00 1.00 1.57
E mm 40.0 40.0 27.1 25.4 25.4 40.0
K - - 3.37 4.50 2.75 5.12
H mm - - 85.7 114.3 69.9 130.0
C
LS
F M 1.102 1.575 1.969 2.835 3.125 3.870
Q mm 28.00 40.00 50.00 72.00 79.38 98.30
F G #8-32 1/4-20 5/16-18 5/16-18 5/16-18 3/8-16
D N
(6) (6) (8) (8) (10) (8)
M4x0.7 M6x1.0 M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M8x1.25 M10x1.5
MG
mm
(6) (6) (8) (8) (10) (8)
O 1.575 1.575 1.772 2.500 1.500 2.559
mm 40.00 40.00 45.00 63.50 38.10 65.00
Ø.1583/ Ø.2520/ Ø.3145/ Ø.3145/ Ø.3145/ Ø.3770/
P* .1573 .2512 .3135 .3135 .3135 .3760
CC
.250(2) .250(2) .375(2) .500(2) .500(2) .500(2)
Ø4.046 Ø6.045 Ø8.045 Ø8.045 Ø8.045 Ø10.045
mm /4.021 /6.020 /8.020 /8.020 /8.020 /10.020
6.35(2) 6.35(2) 9.53(2) 12.70(2) 12.70(2) 12.70(2)
Q 0.17 0.28 0.38 0.35 0.43 0.53
PB
mm 4.3 7.0 9.7 9.0 10.8 13.5
R 1.181 1.58 2.13 2.52 3.10 3.94
mm 30.00 40.00 54.00 64.00 78.74 100.00
S 1.40 1.91 2.48 2.89 3.69 4.53
ENGR
mm 35.50 48.60 62.87 73.50 93.74 115.00

3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
0.003 in
*DOWEL HOLES
0.08 mm
P-PROFILED RAIL PORTING DIMENSIONS MXP16P, MXP25P, MXP32P

16mm END 40mm
SIDE BORE
BORE .39 [10.0]
ABT
.59
[15.0]
.74
BOTTOM [18.8]
MXP
.56
[14.3]
ONE THIS NP NPT #10-32 UNF Not Available for 16mm BORE
SIDE ONE
BC2
.39 OPP. SIDE

[10.0]
(OE = Opposite
25mm END End Port) END
BC3
BORE SIDE SIDE 1.31

[33.3]
.06
.69
[17.5]
[1.5] OE 50mm
OE
.83 .83
[21.0]
.69 BORE
[21.0] [17.5]
BC4
.84 [21.3] .91 .29 [7.3] .81

[23.2] .84 [21.3]
[20.7] .91 [23.2]
BOTTOM BOTTOM
.61
.99 OE [15.6] .99
[25.1] PORT THREAD CHOICES: [25.1] PORT THREAD CHOICES:
LS

ONE THIS TWO THIS
SIDE ONE GP G 1/8-28 PARALLEL SIDE TWO SG G 1/8-28 PARALLEL
OPP. SIDE NP 1/8-27 NPTF OPP. SIDE SN 1/8-27 NPTF
.84
[21.3] .44 [11.1]
.84
[21.3]
MG
32mm END END

BORE SIDE SIDE
1.09 1.09 (2)
CC
[27.7] [27.7]
OE OE
1.09
[27.7]
1.09
[27.7]
63mm
.67 [17.1] 1.37 .67 [17.1] .65
BORE
[34.7] [16.4] 1.37
PB
[34.7]
BOTTOM BOTTOM
.79
1.37 PORT THREAD CHOICES: OE [20.0] 1.37 PORT THREAD CHOICES:
[34.7] [34.7]
ENGR

TWO THIS
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT NP 1/8-27 NPTF SIDE TWO SN 1/8-27 NPTF
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM ONE THIS
SIDE ONE OPP. SIDE
.67 [17.1] OPP. SIDE .67 [17.1]
1.11 [28.1]
MXP_ 32 1.800.328.2174
P-PROFILED RAIL PORTING DIMENSIONS MXP40P, MXP50P, MXP63P

40mm END (OE = Opposite END
BORE SIDE SIDE End Port)
1.26
[32.0]
ABT
OE
1.26 1.26 1.26 OE
[32.0] [32.0] [32.0]
.47 [12.0] 1.46 .47 [12.0] .89
[37.0] 1.10 [28.0] [22.5]
.94 [24.0]
MXP
BOTTOM BOTTOM 1.46 [37.0]
.83 [21.0]
1.46 OE 1.46
[37.0] PORT THREAD CHOICES: [37.0] PORT THREAD CHOICES:
ONE THIS GP G 1/4-19 PARALLEL SG G 1/4-19 PARALLEL
BC2
SIDE ONE TWO THIS
OPP. SIDE NP 1/4-18 NPTF SIDE TWO SN 1/4-18 NPTF
.47 [12.0] OPP. SIDE
.47 [12.0]
1.08 [27.5]
END END
BC3
50mm 2.06 [52.2] 2.06 [52.2]
BORE SIDE SIDE
1.27 1.27 1.27 1.27
[32.3] [32.3] [32.3] [32.3]
BC4
.91 [23.2] OE OE
1.27 1.27
[32.3] [32.3]
HOICES: .71 [18.0] .71 [18.0] 1.11
1.48 [37.5] [28.2]
TAPER
PARALLEL BOTTOM
BOTTOM 1.48 [37.5]
LS
TF
.71 [18.0] PORT THREAD CHOICES: .71 [18.0] PORT THREAD CHOICES:
TP Rc 3/8-19 TAPER 1.15 ST Rc 3/8-19 TAPER
1.82 [29.1] 1.82
[46.3] GP G 3/8-19 PARALLEL OE [46.3] SG G 3/8-19 PARALLEL
TWO THIS TWO THIS
MG
SIDE TWO SIDE TWO
OPP. SIDE OPP. SIDE
END END
2.22 [56.4] 2.22 [56.4]
63mm
CC
BORE SIDE SIDE
1.58 1.58 1.58
[40.0] [40.0] [40.0]
1.58 OE OE
[40.0] 1.58 1.58
[40.0] [40.0]
PB
CHOICES:
.67 [17.0] .67 [17.0] 1.24
TAPER 1.46 [37.0] [31.4]
PARALLEL TWO THIS SIDE
BOTTOM BOTTOM TWO OPP. SIDE
TF
2.22 1.24 2.22
ENGR
[56.4] PORT THREAD CHOICES: OE PORT THREAD CHOICES:

[31.4] [56.4]
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM GP G 3/8-19 PARALLEL SG G 3/8-19 PARALLEL
.67 [17.0] NP 3/8-18 NPTF .67 [17.0] SN 3/8-18 NPTF
1.46 [37.0]
P-PROFILED RAIL OPTION DIMENSIONS
AUXILIARY CARRIER, FOOT MOUNT, TUBE CLAMPS
G
H FOOT B
C MXP16 MXP25 MXP32 MXP40 MXP50 MXP63
MOUNT A 3.13 3.94 4.89 5.79 6.26 8.42
F
mm 79.6 100.2 124.1 147.1 159.1 213.8
E
ABT
FOOT AUXILIARY CARRIER

MOUNTS D 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.50 8.60 13.00
FLUSH
TO mm 127.0 152.4 177.8 215.9 218.4 330.0
BOTTOM A FOOT MOUNT
OF TUBE
B 1.57 1.89 2.36 2.91 3.67 4.72
MXP
mm 40.0 48.0 60.0 74.0 93.2 120.0

C 1.26 1.57 2.01 2.52 3.11 3.94
mm 32.0 40.0 51.0 64.0 78.9 100.0
E 0.16 0.25 0.37 0.47 0.50 0.59
mm 4.0 6.4 9.5 12.0 12.7 15.0
BC2
F 0.31 0.50 0.75 0.94 1.00 1.18

mm 8.0 12.7 19.0 24.0 25.4 30.0
G 0.35 0.52 0.91 0.73 1.00 1.06
D mm 8.9 13.3 23.0 18.5 25.4 27.0
MINIMUM
BC3
DISTANCE H - 0.41 0.71 0.45 0.69 0.65

BETWEEN
- 10.3 18.0 11.4 17.4 16.5
CARRIERS AUXILIARY mm
I 0.18
CARRIER 0.20 0.22 0.28 0.35 0.42
mm 4.6 5.2 5.5 7.1 9.0 10.7
STROKE TUBE CLAMPS
BC4
+
D J - 2.17 2.86 3.26 3.84 5.19
+ mm - 55.0 72.7 82.7 97.5 131.7
2A
K - 2.64 3.39 3.81 4.39 5.93
mm - 67.0 86.0 96.7 111.5 150.7
MOUNTING MOUNTING L - 0.71 0.63 0.55 0.55 0.75
LS
PLATES PLATES mm - 18.0 16.0 14.0 14.0 19.0

MXP16 MXP16 M - 0.14 0.17 0.15 0.15 0.24
ONLY STROKE
ONLY mm - 3.6 4.3 3.8 3.8 6.1
0.50 0.22 N - 0.20 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.42
MG
[12.7] [5.6] mm - 5.2 7.1 7.1 7.1 10.7

1.00 [25.4]
1.87
0.28 [47.6]
[7.1] 2.50 [63.5]
J N
CC
L
TUBE
CLAMPS K
DO NOT A TUBE
HANG
BELOW
CLAMPS
BOTTOM
OF TUBE
PB
ENGR
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
FOOT MOUNT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
M
TUBE CLAMPS
NOTE: Auxiliary carrier is P-Prodiled Rail carrier, see
MXP_ 34 1.800.328.2174
P-PROFILED RAIL OPTION DIMENSIONS
ADJUSTABLE FIXED ADJUSTABLE SHOCK ABSORBER

A 1.51 2.05 2.87 3.28 4.20 5.04
mm 38.3 52.0 72.9 83.2 106.7 128.0
ABT
B 1.38 1.56 2.25 2.63 3.55 3.97
mm 35.0 39.7 57.2 66.8 90.2 100.8
C 1.75 2.48 3.46 3.90 4.80 5.73
mm 44.5 63.0 87.9 99.0 121.8 145.5
D 1.54 1.96 2.63 3.17 3.55 4.07
MXP
mm 39.2 49.7 66.7 80.6 90.2 103.3
E 0.79 0.98 1.00 0.98 1.26 1.26
F mm 20.0 25.0 25.4 25.0 32.0 32.0
F 4.651 5.632 7.433 8.614 8.955 12.456
mm 118.01 143.02 188.83 218.84 227.45 316.26
BC2
FF
Stroke Adder: Adjustable Shock Absorber
in 0.96 2.10 2.73 2.40 3.15 2.74
mm 24.4 53.3 69.3 61.0 80.0 69.6
BC3
NOTE: For each adjustable shock absorber ordered, add Stroke Adder
E value to required stroke to determine configurated actuator stroke.

( )
Stroke
BC4
Example: MXP25P, 500mm stroke required, 2 adjustable shocks
500 + (2 x 53.3) = 500 + 106.6 = 606.6mm
EE
LS
D AA 1.51 2.05 2.89 3.32 4.38 5.22
DD
mm 38.3 52.0 73.4 84.4 111.2 132.5
BB 1.38 1.56 – – – –
CA CC AA mm 35.0 39.7 – – – –
CC 1.80 2.48 3.41 3.87 5.09 5.93
MG
mm 45.8 63.0 86.5 98.4 129.2 150.5
B BB DD 1.66 1.98 2.00 2.44 2.83 3.66
mm 42.2 50.4 50.8 62.0 72.0 93.0
EE 0.13 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.50 0.50
mm 3.3 6.4 6.4 6.4 12.7 12.7
CC
FF 4.651 5.632 7.433 8.614 8.955 12.456
mm 118.01 143.02 188.83 218.84 227.45 316.26
1Carrier is standard MXP16P, 4.33" (110.0mm) long, Impact bolts on

each end of carrier add .31" (8.0mm) to total length PB
each end of carrier add .31" (8.0mm) to total length



ENGR
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT each end of carrier add .45" (11.4mm) to total length
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM

NOTE: Auxiliary carrier is P-Prodiled Rail carrier, see
SWITCHES
SPECIFICATIONS
MX products offer a large number of sensing choices. There
are 12 switch choices: reed, solid state PNP (sourcing) or
solid state NPN (sinking); in normally open or normally closed;
with flying leads or quick-disconnnects.
ABT
Commonly used for end-of-stroke positioning, these switches

allow drop-in installation anywhere along the entire actuator
length. The one-piece design includes the retained fastening
hardware and is designed for any open side or bottom slot on the
MX. The internal piston magnet is a standard feature, therefore
MXP
these switches can be installed in the field at anytime.

Switches are used to send digital signals to PLC
(programmable logic controller), TTL, CMOS circuit or other
controller device. Switches contain reverse polarity protection.
Solid state QD cables are shielded; shield should be
BC2
terminated at flying lead end.

RoHS All switches are CE rated and are RoHS compliant. Switches
COMPLIANT
feature bright red or yellow LED signal indicators; solid state
switches also have green LED power indicators.
BC3
*Power Switching Current

BC4
Order Switching Power Operating Rating Current Con- Voltage Leakage Temp. Shock /
Code Lead Logic LED Signal LED Voltage (Watts) (mA max.) sumption Drop Current Range Vibration
RY 5m SPST — Red
5 - 240
Normally
Quick AC/DC
RK Open 81009082
LS
Disconnect 81009082
3.0 V
REED
81009082 *10.0 100mA — —

max.
NY 5m SPST — Yellow
81009082
81009082
5 - 110
Normally 81009082
Quick 81009084 AC/DC

NK Closed 81009084
Disconnect 81009084
MG
81009084
TY 5m PNP Green Yellow

81009084
81009084
(Sourcing) 81009088 14
Quick Normally 81009088
to
TK Open 81009088
158°F
Disconnect 81009088 50 G /
81009088
81009088 9G
KY 5m NPN Green Red
81009090
[-10
(Sinking)
CC
81009090 to
Normally 81009090
70°C]
SOLID STATE
Quick
KK Open
81009090
Disconnect 81009090 10 - 30 20 mA @ 2.0 V 0.05 mA
81009090 *3.0 100mA
81009092
Vdc 24V max. max.
PY 5m PNP Green Yellow
81009092
(Sourcing) 81009092

PB
PK Closed
81009092
Disconnect 81009092
81009094
81009094
HY 5m NPN Green Red
81009094
(Sinking) 81009094
HK Closed
81009094
Disconnect
ENGR
Enclosure classification IEC 529 IP67 (NEMA 6) CABLES: Robotic grade, oil resistant polyurethane jacket, PVC insulation
*WARNING: Do not exceed power rating (Watt = Voltage x Amperage). Permanent damage to sensor will occur.
MXP_ 36 1.800.328.2174
SWITCHES
WIRING DIAGRAMS
RY • RK TY • TK KY • KK
REED • NORMALLY OPEN SOLID STATE • NORMALLY OPEN • PNP SOLID STATE • NORMALLY OPEN • NPN
BRN BRN BRN
NORMALLY + + +
OPEN BLU NORMALLY BLK NORMALLY
LOAD - OPEN PNP SIGNAL OPEN NPN BLK
LOAD
(SOURCING) (SINKING) SIGNAL
ABT
or LOAD
BLU BLU
BRN
LOAD + - -
NORMALLY
OPEN BLU
-
NY • NK PY • PK HY • HK
MXP
REED • NORMALLY CLOSED SOLID STATE • NORMALLY CLOSED • PNP SOLID STATE • NORMALLY CLOSED • NPN
BRN
NORMALLY + BRN
+
BRN
+
CLOSED BLU NORMALLY NORMALLY
LOAD - CLOSED PNP
BLK
SIGNAL CLOSED NPN BLK
LOAD
(SOURCING) (SINKING) SIGNAL
or LOAD
BLU BLU
BRN
LOAD + - -
NORMALLY
BC2
CLOSED BLU
-
QUICK DISCONNECT MALE PLUG PINOUT QUICK DISCONNECT

FEMALE SOCKET PINOUT
BLACK
(SIGNAL) BLUE (-) BLACK
(SIGNAL) BROWN (+)
BC3
BROWN (+) BLUE (-)
DIMENSIONS
SWITCH DIMENSIONS MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
BC4
_ Y - direct connect 40, 50, 63
SWITCHES SIT BELOW
DETECTION POINT TUBE EXTRUSION PROFILE
SOLID STATE DETECTION POINT REED 16, 25, 32
SWITCHES SIT BELOW
TUBE EXTRUSION PROFILE
.31 [8]
.51 [13]
197 [5000]
LS
X
U U
_ K - QD (Quick-disconnect) switch
M8x1
V V
1.18 [30] W
MG
SWITCH MOUNTING
13.35 [339] 16 25 32 40 50 63
U 0.31 0.79 1.06 0.81 1.08 1.50
8100-9080 - QD Cable mm 7.9 20.0 27.0 20.5 27.4 38.0
1.26 [32.1]
V 0.59 0.83 1.09 0.81 1.08 1.50
CC
M8x1
.95 [24.1] mm 15.0 21.0 27.7 20.5 27.4 38.0
Ø.35 W – – – 1.71 2.02 2.44
[9]
mm – – – 43.5 51.4 62.0
Ø.28 [7] 197 [5000] X – – – 1.71 2.02 2.44 PB
mm – – – 43.5 51.4 62.0
SWITCH INSTALLATION AND REPLACEMENT Insert Rotate Secure

ENGR
Place switch in side groove on tube at desired location with "Tolomatic" facing switch switch switch
outward. While applying light pressure to the switch, rotate the switch halfway into
the groove. Maintaining light pressure, rotate the switch in the opposite direction ic
until the it is fully inside the groove with "Tolomatic" visible. Re-position the switch mat
atic
atic
Tolo
Tolom
Tolom
to the exact location and lock the switch securely into place by tightening the
screw on the switch.
SELECTION GUIDELINES The process of selecting a
load bearing actuator for
1
COMPILE APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS a given application can
be complex. It is highly
APPLICATION DATA WORKSHEET recommended that you
contact Tolomatic for
STROKE LENGTH _____________ FORCES APPLIED Fz ______ assistance in selecting
inch (SK ) millimeters (SM ) TO CARRIER Fy ______ the best actuator for
ABT
(U.S. Standard) (Metric) lbf N

(U.S. Standard) (Metric)
your application. The
AVAILABLE AIR PRESSURE _____ following overview of the
PSI bar BENDING MOMENTS Mx ______ selection guidelines are for
(U.S. Standard) (Metric) APPLIED TO CARRIER My ______ educational purposes only.
2
REQUIRED THRUST FORCE _____ in-lbs N-m Mz ______
MXP

lbf N DETERMINE
FINAL VELOCITY _____________ BORE SIZE
LOAD ______________________ in/sec mm/sec • Consult the Theoretical
lb kg (U.S. Standard) (Metric) Force vs. Pressure graph.
(See graph at right)
BC2

MOVE TIME sec. _____________
LOAD CENTER OF dx ______ • Find the intersection of
NO. OF CYCLES _____________ the available pressure and
GRAVITY DISTANCE dy ______
TO CARRIER CENTER dz ______ per minute per hour required thrust force. If the
inch millimeters intersection falls below the
BC3
(U.S. Standard) (Metric) plotted bore size curve, the

ORIENTATION actuator will supply adequate
Horizontal Side Horizontal Down force for the application. If
CENTER
CENTER
OF GRAVITY
the intersection is above the
dz OF GRAVITY
curve, a larger cylinder bore
dy
OR
BC4
size will be required.

AT
d
d dZ
TU
x
d
R
AC
RIER UATO
ACT IER
x
RIER CAR
CAR
R NOTE: Additional force
Y
UATO
xd
R
CAR dz
ACT may be required to obtain
d
CENTER
OF GRAVITY
the necessary acceleration
within desired cycle time.
LS
Lz
Vertical Z
Angled a __________ b
____________ X
3
Lz COMPARE LOAD TO
Z
CENTER
MAXIMUM LOAD
ACTUATOR
OF GRAVITY
Y FRONT
CAPACITIES
dx β VIEW
MG
SIDE VIEW
Calculate the following static
CARRIER
z
loads: Mx, My, Mz, Fy, Fz

d d
α
Y
Loads = Applied Moments

+ Forces
OTHER ISSUES:
CC
(i.e. Environment, If the load of your application

Temperature, exceeds figures indicated in
Contamination, etc.) the MOMENT AND LOAD
CAPACITY tables (See pages
mxp_10-15) consider:
PB
Contact information: 1.) Higher capacity bearing

style, i.e. N to S, S to P
2.) Larger Bore Cylinder
ENGR
3.) Auxiliary Carrier

4.) Add External Guides
Fax (1-763-478-8080) or call Tolomatic (1-800-328-2174) with the above information.
We will provide any assistance needed to determine the proper MXP Band Cylinder.
MXP_ 38 1.800.328.2174
4
SHOCKS are excessive, consider the • Choose NPT, Metric Parallel
CALCULATE If the intersection of the four choices listed in step #3 (ISO-G/BSP) or Metric Taper
LOAD FACTOR LF final velocity and load mass or consider these deceleration (Rc/BST) Ports
For combined loads the Load falls in the shaded regions, methods:
OPTIONS:
Factor (LF) must not exceed then shock absorbers • Reduce final velocity with
the value 1. should be used. • Switches – Reed, Solid State
flow controls or reduced
PNP or NPN, all available
pressure.
LF = Mx + My + Mz + Fy + Fz < 1 normally open or normally
6
Mxmax Mymax Mzmax Fymax Fzmax CONSIDER PEAK
ABT
• Pneumatic valve decelera- closed
DYNAMIC INERTIA tion circuits. By reducing
If LF exceeds the value 1, MOMENTS the speed before the cushion
• Shock Absorbers – Heavy or
then consider the four choices When a rigidly attached load light duty, fixed or adjustable
or shock is reached, the load
listed in step #3. mass is accelerated or decel- mount – recommended for
can decelerate over a longer
longer life in most applications
MXP
erated, its inertia induces distance, thereby reducing
the deceleration moments. • Foot Mounts
THEORETICAL FORCE VS PRESSURE •
Position shock absorbers •
F loating Mount Bracket
1 2
PRESSURE (bar)
3 4 5 6 7
at the load's center of – used when lack of
gravity. This will greatly parallelism occurs
BC2
400 63 2000
reduce the moment load between the cylinder and
50
1000
applied to the carrier. an externally guided and
200
800 supported load. Available
40
600 P PROFILED RAIL for N internal & S solid
100
32
DECELERATION bearing styles
BC3
400
THRUST FORCE (lbf)
THRUST FORCE (N)
80
60
25 CONSIDERATIONS
200 While the P Profiled Rail MXP S SOLID BEARING 2:1 RULE
40
is capable of carrying very
16
100
large loads, consideration
20 must be given to how to stop
BC4
80
60 the load at the end of stroke.
10 40 If Tolomatic cushions or
8
6
shocks are used, stay within
20
the specifications defined.
4 If another type of shock
LS
20 40 60 80 100 absorber is used, be sure that
PRESSURE (PSI) the deceleration of the load is
smooth and over an adequate
5
DETERMINE bending moments on the distance. For applications using S
7
CUSHION & SHOCK carrier. The magnitude of DETERMINE solid bearings, binding or
MG
CAPACITY these inertia moments can TUBE CLAMP interrupted motion may
Consult the Cushion and be larger than the applied REQUIREMENTS occur if the load offset is
Shock Absorber Performance loads. Careful attention to • Consult the Tube Clamp equal to or greater than
charts for the model how the load is decelerated at Requirement chart for the twice the bearing length
selected (see page mxp_18). the end of stroke is required model selected (page mxp_19- (1X). LOAD OFFSET is
CC
The velocities listed on the for extended actuator perfor- 20). defined as: the distance
cushion charts are final or mance and application safety. from the applied force (or
impact velocities. If the final or •
Cross-reference the load the load center of gravity)
Evaluate the dynamic inertia force and maximum distance
impact velocity is not known, to the centerline of the
moment data: between supports.
use of valve deceleration carrier.
1.) The length of deceleration
PB
circuits or shock absorbers distance • Divide stroke length by max. If the load offset cannot be
should be considered. 2.) The load attached to the distance calculated above to changed consider:
CUSHIONS carrier determine number of tube
clamps to order. 1.) Higher capacity bearing
Find the intersection of the 3.) The distance of the load
style, i.e. S to P
8
ENGR
final velocity and load mass. mass center of gravity from

If the intersection is below the the carrier, and CONSIDER PORTING 2.) Larger Bore Cylinder
diagonal lines, the internal 4.) The final velocity of the AND OPTIONS 3.) Auxiliary Carrier
cushions on the actuator carrier. • Choose Single End Porting
may be used. or Dual End Porting 4.) Add External Guides
If dynamic inertia moments
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES
CUSHION NEEDLE ADJUSTMENT
Adjust the cushion needle in zero. If the carrier reaches the end of stroke at velocity, then
CUSHION
NEEDLE the cylinder heads carefully the cushion needs to be increased by turning the cushion
to obtain proper deceleration needle screw clockwise. If the carrier stalls or bounces (quickly
for your particular application. oscillating directions) before it reaches the end of stroke, then
Proper cushion needle the cushion needs to be decreased by turning the cushion
ABT
adjustment is achieved when needle screw counterclockwise. Improper cushion adjustment

the carrier reaches the end of may cause premature failure of the actuator. Call Tolomatic
travel at a velocity approaching with any questions.
NOTE: MXP16S requires a different carrier

MXP
S SOLID BEARING CARRIER ADJUSTMENT MXP16 adjustment procedure, see below.

The S solid bearing carrier will provide for maximum life when Tools Required:
properly adjusted. The carrier design contains both tension Inch Models: 1/16 inch and 2.5mm Hex Wrench (Key)
and lock screws. The tension screws control the amount of Metric Models: 2 and 2.5 mm Hex Wrench (Key)
pressure placed on the carrier bearings. The lock screws lock 1. Loosen endplate screws on both ends of the carrier.
BC2
the tension screws in place and provide fine adjustment of the

carrier bearings. The number of tension and lock screws will 2. Fully loosen all tension and lock screws. They do not need
vary depending on the bore size of the actuator. to be removed, just fully loosened.
TENSION SCREW
TENSION SCREW
BC3
BC4
LS
LOCK SCREW
LOCK SCREW
1. Fully loosen all tension and lock screws. They do not need
to be removed, just fully loosened. 3. Tighten tension screws by turning them clockwise until the
carrier is just tight enough so that no side-to-side rocking
2. Tighten tension screws on both sides of carrier roughly 1/8
MG
motion is present and it can easily be moved by hand over

to 1/4 turn clockwise past where the screw starts to feel the entire stroke length with no hesitation. Very little torque
snug. The carrier should be very difficult or impossible to on the screws is required to obtain this condition.
move by hand.
Note: The Tension Screws are the small set screw style
3. Next, adjust the lock screws on both sides of the carrier fastener. The Lock Screws are the larger, low head, hex
CC
roughly 1/8 to 1/4 turn clockwise past where the screw drive screws.
starts to engage.
4. Tighten lock screws by turning them clockwise until tight.
4. Ideal carrier tension is achieved when the carrier feels The carrier should feel snug in relation to the tube, with no
snug in relation to the tube. No rocking motion should be side-to-side rocking motion present. If the carrier becomes
present. The carrier should be loose enough to be moved
PB
too loose, loosen the lock screws, tighten the tension

by hand over the entire length of the actuator. screws and then retighten the
If after this process the carrier has become too Allen wrench sizes for carrier lock screws.
loose, equally adjust all of the lock screws with a adjustment, Solid bearing actuators
slight 1/32 turn counterclockwise. A carrier that Tension Screw Lock Screw
5. Once ideal carrier tension is
ENGR
is adjusted too tight will increase the breakaway in mm in mm

pressure required for motion; in extreme cases no 16 1/16 2 1/16 2
achieved, fully tighten end
motion will occur when air is applied. 25 5/32 4 1/8 3 plate screws on both ends of
32 5/32 4 3/32 2 the carrier.
During the service life, this process may need to be 40 5/32 4 1/8 3
repeated. Keeping the carrier properly adjusted will 50 3/16 4 3/32 2.5
prolong the life of the S solid bearing system. 63 1/4 5 3/16 5
MXP_ 40 1.800.328.2174
SERVICE PARTS
REPAIR KITS
Repair kit includes: dust band, seal band, end caps, internal soft seals (piston
seals, cushion seals, wipers), [Also for S style: bearings and bearing caps]
The part number for a repair kit begins with RK followed by model, bore size,
bearing type, and stroke length (SK = inch/US Standard, SM = metric) (NOTE: If
ABT
unit has an auxiliary carrier also include DW and distance between carrier centers)
AUXILIARY
CARRIERS
DISTANCE
BETWEEN
BEARING
CARRIER
LENGTH
STROKE
STROKE
METRIC
MODEL
REPAIR
BORE
MXP
TYPE
SIZE
KIT
RK MXP 40 S SM2007.02 DW215.9

SWITCHES
BC2
TO ORDER SERVICE PARTS SWITCHES:
Switches for MXP include retained mounting hardware and are the same for all bore sizes and bearing styles
Code Lead Normally Sensor Type
RY 5m (197 in)
BC3
Open Reed
RK Quick-disconnect
NY 5m (197 in)
Closed Reed
NK Quick-disconnect
TY 5m (197 in)
BC4
Open Solid State PNP
TK Quick-disconnect
KY 5m (197 in)
Open Solid State NPN
KK Quick-disconnect
PY 5m (197 in)
LS
Closed Solid State PNP
PK Quick-disconnect
HY 5m (197 in)
Closed Solid State NPN
HK Quick-disconnect
MG
CC
To order switches using configurated parts string
(will include mating female QD cable if required)
QUANTITY
BEARING
SWITCH
SWITCH
MODEL
PB
CODE
BORE
TYPE
SIZE
KIT
SW MXP 25 N RK2
ENGR
SERVICE PARTS MXP16, MXP25, MXP32
16 25 32
MOUNTING OPTIONS
N Internal S Solid P Profiled Rail N Internal S Solid P Profiled Rail N Internal S Solid P Profiled Rail
Foot Mount Inch 8116-9519 8116-9519 8116-9519 8125-9519 8125-9519 8125-9519 8132-9519 8132-9519 8132-9519
(1 bracket, 2 bolts) Metric 8116-9019 8116-9019 8116-9019 8125-9019 8125-9019 8125-9019 8132-9019 8132-9019 8132-9019
ABT
Tube Clamp
(2 clamps)
NA NA NA 8125-9018 8125-9018 8125-9018 8132-9018 8132-9018 8132-9018
Floating Mount Inch 8116-9535 8116-9536 NA 8125-9535 8125-9536 NA 8132-9535 8132-9536 NA

(brackets, pin, mounting fasteners) Metric 8116-9035 8116-9036 NA 8125-9035 8125-9036 NA 8132-9035 8132-9036 NA
Mounting Plate Inch 8316-9016 8316-9016 8316-9016

MXP
(1 plate, 2 bolts) Metric 8316-9016 8316-9016 8316-9016
SHOCK 16 25 32
ABSORBER KITS N Internal S Solid P Profiled Rail N Internal S Solid P Profiled Rail N Internal S Solid P Profiled Rail
BC2
Fixed Shock Absorber Inch 8116-9510 8116-9511 8116-9512 8125-9510 8125-9511 8125-9512 8132-9510 8132-9511 8132-9512
Kit - Light Duty
((2 shock absorbers,
all required hardware))
Metric 8116-9010 8116-9011 8116-9012 8125-9010 8125-9011 8125-9012 8132-9010 8132-9011 8132-9012
Kit - Heavy Duty
BC3

all required hardware)) Metric 8116-9025 8116-9026 8116-9027 8125-9025 8125-9026 8125-9027 8132-9025 8132-9026 8132-9027
*Adjustable Shock Inch 8116-9515 8116-9016 8116-9517 8125-9515 8125-9016 8125-9517 8132-9515 8132-9016 8132-9517
Absorber Kit - Light
Duty ((2 shock absorbers, all
required hardware))
Metric 8116-9015 8116-9016 8125-9017 8125-9015 8125-9016 8125-9017 8132-9015 8132-9016 8132-9017
BC4
Absorber Kit - Heavy
required hardware)) Metric 8116-9030 8116-9031 8116-9032 8125-9030 8125-9031 8125-9032 8132-9030 8132-9031 8132-9032
16 25 32
LS
SHOCK PARTS
Mounting Hardware
(1 shock mount) Metric 8116-9020 8116-9020 8116-9022 8125-9020 8125-9020 8125-9022 8132-9020 8132-9020 8132-9022
*Adj. Shock Absorber
MG
Mounting Hardware 8116-9023 8116-9023 8116-9024 8125-9023 8125-9023 8125-9024 8132-9023 8132-9023 8132-9024
(1 shock mount)
Shock Stop Kit Inch 8116-9521 NA 8116-9034 8125-9521 8125-9013 8125-9534 8132-9521 4912-1063 8132-9534
(Hardware needed for shock to
strike carrier) Metric 8116-9021 NA 8116-9034 8125-9021 8125-9013 8125-9034 8132-9021 4912-1063 8132-9034
Shock Absorber -
CC
Heavy Duty 7906-1066 7906-1066 7906-1066 4910-1338 4910-1338 4910-1338 4912-1068 4912-1068 4912-1068
(1 shock absorber)
Shock Absorber -
Light Duty 7906-1065 7906-1065 7906-1065 4910-1337 4910-1337 4910-1337 4912-1067 4912-1067 4912-1067
(1 shock absorber)
PB
*NOTE: N Internal bearing: Adjustable shock absorbers will decrease actuator stroke, see Stroke Adder note on page MXP_25 for more information.
S Solid bearing: Adjustable shock absorbers will decrease actuator stroke, see Stroke Adder note on page MXP_30 for more information.
P Profiled rail: Adjustable shock absorbers will decrease actuator stroke, see Stroke Adder note on page MXP_35 for more information.
ENGR
MXP_ 42 1.800.328.2174
SERVICE PARTS MXP40, MXP50, MXP63
40 50 63
MOUNTING OPTIONS
Foot Mount Inch 8140-9519 8140-9519 8140-9519 8150-9519 8150-9519 8150-9519 8163-9519 8163-9519 8163-9519
(1 bracket, 2 bolts) Metric 8140-9019 8140-9019 8140-9019 8150-9019 8150-9019 8150-9019 8163-9019 8163-9019 8163-9019
Tube Clamp
ABT
(2 clamps)
8140-9018 8140-9018 8140-9018 8140-9018 8140-9018 8140-9018 8163-9018 8163-9018 8163-9018
Floating Mount Inch 8140-9535 8140-9536 NA 8150-9535 8150-9536 NA 8163-9535 8163-9536 NA

(brackets, pin, mounting fasteners) Metric 8140-9035 8140-9036 NA 8150-9035 8150-9036 NA 8163-9035 8163-9036 NA
MXP
SHOCK 40 50 63
ABSORBER KITS N Internal S Solid P Profiled Rail N Internal S Solid P Profiled Rail N Internal S Solid P Profiled Rail
Kit - Light Duty
Metric 8140-9010 8140-9011 8140-9012 8150-9010 8150-9011 8150-9012 8163-9010 8163-9011 8163-9012
BC2
all required hardware))
Kit - Heavy Duty
all required hardware)) Metric 8140-9025 8140-9026 8140-9027 8150-9025 8150-9026 8150-9027 8163-9025 8163-9026 8163-9027
BC3
Absorber Kit - Light
required hardware))
Metric 8140-9015 8140-9016 8140-9017 8150-9015 8150-9016 8150-9017 8163-9015 8163-9016 8163-9017
Absorber Kit - Heavy
8140-9030 8140-9031 8140-9032 8150-9030 8150-9031 8150-9032 8163-9030 8163-9031 8163-9032
BC4
required hardware)) Metric
40 50 63
SHOCK PARTS
Mounting Hardware
LS
(1 shock mount) Metric 8140-9020 8140-9020 8140-9020 8150-9020 8150-9020 8150-9022 8163-9020 8163-9020 8163-9020
*Adj. Shock Absorber
Mounting Hardware 8140-9023 8140-9023 8140-9024 8150-9023 8150-9023 8163-9024 8163-9023 8163-9023 8163-9024
(1 shock mount)
Shock Stop Kit Inch 8140-9521 4912-1063 8140-9534 8150-9521 4415-1003 8150-9034 8163-9521 4915-1003 8150-9034
MG
(Hardware needed for shock to
strike carrier) Metric 8140-9021 4912-1063 8140-9034 8150-9021 4415-1003 8150-9034 8163-9021 4915-1003 8150-9034
Shock Absorber -
Heavy Duty 4912-1068 4912-1068 4912-1068 4920-1069 4920-1069 4920-1069 4920-1069 4920-1069 4920-1069
(1 shock absorber)
Shock Absorber -
CC
Light Duty 4912-1067 4912-1067 4912-1067 4920-1068 4920-1068 4920-1068 4920-1068 4920-1068 4920 -1068
(1 shock absorber)
*NOTE: N Internal bearing: Adjustable shock absorbers will decrease actuator stroke, see Stroke Adder note on page MXP_25 for more information.
S Solid bearing: Adjustable shock absorbers will decrease actuator stroke, see Stroke Adder note on page MXP_30 for more information.
PB
P Profiled rail: Adjustable shock absorbers will decrease actuator stroke, see Stroke Adder note on page MXP_35 for more information.
ENGR
ordering
M O D E L S E L E C T I O N (MUST BE IN THIS ORDER) OPTIONS (IN ANY ORDER)
MXP 40 P SN SM2007.02 DW215.9 FM2 TC8 TK2 AH2 ___
abt
MODEL AUXILIARY CARRIER SHOCK ABSORBER

MXP MXP Pneumatic Band Cylinder DW_ _ _._ _ _ Auxiliary Carrier, enter SD_ Fixed Shock Hardware
center-to-center spacing & enter quantity desired
MXP
desired in inches (SK) or SL_ Fixed Shock Light Duty

millimeters (SM) & enter quantity desired
BORE (Same unit of measure as stroke length is required) SH_ Fixed Shock Heavy Duty
Center-to-center spacing between carriers & enter quantity desired
16 16 mm (5/8-inch) bore adds to overall length of the actuator, this
25 25 mm (1-inch) bore AD_ Adjustable Shock Hardware
distance will not be subtracted from stroke
BC2
32 32 mm (1 1/4-inch) bore & enter quantity desired

length specified in the previous step AL_ Adjustable Shock Light Duty
40 38 mm (1 1/2-inch) bore
50 50 mm (2-inch) bore & enter quantity desired
63 64 mm (2 1/2-inch) bore AH_ Adjustable Shock Heavy Duty
& enter quantity desired
MOUNTING
NOTE: Adjustable Shock
BC3
FM _ Foot Mount, enter quantity desired Absorbers reduce usable stroke

TC_ Tube Clamps, enter number of pairs length of the actuator. Please
BEARING (Not available on MXP16) see the following pages for
N Internal Bearing MP_ Mounting Plate (includes T-Nuts) required stroke adder.
S Solid Bearing for MXP16 ONLY N Internal Bearing......pg. MXP_25
FL Floating Mount S Solid Bearing.........pg. MXP_30
BC4
P Profiled Rail
NOTE: Floating Mount is not available with P Profiled Rail...........pg. MXP_35
"P" Profiled Rail NOTE: Floating Mount is not
NOTE: Shock Absorbers are not available available with Shock Absorbers
PORTING with Floating Mount
TP Metric Taper (Rc/BST), Dual-end
LS
GP Metric Parallel (ISO-G/BSP), Dual-end

NP NPT, Dual-end SWITCHES
ST Single-end, Metric Taper
RY_ Reed Switch (Normally Open) with
SG Single-end, Metric Parallel 5-meter lead, & enter quantity desired
SN
MG
Single-end, NPT RK_ Reed Switch (Normally Open) with

5-meter lead/QD, & quantity
Single End Porting ST SG SN is not
NY_ Reed Switch (Normally Closed) with
available for MXP16
5-meter lead, & quantity
Metric Taper Porting TP is not available NK_ Reed Switch (Normally Closed) with
for MXP16 5-meter lead/QD, & quantity
CC
TY_ Solid State Switch PNP (Normally Open)

w/ 5-meter lead, & quantity
STROKE LENGTH & MOUNTING TYPE TK_ Solid State Switch PNP (Normally Open) VISIT www.tolomatic.com/
w/ 5-meter lead/QD, & quantity mxp FOR COMPLETE, UP-TO-
SK_ _ _ ._ _ _ Stroke, enter desired stroke KY_ Solid State Switch NPN (Normally Open)
DATE INFORMATION
PB
length in inches w/ 5-meter lead, & quantity

KK_ Solid State Switch NPN (Normally Open)
SM_ _ _ _ _ ._ _ _ Stroke, enter desired stroke w/ 5-meter lead/QD, & quantity
length in millimeters
PY_ Solid State Switch PNP (Normally Closed) Not all codes listed are compatible
NOTE: Actuator mounting threads and w/ 5-meter lead, & quantity
with all options.
mounting fasteners will be either
ENGR
PK_ Solid State Switch PNP (Normally Closed) Call Tolomatic to determine available
inch or metric; depending on how w/ 5-meter lead/QD, & quantity
stroke length is indicated options and accessories based on
HY_ Solid State Switch NPN (Normally Closed) your application requirements.
SK=inch mounting w/ 5-meter lead, & quantity
HK_ Solid State Switch NPN (Normally Closed)
SM= metric mounting w/ 5-meter lead/QD, & quantity
MXP_ 44 1.800.328.2174
BC2 SOLID BEARING
ABT
RODLESS CYLINDER
MXP
BC2
BC3
BC4
LS
MG
CONTENTS
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_2
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_4
Carrier Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_5
CC
BC205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_6
BC210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_8
BC212 & 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_10
BC220 & 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_12 PB
Auxiliary Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_14
Tube Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_16
Foot Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_17
ENGR
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_20
Application Data Worksheet . . . . . . BC2_24
Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_25
Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_27
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_28
BC2 BAND CYLINDER Endurance Technology features are
ABT
The BC2 is the direct descendent of the industry’s first pneumatic rodless cylinder, manufactured by Tolomatic, the number one rodless
supplier. Featuring durable stainless steel bands, field replaceable engineered bearings and a large carrier mounting pattern the BC2 is
a great solution for applications that require increased Mx bending moment capacity. Built-to-order in stroke lengths up to 350 inches.
MXP
FORMED STEEL PISTON BRACKET

• Provides maximum strength at
major stress points
• Heat treated carbon steel
withstands the toughest
BC2
dynamic forces
• Strongest bracket design in the
industry assures long life with
less maintenance
BC3
BC4
LS
MG
STAINLESS STEEL SEALING BAND SYSTEM

• Fatigue resistant
stainless steel bands
are specifically made to
CC
FORMED END CAP provide longer life and

WIPER SEAL will not elongate, like
• Keeps contaminants from elastomers
ADJUSTABLE
CUSHIONS entering the sealing area • Outer band keeps
• Protects internal out contaminants for
PB
• Adjustable cushions extended performance

are standard, not components
optional • Reduces maintenance while • Inner band provides
increasing productivity a smooth surface
• Easy screw adjustment for less seal wear
for end-of-stroke
ENGR
deceleration
• Protects actuator and
load from damage
BC2_2 1-800-328-2174
TOLOMATIC… THE RODLESS CYLINDER LEADER
ABT
3-PORTED HEADS
• Standard feature
• Simplifies air connections
MXP
BC2
RIGID BLACK-
ANODIZED EXTRUDED
ALUMINUM TUBE
• Stronger, stiffer tube retains
tolerance specs when chamber
BC3
is pressurized
• Keeps sealing band in place
for maximized air efficiency
• Tube supports are minimized
• Solid structural support
BC4
provides durability and long life
ADJUSTABLE CARRIER BRACKET performance
• 2-bolt adjustment
instead of a series
of set screws
OPTIONS
LS
• Easy to set tension
for freer running or AUXILIARY CARRIER
stiffer systems • Substantially higher load capacity
• Minimizes free play • Substantially higher bending moment capacity
while maintaining a
MG
higher level of load
guidance FLOATING MOUNT
• Compensates for non-parallelism between band
cylinder and externally guided load
TUBE SUPPORT MOUNTS
CC
• Used for intermediate support
LOAD-BEARING CARRIER DESIGN FOOT MOUNTS

• For end mounting of band cylinder
• Load and piston are
independent - piston floats, SHOCK ABSORBERS
resulting in less friction and
PB
• Smooth deceleration
longer seal life • Allows increased operating speed
• Engineered resin load bearings • Self-compensates for load or speed changes
offer consistently low friction • Minimizes impact load to equipment
and long wear • Higher equipment productivity
ENGR
• Adjustable position shocks available
SWITCHES
• Available in Reed, Hall-effect and Triac
• 15ft. cable with flying leads; available with quick-
disconnect couplers
BC2 Solid Bearing Rodless Cylinder
PERFORMANCE
BC2 BENDING MOMENTS AND LOAD, ALL SIZES
ABT
STANDARD ACTUATOR
BENDING MOMENTS
1800
1100
MXP
My Mx Mz MAX. LOAD(Fz)
500 56.5 400 181
350 159
400 45.2
300 136
NEWTON-METERS
BC2
INCH-POUNDS
KILOGRAMS
250 113
POUNDS
300 33.9
200 91
200 22.6 150 68

BC3
100 45
100 11.3
50 23
0 0 0 0
BC4
BC205
BC210
BC212
BC215
BC220
BC225
BC205
BC210
BC212
BC215
BC220
BC225
BC205
BC210
BC212
BC215
BC220
BC225
BC205
BC210
BC212
BC215
BC220
BC225
AUXILIARY CARRIER OPTION
BENDING MOMENTS
LS
MAX. LOAD(Fz)
My* Mx Mz* 800 363
4500 508.5
4000 452.0 700 318
3500 395.5 600 272
NEWTON-METERS
MG
INCH-POUNDS
KILOGRAMS
3000 339.0 500 227
POUNDS
2500 282.5
400 181
2000 226.0
300 136
CC
1500 169.5
200 91
1000 113.0
500 100 45
56.5
0 0 0 0
PB
BC210DO/DW
BC212DO/DW
BC215DO/DW
BC220DO/DW
BC225DO/DW
BC210DO/DW
BC212DO/DW
BC215DO/DW
BC220DO/DW
BC225DO/DW
BC210DO/DW
BC212DO/DW
BC215DO/DW
BC220DO/DW
BC225DO/DW
BC210DO/DW
BC212DO/DW
BC215DO/DW
BC220DO/DW
BC225DO/DW
ENGR
*Auxiliary carrier bending moments indicated are at minimum center to center distance. Additional My + Mz load
capacity can be obtained by increasing “D” dimension. Refer to auxiliary carrier data on page BC2_14.
BC2_4 1-800-328-2174
GUIDELINES
BC2 THEORETICAL FORCE vs PRESSURE BC2 CARRIER BRACKET
BOLT ADJUSTMENT
PRESSURE (bars)
ABT
1.4
2.8
4.2
5.6
6.9
500 227
MXP
BC2
400 5 181
BC22
BC3
FORCE (kilograms)
300 136
BC4
FORCE (pounds)
BC2 carrier bracket adjustment bolts should

be adjusted to suit each individual application,
depending on the degree of rigidity required. A good
starting point is to tighten the nut on the bolt until
20
there is no lateral movement of the bolt. Then, equally
LS
tighten each nut on the carrier bolt while moving
BC2
the carrier by hand along the length of the stroke.

When all lateral play in the carrier is eliminated and
200 91 free movement along the length of the stroke is
maintained, your carrier bracket is adjusted properly.
MG
Some applications may require fine tuning of this
adjustment to gain more lateral play or a higher
degree of rigidity. In demanding applications, carrier
adjustments should be done periodically.
15
2
BC
CC
100 2 45
21
BC
10
PB
2
BC
BC205 0
ENGR
0
20
40
60
80
100
PRESSURE (PSI)
PERFORMANCE
BC205 THEORETICAL FORCE vs PRESSURE
PRESSURE (bar)
ABT
6.9
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.4
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.2
.7
20 9.1
18 8.2
MXP
16 7.3
14 6.4
FORCE (lbs)
12 5.4
FORCE (kg)
10 4.5
BC2
BC205 OPTIONS Page 8 3.6

Floating Mount BC2_18
Foot Mount BC2_17 6 2.7
Switches BC2_20
4 1.8
BC3
Tube Supports BC2_16

MORE INFORMATION Page 2 .9
Application Guidelines BC2_26
Ordering BC2_28 0 0
Selection BC2_25 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
BC4
PRESSURE (PSI)
BUMPER DAMPENING TUBE SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS

LS
LOAD (kg) Max Distance Between Supports (mm) “L”

1219.2
1473.2
304.8
609.6
914.4
1.4
2.3
.5
1.8
.9
0
MG
50 1.3
40 1.0
FINAL VELOCITY (meters/sec)
30 .80 Maximum Allowable Load

5 2.3
20 .50
LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
LOAD WEIGHT (kg)

15 .30
.25
4 1.8
10
CC
9 8 .23
7 .20 .18
6 .15 3 1.4
5 .13
4 .10
3 .08 2 .9
2 .05
PB
1 .5
1 .03
2 4 0 0
1 3 5 0 12 24 36 48 58
ENGR
LOAD (lbs) Max Distance Between Supports (in) “L”

W
L L
BC2_6 1-800-328-2174
BC205 Solid Bearing Rodless Cylinder 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com
DIMENSIONS Always use configurated CAD solid model

to determine critical dimensions
U.S. Standard Metric

C A 0.97 24.6
L J HH
I K D B 0.48 12.3
C 3.00 76.2
ABT
D 1.50 38.1
A E 0.36 9.1
B F 0.25 6.35
G 0.49 12.4
V I 0.45 11.45
MXP
J 0.70 17.8
K 0.35 8.9
EE L 0.90 22.9
TOLOMATIC
N 1.55 39.4
Q 1.09 27.7
FF S #10-32 UNF M5
BC2
Q DD T 4.00 101.6
U 2.00 50.8
JJ 2x #6-32 UNC
AA V M3 x 9.7 DEEP
x .38 DEEP
BB 2.60 @ 80-100 PSI 66.0 @ 80-100 PSI
BC3
X* 2.66 @ 40-80 PSI 67.6 @ 40-80 PSI
T 2.71 @ 0-40 PSI 68.8 @ 0-40 PSI
U S AA 0.33 8.4
F BB 0.66 16.8
DD 0.48 12.2
4x #6-32UNC
BC4
N EE
x .25 DEEP
M3 x 6.4 DEEP
E G FF 1.55 39.4
HH 0.50 12.7
JJ 0.17 4.3
X STROKE X INCHES MILLIMETERS
LS
STROKE + 2X
MG
SPECIFICATIONS
BC205 BENDING MOMENTS AND LOAD
CC
ORDER BORE MAX. BENDING MOMENT MAX. LOAD
CODE SIZE My Mx Mz Fz
U.S. 0.50 in 9.0 in-lbs 2.0 in-lbs 3.0 in-lbs 5.0 lbs
Metric 12 mm 1.01 N-m 0.22 N-m 0.33 N-m 2.27 kg PB
WEIGHT
ENGR
MAX. STROKE MAX. TEMPERATURE

BORE SIZE
BASE PER UNIT OF STOKE LENGTH* PRESSURE RANGE
U.S. 0.50 in 0.38 lb 0.036 lb/in 171 in 100 PSI 20° to 140° F
Metric 12 mm 0.169 kg 0.0164 kg/mm 4343 mm 6.895 bar -7° to 60° C
*For longer strokes, alternate materials, mounting and/or fasteners – consult Tolomatic
PERFORMANCE
BC210
THEORETICAL
THEORETICALFORCE
FORCE VS. PRESSURE
vs PRESSURE
PRESSURE (bar)
ABT
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.4
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.2
6.9
.7
80 36.3
70 31.7
MXP
60 27.2
50 22.7
FORCE (lbs)
FORCE (kg)
BC2
40 18.1
BC210 OPTIONS Page
Auxiliary Carrier BC2_14 30 16.6
Floating Mount BC2_18
Foot Mount BC2_17 20 9.1
BC3
Shock Absorbers BC2_22

Switches BC2_20 10 4.5
MORE INFORMATION Page 0 0
Application Guidelines BC2_26 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Ordering BC2_28 PRESSURE (PSI)
BC4
Selection BC2_25
TUBE SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS

CUSHION DATA
LS
Max Distance Between Supports (mm) “L”

LOAD (kg)
1219.2
2133.6
2438.4
2743.2
1828.8
609.6
304.8
914.4
1524
18.1
27.2
36.3
40.8 45.4
1.4
2.3
3.2
4.1
9.1
.5
60 27.2
13.6
22.7
31.7
Maximum Allowable Load

1.8
2.7
3.6
4.5
.9
100 2.5
MG
90 2.3 55 24.9
80 2.0 1.8
70 60 1.5 50 22.7
50 1.3
40 1.0 45 20.4
LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
LOAD WEIGHT (kg)

30 .7
40 18.1
20 .5
CC
35 15.9
10 9 .25 30 13.6
8 .23 .20
7 .18 25 11.3
6 .15
5 .13
4 .10 20 9.1
3 .08
PB
15 6.8
2 .05
10 4.5
1 .03 5 2.3
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 0 0
ENGR
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80 100 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108
LOAD (lbs) Max Distance Between Supports (in) “L”
L L
BC2_8 1-800-328-2174
BC210 Solid Bearing Rodless Cylinder 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com

U.S. Standard Metric

C A 1.58 40.1
D
E B 0.79 20.1
I J C 3.15 80.0
F
ABT
D 1.57 40.0
B E 1.00 25.4
A F 0.50 12.7
G 0.65 16.5
JJ H 1.30 33.0
Z V GH
MXP
EE I 1.09 27.7
TOLOMATIC
J 2.18 55.4
NN GG N 1.62 41.2
LOMA
DD Q REF O 1.88 47.7
TIC
TO
CC
P 1.20 30.5
Q 1.64 41.5
BC2
OO
AA R 0.68 17.3
BB TP 1/8 BSPT(3)
S 1/8 NPT (3)
T GP 1/8 BSPP(3)
U T 4.75 120.7
PP CUSHION STROKE
LENGTH U 2.37 60.2
BC3
1/4-20 UNC X .25
GG N P V M6 X 6 DEEP
DEEP
REF O Q
R S X 3.94 100.1
MM 10-32 UNC X .25
Z M6 X 6 DEEP
DEEP
X STROKE X
AA 0.55 14.0
BC4
STROKE + 2X BB 1.10 27.9
CC 0.55 14.0
OPTIONAL 4th PORT DD 1.10 27.9
MM LOCATION EE 10-24 X .43 DEEP M5 X 11.0 DEEP
GG 2.30 58.4
LS
B JJ 1.00 25.4
MM 0.55 14.0
NN 1.50 38.1
OO 0.18 4.7
SPECIFICATIONS PP 0.68 17.3
INCHES MILLIMETERS
MG
MAX.
BORE MAX. BENDING MOMENT
LOAD
SIZE
My Mx Mz Fz
CC
U.S. 1.00 in 100 in-lbs 55 in-lbs 30 in-lbs 60 lbs
Metric 25 mm 11.29 N-m 6.21 N-m 3.39 N-m 27.21 kg
PB
WEIGHT MAX. STROKE MAX. TEMPERATURE

BORE SIZE
ENGR

U.S. 1.00 in 2.26 lbs 0.14 lbs/in 350 in 100 PSI 20° to 140° F
BC212 & BC215 Solid Bearing Rodless Cylinder
PERFORMANCE BC212
BC215
BC212 & BC215 THEORETICAL FORCE vs PRESSURE
PRESSURE (bar)
ABT
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.4
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.2
6.9
90.7
.7
200
79.4
175
68.0
MXP
150
56.7
FORCE (lbs)
FORCE (kg)
125
45.4
100
BC2
34.0
75
22.7
50
11.3
BC3
25
BC212 & BC215 OPTIONS Page
Auxiliary Carrier BC2_14 0
Floating Mount BC2_18 0
Foot Mount BC2_17 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Shock Absorbers BC2_22 PRESSURE (PSI)
BC4
Switches BC2_20
MORE INFORMATION Page TUBE SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS
Ordering BC2_28
Selection BC2_25 Max Distance Between Supports (mm) “L”
LS
1219.2
1524.0
1828.8
2133.6
2438.4
2743.2
3048.0
304.8
609.6
914.4
CUSHION DATA 180 Maximum Allowable Load 81.6
LOAD (kg) 160 72.6

MG
18.1
27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
.5
140 63.5
1.81
13.6
22.7
90.7
4.5
.9
100 2.5 120 Maximum Allowable Load 54.4

LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
80 90 2.3 2.0
LOAD WEIGHT (kg)

60 70 1.8 1.5
1.3 100 45.4

CC
50
1.0
40
30 .8 80 36.3
20 .5
60 27.2
10 .3
9 .23 40 18.1
PB
7 8 .20 .18
6 .15 .13
5 20 9.1
4 .10
3 .08 0 0
2 .05 0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
ENGR
Max Distance Between Supports (in) “L”

1 .03
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 200
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80 100 W
LOAD (lbs)
L L
BC2_10 1-800-328-2174
BC212 & BC215 Solid Bearing Rodless Cylinder 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com

U.S.12 U.S.15 Metric12 Metric15

C A 2.18 2.85 55.4 72.4
D
E B 1.09 1.42 27.7 36.1
I J C 3.20 4.25 81.3 108.0
ABT
F
D 1.60 2.12 40.6 53.8
E 1.00 1.00 25.4 25.4
B
A F 0.50 0.50 12.7 12.7
G 0.78 0.90 19.8 22.9
H 1.56 1.80 39.6 45.7
MXP
JJ I 1.41 1.75 35.8 44.5
Z V GH J 2.82 3.50 71.6 89.0
N 1.83 2.13 46.5 54.1
T O 2.48 2.95 63.0 74.9
U PP CUSHION STROKE LENGTH P 1.25 1.51 31.0 38.4
Q 2.25 2.59 57.2 65.8
BC2
R 1.23 1.41 31.2 36.6
N
P M 1/4 M 1/4
GG 1/4 NPT 1/4 NPT BSPT(3) BSPT(3)
REF O Q S
R S (3) (3) MM 1/4 MM 1/4
BSPP(3) BSPP(3)
BC3
MM T 4.64 5.91 117.9 150.1
X STROKE X U 2.32 2.96 58.9 75.1
STROKE + 2X 5/16-18 1/4-20
M8 x 7 M8 x 10
V UNC x UNC x
DP DP
EE .31 DP .38 DP
OPTIONAL 4th PORT
X 4.87 5.91 123.7 150.1
BC4
MM LOCATION
1/4-20 5/16-18
NN
TOLOMATIC M8 x 7 M8 x 10
Z UNC x UNC x
B DP DP
Q GG .31 DP .38 DP
MA
OLO TI
DD
C
T
AA 0.71 0.91 18.0 23.1

CC OO REF BB 1.42 1.81 36.1 46.0
LS
CC 0.78 1.03 19.8 26.2
AA DD 1.42 1.81 36.1 46.0
BB 1/4-20 x 1/4-20 x M6 x 12 M6 x 12
EE
.47 DP .47 DP DP DP
SPECIFICATIONS GG 3.06 3.54 77.7 90.7
JJ 1.00 1.25 25.4 31.8
MG
BC212/15 BENDING MOMENTS AND LOAD MM 0.34 0.50 8.6 12.7
NN 1.83 2.13 46.5 54.1
MAX. OO 0.35 0.28 9.0 7.0
LOAD PP 1.10 1.29 27.9 32.7
SIZE
My Mx Mz Fz INCHES MILLIMETERS
CC
U.S.12 1.25 in 290 in-lbs 75 in-lbs 130 in-lbs 120 lbs
U.S.15 1.50 in 500 in-lbs 275 in-lbs 200 in-lbs 180 lbs
Metric12 32 mm 32.77 N-m 8.47 N-m 14.69 N-m 54.42 kg
PB
BORE WEIGHT MAX. STROKE MAX. TEMPERATURE

SIZE BASE PER UNIT OF STOKE LENGTH* PRESSURE RANGE
U.S.12 1.25 in 4.56 lbs 0.21 lbs/in 288 in 100 PSI 20° to 140° F
ENGR
Metric12 32 mm 2.068 kg 0.0036 kg/mm 7315 mm 6.895 bar -7° to 60° C
BC220 & BC225 Solid Bearing Rodless Cylinder
PERFORMANCE BC220
BC225
BC220 & BC225 THEORETICAL FORCE vs PRESSURE
PRESSURE (bar)
ABT
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.4
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.2
6.9
.7
600 272.2
500 226.8
MXP
400 181.4
FORCE (lbs)
FORCE (kg)
300 136.1
BC2
200 90.7
100 45.4
BC3
BC220 & BC225 OPTIONS Page

Auxiliary Carrier BC2_14 0 0
Floating Mount BC2_18 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Foot Mount BC2_17
Shock Absorbers BC2_22 PRESSURE (PSI)
BC4
Switches BC2_20
MORE INFORMATION Page TUBE SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS
Ordering BC2_28
LS
1219.2
1524.0
1828.8
2133.6
2438.4
2743.2
3048.0
3352.8
3657.6
3962.4
4267.2
304.8
609.6
914.4
0
CUSHION DATA
400 Maximum Allowable Load 181.4
LOAD (kg)
MG
350 158.7
136.1
226.8
18.1
27.2
36.3
45.4
1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
.5
181.4
13.6
22.7
31.7
40.8
90.7
300 136.1
1.8
4.5

.9
LOAD WEIGHT (kg)

LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
100 2.5
90 2.3 2.0
80
70 1.8 250 113.4
60 1.5
CC
50 1.3
1.0
40
30 .8 200 90.7
20 .5
150 68.0
10 .3
9 .23
8 .20 100 45.4
PB
7 .18
6 .15 .13
5
4 .10 50 22.7
3 .08
2 .05 0 0
0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168
ENGR
1 .03
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 200 400 Max Distance Between Supports (in) “L”
1 3 5 79 20 40 60 80 100 300 500
W
LOAD (lbs)
L L
BC2_12 1-800-328-2174
BC220 & BC225 Solid Bearing Rodless Cylinder 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com

U.S.20 U.S.25 Metric20 Metric25

C
D A 3.25 4.25 82.6 108.0
E I J B 1.62 2.13 41.1 54.1
F C 5.00 6.00 127.0 152.4
ABT
D 2.50 3.00 63.5 76.2
B E 2.50 3.00 63.5 76.2
A F 1.25 1.50 31.8 38.1
G 1.16 1.27 29.5 32.4
H 2.30 2.55 58.4 64.8
MXP
I 2.22 2.81 56.4 71.4
K
JJ V GH J 4.44 5.62 112.8 142.8
K 0.06 0.03 1.5 0.8
N 2.75 3.20 69.9 81.3
T PP CUSHION STROKE O 3.69 4.67 93.7 118.6
U LENGTH P 2.00 2.37 50.8 60.2
BC2
Q 3.38 4.37 85.9 111.0
R 1.69 2.30 42.9 58.4
N M 3/8 M 3/8
GG P
REF 3/8 NPT 3/8 NPT BSPT(3) BSPT(3)
O Q S
(3) (3) GP 3/8 GP 3/8
BC3
R S
BSPP(3) BSPP(3)
MM
T 7.37 8.86 187.2 225.0
X STROKE X U 3.68 4.43 93.5 112.5
STROKE + 2X 3/8-16 3/8-16
M10 x 11 M10 x 12
V UNC x UNC x
DP DP
.44 DP .50 DP
BC4
OPTIONAL
MM 4th PORT X 6.30 8.45 160.0 214.6
LOCATION EE
NN
TOLOMATIC AA 1.12 1.44 28.5 36.6
B TOLOMATIC
GG BB 2.25 2.88 57.2 73.2
Q CC 1.25 1.75 31.8 44.5
DD REF
CC DD 2.25 2.88 57.2 73.2
LS
OO 5/16-18 x 5/16-18 x M8 x 22 M8 x 22
EE
AA .88 DP .88 DP DP DP
BB GG 4.44 5.50 112.8 139.7
JJ 1.44 2.06 36.6 52.3
SPECIFICATIONS MM 0.69 1.00 17.5 25.4
NN 2.75 3.20 69.9 81.3
MG
BC220/25 BENDING MOMENTS AND LOAD OO 0.43 0.76 10.9 19.3
PP 1.35 1.97 34.3 50.0
MAX. INCHES MILLIMETERS
LOAD
SIZE
My Mx Mz Fz
CC
U.S.20 2.00 in 1,100 in-lbs 300 in-lbs 325 in-lbs 300 lbs
U.S.25 2.50 in 1,800 in-lbs 450 in-lbs 400 in-lbs 400 lbs
PB

ENGR
BC2 Auxiliary Carrier - 10, 12, 15, 20, 25 Sizes
PERFORMANCE
The auxiliary carrier option substantially increases load C
carrying and bending moments capacity over the standard L
single carrier models. As a general rule, the auxiliary carrier CARRIER

option is highly recommended in vertical applications (My) if
ABT
the distance from the carrier mounting surface to the load

center of gravity (CG) exceeds the overall length of the carrier.
Auxiliary carriers can be ordered with (DW) or without (DO) “D”
C
an internal piston. (Auxiliary carriers without a piston have no L
cushion on the cylinder end closest to the auxiliary carrier.)

MXP
CARRIER
NOTE: breakaway pressure will increase when using
auxiliary carrier.
BC2
BENDING MOMENTS
MOMENT LOAD vs. DISTANCE

BC3
“D” (mm)
102
127
152
178
203
229
254
279
305
330
356
381
406
432
457
483
508
533
559
584
610
635
10,000 1,130
BC4
9,000 1,017
2.50" BORE
8,000 904
7,000 791
Mya & Mza (in-lbs)
Mya & Mza (N-m)

6,000 BC 225D 2.00" BORE 678
LS
5,000 565
0DW
BC22
4,000 452
1.50" BORE
W
3,000 BC215D 339
MG
2,000 1.25" BORE 226

BC212DW
1,000 BC210DW 1.00" BORE 113
0 0
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
CC
“D” (in)
Rates were calculated with the following assumptions:
1.) Coupling between carriers is rigid. 2.) Load is equally distributed between carriers.
3.) Coupling device applies no misalignment loads to carriers.
PB
“D” MINIMUM * MAX. BENDING MOMENT MAX. LOAD

BORE SIZE
(w/o Piston) (w/ Piston) My** Mx Mz** Fz
in mm in mm in mm in-lbs N-m in-lbs N-m in-lbs N-m lbs kg
10 1.00 25 5.07 129.0 5.07 129.0 287 32.4 110 12.4 287 32.4 120 54.4
ENGR
12 1.25 32 5.17 131.0 6.85 174.0 822 92.9 150 16.9 822 92.9 240 108.9
15 1.50 40 6.46 164.0 8.07 205.0 1,453 164.1 550 62.1 1,453 164.1 360 163.3
20 2.00 50 8.10 206.0 8.10 206.0 2,430 274.6 600 67.8 2,430 274.6 600 272.2
25 2.50 63 9.62 244.0 11.04 2810.4 4,416 498.9 900 101.7 4,416 498.9 800 362.9
* “D” is distance between carriers
** Loads calculated are at minimum “D”, for substantially higher My and Mz loads increase “D” and refer to graph above
BC2_14 1-800-328-2174
BC2 Auxiliary Carrier - 10, 12, 15, 20, 25 Sizes 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com

CL CL
ABT
2A + “D” + STROKE
MXP
A “D” (Min.)
BC2
“D” MINIMUM *
BORE SIZE A
(w/o Piston) (w/ Piston)
BC3
in mm in mm in mm in mm
10 1.00 25 3.94 100.1 5.07 129.0 5.07 129.0
12 1.25 32 4.90 124.5 5.17 131.0 6.85 174.0
15 1.50 40 5.91 150.1 6.46 164.0 8.07 205.0
20 2.00 50 6.30 160.0 8.10 206.0 8.10 206.0
BC4
25 2.50 63 8.46 214.9 9.62 244.0 11.04 280.4
AUXILIARY CARRIER ASSEMBLY INFORMATION
LS
IMPORTANT INFORMATION REGARDING AUXILIARY
CARRIER PLACEMENT
When a BC2 cylinder is ordered with auxiliary carrier, it is
always placed to the right (while facing the switch mounted
or open port side) of the main carrier. This is for auxiliary
MG
ORDER CODES
DO carriers with (DW)/or without (DO) piston and for units with/
(Auxiliary Carrier without or without shock absorbers. When the auxiliary carrier is
piston) ordered without (DO) piston the carrier without piston will be
DW marked.
(Auxiliary Carrier with piston)
MAIN CARRIER AUXILIARY CARRIER
CC
ORDERING INFORMATION
When ordering, determine the minimum distance required
between carriers (dimension “D” in Auxiliary Carrier Bending
PB
Moments chart). L
C
L
C
CA
RR
IER “D CA MAIN CARRIER AUXILIARY CARRIER
” RR
IER
ENGR
Determine your working stroke and your “D” dimension,

then enter these into your configuration string. (Example:
BC215SK50.00DW15.00RT2) The configurator will calculate
the overall length of the actuator.
BC2 Tube Supports - ALL Sizes 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com
Always use configurated CAD solid model
TUBE SUPPORT
Tube supports are mounted to the BC2 band cylinder during
ORDER CODE assembly procedure. Made of black-anodized aluminum,
TS_ tube supports are designed to fit into dovetail grooves which
(_ = Number
run the length of the cylinder tube. Refer to the tube support
ABT
ordered)
graph to determine the number of tube supports required.
A
M
NOTE: Switches cannotE be mounted on the same face
of the actuator as tube supports.
PERFORMANCE
MXP
TUBE SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS B

DIMENSIONS C
05 A
1219.2
1524.0
1828.8
2133.6
2438.4
2743.2
3048.0
3352.8
3657.6
3962.4
4267.2
TOLOMATIC
304.8
609.6
914.4
M L
BC2
E
BC225 J
N H
350 158.7 B K
C
BC220
LOAD WEIGHT (Kgs.)
300 136.1
LOAD WEIGHT (Lbs.)
BC3
10, 12, 15, 20, 25 TOLOMATIC

A
A 10, 12, 15, 20
250 113.4 TOLOMATIC
L TOLOMATIC
200 90.7 J L
BC215 L
C
N H C
150 68.0 B
BC4
K B J
BC212 J
100 45.4 (CARRIER NOT SHOWN) H K
BC210 (CARRIER NOT SHOWN) H K
D
50 22.7 D
BC205 10, 12, 15, 20, 25 25
0 0
LS
0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 TOLOMATIC

TOLOMATIC
Max Distance Between Supports (in.) “L” L

L
W
J
J
MG
G F H K
G F H K
L L E
E
U.S. BORE
Standard SIZE AØ B C D E F G H J K L M N
05 0.50 0.18 0.75 1.50 – 0.50 – – 0.18 0.54 1.88 1.60 0.65 0.50
CC
10 1.00 0.22 1.00 2.00 3.00 3.50 2.50 0.50 0.25 0.41 2.36 2.43 – –
12 1.25 0.27 1.31 2.63 4.50 5.00 4.00 0.50 0.40 0.81 3.12 3.23 – –
15 1.50 0.27 1.50 3.00 4.50 5.00 4.00 0.50 0.31 0.70 3.50 3.62 – –
20 2.00 0.41 1.875 3.750 5.75 6.38 5.00 0.69 0.375 0.87 4.44 4.53 – –
25 2.50 0.42 2.563 5.125 7.75 8.50 7.00 0.75 0.437 1.17 6.00 5.56 – –
PB
Dimensions in inches
BORE
Metric
SIZE AØ B C D E F G H J K L M N
05 12 4.6 19.1 38.1 – 12.7 – – 4.6 13.7 47.7 40.6 16.5 12.7
ENGR
10 25 5.6 25.4 50.8 76.2 88.9 63.5 12.7 6.3 10.4 59.9 61.7 – –
12 32 6.7 33.3 66.8 114.3 127.0 101.6 12.7 10.2 20.6 79.2 82.0 – –
15 40 6.7 38.1 76.2 114.3 127.0 101.6 12.7 7.9 17.8 88.9 91.9 – –
20 50 10.5 47.6 95.3 146.1 162.1 127.0 17.5 9.5 22.1 112.8 115.1 – –
25 63 10.7 65.1 130.2 196.9 215.9 177.8 19.1 11.1 29.7 152.4 141.2 – –
Dimensions in millimeters
BC2_16 1-800-328-2174
BC2 Foot Mounts - ALL Sizes 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com
FOOT MOUNT
For mounting other than flush. Foot mounts may be specified
ORDER CODE on one or both ends of the cylinder.
FM_
(_ = Number
ABT
ordered)
MXP
DIMENSIONS 15
05
BC2
I
H TOLOMATIC
F
J A
P P A
E O
MA
OLO TI
C
O
T
E
BC3
G
J B
N Q N R
R Q
M M
L L D
K K C
BC4
10, 12 20,25
I
I H
TOLOMATIC
H F
LS
TOLOMATIC
F TOLOMATIC
J Q A
P L
O M A T
O E A P E
T O
I C
O
G G
Q B
N B N J R
M
M
MG
L D
L D K C
C R
K
U.S. BORE
Std. SIZE A B C D E F G H I JØ K L M N O P Q R
05 0.50 1.62 – – – 0.87 – – – – 0.180 0.97 0.49 0.47 0.24 0.70 0.40 0.06 0.06
CC
10 1.00 2.36/2.73 0.86/1.23 1.10 0.55 1.10 1.50 0.55 #10-24 x .43 DP 1.58 0.260 1.60 0.80 1.06 0.53 1.00 0.63 0.18 0.14
12 1.25 3.21/3.71 1.38/1.88 1.42 0.71 1.42 1.83 0.78 1/4-20 x .47 DP 2.18 0.328 2.09 1.05 1.42 0.71 0.84 0.49 0.35 0.13
15 1.50 3.69 1.56 1.82 0.91 1.81 2.13 1.03 1/4-20 x .47 DP 2.85 0.328 2.83 1.42 1.18 0.59 1.00 0.50 0.25 1.00
20 2.00 4.53 1.78 2.25 1.13 2.25 2.75 1.25 5/16-18 x 1.0 DP 3.25 0.390 3.25 1.63 1.25 0.63 1.00 0.50 0.43 0.88
25 2.50 5.65 2.45 2.88 1.44 2.88 3.20 1.75 5/16-18 x 1.0 DP 4.25 0.437 4.25 2.13 1.89 0.95 1.18 0.59 0.76 1.00
PB
BORE
Metric
SIZE A B C D E F G H I JØ K L M N O P Q R
05 12 41.1 – – – 22.1 – – – – 4.6 24.6 12.3 11.9 6.0 20.4 10.2 1.5 1.5
ENGR
10 25 59.7/69.3 21.8/31.2 27.9 14.0 27.9 38.1 14.0 M5 x 11 DP 40.1 6.6 40.6 20.3 26.9 13.5 25.4 15.9 4.7 3.4
12 32 81.5/94.2 35.1/47.8 36.1 18.0 36.1 46.5 19.8 M6 x 12 DP 55.4 8.3 53.1 26.7 36.1 18.0 21.3 12.4 9.0 3.2
15 40 93.7 39.6 46.2 23.1 46.0 54.1 26.2 M6 x 12 DP 72.4 8.3 71.9 36.1 30.0 15.0 25.4 12.7 6.0 25.4
20 50 115.1 45.7 57.2 28.7 57.2 69.9 31.8 M8 x 25 DP 82.6 9.9 82.6 41.2 31.8 16.0 25.4 12.7 10.9 22.2
25 63 143.5 62.2 73.2 35.6 73.2 81.3 44.5 M8 x 25 DP 108.0 11.1 108.0 54.1 48.0 24.1 30.0 15.0 19.3 25.4
BC2 Floating Mount Bracket - ALL Sizes 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com
FLOATING MOUNT BRACKET
For applications where a BC2 band cylinder is moving a load
that is externally guided and supported. An externally guided
load, not parallel to the BC2 band cylinder may result in
cylinder binding. The floating mount bracket compensates for
ABT
nonparallelism between the cylinder and the external guide.
(Floating mount brackets are not to be used in conjunction

with shock absorbers)
MXP
ORDER CODE
FL
BC2
DIMENSIONS
05 10
BC3
1.14 (29.0) 3.15 (80.0)

0.75 (19.1) 1.26
0.56 (14.2) #10-32 (32.0)
Ø.17 (4.3) [2]
0.38 (9.6)
0.70 (17.8)
1.81 C 1.31 2.18
BC4
(46.0) L (33.3) (55.5)

0.35 (8.9)
0.63 (16.0) Ø .22 (5.6)
0.29 (7.4) 0.15
LS
2.00 (50.8) (3.8) 4.74 (120.4)

4.00 (101.6)
1.14 (29.0) 1.99

0.05 (1.3) 0.05 (1.3) (50.5)
MG
0.57 (14.5) C
L
2.32 TOLOMATIC 0.32 (8.1)

(58.9)
CC
2.03
(51.6)
PB
Dimensions in inches (parenthesis indicate dimensions in millimeters)

ENGR
BC2_18 1-800-328-2174
www.tolomatic.com
DIMENSIONS
ABT
12 3.20 (81.3) 15 4.25 (108.0)
2.76 3.54
#1/4-20 (70.1) 5/16-18 (89.9)
MXP
2.22 C 1.56 2.82 2.95 2.17
(56.4) L (39.6) (71.6) C 1.80 3.50
(74.9) (55.1) L (45.7) (88.9)
1.97 (50.0) Ø .28 (7.1)

0.15 2.95 Ø .28 (7.1)
BC2
(3.8) 4.64 (117.9) (74.9)
0.23
(5.8) 5.91 (150.1)
2.20
(55.9)
2.95
BC3
C (75.0)
L
C
L
0.32 (8.1)
0.44 (11.3)
BC4
LS
20 25
5.00 (127.0) 6.00 (152.4)
Ø .36 3.94 4.72
3/8-16 (119.9)
(9.1) (100.1)
MG
3.24 C 2.31 4.44 3.87 2.76 C 2.55 5.62
(82.3) L (58.7) (112.7) (98.3) (70.1) L (64.8) (142.8)
3.15 3.94
CC
3/8-16 Ø .34 (8.7)
(80.0) (100.1)
0.25 0.23
(6.4) 7.37(187.2) (5.8) 8.86 (225.0)
3.77 4.02
PB
(95.8) (102.1)
C C
L L
ENGR
0.63 (15.9) 0.63 (15.9)
BC2 Switches - ALL Sizes
SWITCHES
DC REED, AC REED (TRIAC)
There are 10 sensing choices: DC reed, form A (open) or form C (open or
AND HALL-EFFECT closed); AC reed (Triac, open); Hall-effect, sourcing, PNP (open); Hall-effect,
sinking, NPN (open); each with either flying leads or QD (quick disconnect) .
Commonly used to send analog signals to PLC (programmable logic
ABT
controllers), TLL, CMOS circuit or other controller device . These switches are
activated by the actuator’s magnet .
QUICK-DISCONNECT
COUPLER - MALE END
Switches contain reverse polarity protection . QD cables are shielded; shield
should be terminated at flying lead end .
MXP
QUICK-DISCONNECT If necessary to remove factory installed switches, be sure to reinstall on the

COUPLER - FEMALE END
same of side of actuator with scored face of switch toward internal magnet .
SPECIFICATIONS
BC2
REED DC REED AC HALL-EFFECT DC

ORDER CODE RT RM BT BM CT CM TT TM KT KM
LEAD 5m QD* 5m QD* 5m QD* 5m QD* 5m QD*
CABLE SHIELDING Unshielded Shielded† Unshielded Shielded† Unshielded Shielded† Unshielded Shielded† Unshielded Shielded†
PNP (Sourcing) Normally
BC3
SWITCHING LOGIC "A" Normally Open "C" Normally Open or Closed Triac Normally Open NPN (Sinking) Normally Open
Open
MECHANICAL CONTACTS Single-Pole Single-Throw Single-Pole Double-Throw Single-Pole Single-Throw NO, These Are Solid State Components
COIL DIRECT Yes Yes Yes —
POWER LED None None None
None None
SIGNAL LED Red Red Red
BC4
OPERATING VOLTAGE 200 Vdc max . 120 Vdc max . 120 Vac max . 5 - 25 Vdc
OUTPUT RATING — — 25 Vdc, 200mA dc
0 .6 msec max . 0 .7 msec max .
OPERATING TIME — < 10 micro sec .
(including bounce) (including bounce)
OPERATING TEMPERATURE -40°F [-40°C] to 158°F [70°C] 0°F [-18°C] to 150°F [66°C]
RELEASE TIME 1 .0 msec . max . — —
LS
ON TRIP POINT — — 150 Gauss maximum

OFF TRIP POINT — — 40 Gauss minimum
**POWER RATING (WATTS) 10 .0 § 3 .0 § § 10 .0 5 .0
VOLTAGE DROP 2 .6 V typical at 100 mA NA — —
RESISTANCE 0 .1 Ω Initial (Max .) — —
MG
1 Amp at 0 .5 Amp at
CURRENT CONSUMPTION — 200 mA at 25 Vdc
86°F [30°C] 140°F [60°C]
FREQUENCY — 47 - 63 Hz —
CABLE MIN. STATIC 0 .630" [16mm]
BEND
DYNAMIC Not Recommended
CC
RADIUS
CAUTION: DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN SWITCH HARDWARE WHEN INSTALLING!

** WARNING: Do not exceed power rating (Watt = Voltage X Amperage) . Permanent damage to sensor will occur .
PB
*QD = Quick Disconnect; Male coupler is located 6" [152mm} from sensor,
Female coupler to flying lead (part #2503-1025) distance is 197" [5m] also see Cable Shielding specification above
REPLACEMENT OF QD SWITCHES MANUFACTURED BEFORE JULY 1, 1997: It will be necessary to replace or rewire the female end coupler .
BLUE BROWN
+
BROWN
ENGR
BLUE
CURRENT
Quick disconnect
Wiring
- OLD
Quick disconnect
Wiring
SIGNAL - Reed Switch Life Expectancy: Up to
200,000,000 cycles (depending on load cur-
rent, duty cycle and environmental conditions)
+
BLACK BLACK
SIGNAL
†
Shielded from the female quick disconnect coupler to the flying leads . Shield should be terminated at flying lead end .
§
Maximum current 500mA (not to exceed 10VA) Refer to Temperature vs . Current graph and Voltage Derating graph
§§
BC2_20 1-800-328-2174
PERFORMANCE
TEMP. vs CURRENT, DC REED TEMP. vs CURRENT, AC REED VOLTAGE DERATING, DC REED
600 1000 200
TRIAC
LOAD CURRENT (mA)
VOLTAGE A.C. or D.C.

LOAD CURENT (mA)
500 800
400
REED FORM A 150
600
ABT
300
400 100
200 REED FORM C
RE
200 50 D REED FO
FOR
E
100
MC RM A
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0
OPERATING TEMPERATURE ( F) OPERATING TEMPERATURE ( F) 0 100 200 300 400 500
CURRENT D.C (mA)
MXP
WIRING DIAGRAMS INSTALLATION INFORMATION
R T & R M DC REED, FORM A C T & C M AC REED, TRIAC
(+) BROWN
AC
THE NOTCHED
(+) REED FACE OF THE
BC2
LOAD COM
BLUE SWITCH 120Vac MOV SWITCH INDICATES
(-) Max. LOAD THE SENSING
(-)
SURFACE AND
OR BLUE BROWN INPUT MUST FACE
(+) BROWN TOWARD THE
(+) REED MAGNET.
LOAD SWITCH TRIAC
BLUE
BC3
(-) SWITCH
(-)
B T & B M DC REED, FORM C

COMMON BROWN
THE NOTCHED
BLACK REED GROOVE IN THE
BC4
NORMALLY CLOSED SWITCH
BLUE ACTUATOR
NORMALLY OPEN INDICATES THE
GROOVE TO
T T & T M HALL-EFFECT, SOURCING, PNP K T & K M HALL-EFFECT, SINKING, NPN INSTALL THE
HALL-EFFECT SWITCHES ARE NOT AVAILABLE SWITCH.
FOR CONTACT
BROWN(+) (+) TOLOMATIC IF
BROWN(+) (+)
BC205 SWITCHES ARE
LS
HALL-EFFECT BLACK
SOURCING HALL-EFFECT BLACK REQUIRED ON
SWITCH SINKING
BLUE (-) SWITCH BLUE (-) LOAD
Some actuators may require switch mounting ANOTHER SIDE OF
(-) (-) ACTUATOR .
LOAD
on a specific side of the assembly.
Call Tolomatic for details.
MG
DIMENSIONS SIZE BORE A B C D E F G
BC210, BC212, BC215 05 0.50 0.445 0.157 0.518 0.219 0.315 1.25 1.45
BC215, BC220, BC225 10 1.00 0.383 0.011 0.448 0.219 0.315 1.25 1.45
BC205
CC
12 1.25 0.541 0.169 0.448 0.219 0.315 1.25 1.45
SWITCH DIMENSIONS
15 1.50 0.548 0.161 0.432 0.219 0.315 1.25 1.45
D 20 2.00 0.732 0.344 0.448 0.219 0.315 1.25 1.45
A 25 2.50 1.082 0.710 0.432 0.219 0.315 1.25 1.45
A E Dimensions in inches
PB
B C
B C G F
SIZE BORE A B C D E F G
05 12 11.30 3.99 13.16 5.56 8.00 31.75 36.83
ENGR
10 25 9.73 0.28 11.38 5.56 8.00 31.75 36.83

12 32 13.74 4.29 11.38 5.56 8.00 31.75 36.83
15 40 13.92 4.09 10.97 5.56 8.00 31.75 36.83
20 50 18.59 8.74 11.38 5.56 8.00 31.75 36.83
25 63 27.48 18.03 10.97 5.56 8.00 31.75 36.83
BC2 Shock Absorbers - 10, 12, 15, 20, 25 Sizes 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com
SHOCK ABSORBERS Rodless cylinders with standard internal cushion
offer an effective method of decelerating loads.
However, all Tolomatic rodless cylinders are capable
of carrying heavier loads at higher velocities than
ABT
the cylinder cushion can absorb. Optional shock

absorbers can be used to increase the cylinder’s life
and broaden the application range for the cylinder
model you have chosen.
Tolomatic offers two types of shock absorber
MXP
options for use with rodless cylinders. Standard

ORDER CODE ORDER CODE shock absorbers, which are positioned on the
SD_ or SH_ or SL_ AD_ or AH_ or AL_ cylinder heads for end-of-stroke deceleration and
(_ = Number (_ = Number
ordered) ordered) adjustable shock absorbers which allows the shock
to be positioned at any point along the cylinder.
BC2
Typical shock absorber life varies between 1-2 million cycles (depending on environment) appropriate preventative maintenance
should be considered in high cyclic applications.
NOTE: When 2 shock absorbers are ordered, the unit will be assembled with NO internal cushions.
BC3
NOTE: Adjustable shock absorbers will reduce stroke length. To maintain desired stroke length: when ordering increase
stroke length by the dimension in the table below for each adjustable shock absorber ordered.
10 12 15 20 25
0.75" [19.0mm] 0.03" [0.7mm] 0.35" [8.9mm] 0.85" [21.6mm] 0.85" [21.6mm]
BC4
CAUTION: In applications which result in a load bending moment at deceleration, care should be taken to decelerate the
load rather than the carrier of the band cylinder.
DIMENSIONS
STANDARD SHOCK ADJUSTABLE POSITION SHOCK
LS
CL
C A G
F
MG
E A
B
C B
CC
SIZE BORE A B C (Thread Size) SIZE BORE A B C (Thread Size) D E F G

10 1.00 2.35 2.50 9/16-18 UNF-2B 10 1.00 3.68 2.45 9/16-18 UNF-2B 2.00 0.15 2.59 0.21
12 1.25 2.23 3.50 3/4-16 UNF-2B 12 1.25 4.39 3.19 3/4-16 UNF-2B 2.25 0.13 2.82 0
15 1.50 2.23 4.00 3/4-16 UNF-2B 15 1.50 4.39 3.62 3/4-16 UNF-2B 2.50 0.05 3.50 0
PB
20 2.00 2.62 4.70 1-12 UNF-2B 20 2.00 4.75 4.60 1-12 UNF-2B 3.13 0.16 4.44 0
25 2.50 1.17 6.00 1-12 UNF-2B 25 2.50 4.75 5.63 1-12 UNF-2B 4.47 0.17 5.63 0
Dimensions in inches Dimensions in inches
SIZE BORE A B C (Thread Size) D E F G

ENGR
SIZE BORE A B C (Thread Size)

10 25 59.7 63.5 M14x1.5-6g 10 25 93.5 62.2 M14x1.5-6g 50.8 3.8 65.8 5.3
12 32 56.6 88.9 M20x1.5-6g 12 32 111.5 81.0 M20x1.5-6g 57.2 3.3 71.6 0
15 40 56.6 101.6 M20x1.5-6g 15 40 111.5 92.0 M20x1.5-6g 63.5 1.3 88.9 0
20 50 66.5 119.4 M25x1.5-6g 20 50 120.7 116.8 M25x1.5-6g 79.5 4.1 112.8 0
25 63 29.7 152.4 M25x1.5-6g 25 63 120.7 143.0 M25x1.5-6g 113.5 4.3 143.0 0
Dimensions in millimeters Dimensions in millimeters
BC2_22 1-800-328-2174
BC2 Shock Absorbers - 10, 12, 15, 20, 25 Sizes: PERFORMANCE
VELOCITY vs LOAD
BC210 BC212
LOAD (kg) LOAD (kg)
18.1
27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
18.1
27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
.5
.5
13.6
22.7
90.7
13.6
22.7
ABT
1.8
4.5
1.8
4.5
.9
100
90 .9 2.5
2.3 200 5.1
80 2.0
70 1.8
60 1.5

100 2.5

50 1.3
80 90 2.3 2.0

40 1.0
60 70 1.8
30 .8 50 1.3 1.5
20 40 1.0
.5 .8
30
MXP
20 .5
10 .23 .25
9
8 7 .20
.18 10 .3
6 .15 9 8 .23
5 .13 7 .20 .18
4 .10 6 .15
3 .08 5 .13
4 .10
2 .05 3 .08
2 .05
BC2
1 .03
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 1 .03
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80 100 2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 200
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80100
LOAD (lbs)
LOAD (lbs)
BC3
BC215 BC220
LOAD (kg) LOAD (kg)
18.1
22.7 27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
136.1
1.4
2.3
3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
18.1
22.7 27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
.5
1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
.5
13.6
90.7
1.8
2.7
4.5
13.6
90.7
.9
1.8
4.5
.9
200 5.1
BC4
200 5.1

100 2.5
100 2.5
80 90 2.3 2.0 80 90 2.3 2.0
60 70 1.8 1.5 60 70 1.8 1.5
50 1.3 50 1.3
40 1.0 40 1.0
30 .8 30 .80
20 .5 20 .50
LS
9 10
.25 9 10 .25 .23
7 8 .20 .23 7 8 .20 .18
6 .15 .18 5 6 .15 .13
5 .13 .10
4 .10 4
.08 3 .08
3
.05 2 .05
2
1 .03
1 .03
MG
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 200
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 200
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80100 1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80100 300
LOAD (lbs) LOAD (lbs)
BC225
CC
LOAD (kg) LIGHT DUTY (Light load/High velocity)
136.1
226.8
18.1
27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
HEAVY DUTY (Heavy load/Low velocity)

1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
.5
181.4
13.6
22.7
90.7
1.8
4.5
.9
200 5.1
AIR CUSHION DATA
100 2.5
80 90 2.3 2.0
PB
60 70 1.8 1.5
50 1.3
40
30 .80
1.0 NOTE: If final (or impact) velocity cannot be calculated
20 .50 directly, a reasonable guideline to use is 2 x average velocity.
9 10 .25 .23
7 8 .20 .18
5 6 .15 .13
ENGR
4 .10
3 .08
2 .05
1 .03
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 200 400
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80100 300 500
LOAD (lbs)
Application Data Worksheet
STROKE LENGTH _____________ FORCES APPLIED Fz ______

inch (SK ) millimeters TO CARRIER Fy ______
ABT

AVAILABLE AIR PRESSURE _____
PSI bar BENDING MOMENTS Mx ______
(U.S. Standard) (Metric) APPLIED TO CARRIER My ______
MXP

lbf N
FINAL VELOCITY _____________
LOAD ______________________ in/sec mm/sec
lb kg
BC2

MOVE TIME sec. _____________
LOAD CENTER OF dx ______ NO. OF CYCLES _____________
TO CARRIER CENTER dz ______ per minute per hour
inch millimeters
BC3
ORIENTATION
Horizontal Side Horizontal Down
CENTER
CENTER
OF GRAVITY
dz OF GRAVITY
dy
OR
BC4
AT
d
d dZ
TU
x
d
R
AC
RIER UATO
ACT IER
x
RIER CAR
CAR
R
Y
UATO
xd
R
CAR dz
ACT
d
CENTER
OF GRAVITY
LS
Lz
Vertical Z
Angled α __________ β
____________ X
Lz
CENTER Z
ACTUATOR
OF GRAVITY
Y FRONT
dx β VIEW
MG
SIDE VIEW
CARRIER
z
d d
α
Y
OTHER ISSUES:
CC
(i.e. Environment,
Temperature,
Contamination, etc.)
PB
Contact information:
ENGR

We will provide any assistance needed to determine the proper actuator.
BC2_24 1-800-328-2174
Rodless Cylinder Selection Guidelines - BC2, BC3, BC4, LS - All Sizes
PROVIDING LOAD GUIDANCE AND SUPPORT
The process of selecting If the intersection is above the carriers without a piston have larger cylinder with greater
a load bearing actuator diagonal line, a larger cylinder no internal cushion on the cushion capacity . On high-
for a given application can bore size should be cylinder end closest to the cyclic applications, use of
ABT
considered . auxiliary carrier .) external stops is strongly
be complex. It is highly recommended .
recommended that you NOTE: Additional force may be IMPORTANT: When ordering,
5
contact Tolomatic or a required to obtain the necessary determine the working stroke,
Tolomatic Distributor for acceleration for vertical or then the minimum distance DETERMINE
assistance in selecting horizontal loads . required between carriers TUBE SUPPORT
MXP
(dimension “D” in Auxiliary REQUIREMENTS
3
the best actuator for your Carrier Bending Moments
application. The following DETERMINE • Consult the Tube Support chart
chart) . When ordered, for the model selected .
overview of the selection NATURE OF Tolomatic’s configurator will
guidelines are for educa- LOAD AND THE calculate the overall length of • Cross reference the load
BC2
tional purposes only. EFFECT OF the actuator . weight and maximum distance
BENDING between supports .
1
NOTE: breakaway pressure will
MOMENTS
6
COMPILE increase when using auxiliary
APPLICATION If the cylinder will guide and carriers .
support a load located directly CONSIDER
BC3
REQUIREMENTS
4
To determine the appropriate
over the center of carrier, bending
DETERMINE OPTIONS
moments will not be a factor in • Switches– dc Reed, Hall-effect
Band Cylinder or Linear Slide the cylinder selection . INTERNAL or ac Triac
model for an application, compile CUSHION
the following information: NOTE: The maximum load “L” Band Cylinders and Linear Slides
CAPACITY
BC4
must not exceed the capacity each have different standard
• Available pressure (PSI) limits of the cylinder selected . • Consult the Cushion Data chart
for the model selected . The features and options . Check the
• Weight of load (lbs or kg) • Bending Moments options section for the actuator
velocities listed on the cushion
• Orientation of load (lbs or kgs) charts are final or cushion you have selected .
For off center or side loads,
• Velocity of load (in/sec or determine the distance from impact velocities . On • Shock Absorbers– if needed .
LS
mm/sec) the center of mass of the load applications where the internal
cushions or bumpers are to be • Foot Mounting Kits
to the center of the carrier
• Stroke length (in or mm) bracket . This measurement is used, be sure the actual, final • Floating Mount Bracket – use
HINT: Use Tolomatic sizing and needed to calculate the torque or impact velocity is known . If when lack of parallelism
selection software, download at: for bending moments . (Refer to the velocity is not known, use occurs between the cylinder
MG
tolomatic .com Bending Moment chart for of limit switches with valve and an external guided and
each model .) deceleration circuits or shock supported load .
2
absorbers should be
Should the resulting maximum considered . NOTE: The BC205 • Single End Porting (BC3, BC4)
SELECT bending moment exceed uses external bumpers in place • Long Carrier (BC4)
CC
CYLINDER SIZE figures indicated on the chart, of internal cushions, LS05 &
external guides, auxiliary LS10 do not have cushions or • Proximity Sensors (LS)
• Consult the Theoretical Force
vs . Pressure charts . carrier/s or a larger cylinder bumpers . • Dual 180° Carrier (BC3)
should be considered .
• Cross-reference the load force • Cross-reference the final
• Auxiliary Carrier Bending velocity and weight of the load .
PB
(or load weight if force is not
known) and the available Moments If the intersection is below the
operating pressure . If the The auxiliary carrier option diagonal lines, the internal
intersection falls below the (available on most models) cushions on the actuator may
diagonal line, and if moments increases load carrying be used . If the point falls above
ENGR
do not exceed maximum capacity and bending the dashed diagonal line or if
values listed for that model moments . Auxiliary carriers the velocity is not known, use
(see Step 3), the actuator will can be ordered with or without deceleration circuits, external
accommodate the application . an internal piston . (Auxiliary shock absorbers or select a
Application Guidelines
The following conditional cylinder . As a rule of thumb,
statements are intended as double that rate if water in
general guidelines for use of the system is suspected .
Tolomatic actuators . Since all Demanding conditions may
ABT
applications have their own require more lubricant .

specific operating If lubricators are used, we
requirements, consult recommend a non-
Tolomatic, Inc . or your local detergent, 20cP @ 140˚F
Tolomatic distributor if an
MXP
10-weight lubricant .
application is unconventional Optimum conditions for
or if questions arise regarding standard cylinder operation
the selection process . are +32˚ to +150˚F (+0˚ to
CUSHION NEEDLE 65 .5˚C) .
BC2
ADJUSTMENT (BC2,
BC3, BC4, CC, SA, DP, NOTE: Use of external
TC ONLY) lubricators may wash away
the factory installed
LUBRICATION filters will generally keep lubrication . External
BC3
GUIDELINES excess moisture in check . lubricants must be

maintained in a constant
All Tolomatic actuators (except • External Lubricators supply or the results will be
Cable Cylinders) are (optional) a dry actuator prone to
prelubricated at the factory . To premature wear .
The factory prelubrication of
BC4
ensure maximum actuator life,

the following guidelines should Tolomatic actuators will • Sanitary Environments
be followed . provide optimal
performance without the Oil mist lubricators must
Adjust the cushion needles in dispense “Food Grade”
• Filtration use of external lubrication .
the cylinder heads carefully to lubricants to the air supply .
However, external
LS
obtain a smooth, hesitation We recommend the use of Use fluids with ORAL LD50
free deceleration for your dry, filtered air in our lubricators can further
extend service life of toxicity ratings of 35 or
particular application . If there products . “Filtered air” higher such as Multitherm®
are questions on proper means a level of 10 Micron pneumatic actuators if the
supply is kept constant . PG-1 or equivalent .
adjustment, please consult or less . “Dry” means air
MG
Demanding conditions can

Tolomatic, Inc . should be free of Oil lubricators, (mist or drop) require a review of the
appreciable amounts of should supply a minimum of application .
moisture . Regular 1 drop per 20 standard
maintenance of installed cubic feet per minute to the
CC
FINAL VELOCITY CALCULATION

Velocity calculations for all rodless final (or impact) velocity . Rodless cylinders
PB
Final (impact)
cylinders need to differentiate between accelerate and decelerate at each end of
final velocity and average velocity . For the stroke . Therefore this acceleration
example: Stroking a 100-inch BC3 model must be considered (see diagram) .
in one second yields an average velocity If final (or impact) velocity cannot be
VELOCITY
ENGR
of 100 inches per second . To properly Average

calculated directly, a reasonable guideline
determine the inertial forces for is to use 2 x average velocity .
cushioning, it is important to know the
Start Time End
BC2_26 1-800-328-2174
BC2 Service Parts Ordering - ALL Sizes
Inch (U.S. Standard) SIZE 05 10 12 15 20 25
Aux. Carrier Assembly (w/piston) (each) NA 0510-9057 0512-9057 0515-9057 0520-9057 0525-9057
Aux. Carrier Assembly (wo/piston) (each) NA 0510-9095 0512-9095 0515-9095 0520-9095 0525-9095
Floating Mount Bracket Kit 0905-9115 0510-9007 0512-9007 0515-9007 0520-9007 0525-9007
ABT
Foot Mount Kit1 0905-9010 0510-9125 0512-9125 0515-9125 0520-9125 0525-9125
Shock Field Retrofit Kit – Heavy Duty2,8 NA 0510-9090 0512-9090 0515-9090 0520-9090 0525-9090
Shock Field Retrofit Kit – Light Duty2,8 NA 0510-9091 0512-9091 0515-9091 0520-9091 0525-9091
Shock Field Mount Kit (Hardware Only)3,8 NA 0510-9092 0512-9092 0515-9092 0520-9092 0525-9092
MXP
Adj. Shock Field Retrofit Kit – Heavy Duty2 NA 0510-9048 0512-9011 0515-9011 0520-9011 0525-9011
Adj. Shock Field Retrofit Kit – Light Duty2 NA 0510-9049 0512-9012 0515-9012 0520-9012 0525-9012
Adj. Shock Field Mount Kit (Hardware Only)3 NA 0510-9072 0512-9072 0515-9072 0520-9072 0525-9013
Tube Supports4 0905-1034 4510-1010 4512-1010 4515-1010 4520-1010 4525-1010
Repair Kits5,6,7 RKBC205NP RKBC210NP RKBC212NP RKBC215NP RKBC220NP RKBC225NP
BC2
Metric SIZE 05 10 12 15 20 25
Aux. Carrier Assembly (w/piston) (each) NA 4510-9057 4512-9057 4515-9057 4520-9057 4525-9057
Aux. Carrier Assembly (wo/piston) (each) NA 4510-9095 4512-9095 4515-9095 4520-9095 4525-9095
BC3
Floating Mount Bracket Kit 4905-9115 4510-9007 4512-9007 4515-9007 4520-9007 4525-9007
Foot Mount Kit1 4905-9010 4510-9125 4512-9125 4515-9125 4520-9125 4525-9125
Shock Field Retrofit Kit – Heavy Duty2,8 NA 4510-9090 4512-9090 4515-9090 4520-9090 4525-9090
Shock Field Retrofit Kit – Light Duty2,8 NA 4510-9091 4512-9091 4515-9091 4520-9091 4525-9091
BC4
Shock Field Mount Kit (Hardware Only) 3,8 NA 4510-9092 4512-9092 4515-9092 4520-9092 4525-9092
Adj. Shock Field Retrofit Kit – Heavy Duty2 NA 4510-9013 4512-9013 4515-9013 4520-9013 4525-9013
Adj. Shock Field Retrofit Kit – Light Duty 2 NA 4510-9014 4512-9014 4515-9014 4520-9014 4525-9014
Adj. Shock Field Mount Kit (Hardware Only)3 NA 4510-9025 4512-9025 4515-9025 4520-9025 4525-9025
Tube Supports4 0905-1034 4510-1010 4512-1010 4515-1010 4520-1010 4525-1010
LS
Repair Kits 5,6,7 RKBC205TP(GP) RKBC210TP(GP) RKBC212TP(GP) RKBC215TP(GP) RKBC220TP(GP) RKBC225TP(GP)
CONFIG. CODE ORDERING

Mounting Hardware & FE conn. included
Service Parts Ordering NOTES:
MG
DESCRIPTION CODE 1 Foot Mount Kit contains two foot mount brackets and mounting
Switch Kit, Reed, Form C, 5m BT hardware
Switch Kit, Reed, Form C, Male Conn. BM 2 Shock Field Retrofit Kit contains one Shock Absorber and mounting
Switch Kit, Reed, Form A, 5m RT hardware
Switch Kit, Reed, Form A, Male Conn. RM 3 Shock Field Mount Kit contains one set of mounting hardware only
CC
Switch Kit, Triac, 5m CT
Switch Kit, Triac, Male Conn. CM 4 A minimum of 2 (two) Tube Supports required per cylinder
Switch Kit, Hall-effect, Sinking, 5m KT 5 Repair Kit for 05 size contains O-rings, U-Cups, End Caps, Wear
Switch Kit, Hall-effect, Sinking, Male Conn. KM Strips, Band Inserts, Spring Clamps, Sealing Band, Dust Band and
Switch Kit, Hall-effect, Sourcing, 5m TT Shock Absorbing Pads
Switch Kit, Hall-effect, Sourcing, Male Conn. TM 6 Repair Kit for 10, 12, 15, 20 & 25 size contains End Caps, Bearing
PB
NOTE: When kit is ordered female connector & all mounting hardware is included Rods, O-rings, U-cups, Wear Rings, Cushion Seals, Band Inserts,
Spring Clamps, Sealing Band and Dust Band.
7 When ordering repair kits, specify stroke as “SK” then indicate the
Switch Ordering NOTES: desired length in decimal inches after the order code indicated
above. EXAMPLE: RKBC210SK10.00
ENGR
To order field retrofit switch and hardware kits for all Tolomatic
actuators: SW (Then the model and bore size, and type of switch 8 Standard end-of-stroke shock absorbers are designed to oper-
required) ate without the assistance of the standard band cylinder cushion.
Example: SW B C 2 1 5 RT To ensure proper shock absorber performance, make sure the air
(Hardware and Form A Reed switch with 5 meter lead for 1.5" cushion is disabled.
bore BC2 band cylinder) NA = Not Available
BC2 Ordering - ALL Sizes
M O D E L , B O R E , S T R O K E O P T I O N S
BC2 10 NP SK100.250 DW6.0 TS3 FM2 SH2 BM2

ABT
MODEL & MOUNTING AUXILIARY CARRIER (BC2_14) SHOCK ABSORBERS (BC2_22)

BC2 BC2 Band Cylinder DW Auxiliary carrier With SD_ Shock hardware Only and
piston & “D” distance number required
DO Auxiliary carrier Without SH_ Shock, Heavy duty and
MXP
BORE SIZE piston & “D” distance number required

05 0.50" (12mm) _ _._ _ “D” Distance between SL_ Shock, Light duty and
10 1.00" (25mm) carriers “D” Distance number required
12 1.25" (32mm) between carriers in *AD_ Adjustable shock hardware
15 1.50" (40mm) inches (SK) or Only and number required
millimeters (SM) *AH_ Adjustable shock, Heavy
BC2
20 2.00" (50mm)
25 2.50" (63mm) (Same unit of measure as stroke length is required) duty and number required
Not available for 05 size *AL_ Adjustable shock, Light duty
MINIMUM “D” DISTANCE and number required
MOUNTING & PORTS BETWEEN CARRIERS Not available for 05 size
NP US standard mounting (DO) w/o Piston (DW) w/ Piston *NOTE: Adjustable Shock will reduce
BC3
& NPT ports in mm in mm working stroke (see page BC2_22)

TP† Metric mounting with 10 5.07 129 5.07 129
metric taper port 12 5.17 131 6.85 174
GP† Metric mounting with 15 6.46 164 8.07 205
metric parallel port 20 8.10 206 8.10 206 SWITCHES (BC2_20)
25 9.62 244 11.06 281
BC4
LEAD LENGTH
† The metric version provides metric tapped holes
DISCONNECT
*When ordering auxiliary carrier
for mounting of the load to the carrier and of the
QUANTITY
option, enter the distance
actuator to mounting surfaces & metric ports
QUICK-
required between carriers. The
CODE
configurator will calculate the overall
length of the actuator. TYPE
STROKE LENGTH & MOUNTING TYPE
QD RM
LS
SK _ _ . _ _ Stroke, enter desired stroke TUBE SUPPORTS (BC2_16) Form A
After code enter quantity desired

no RT
REED
length in inches
SM† _ _ . _ _ Stroke, enter desired stroke TS_ Tube Support & number QD BM
required Form C
length in millimeters no BT
NOTE: Actuator mounting threads and mounting
5 meters
QD *KM
HALL-EFFECT
fasteners will be either inch or metric; FOOT MOUNT (BC2_17) Sinking

MG
depending on how stroke length is indicated. no *KT

FM_ Foot Mount & number QD *TM
SK = inch mounting required (1 or 2) Sourcing
SM = metric mounting no *TT
QD CM
MAXIMUM STROKE FLOATING MOUNT (BC2_18) TRIAC
...SK ...SM no CT
CC
FL Floating Mount Bracket MDR Dual Magnet (Reed, Hall-effect, Triac)

SIZE in mm
05 171 4,343 Not compatible with shock absorbers
* Not available for 05 size
10 350 8,890
12 288 7,315 PORTING OPTION
15 298 7,569
20 274 6,959 HDL 4-Ported Head - Left End
PB
25 163 4,140 HDR 4-Ported Head - Right End

HDB 4-Ported Head - Both Ends
Not available for 05 size 1 WEEK
Not all codes listed are compati- BUILT-TO-ORDER
ble with all options. Contact
ENGR
Tolomatic with any questions.
BC2_28 1-800-328-2174
BC3 RECIRCULATING BALL
BEARING RODLESS CYLINDER
CONTENTS
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_2
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_4
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_5
BC310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_6
BC315 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_8
BC320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_10
Tube Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_12
Foot Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_13
Dual 180° Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_14
Auxiliary Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_16
Auxiliary Dual 180° Carrier . . . BC3_17
Single End Porting . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_18
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_19
Shock Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_21
Application Data Worksheet . . BC3_23
Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . BC3_24
Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . BC3_25
Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BC3_27
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_28
www.tolomatic.com
BC3_ 1
The BC3 is the most capable pneumatic rodless cylinder in the industry today. Featuring durable stainless steel bands, a reliable
recirculating ball bearing design and smooth, low breakaway pressure the BC3 is a great solution for applications with high load and
bending moment requirements. Built-to-order in stroke lengths up to 205 inches.
SEALED BALL BEARING SYSTEM

• All bearing components covered by seal strip
FORMED END CAP • Bearing components are sealed and lubricated
WIPER SEAL at the factory
• Keeps contaminants from • Assures maximum resistance to contamination
entering the sealing area
•Protects internal
components
• Reduces maintenance
while increasing
productivity

major stress points
STAINLESS STEEL • Heat treated carbon steel
SEALING BAND SYSTEM withstands the toughest
dynamic forces
• Fatigue resistant stainless steel
bands are specifically made to • Strongest bracket design in the
provide longer life and will not industry assures long life with
elongate, like elastomers less maintenance
• Outer band keeps out
contaminants for extended
performance
• Inner band provides a smooth
surface for less seal wear
BC3 _2 1-800-328-2174
LOAD-BEARING CARRIER DESIGN

• Load and piston are independent - piston floats, resulting
in less friction and longer seal life
• Recirculating ball bearing system guides and supports ADJUSTABLE
load for consistent long term performance CUSHIONS
• Constant level of friction is maintained even when load • Adjustable cushions
orientation changes are standard, not
optional
• Easy screw adjustment
for end-of-stroke
deceleration
• Protects actuator and
load from damage
OPTIONS
AUXILIARY CARRIER
• Substantially higher load capacity
• Substantially higher bending moment capacity
PATENTED WEDGE BEARING SYSTEM DUAL 180° CARRIER

• Bearing surfaces
adjusted at the • Substantially higher bending moment capacity
factory for optimum
pre-load AUXILIARY DUAL 180°
• Bearing surfaces • Highest load capacity
adjusted by and • Highest bending moment capacity
supported by a steel
wedge assuring long TUBE SUPPORT MOUNTS
term stability • Used for intermediate support
FOOT MOUNTS
SHOCK ABSORBERS
• Smooth deceleration, higher productivity
• Allows increased operating speed
• Self-compensates for load or speed changes
• Minimizes impact load to equipment
SWITCHES
disconnect couplers
BC3 Recirculating Ball Bearing Rodless Cylinder
APPLICATIONS
Material Handling Material Handling Material Handling
Automatic sorting of products on A pick and place application for moving Vacuumized sheet transfer application.
conveyors. product between conveyors.
Customer Challenge: Customer Challenge: Customer Challenge:

A manufacturer of sorting equipment A manufacturer of consumer electronic A manufacturer of battery chargers
had created some in-house automation equipment needed a method to move needed a method of taking sheet metal
solutions on their sorting equipment but finished product from one conveyor to off of pallets and placing onto the
they could not achieve the speed or another quickly without damage or waste. assembly line. Speed is critical and end-
reliability to keep up with their distribution of-stroke position must be consistent,
requirements. They needed to speed up Application thus, Tolomatic pneumatic products were
production and find a way to sort to more Requirements: chosen for this system.
locations with limited floor space. • Fast response, throughput of 20
products per minute Application
Tolomatic Solution: Requirements:
• Consistent positioning
A BC3 rodless pneumatic cylinder with • Fast response, 1 part must be
was selected for this application because • End-of-stroke adjustment to reoriented and moved each 3 seconds
of their space-saving characteristics. The accommodate varying product lines
• Movement from end-of-stroke to end-
BC3 cylinder sits parallel over the top of
of-stroke with consistent positioning
the conveyor and is fitted with a paddle.
The BC3 cylinder moves the paddle
Tolomatic Solution: • Low cost
This side mounted BC3D Band Cylinder
which pushes product both directions to
with dual 180° option provides the motion • End-of-stroke adjustment
different conveyors. Speed requirements
along the X axis and support for the PB2
of 30 in/sec were achieved easily
rod cylinder slide which provides the
achieved. Tolomatic Solution:
Y axis motion. In this application dual
This application uses a Tolomatic PB2
vacuum cups are used, however they are
Result: often replaced with a gripper unit with
Rod Cylinder Slide, attached to a BC3
The rodless approach provided long- Band Cylinder with adjustable shocks.
custom tooled fingers for product that
lasting durability for reliable performance This actuator assembly moves the
does not present a smooth flat surface.
at the required speed. The customer vacuum grid attachment that holds the
achieved flexibility on the number of sheet metal.
products they could sort and increased
Result:
This continuing customer is pleased with
the number of sorting locations Result:
the durability, price and delivery that the
maximizing their limited floor space. Most The BC3 and PB2 has long-lasting
BC3 and PB2 actuators manufactured by
important, they were able to meet their durability for reliable performance at the
Tolomatic provide.
distribution demands. The customer required speed. This continuing customer
ordered 300 units for a total of $400,000. is pleased with the price and delivery that
Tolomatic provides.
BC3 _4 1-800-328-2174
BC3 Recirculating Ball Bearing Rodless Cylinder
PERFORMANCE
THEORETICAL FORCE BENDING MOMENTS,

vs PRESSURE LOAD
PRESSURE (bars) STANDARD ACTUATOR
BENDING MOMENTS MAX. LOAD
1.4
2.8
4.2
5.6
6.9
My Mx Mz Fz Fy
350 159 2000 226.0 2000 907
1500 169.5 1500 680

300 138
NEWTON-METERS
INCH-POUNDS
KILOGRAMS
POUNDS
1000 113.0 1000 454
250 113
20
BC3
500 56.5 500 227

FORCE (kilograms)
FORCE (pounds)
200 91
0 0 0 0
BC310
BC315
BC320
BC310
BC315
BC320
BC310
BC315
BC320
BC310
BC315
BC320
BC310
BC315
BC320
150 68 AUXILIARY CARRIER & DUAL 180° CARRIER** OPTIONS
16265
5
31
11734 BENDING MOMENTS

BC
100 45 6779
9388 MAX. LOAD
My* Mx Mz* Fz DW Fy DW Fy D Fz D
5000 565 4000 1814
0
50 31 23 4000
BC
452
3000 1361
NEWTON-METERS
INCH-POUNDS
KILOGRAMS
3000 339
POUNDS
2000 907
0 0
20
40
60
80
100
2000 226
PRESSURE (PSI)
1000 454
1000 124
0 0 0 0
BC310DW
BC315DW
BC320DW
BC310D
BC315D
BC320D
BC310DW
BC315DW
BC320DW
BC310D
BC315D
BC320D
BC310DW
BC315DW
BC320DW
BC310D
BC315D
BC320D
BC310DW
BC315DW
BC320DW
BC310DW
BC315DW
BC320DW
BC310D
BC315D
BC320D
BC310D
BC315D
BC320D
**Dual 180° carrier bending moments are not an exact comparison with other types of carriers. See page BC3_14.
BC310 Band Cylinder
PERFORMANCE
PRESSURE (bar)
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.4
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.2
6.9
.7
80 36.3
70 31.7
60 27.2
FORCE (lbs)
50 22.7
FORCE (kg)
40 18.1
Auxiliary Carrier BC3_16
Auxiliary Dual 180° Carrier BC3_17 20
Dual 180° Carrier BC3_14 9.1
Foot Mounts BC3_13
Shock Absorbers BC3_21 10 4.5
Switches BC3_19
Tube Supports BC3_12 0 0
MORE INFORMATION Page 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Application Guidelines BC3_25 PRESSURE (PSI)
Cushion Needle Adjustment BC3_25
Ordering BC3_28
Selection BC3_24 TUBE SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD FEATURE Page
Single End Porting BC3_18 Max Distance Between Supports (mm) “L”
152.4
228.6
304.8
381.0
457.2
533.4
609.6
685.8
76.2
0
650 294.8
550 249.5
LOAD (kg)
18.1
27.2
36.3
40.8 45.4
500 226.8
1.4
2.3
3.2
4.1
9.1
.5
13.6
22.7
31.7
450 204.1
1.8
2.7
3.6
4.5
.9
100 2.5
LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
LOAD WEIGHT (kg)

90 2.3 400 181.4
80 2.0 1.8
70 60 1.5
50 1.3 350 158.8

40 1.0
30 .7 300 136.1
20 .5 250 113.4
10 9 .25 200 90.7

8 .23 .20
7 .18 150 68.0
6 .15
5 .13
4 .10 100 45.4
3 .08
2 .05 50 22.7
0 0
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27
1 .03
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80 100 Weight
LOAD (lbs)
BC3 _6 1-800-328-2174
BC310 Band Cylinder 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com MODELS
A U.S Standard Metric
A 3.94 100.0
K B 3.67 93.3
M TAPPED HOLE K/2 H DOWEL HOLE (2) C .45 11.4
x .37 9,5mm (4)
D .047 1.19
G/2 E .611 15.52
G G 1.781 45.24
H* .252/.251 x .25 6.045/6.020 x 6.4
A J 10-24 x .43 M5-0.8 x 11.0
P PORT K 2.250 57.15
(2) FROM OPP SIDE B P PORT (2) M 1/4-20 M6-1.0
B/2 SS C
B N SS N 1.00 25.4
A
P 1/8-27 NPT TP 1/8-28 BSPT
GP 1/8-28 BSPP
RR
U R 2.16 54.8
D S 1.54 39.1
A
T 2.19 55.6
B U 2.17 55.1
A STROKE A V .750 19.05
STROKE + 2A
W 1.250 31.75
R
R/2 X .330 8.38
SECTION A-A AA
OUTLINE ONLY BORE Y .76 19.3
AA/2 P PORT (4)
CENTER 2 THIS END Z 1.094 27.79
LINE MM 2 OTHER END
Z SILVER NUTS FOR AA 1.063 27.00
SLOTS 90° FROM CARRIER
#3410-1013 [4410-1013]
S BB 1.12 28.45
BB GG NN LL
CC HH KK
CC 1.88 47.8
V
E DD .266 6.76
øJJ TAPPED HOLE
(CENTERED)
Y X
EE 1.922 48.82
DD
EE W/2 FF 2.19 55.6
QQ
FF PP BORE W J TAPPED GG 1.12 28.45
YELLOW NUTS FOR
SLOTS OPPOSITE CARRIER
CENTER HOLE (8)
#3410-1775 [4410-1708] LINE T/2 4 AS SHOWN HH .66 16.8
T 4 OPPOSITE
JJ 10-24 M5-0.8
VIEW B-B KK .25 6.4
SPECIFICATIONS LL .142 3.61
BC310 BENDING MOMENTS AND LOAD MM .547 13.89
NN .890 22.6
PP .75 19.1
BORE MAX. BENDING MOMENT MAX. LOAD
SIZE QQ .188 4.8
My Mx Mz Fz Fy
RR .845 21.46
U.S. 1.00 in 269 in-lbs 250 in-lbs 156 in-lbs 591 lbs 341 lbs SS .203 5.2
Metric 25 mm 30.4 N-m 28.2 N-m 17.9 N-m 268.1 kg 154.7 kg INCHES MILLIMETERS
*DOWEL PINS .003 M
.076 M

SIZE BASE PER UNIT OF STOKE LENGTH** PRESSURE RANGE
U.S. Standard 1.00 in 2.71 lbs 0.23 lbs/in 205 in 100 PSI 20° to 140° F
**For longer strokes, alternate materials, mounting and/or fasteners – consult Tolomatic
BC315 Band Cylinder
PERFORMANCE
PRESSURE (bar)
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.4
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.2
6.9
90.7
.7
200
79.4
175
68.0
150
56.7
FORCE (lbs)
FORCE (kg)
125
45.4
100
34.0
BC315 OPTIONS Page 75
Auxiliary Carrier BC3_16 22.7
Auxiliary Dual 180° Carrier BC3_17 50
Dual 180° Carrier BC3_14 11.3
Foot Mounts BC3_13 25
Shock Absorbers BC3_21 0
Switches BC3_19 0
Tube Supports BC3_12 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
MORE INFORMATION Page
Application Guidelines BC3_25 PRESSURE (PSI)
Ordering BC3_28
152.4
228.6
304.8
381.0
457.2
533.4
609.6
685.8
762.0
838.2
914.4
76.2
0
1500 680.4
CUSHION DATA 1400 635.0
1300 589.7
LOAD (kg) 1200 544.3
18.1
27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
.5
1100 498.9
1.81
13.6
22.7
90.7
4.5
.9
1000 453.6
100 2.5
LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
LOAD WEIGHT (kg)

80 90 2.3 2.0 900 408.2
60 70 1.8 1.5
50 1.3 800 362.9

40 1.0
30 .8 700 317.5
20 .5 600 272.2
500 226.8
10 .3
9 .23 400 181.4
7 8 .20 .18
6 .15 .13 300 136.1
5
4 .10
200 90.7
3 .08
.05 100 45.4
2
0 0
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
1 .03 Max Distance Between Supports (in) “L”
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 200 Weight
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80 100
LOAD (lbs)
BC3 _8 1-800-328-2174
www.tolomatic.com

MODELS
U.S. Std. Metric
K A 5.93 150.7
K/2 H DOWEL HOLE (2)
M TAPPED HOLE (4) B 6.25 158.8
C .84 21.3
G
F D .48 12.2
E .86 21.8
F 2.156 54.76
A G 1.078 27.38
B H* .252-.251 x .25 6.045-6.020 x 6.4
LL LL
P PORT (4) N B/2 P PORT (4) J 1/4-20 x .47 M6-1 x 12
2 AS SHOWN
2 AS SHOWN C K 4.500 114.30
2 OPPOSITE A 2 OPPOSITE
M 1/4-20 X .44 M6- x 11
N 1.27 32.3
U E
P 1/4-18 NPT TP 1/4-19 BSPT
D GP 1/4-19 BSPP
A R 2.88 73.0
A STROKE A S 2.109 53.57
STROKE + 2A
T 3.19 81.0
BORE CENTER LINE R
R/2 P PORT (4) U 3.25 82.6
Z 2 AS SHOWN
2 OPPOSITE V 1.625 41.28
AA GG S W 1.313 33.35
BB
CC E V X .875 22.23
Y X
D Y 1.46 37.1
NUT FOR SLOTS
DD W/2 Z 1.44 36.5
EE BORE J TAPPED
HH KK CENTER HOLE (8) AA 1.41 35.81
SECTION A-A FF LINE W
JJ TAPPED HOLE THRU T/2 4 AS SHOWN BB 2.22 56.38
OUTLINE ONLY CENTERED ON HH 4 OPPOSITE
T CC 2.99 75.95
DD .35 8.9
EE 2.53 64.3
FF 2.88 73.0
SPECIFICATIONS GG 1.62 41.15
BC315 BENDING MOMENTS AND LOAD HH .75 19.1
JJ 1/4-20 M6-1
MAX. BENDING MOMENT MAX. LOAD KK .25 6.4
BORE
SIZE LL .25 6.4
My Mx Mz Fz Fy
INCHES MILLIMETERS
U.S. 1.50 in 1033 in-lbs 859 in-lbs 596 in-lbs 1454 lbs 840 lbs
Metric 40 mm 116.7 N-m 97.1 N-m 67.3 N-m 659.5 kg 381.0 kg *DOWEL PINS .003 M
.076 M

BC320 Band Cylinder
PERFORMANCE
PRESSURE (bar)
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.4
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.2
6.9
.7
350 158.9
ORDER CODES 300 136.1

BC320
inch (U.S. Standard) 250 113.5
BC3M20
FORCE (lbs)
FORCE (kg)
(metric with taper port)
200 90.7
BC3MM20
(metric with parallel port)
150 68.1
BC320 OPTIONS Page
Auxiliary Carrier BC3_16 100 45.4
Auxiliary Dual 180° Carrier BC3_17
Dual 180° Carrier BC3_14
Foot Mounts BC3_13 50 22.7
Switches BC3_19 0 0
Tube Supports BC3_12 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
MORE INFORMATION Page PRESSURE (PSI)
Ordering BC3_28
152.4
228.6
304.8
381.0
457.2
533.4
609.6
685.8
762.0
838.2
914.4
76.2
0
2200 997.8
LOAD (kg) 1800 816.4

136.1
226.8
18.1
27.2
36.3
45.4
1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
.5
1600 725.8
181.4
13.6
22.7
31.7
40.8
90.7
1.8
4.5
.9
100 2.5 1400 635.0

LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
90 2.3 2.0
LOAD WEIGHT (kg)
80 1.8
70
60 1.5 1200
50 1.3 544.3
1.0
40
30 .8 1000 453.6
20 .5
800 362.9
10 .3
9 .23 600 272.2
8 .20
7 .18
6 .15 .13
5 400 181.4
4 .10
3 .08
200 90.7
2 .05
0 0
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
1 .03
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 200 400
1 3 5 79 20 40 60 80 100 300 500 Weight
LOAD (lbs)
BC3 _10 1-800-328-2174

www.tolomatic.com

K H DOWEL HOLE (2) MODELS

M TAPPED HOLE
K/2
x .56 14,2mm (4) F G BC320 BC3M/MM20
A 6.27 159.0
B 6.75 171.5
C 0.625 15.88
D 0.625 15.88
L (8) 4 EACH END E 1.125 28.58
A F 3.125 79.38
LL LL P PORT (4) G 1.563 39.70
B
B/2 2 AS SHOWN H* .252/.251 x .25 6.045/6.020 x 6.4
N 2 OPPOSITE C
J 5/16-18 x .88 M8-1.25 x 22
K 4.750 120.65
U
L 0.063 1.60
D E
M 5/16-18 M8-1.25
N 1.31 33.3
P PORT (4) A STROKE A P 3/8-18 NPT TP 3/8-19 BSPT
2 AS SHOWN GP 3/8-19 BSPP
2 OPPOSITE STROKE + 2A
R 3.84 97.5
R
BORE CENTER LINE
BORE R/2 S 2.663 67.64
Z CENTER P PORT (4)
2 AS SHOWN T 4.25 108.0
LINE
2 OPPOSITE
AA S U 4.20 106.7
GG
BB V 2.188 55.58
CC
E V
X D W 1.625 41.28
Y
X 1.156 29.36
DD W/2 J TAPPED HOLE (8) Y 1.78 45.2
EE VIEW B-B 4 AS SHOWN
SECTION A-A FF W Z 1.969 50.01
OUTLINE ONLY 4 OPPOSITE
T/2
AA 1.67 42.4
T
M TAPPED HOLE THRU BB 2.80 71.0
CENTERED ON HH
CC 3.81 96.7
NUT FOR TUBE SUPPORT DD 0.500 12.70
BOTTOM SLOT ONLY HH KK
EE 3.438 87.33
SPECIFICATIONS FF 3.94 100.1
GG 2.03 51.6
HH 0.94 23.9
JJ 5/16-18 M8-1.25
SIZE KK .41 10.4
My Mx Mz Fz Fy
LL .25 6.4
U.S. 2.00 in 1472 in-lbs 1662 in-lbs 850 in-lbs 2008 lbs 1159 lbs
INCHES MILLIMETERS
Metric 50 mm 166.3 N-m 187.8 N-m 96.0 N-m 910.8 kg 525.77 kg
*DOWEL PINS .003 M
.076 M

BC3 TUBE SUPPORTS - All Sizes
TUBE SUPPORT PERFORMANCE
ORDER CODE
TS_ TUBE SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS
(_ = Number ordered) Max Distance Between Supports (mm) “L”
152.4
228.6
304.8
381.0
457.2
533.4
609.6
685.8
762.0
838.2
914.4
76.2
0
2200 997.8
BC320:
1800 816.4
1600 725.8
BC315:
LOAD WEIGHT (kgs.)

1400
LOAD WEIGHT (lbs.)

635.0
1200 544.3
For intermediate support, tube support brackets can be 1000 453.6

mounted to the BC3 model. Made of black-anodized alumi-
800 362.9
num, the brackets are attached to the bottom and sides of the BC310:
cylinder tube with rail nuts. The number of tube support 600 272.2
brackets required and their placement depends on the overall 400 181.4
length of the BC3 model and the load weight being moved 200 90.7
and supported. Refer to the tube support data chart below. 0 0
Note: Switches cannot be mounted on the same face of the 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
Max Distance Between Supports (in.) “L”
actuator as tube supports. Weight
DIMENSIONS A ØG
B D E
C
OPTIONAL TUBE SUPPORT F
BORE BORE
SIZE A B C D E F G SIZE A B C D E F G
10 1.00 2.75 2.250 0.25 1.53 1.76 1.09 0.206 10 25 69.85 57.15 6.4 38.9 44.7 27.7 5.232
15 1.50 3.75 3.000 0.38 1.97 2.19 1.16 0.266 15 40 95.30 76.20 9.7 50.0 55.6 29.5 6.756
20 2.00 4.00 3.375 0.31 2.56 2.84 1.50 0.328 20 50 101.60 85.73 7.9 65.0 72.1 38.1 8.331
Dimensions in inches Dimensions in millimeters
BC3 _12 1-800-328-2174

BC3 FOOT MOUNT KIT - All Sizes 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com
FOOT MOUNT KIT to determine critical dimensions
Foot mounts are an option on BC3 Series

Band Cylinders when an application
requires the mounting to be different than
flush. They may be specified on one or
ORDER CODE
both ends of the cylinder.
FM_
(_ = Number ordered)
DIMENSIONS Ø B THRU,
M Ø C x D DEEP
C'BORE (2)
E F
G H
A OPTIONAL
STROKE + 2A FOOT
MOUNT
N K
J
BORE
SIZE A B C D E F G H J K L M N
10 1.00 4.31 Ø.206 Ø .38 0.22 0.906 1.095 1.812 2.19 4.69 0.88 2.44 0.75 0.574
15 1.25 6.43 Ø.266 Ø .44 0.28 1.188 1.560 2.375 3.13 6.93 1.00 3.63 1.00 0.641
20 1.50 6.80 Ø.328 Ø .53 0.34 1.500 2.000 3.000 4.00 7.30 1.13 4.53 1.00 0.719
BORE
SIZE A B C D E F G H J K L M N
10 25 109.5 Ø 5.23 Ø 9.7 5.6 23.01 27.8 46.02 55.6 119.1 22.4 62.0 19.1 14.6
15 32 163.4 Ø 6.76 Ø 11.2 7.1 30.18 39.7 60.33 79.4 176.1 25.4 92.2 25.4 16.3
20 40 172.7 Ø 8.33 Ø 13.5 8.6 38.10 50.8 76.20 101.6 185.4 28.7 115.1 25.4 18.3
BC3 DUAL 180° CARRIER - All Sizes
DUAL 180° CARRIER DUAL 180˚ CARRIER
The Dual 180˚ Carrier option may be used when load factors
exceed those of a single carrier actuator. This option allows
the load to be rotated 90˚ from the cylinder’s carrier providing
an additional load bearing mounting surface.
NOTE: The Dual 180˚ Carrier option requires its own proprie-
tary tube supports and foot mounts. See dimensional informa-
tion below. Breakaway pressure will increase when using the
Dual 180˚ Carrier option.
ORDER CODE
BC3_ _D
PERFORMANCE
BC3D (DUAL 180° CARRIER) BENDING MOMENTS AND LOAD

SIZE My Mx Mz Fz Fy
BC310D 1.00 in. 312 in.-lbs. 657 in.-lbs. 538 in.-lbs. 1182 lbs. 682 lbs.
BC310D 25mm 35.3 N-m 74.2 N-m 60.8 N-m 536.1 kgs. 309.3 kgs.
BORE WEIGHT** MAX. STROKE MAX. TEMPERATURE

BC310D 1.00 in. 5.37 lbs. 0.32 lbs. 205 in
BC315D 1.50 in. 17.2 lbs. 0.69 lbs. 202 in 100 PSI 20° to 140° F
BC320D 2.00 in. 28.9 lbs. 1.12 lbs. 142 in
BC310D 25mm 2.43 kgs. 0.14 kgs. 5207 mm
BC315D 40mm 7.76 kgs. 0.31 kgs. 5130 mm 6.895 bar -7° to 60° C
BC320D 50mm 13.11 kgs. 0.50 kgs. 3606 mm
**Use these figures to calculate actuator weight instead of standard weights on pages BC3_7, BC3_9, BC3_11
BC3 _14 1-800-328-2174

BC3 DUAL 180° CARRIER - All Sizes 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com
DIMENSIONS KK
L P
GG TAPPED HOLE N
x HH DEEP (4) K
M U
T V
H R
S W
J X Y
Z THRU,
B A FF DOWEL HOLE (2) CC THRU, AA x BB DEEP
C DD x EE DEEP C'BORE (2)
C'BORE (4)
TOL-O-MATIC
TOL-O-MATIC
E JJ
LL
F A STROKE A
G STROKE + 2A
BORE
CENTER
LINE
NOTE: In vertical mounting applications, supplemental mounting may be required besides factory foot mounts.
Optional Tube Supports and Foot Mounts are shown.
MODELS BORE A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S
BC310 1.0 in. 3.93 4.31 2.13 3.33 1.61 1.75 3.50 1.192 2.437 1.531 3.062 .28 2.563 3.12 1.469 2.937
BC315 1.5 in. 5.93 6.00 2.78 4.33 2.09 2.35 5.09 1.48 3.375 2.250 4.500 .38 2.250 3.00 2.02 4.437
BC320 2.0 in. 6.27 7.41 3.51 5.30 2.59 2.80 6.00 2.358 5.125 3.000 6.000 .38 2.250 3.00 2.422 5.250
MODELS BORE T U V W X Y Z AA BB CC DD EE FF* GG HH JJ KK LL
BC310 1.0 in. .307 .62 .28 .891 1.688 2.25 .266 .44 .28 .266 .44 .28 .252/.251 x .25 1/4-20 .47 1.25 3.67 .52
BC315 1.5 in. .312 .62 .38 1.312 2.750 3.50 .266 .44 .28 .328 .53 .34 .252/.251 x .25 5/16-18 .59 1.62 6.25 .66
BC320 2.0 in. .312 .62 .31 1.625 3.375 4.00 .328 .53 .34 .391 .63 .41 .252/.251 x .25 3/8-16 .66 2.00 6.75 .63
MODELS BORE A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S
BC310 25 mm 99.8 109.5 54.1 84.6 40.9 44.5 88.9 30.28 61.90 38.89 77.77 7.1 65.10 79.2 37.31 74.60
BC315 40 mm 150.6 152.4 70.61 110.0 53.1 59.7 129.3 37.59 85.73 57.15 114.30 9.7 57.15 76.2 51.31 112.70
BC320 50 mm 159.3 188.2 89.15 135.6 68.8 71.1 152.4 59.89 130.18 76.20 152.40 9.7 57.15 76.2 61.52 133.35
MODELS BORE T U V W X Y Z AA BB CC DD EE FF* GG HH JJ KK LL
BC310 25 mm 7.80 15.7 7.1 22.63 42.88 57.2 6.76 11.2 7.1 6.8 11.2 7.1 6.045/6.020 x 6.4 M6 x 1.00 11.9 31.8 93.2 13.2
BC315 40 mm 7.92 15.7 9.7 33.32 69.85 88.9 6.76 11.2 7.1 8.33 13.5 8.6 6.045/6.020 x 6.4 M8 x 1.25 15.0 41.1 158.8 16.8
BC320 50 mm 7.92 15.7 7.9 41.28 85.73 101.6 8.33 13.5 8.6 9.93 16.0 10.4 6.045/6.020 x 6.4 M10 x 1.50 16.8 50.8 171.8 16.0
*DOWEL PINS .003 M
.076 M
BC3 AUXILIARY CARRIER - All Sizes
AUXILIARY CARRIER
AUXILIARY CARRIER
The auxiliary carrier option substantially increases load carrying
capacity and bending moments. Auxiliary carriers can only be
ordered with an internal piston. When ordering, determine the
minimum distance required between carriers (dimension “D” in
Auxiliary Carrier Bending Moments chart below). Determine
your working stroke. Enter these into your configuration
PROCEDURE
ORDERING
string. (Example BC315SK50.00DW10.00) the configura-
ORDER CODE
tor will calculate the overall length of the actuator.
DW_ _ . _ NOTE: Breakaway pressure will increase when using
(with piston, indicate distance
“D” between carriers) auxiliary carriers.
PERFORMANCE
BC3--DW (AUXILIARY CARRIER) BENDING MOMENTS AND LOAD
LOAD vs. DISTANCE BC3 SERIES

“D” MILLIMETERS
101.6
127.0
152.4
177.8
203.2
228.6
254.0
279.0
304.8
330.2
355.6
381.0
406.4
431.8
457.2
482.6
508.0
533.4
558.8
584.2
609.6
635.0
52 5.8754
48 5.4235
44 BC310: MYA Moment MZA Moment 4.9716
40 BC315: MYA Moment MZA Moment
4.5196
BC320: MYA Moment MZA Moment
IN.-LBS. (IN THOUSANDS)
36 4.0676
N-m (IN THOUSANDS)

32 3.6157
Rates were calculated
with the following 28 3.1637
assumptions: 24 2.7117
1.) Coupling between car- 20 2.2598
riers is rigid.
16 1.8078
2.) Load is equally distrib-
12 1.3559
uted between carriers.
8 .9039
3.) Coupling device
applies no misalignment 4 .4519
loads to carriers. 0 0
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
“D” INCHES
MODEL “D”* MAXIMUM BENDING MOMENT
1.) Coupling MAXIMUM
between carriers is rigid.LOAD
2.) Load is equally distributed between carriers.
NO. MIN. MYA** MXA MZA**
3.) Coupling device applies Fno
ZA FYA
misalignment loads to carriers.
BC310DW 4.88 in. 2825 in.-lbs. 500 in.-lbs. 1630 in.-lbs. 1182 lbs. 682 lbs. * D is distance between carriers.
BC315DW 8.07 in. 11734 in.-lbs. 1718 in.-lbs. 6779 in.-lbs. 2908 lbs. 1680 lbs. ** Loads calculated are at minimum “D”,
for substantially higher My + Mz loads
BC320DW 8.10 in. 16265 in.-lbs. 3324 in.-lbs. 9388 in.-lbs. 4016 lbs. 2318 lbs.
increase “D’ and refer to graph at left
BC310DW 124.0mm 319.2 N-m 56.5 N-m 184.2 N-m 536.1 kgs. 309.3 kgs.
BC3 _16 1-800-328-2174

BC3 AUXILIARY DUAL 180° CARRIER - All Sizes
AUXILIARY DUAL 180° CARRIER
AUXILIARY DUAL 180° CARRIER
The auxiliary dual 180° carrier option substantially increases
load carrying capacity and bending moments. Auxiliary carriers
can only be ordered with an internal piston. When ordering,
determine the minimum distance required between carriers
(dimension “D” in Auxiliary Dual 180° Carrier Bending
Moments chart below). Determine your working stroke. Enter
these into your configuration string. (Example
PROCEDURE
ORDERING
ORDER CODEs BC3D15SK50.00DW10.00) The configurator will calculate
BC3_ _DSK_ _ . _ DW_ _ . _ the overall length of the actuator.
(with piston, indicate distance
“D” between carriers)
NOTE: Breakaway pressure will increase when using
auxiliary dual 180° carriers.
PERFORMANCE
BC3D--DW (DUAL 180°, AUXILIARY CARRIER) BENDING MOMENTS AND LOAD
LOAD vs. DISTANCE BC3 SERIES

“D” MILLIMETERS
101.6
127.0
152.4
177.8
203.2
228.6
254.0
279.0
304.8
330.2
355.6
381.0
406.4
431.8
457.2
482.6
508.0
533.4
558.8
584.2
609.6
635.0
100 11.30
BC310: MY Moment MZ Moment

80 BC315: MY Moment MZ Moment 9.04
BC320: MY Moment MZ Moment
IN.-LBS. (IN THOUSANDS)
N-m (IN THOUSANDS)

60 6.78
Rates were calculated
with the following
assumptions: 40 4.52
1.) Coupling between
carriers is rigid.
2.) Load is equally distribut- 20 2.26
ed between carriers.
3.) Coupling device applies
no misalignment loads to 0 0
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
carriers. “D” INCHES
MODEL “D”* MAXIMUM1.)BENDING MOMENT
Coupling MAXIMUM
between carriers LOAD2.) Load is equally distributed between carriers.
is rigid.
NO. MIN. MY** MX MZ** F FY
3.) Coupling device applies no misalignment
Z loads to carriers.
BC3D10DW 4.88 in. 3328 in.-lbs. 1314 in.-lbs. 5768 in.-lbs. 1364 lbs. 2364 lbs. * D is distance between carriers.
BC3D15DW 8.07 in. 13558 in.-lbs. 4936 in.-lbs. 23468 in.-lbs. 3360 lbs. 5816 lbs. ** Loads calculated are at minimum “D”,
BC3D20DW 8.10 in. 18776 in.-lbs. 9054 in.-lbs. 32530 in.-lbs. 4636 lbs. 8032 lbs. for substantially higher My + Mz loads
increase “D’ and refer to graph at left
BC3D10DW 124.0mm 373 N-m 147 N-m 646 N-m 619 kgs. 1072 kgs.
BC3 SINGLE END PORTING - All Sizes
SINGLE END PORTING
The BC3 is uniquely designed for multiple port locations
including single end porting. This is a standard feature on all
bore sizes of the BC3. The lower ports on the head assembly
only function when used to cross port the cylinder for single
end porting.
To convert to single end porting, remove access pipe plug fit-
ting from the opposite head assembly that the air lines will be
ORDER CODE: NONE installed into. Then remove the internal port pipe plug. Reinstall
STANDARD FEATURE access pipe plug into the bottom of the head. Remove pipe
(No code required)
plug from the head that the air lines will be installed.
AIR FLOW DIAGRAMS
SINGLE END PORTING ALLOWS THE GREATEST FLEXIBILITY IN AIR HOOK UP

Converting from Standard porting to Left or Right side porting can be achieved if plugs are placed as in the diagram below.
Main Main
Port Port
PISTON
Cross Cross
Port Standard Porting Port
(cross ports not functional)
Main Main
Port Port
Pipe Plug PISTON Pipe Plug

inserted removed
Cross Cross
Port Ported From Left Side Port
Main Main
Port Port

removed inserted
Cross Cross
Port Ported From Right Side Port
Diagrams shown for
BC315 and BC320
Open Plugged
Note: Standard porting may be field converted to ported from left or ported from right.
For complete instructions refer to parts sheet.
BC3 _18 1-800-328-2174

BC3 SWITCHES - All Sizes
SWITCHES
sinking, NPN (open); each with either flying leads or QD (quick disconnect).
controllers), TLL, CMOS circuit or other controller device. These switches are
activated by the actuator’s magnet.
QUICK-DISCONNECT
COUPLER - MALE END
Switches contain reverse polarity protection. QD cables are shielded; shield
should be terminated at flying lead end.
same of side of actuator with scored face of switch toward internal magnet.
SPECIFICATIONS
Open
None None
OPERATING VOLTAGE 200 Vdc max. 120 Vdc max. 120 Vac max. 5 - 25 Vdc
0.6 msec max. 0.7 msec max.
OPERATING TIME — < 10 micro sec.
RELEASE TIME 1.0 msec. max. — —
**POWER RATING (WATTS) 10.0 § 3.0 § § 10.0 5.0
VOLTAGE DROP 2.6 V typical at 100 mA NA — —
RESISTANCE 0.1 Ω Initial (Max.) — —
1 Amp at 0.5 Amp at
86°F [30°C] 140°F [60°C]
CABLE MIN . STATIC 0.630" [16mm]
BEND
RADIUS DYNAMIC Not Recommended

** WARNING: Do not exceed power rating (Watt = Voltage X Amperage). Permanent damage to sensor will occur.
Female coupler to flying lead (part #2503-1025) distance is 197" [5m] also see Cable Shielding specification above
REPLACEMENT OF QD SWITCHES MANUFACTURED BEFORE JULY 1, 1997: It will be necessary to replace or rewire the female end coupler.
BLUE BROWN
+
BLUE BROWN
CURRENT
Quick disconnect
Wiring
- OLD
Quick disconnect
Wiring
+
BLACK BLACK
SIGNAL
†
Shielded from the female quick disconnect coupler to the flying leads. Shield should be terminated at flying lead end.
§
Maximum current 500mA (not to exceed 10VA) Refer to Temperature vs. Current graph and Voltage Derating graph
§§
BC3 SWITCHES - All Sizes
PERFORMANCE
TEMP . vs CURRENT, DC REED TEMP . vs CURRENT, AC REED VOLTAGE DERATING, DC REED
600 1000 200
TRIAC
LOAD CURRENT (mA)

LOAD CURENT (mA)
500 800
400
REED FORM A 150
600
300
400 100
200 REED FORM C
RE
200 50 D REED FO
FOR
E
100
MC RM A
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0
CURRENT D.C (mA)

(+) BROWN
AC
THE NOTCHED
LOAD (+) REED COM
FACE OF THE
(-)
SURFACE AND
(+) REED MAGNET .
LOAD SWITCH TRIAC
(-) BLUE SWITCH
(-)

COMMON BROWN
THE NOTCHED
NORMALLY CLOSED BLACK REED GROOVE IN THE
BLUE SWITCH ACTUATOR
GROOVE TO
SWITCH . CONTACT
BROWN(+) (+)
HALL-EFFECT BLACK SWITCHES ARE
SWITCH SINKING
BLUE (-) SWITCH BLUE (-)
ANOTHER SIDE OF
(-) (-) LOAD ACTUATOR.
LOAD
Some actuators may require switch

DIMENSIONS mounting
on a specific side of the assembly.
SENSING E Call Tolomatic for details.
SURFACE D
BC
SIZE BORE A B C D E SIZE BORE A B C D E

10 1.000 0.194 0.822 0.906 0.500 1.250 10 25 4.93 20.88 23.01 12.70 31.75
15 1.500 0.160 1.428 1.721 0.500 1.250 15 40 4.06 36.27 43.71 12.70 31.75
20 2.000 0.036 1.994 2.287 0.500 1.250 20 50 0.91 50.65 58.09 12.70 31.75
BC3 _20 1-800-328-2174

3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
BC3 SHOCK ABSORBERS - All Sizes

SHOCK ABSORBERS
Rodless cylinders with standard internal cushion offer an
ORDER CODE effective method of decelerating loads. However, all Tolomatic
AD_ or AH_ or AL_ rodless cylinders are capable of carrying heavier loads at
(_ = Number ordered) higher velocities than the cylinder cushion can absorb. Optional
shock absorbers can be used to increase the cylinder’s life and
broaden the application range for the cylinder model you have
chosen.
Tolomatic offers adjustable shock absorbers for the BC3. They
allow the shock to be positioned at any point along the cylinder.
A shock stop plate must be used in conjunction with the BC3
shock to provide a stopping surface on the carrier.
Typical shock absorber life varies between 1-2 million
cycles (depending on environment) appropriate preventative
maintenance should be considered in high cyclic applications.
DIMENSIONS
G DOWEL HOLE (2)
A
B C
*NOTE: Shock Absorber

option will increase the overall D
carrier height “M”. E F TAPPED HOLE (4)
H J MAX
OPTIONAL K
SHOCK MOUNT L
ØN
M* Q P
SIZE BORE A B C D E F G** H J K L M N P Q

10 1.00 3.93 0.890 1.781 1.562 3.125 1/4-20 x .50DP .252-.251 x .25 3.09 5.47 2.91 2.22 2.223 0.50 2.46 1.964
15 1.50 5.93 1.078 2.156 2.750 5.500 1/4-20 x .50DP .252-.251 x .25 4.00 7.65 4.59 3.59 2.812 0.75 3.06 2.495
20 2.00 6.27 1.563 3.125 2.938 5.875 5/16-18 x .75DP .252-.251 x .69 5.06 8.14 4.88 3.88 3.594 1.00 3.88 3.230
**DOWEL PINS .003 M
SIZE BORE A B C D E F G** H J K L M N P Q

10 25 99.8 22.62 45.24 39.69 79.38 M6-1.0 x 12.7DP 6.05-6.02 x 6.4 78.5 138.9 73.9 56.4 56.46 14.0 62.5 49.89
15 40 150.7 27.38 54.76 69.85 139.70 M6-1.0 x 12.7DP 6.05-6.02 x 6.4 101.6 194.2 116.6 91.2 71.42 20.0 77.7 63.37
20 50 159.3 39.69 79.38 76.62 149.23 M8-1.25 x 19.1DP 6.05-6.02 x 17.5 128.5 206.8 124.0 98.6 91.29 25.4 98.6 82.04
* *DOWEL PINS .076 M Dimensions in millimeters
BC3 Shock Absorbers - All Sizes - PERFORMANCE
VELOCITY vs LOAD
BC310
LOAD (kg)
18.1
27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
.5
13.6
22.7
1.8
4.5
.9
100 2.5
90 2.3
80 2.0
70 1.8
60 1.5

50 1.3

40 1.0
30 .8
20 .5
10 .23 .25
9
8 7 .20
.18
6 .15
5 .13
4 .10
3 .08
2 .05 LIGHT DUTY (Light
load/High velocity)
1 .03
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80 100
LOAD (lbs) HEAVY DUTY (Heavy
load/Low velocity)
BC315
LOAD (kg)
AIR CUSHION DATA
18.1
22.7 27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
1.4
2.3
3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
.5
13.6
90.7
1.8
2.7
4.5
.9
200 5.1
100 2.5
80 90 2.3 2.0
60 70 1.8 1.5
50 1.3
40 1.0
30 .8
20 .5
.25
9 10
7 8 .20 .23
6 .15 .18
5 .13
4 .10
3 .08
2 .05
1 .03
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 200
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80100
LOAD (lbs)
BC320 NOTE: If
LOAD (kg) final (or impact)
136.1
18.1
22.7 27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
velocity cannot be
1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
.5
13.6
90.7
calculated
1.8
4.5
.9
200 5.1
directly, a
100 2.5
80 90 2.3 2.0 reasonable

60 70 1.8 1.5
guideline to use is
50 1.3
40 1.0
30 .80 2 x average
20 .50 velocity.
9 10 .25 .23
7 8 .20 .18
5 6 .15 .13
4 .10
3 .08
2 .05
1 .03
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 200
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80100 300
LOAD (lbs)
BC3 _22 1-800-328-2174


lbf N
LOAD ______________________ in/sec mm/sec
lb kg
MOVE TIME sec. _____________
LOAD CENTER OF dx ______ NO . OF CYCLES _____________
inch millimeters
ORIENTATION
CENTER
CENTER
OF GRAVITY
dz OF GRAVITY
dy
OR
Y
AT
d
d dZ
TU
x
d
R
AC
RIER UATO
ACT IER
x
RIER CAR
CAR
R
Y
UATO
xd
R
CAR dz
ACT
d
CENTER
OF GRAVITY
Lz
Vertical Z
Angled α __________ β
____________ X
Lz
CENTER Z
ACTUATOR
OF GRAVITY
Y FRONT
dx β VIEW
SIDE VIEW
CARRIER
z
d d
α
Y
OTHER ISSUES:
(i.e. Environment,
Temperature,

a load bearing actuator diagonal line, a larger cylinder no internal cushion on the cushion capacity. On high-
considered. auxiliary carrier.) external stops is strongly
be complex . It is highly recommended.
5
assistance in selecting horizontal loads. required between carriers TUBE SUPPORT
3
application . The following DETERMINE • Consult the Tube Support chart
chart). When ordered, for the model selected.
tional purposes only . EFFECT OF the actuator. weight and maximum distance
BENDING between supports.
1
MOMENTS
6
APPLICATION If the cylinder will guide and carriers.
REQUIREMENTS
4
DETERMINE OPTIONS
Band Cylinder or Linear Slide the cylinder selection. INTERNAL or ac Triac
must not exceed the capacity CAPACITY each have different standard
• Available pressure (PSI) limits of the cylinder selected. • Consult the Cushion Data chart
for the model selected. The features and options. Check the
• Orientation of load (lbs or kgs) charts are final or cushion you have selected.
• Velocity of load (in/sec or determine the distance from impact velocities. On • Shock Absorbers– if needed.
• Stroke length (in or mm) bracket. This measurement is used, be sure the actual, final • Floating Mount Bracket – use
HINT: Use Tolomatic sizing and needed to calculate the torque or impact velocity is known. If when lack of parallelism
selection software, download at: for bending moments. (Refer to the velocity is not known, use occurs between the cylinder
tolomatic.com Bending Moment chart for of limit switches with valve and an external guided and
each model.) deceleration circuits or shock supported load.
2
absorbers should be
Should the resulting maximum considered. NOTE: The BC205 • Single End Porting (BC3, BC4)
vs. Pressure charts. carrier/s or a larger cylinder bumpers. • Dual 180° Carrier (BC3)
should be considered.
(or load weight if force is not • Auxiliary Carrier Bending velocity and weight of the load.
operating pressure. If the The auxiliary carrier option diagonal lines, the internal
diagonal line, and if moments increases load carrying be used. If the point falls above
values listed for that model moments. Auxiliary carriers the velocity is not known, use
accommodate the application. an internal piston. (Auxiliary shock absorbers or select a
BC3 _24 1-800-328-2174

The following conditional cylinder. As a rule of thumb,
general guidelines for use of the system is suspected.
Tolomatic actuators. Since all Demanding conditions may
applications have their own require more lubricant.
Tolomatic, Inc. or your local detergent, 20cP @ 140˚F
Tolomatic distributor if an 10-weight lubricant.
the selection process. are +32˚ to +150˚F (+0˚ to
CUSHION NEEDLE 65.5˚C).
ADJUSTMENT (BC2,
LUBRICATION filters will generally keep lubrication. External
GUIDELINES excess moisture in check. lubricants must be
prelubricated at the factory. To premature wear.
ensure maximum actuator life, The factory prelubrication of
be followed. provide optimal
• Filtration use of external lubrication.
the cylinder heads carefully to lubricants to the air supply.
obtain a smooth, hesitation We recommend the use of However, external
lubricators can further Use fluids with ORAL LD50
free deceleration for your dry, filtered air in our toxicity ratings of 35 or
particular application. If there products. “Filtered air” extend service life of
pneumatic actuators if the higher such as Multitherm®
are questions on proper means a level of 10 Micron PG-1 or equivalent.
adjustment, please consult or less. “Dry” means air supply is kept constant.
Tolomatic, Inc. should be free of Oil lubricators, (mist or drop) require a review of the
appreciable amounts of should supply a minimum of application.
moisture. Regular 1 drop per 20 standard

Velocity calculations for all rodless Final (impact)
final (or impact) velocity. Rodless cylinders
final velocity and average velocity. For the stroke. Therefore this acceleration
example: Stroking a 100-inch BC3 model must be considered (see diagram).
VELOCITY
of 100 inches per second. To properly Average

determine the inertial forces for is to use 2 x average velocity.
Start Time End
BC3 APPLICATION GUIDELINES
BC3 DECELERATION CONSIDERATIONS BC3 BEARING LUBRICATION
While the BC3 is capable of carrying very large loads, consid- The bearing system for the BC3 is prelubricated at the factory
eration must be given to how to stop the load at the end of with a high quality No. 2 lithium-soap base grease.
stroke. If Tolomatic cushions or shocks are to be used, please Relubrication is recommended every 10 million linear feet
stay within the specifications on page BC3_22. If you using a lithium-soap base grease for optimal bearing perfor-
should decide to utilize another type of shock absorber, be mance. To relubricate, lift back upper sealing band and apply
sure that the deceleration of the load is smooth and over ade- grease directly to the stationary ball ways. Applications that
quate distance. are exposed to moisture or dirt, may require more frequent
CAUTION: In applications which result in a load bending relubrication.
moment at deceleration, care should be taken to decelerate
the load rather than the carrier of the band cylinder.
PERFORMANCE
BC3 CYLINDER/LOAD DEFLECTION
F
MEASUREMENT DISTANCE: 13"
DEF.
CYLINDER/LOAD DEFLECTION
Mx (N-m)
0 9.03 18.08 27.2 36.16 45.20 54.24 63.27 72.31 81.35 90.39 99.43 108.47 117.51 126.55 135.59 144.63 153.67 162.71 171.74 180.78
.150 3.810
.140 3.556
.130 3.302
.120 3.048
.110 2.794
DEFLECTION (mm)
.100 2.540
DEFLECTION (in.)
.090 2.286
.080 2.032
.070 1.778
.060 1.524
.050 1.270
.040 1.016
.030 .762
.020 .508
.010 .254
.000 .000
0 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 640 720 800 880 960 1040 1120 1200 1280 1360 1440 1520 1600 1680
Mx (in.-lbs.)
BC310: Deflection figures were calculated with the following considerations:
BC315: 1.) Tube supports spaced at mimimum distances for each bore size.
BC320:
2.) Measurement distance from center of carrier is 13 inches.
BC3 _26 1-800-328-2174

Inch (U.S. Standard) SIZE 10 D10 15 D15 20 D20
Foot Mount Kits1 3410-9005 3410-9025 3415-9005 3415-9025 3420-9005 3420-9025
Shock Mount Kit w/ Shock2 – Heavy Duty 3410-9013 3410-9013 3415-9013 3415-9013 3420-9013 3420-9013
Shock Mount Kit w/ Shock2 – Lite Duty 3410-9010 3410-9010 3415-9010 3415-9010 3420-9010 3420-9010
Shock Mount Kit w/o Shock3 (Hardware Only) 3410-9003 3410-9003 3415-9003 3415-9003 3420-9003 3420-9003
Shock Stop Plate Kit4 3410-9004 3410-9004 3415-9004 3415-9004 3420-9004 3420-9004
Tube Supports5 3410-9006 3410-9026 3415-9006 3415-9026 3420-9006 3420-9026
Repair Kit6 RKBC310NP RKBC3D10NP RKBC315NP RKBC3D15NP RKBC320NP RKBC3D20NP
Metric SIZE 10 10D 15 15D 20 20D

Foot Mount Kits1 4410-9005 4410-9025 4415-9005 4415-9025 4420-9005 4420-9025
Shock Mount Kit w/ Shock2 – Heavy Duty 4410-9013 4410-9013 4415-9013 4415-9013 4420-9013 4420-9013
Shock Mount Kit w/ Shock2 – Lite Duty 4410-9010 4410-9010 4415-9010 4415-9010 4420-9010 4420-9010
Shock Mount Kit w/o Shock3 (Hardware Only) 4410-9003 4410-9003 4415-9003 4415-9003 4420-9003 4420-9003
Shock Stop Plate Kit4 4410-9004 4410-9004 4415-9004 4415-9004 4420-9004 4420-9004
Tube Supports5 4410-9006 4410-9026 4415-9006 4415-9026 4420-9006 4420-9026
Repair Kit6 RKBC310TP(GP) RKBC310DTP(GP) RKBC315TP(GP) RKBC315DTP(GP) RKBC320TP(GP) RKBC320DTP(GP)

DESCRIPTION CODE 1 Foot Mount Kit contains one bracket and mounting hardware.
Switch Kit, Reed, Form C, 5m BT 2 Shock Field Retrofit Kit contains one shock absorber and mount-
Switch Kit, Reed, Form C, Male Conn. BM ing hardware.
Switch Kit, Reed, Form A, 5m RT 3 Shock Field Mount Kit contains one set of mounting hardware.
Switch Kit, Reed, Form A, Male Conn. RM
Switch Kit, Triac, 5m CT 4 Shock Stop Plate Kit contains shock plate, impact bolts, screws
Switch Kit, Triac, Male Conn. CM and dowel pins.
Switch Kit, Hall-effect, Sinking, 5m KT 5 Contains one tube support and mounting hardware.
Switch Kit, Hall-effect, Sinking, Male Conn. KM
6 Repair Kit contains external dust band, internal seal band, wipers,
Switch Kit, Hall-effect, Sourcing, 5m TT
end caps and internal soft seals. Stroke length must be indicated
Switch Kit, Hall-effect, Sourcing, Male Conn. TM after repair kit code.
NOTE: When kit is ordered female connector & all mounting hardware is
included
Switch Ordering NOTES:

To order field retrofit switch and hardware kits for all Tolo-
matic actuators: SW (Then the model and bore size, and type
of switch required)
Example: SW B C 3 1 5 RT
(Hardware and Form A Reed switch with 5 meter lead for 1.5"
bore BC3 band cylinder)
BC3 10 D NP SK100.250 DW6.0 TS3 FM2 AH2 BM2
MODEL & MOUNTING AUXILIARY CARRIER (BC3_16) SHOCK ABSORBERS (BC3_21)

BC3 BC3 Band Cylinder DW Auxiliary carrier With *AD_ Shock hardware Only and
_ _._ _ “D” Distance between *AH_ Shock, Heavy duty and
BORE SIZE carriers “D” Distance number required
10 1.00" (25mm) between carriers in *AL_ Shock, Light duty and
15 1.50" (40mm) inches (SK) or number required
20 2.00" (50mm) millimeters (SM) *NOTE: When shock absorbers are
(Same unit of measure as stroke length is required)
ordered cushion seals are removed.
MINIMUM “D” DISTANCE
DUAL 180° CARRIER (BC3_14) BETWEEN CARRIERS
D Dual 180° Carrier Option with Piston
in mm SWITCHES (BC3_19)
10 4.88 124.0
LEAD LENGTH
DISCONNECT
MOUNTING & PORTS 15 8.07 205.0
QUANTITY
NP US standard mounting 20 8.10 205.7
QUICK-
& NPT ports
CODE
TP† Metric mounting with When ordering auxiliary carrier TYPE
metric taper port option, enter the distance
required between carriers. The QD RM

GP† Metric mounting with configurator will calculate the overall Form A
no RT
REED
metric parallel port length of the actuator.
QD BM
† The metric version provides metric tapped holes Form C
no BT
for mounting of the load to the carrier and of the
5 meters
TUBE SUPPORTS (BC3_12) QD KM
HALL-EFFECT
actuator to mounting surfaces & metric ports Sinking
TS_ Tube Support & number no KT
required
STROKE LENGTH & MOUNTING TYPE QD TM
Sourcing
SK _ _ . _ _ Stroke, enter desired no TT
Each TS includes two (2) tube
stroke length in inches support halves QD CM
SM† _ _ . _ _ Stroke, enter desired TRIAC
no CT
stroke length in
millimeters
NOTE: Actuator mounting threads and mounting T-NUTS
fasteners will be either inch or metric; TN_ additional T-Nuts
depending on how stroke length is indicated. (see individual dimensional
SK = inch mounting drawings for sizes)
SM = metric mounting
MAXIMUM STROKE
...SK ...SM
SIZE in mm FOOT MOUNT (BC3_13)
10 205 5,207 FM_ Foot Mount & number 1 WEEK
15 202 5,130 required (1 or 2) BUILT-TO-ORDER
20 142 3,606
NOTE: Prelubrication is standard on all Not all codes listed are compati-
BC3 Band Cylinders (see Application ble with all options. Contact
Guidelines on page BC3_25) Tolomatic with any questions.
BC3 _28 1-800-328-2174

BC4 INTERNAL BEARING
RODLESS CYLINDER
CONTENTS
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_2
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_4
BC406 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_6
BC410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_8
BC412 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_10
BC415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_12
Long Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_14
Single End Porting . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_18
Foot Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_19
Tube Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_20
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_22
Shock Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_24
Application Data Worksheet . . . . BC4_26
Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_27
Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . BC4_28
Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_29
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_30
The BC4 was designed in response to customer requests

for a basic rodless cylinder for use in applications that have
LOAD-SUPPORTING BEARING DESIGN guidance and support for the load. The BC4 features durable
• Self-lubricating stainless steel bands, field replaceable engineered bearings
bearing runs the and a large carrier mounting pattern. Built-to-order in stroke
length of carrier lengths up to 206 inches.
web for max
imum bearing
surface, this
patented floating
bearing system
provides smooth
movement and
maximum transverse load resistance
• Durable, engineered resin piston has 50% greater
bearing area
• Thicker and longer web has 60% greater material for
increased robustness
• Maximum bearing life for millions of cycles
STAINLESS STEEL SEALING BAND SYSTEM

• Fatigue resistant stainless steel
bands are specifically made to
provide longer life and will not
elongate, like elastomers
• Outer band keeps out
contaminants for extended
performance
FORMED END CAP WIPER SEAL
• Inner band provides
• Keeps contaminants from entering the sealing area a smooth surface
• Protects internal components for less seal wear
• Reduces maintenance while increasing productivity
BC4_2 1-800-328-2174
ADJUSTABLE CUSHIONS
• Adjustable cushions are standard,
not optional
• Easy screw adjustment for end-of-
stroke deceleration
• Protects actuator and load from
damage
OPTIONS
AUXILIARY CARRIER
RIGID CLEAR-ANODIZED • Substantially higher bending moment capacity
EXTRUDED ALUMINUM TUBE
• Stronger, stiffer tube retains tolerance
specifications when chamber is LONG CARRIER
• Substantially higher My and Mz bending
pressurized moment capacity
• Keeps sealing band in place for • Larger load bearing mounting surface
maximized air efficiency
• Tube supports are minimized FLOATING MOUNT
• Solid structural support provides • Compensates for non-parallelism between band
durability and long life performance cylinder and externally guided load
TUBE SUPPORT MOUNTS

• Used for intermediate support
FOOT MOUNTS
SHOCK ABSORBERS
• Smooth deceleration, higher productivity
• Allows increased operating speed
SINGLE END PORTING

SWITCHES
• 15ft. cable with flying leads; available with
quick-disconnect couplers
BC4 Internal Bearing Rodless Cylinder
PERFORMANCE
BC4 THEORETICAL FORCE BC4 MAX. LOAD
vs PRESSURE
PRESSURE (Bars) STANDARD ACTUATOR
.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.4 4.2 4.8 5.6 6.2 6.9 MAX. LOAD (Fz)
200 91
200 91
15
BC4
100 45
12
BC4
KILOGRAMS
80 36
POUNDS
100 45
60 27
10
BC4
40 18
0 0
06
BC406
BC410
BC412
BC415
20
BC4 9.1
FORCE (kg)
FORCE (lb)
AUXILIARY CARRIER OPTION

10 4.5 MAX. LOAD (Fz)
400 181
8 3.6
6 2.7
300 136
KILOGRAMS
4 1.8
POUNDS
200 91
100 45
2 .91
0 0
BC406DW
BC410DW
BC412DW
BC415DW
1 .45
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PRESSURE (PSI)
BC4_4 1-800-328-2174
PERFORMANCE
STANDARD ACTUATOR
My BENDING MOMENTS Mx BENDING MOMENTS Mz BENDING MOMENTS
2000 226 2000 226 2000 226
1000 124 1000 124 1000 124

800 90 800 90 800 90
600 67.8 600 67.8 600 67.8
400 45.2 400 45.2 400 45.2
200 22.6 200 22.6 200 22.6
100 11.3 100 11.3 100 11.3

80 9.0 80 9.0 80 9.0
60 6.8 60 6.8 60 6.8
in-lbs
in-lbs
in-lbs
N-m
N-m
N-m
40 4.5 40 4.5 40 4.5
20 2.3 20 2.3 20 2.3
10 1.1 10 1.1 10 1.1

8 .90 8 .90 8 .90
6 .68 6 .68 6 .68
4 .45 4 .45 4 .45
2 .23 2 .23 2 .23
1 .11 1 .11 1 .11

BC406
BC410
BC412
BC415
BC406
BC410
BC412
BC415
BC406
BC410
BC412
BC415
AUXILIARY CARRIER & LONG CARRIER OPTIONS
My BENDING MOMENTS Mx BENDING MOMENTS Mz BENDING MOMENTS
4000 452 4000 452 4000 452
2000 226 2000 226 2000 226
1000 124 1000 124 1000 124

800 90 800 90 800 90
600 67.8 600 67.8 600 67.8
400 45.2 400 45.2 400 45.2
200 22.6 200 22.6 200 22.6
100 11.3 100 11.3 100 11.3

80 9.0 80 9.0 80 9.0
in-lbs
in-lbs
in-lbs
60 60 60
N-m
N-m
N-m
6.8 6.8 6.8
40 4.5 40 4.5 40 4.5
20 2.3 20 2.3 20 2.3
10 1.1 10 1.1 10 1.1

8 .90 8 .90 8 .90
6 .68 6 .68 6 .68
4 .45 4 .45 4 .45
2 .23 2 .23 2 .23
1 .11 1 .11 1 .11
BC406DW
BC4L10
BC410DW
BC4L12
BC412DW
BC4L15
BC415DW
BC406DW
BC4L10
BC410DW
BC4L12
BC412DW
BC4L15
BC415DW
BC406DW
BC4L10
BC410DW
BC4L12
BC412DW
BC4L15
BC415DW
PERFORMANCE
PRESSURE (bar)
6.9
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.4
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.2
.7
35 15.9
30 13.6
25 11.3
FORCE (lbs)
FORCE (kg)
20 9.1

Floating Mount Bracket BC4_21 10 4.5
Foot Mounts BC4_19
Long Carrier BC4_14
Shock Absorbers BC4_24 5 2.3
Switches BC4_22
Tube Supports BC4_20 0 0
MORE INFORMATION Page 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Cushion Needle Adjustment BC4_28 PRESSURE (PSI)
Ordering BC4_30
Selection BC4_27

CUSHION DATA 1066.8
1828.8
1219.2
1371.6
1676.4
914.4
609.6
762.0
152.4
304.8
457.2
1524
33 14.9
0
LOAD (kg)
18.1
27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
30 Maximum Allowable Load

1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
13.6
.5
13.6
22.7
1.8
4.5
27
.9
12.2
100 2.5
90 80 2.3 24 10.9
2.0
70 60 1.8
1.5
21
50 1.3 9.5
LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
30
40 1.0
.8 18 8.2 LOAD WEIGHT (kg)
20 .5 15 6.8
10 9 .25 12 5.4
.23 .20
8 .18
7 .15 9 4.1
6
5 .13
4 .10 6 2.7
3 .08
3 1.4
2 .05
0 0
1 .03 0 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 Max Distance Between Supports (in) “L”
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80 100
LOAD (lbs) W
L L
BC4_6 1-800-328-2174
BC406 Internal Bearing Rodless Cylinder 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com

3.912
.627 [99.36mm]
[15.93mm] 1.250
[31.75mm]
1.180 .558
[29.97mm] [14.17mm]
#6-32 X .22 DP (4)

.590 [M3x0.5 X 6mm DP]
[14.99mm]
STROKE + 6.286
[159.66mm]
3.143 3.143
[79.83mm] STROKE [79.83mm]
OPP SIDE OF HEAD
SHOWN BELOW
.300
1.741 [7.62mm]
[44.22mm]
1.350
[34.29mm]
.473
[12.01mm]
#10-32 X .25 DP .137
[M5x0.8 X 6mm DP] [3.48mm] #10-32 X .25 DP
[M5X0.8 X 6mm DP]
.750 .380
[19.05mm] #10-32 X .25 DP [9.65mm]
[M5x0.8 X 6mm DP]
.380
.313 .375 [9.65mm]
[7.95mm] [9.52mm] #6-32 X .25 DP (4)
[M3X0.5 X 6mm DP]
.625 1.171 1.000
[15.87mm] .695 [29.74mm] [25.40mm]
.383 .583 .873
[9.73mm] [17.65mm] [14.81mm] [22.17mm]
.205 OPTIONAL NUT .750

[5.21mm] .500 [19.05mm] .128 #10-32 X .25 DP
[12.70mm] .31 CENTERED [3.25mm] [M5X0.8 X 6mm DP]
.290 [7.9mm]
[7.37mm] .11
[2.8mm]
.540 .31
[13.72mm] [7.9mm]
1.080
[27.43mm] 6-32 Thru
[M3 x .5 Thru]
SPECIFICATIONS
U.S. 0.625 in 35 in-lbs 3.0 in-lbs 5.0 in-lbs 30.0 lbs

BORE SIZE
U.S. 0.625 in 0.68 lb 0.063 lb/in 206 in 100 PSI 20° to 140° F
PERFORMANCE
PRESSURE (bar)
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.4
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.2
6.9
.7
80 36.3
70 31.7
60 27.2
FORCE (lbs)
50 22.7
FORCE (kg)
40 18.1

Floating Mount Bracket BC4_21 20 9.1
Foot Mounts BC4_19
Long Carrier BC4_14 10 4.5
Single End Porting BC4_18 0 0
Switches BC4_22 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
MORE INFORMATION Page PRESSURE (PSI)
Ordering BC4_30 TUBE SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS
Selection BC4_27
Max Distance Between Supports (mm) “L” 1219.2
2133.6
2438.4
2743.2
1828.8
609.6
304.8
914.4
1524
CUSHION DATA
0
66 29.7
60 27.2
LOAD (kg) 57 25.8
18.1
27.2
36.3
40.8 45.4
54 24.5
1.4
2.3
3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
.5
51 23.1
13.6
22.7
31.7
1.8
2.7
4.5
48 21.8
.9
100 2.5 45 20.4

90 2.3
LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
80 2.0 1.8 42 19.0

LOAD WEIGHT (kg)
70 60 1.5 39 17.6
50 1.3
40 1.0 36 16.3
30 .7 33 14.9
30 13.6
20 .5 27 12.2
24 10.9
10 9 .25
.23 .20
21 9.5
8 18 8.2
7 .18
6 .15 15 6.8
5 .13
4 .10 12 5.4
3 .08 9 4.1
2 .05 6 2.7
3 1.4
0 0
0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108
1 .03
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 Max Distance Between Supports (in) “L”
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80 100
W
LOAD (lbs)
L L
BC4_8 1-800-328-2174
www.tolomatic.com

#10-24UNC 2.00 (50.8)

x .30 DEEP [4] 0.41 0.822
(M5 x 0.8 x 6 DP [4]) 1.00 (20.88)
(25.4) (10.4)
0.92
(23.4)
1.85
(47.0)
0.90
(22.9) 5.03 (127.8)
STROKE + 7.88 (200.2)

3.94 (100.1) STROKE 3.94 (100.1)
1.39
2.01 (35.3)
(51.1)
2.39 0.23
(60.7) 0.999 (5.8)
(25.4)
OPTIONAL SINGLE
1/8 NPTF [3] END PORTING
(M 1/8 BSPT [3]) 0.34 0.55 1/8 NPTF [2] 0.34
(MM 1/8 BSPP [3]) (8.6) (14.0) 0.92 (8.6)
1.25 (23.4) (M 1/8 BSPT [3])
(31.8) 1.10 (MM 1/8 BSPP [3])
0.63 (27.9)
0.71 (16.0) 0.55
(18.0) (14.0)
1.21
(30.7)
17 (2) 1.10
TIC
TO L
1.74 - O - MA (27.9)
10-24 (M5-0.8) TAPPED HOLE THRU (44.2) 10-24 UNC
x .43
CENTERED ON 0.75 (19.1) DEEP [4]
0.55 (M5 x 0.8 x
OPTIONAL 0.281 (14.0) 10 DP[4]) 0.55
NUT FOR (7.14) 0.88 (14.0)
SLOTS 0.75 0.25 (22.4)
(19.1) (6.4) 1.10 1/8 NPTF [3] 1.10
(27.9) (M 1/8 BSPT [3]) (27.9)
1.76 (MM 1/8 BSPP [3])
(44.7)
SPECIFICATIONS
U.S. 1.00 in 132 in-lbs 9 in-lbs 27.0 in-lbs 65 lbs

BORE SIZE
PERFORMANCE
PRESSURE (bar)
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.4
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.2
6.9
90.7
.7
200
79.4
175
68.0
150
56.7
FORCE (lbs)
FORCE (kg)
125
45.4
100
34.0
75
BC412 OPTIONS Page 22.7
Floating Mount Bracket BC4_21
Foot Mounts BC4_19
11.3
25
Long Carrier BC4_14
0
Single End Porting BC4_18 90 100
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Switches BC4_22
Tube Supports BC4_20 PRESSURE (PSI)
Cushion Needle Adjustment BC4_28 TUBE SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS
Ordering BC4_30
Selection BC4_27
1219.2
1828.8
2133.6
2438.4
304.8
609.6
914.4
120 1524 54.4

CUSHION DATA Maximum
110 Allowable 49.9
LOAD (kg) Load
100 45.4
18.1
27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
.5
90 40.8
1.81
13.6
22.7
90.7
4.5
.9
100 2.5 80 36.3

LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
LOAD WEIGHT (kg)

80 90 2.3 2.0
60 70 1.8 1.5 70 31.7
50 1.3
40 1.0
60 27.2
30 .8
20 .5 50 22.7
40 18.1
10 .3
9 .23 13.6
7 8 .20 .18 30
6 .15 .13
5 20 9.1
4 .10
3 .08 10 4.5
2 .05 0
0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 200
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80 100 W
LOAD (lbs)
L L
BC4_10 1-800-328-2174
www.tolomatic.com

5.21 (132.3)
1.75 (44.4)
1.33 2.60 (66.0)
(33.8) 0.88
0.71 0.38 (22.4)
(18.0) (9.7)
1.42 0.75
(36.1) (19.0)
1.19
(30.2)
1/4-20 X .375 DP [4]

(M6-1 X 10 DP [4])
STROKE + 9.73 (247.1)
4.87 (123.7) STROKE 4.87 (123.7)
3.06 0.336
(77.7) (8.53)
2.61
(66.3)
1.05
(26.7)
Ø .19 (4.8) THRU TO BORE OPTIONAL SINGLE 1/4 NPTF [2]
END PORTING (M 1/4 BSPT [2]) 0.33
1/4-18 NPTF BOTH SIDES (8.4) 0.66
(M 1/4-19 BSPT BOTH SIDES) (MM 1/4 BSPP [2]) (16.8)
(MM 1/4-19 BSPP BOTH SIDES) 1/4-20 X .47 DP [4]
(M6-1 X 12 DP [4]) 0.44 (11.2)
0.84 0.61
(21.3) 2.14 (15.5)
(54.4)
1.62
T0L
T IC
-0-MA (41.1)
10.00° 1.45 1/4-18 NPTF
(36.8) (M 1/4-19 BSPT)
0.281 (MM 1/4-19 BSPP)
10-24 (M5-0.8) TAPPED HOLE THRU (7.14) 0.58 (14.7)
CENTERED ON 0.75 (19.1) 0.90 1.19 (30.2)
0.63 (22.9) 0.11
OPTIONAL (16.0) 0.81 (20.6) (2.8)
NUT FOR 1.08 1.62 (41.1)
SLOTS (27.4)
0.75 0.25 1.53 2.38 (60.5)
(19.1) (6.4) (38.9)
2.16 (54.9)
SPECIFICATIONS

PERFORMANCE
PRESSURE (bar)
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.4
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.2
6.9
90.7
.7
200
79.4
175
68.0
150
56.7
FORCE (lbs)
FORCE (kg)
125
45.4
100
34.0
75
BC415 OPTIONS Page
22.7
Floating Mount Bracket BC4_21
Foot Mounts BC4_19 11.3
25
Long Carrier BC4_14
Single End Porting BC4_18 0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Switches BC4_22
Tube Supports BC4_20 PRESSURE (PSI)
Cushion Needle Adjustment BC4_28 TUBE SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS
Ordering BC4_30
1219.2
1828.8
2133.6
2438.4
2743.2
304.8
609.6
914.4
1524
3048
200 90.1
180 81.6
LOAD (kg) 170 77.1
160 72.6
18.1
27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
.5
150 68.0
1.81
13.6
22.7
90.7
63.5
4.5
140
.9
100 2.5 130 58.9

80 90 2.3 2.0
LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
120 54.4
LOAD WEIGHT (kg)
60 70 1.8 1.5
110 49.9
50 1.3
40 1.0 100 45.4
30 .8 90 40.8
20 .5 80 36.3
70 31.7
10 .3 60 27.2
9 .23 50 22.7
7 8 .20 .18
6 .15 .13 40 18.1
5 13.6
4 .10 30
3 .08 20 9.1
.05 10 4.5
2
0
0 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 200
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80 100
W
LOAD (lbs)
L L
BC4_12 1-800-328-2174
www.tolomatic.com

6.28 (159.5)
3.00 (76.2) 1.00
1.25 (25.4)
1.50 0.50
(31.8) (38.1) (12.7)
1.34
(34.0)
1/4-20 X .375 DP [4]

(M6-1 X 10 DP [4])
STROKE + 11.81 (300.0)
5.88 (149.4) STROKE 5.88 (149.4)
1/4 NPTF [3]
(M 1/4 BSPT [3])
(MM 1/4 BSPP [3])
2.99
(75.9) 0.79
3.56 (20.1)
(90.4)
1.20 1.20
(30.5) (30.5)
OPTIONAL SINGLE END PORTING
1/4-18 NPTF [3] 0.58
(M 1/4-19 BSPT [3]) 0.56 (14.2) (14.7)
(MM 1/4-19 BSPP [3])
0.78 0.96 0.68
(19.8) (24.4) (17.3)
1.64 1/4 NPTF 1.81 3.02
TIC
T0L
(41.7) (M 1/4 BSPT) - 0 - MA (46.0) (76.7)
2.61 (MM 1/4 BSPP)
(66.3)
0.313 0.70
1/4-20 (M6-1) TAPPED HOLE THRU 1/4-20 X .47 DP [4] (17.8)
(7.95) (M6-1 X 12 DP [4])
CENTERED ON 0.94 (23.9) 0.74 0.53
OPTIONAL (18.8) 1.36 (34.5) (13.5)
1.30 0.91
NUT FOR (23.1) 1/4 NPTF OPT.
SLOTS (33.0) (M 1/4 BSPT OPT.)
0.94 0.25 1.86 (47.2) 1.81 (46.0)
(23.9) (6.4) (MM 1/4 BSPP OPT.)
2.60 (66.0) 2.72 (69.1)
SPECIFICATIONS

BC4 Long Carrier - All Sizes 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com
Long Carrier Option
ORDER Long carrier option greatly increases the “My”
CODE and “Mz” moment load capacity. This broadens the
L application range for these models. Other benefits include
larger mounting surface and virtual elimination of chatter for
BC4 vertical cantilever loads.
(Standard
Carrier)
BC4L
(Long Carrier) NOTE: Not available for BC406 / BC4M06 size
DIMENSIONS A
B
C D
E (8)
STROKE + F
G
BORE A B* C* D E F§ G
L10 1.00 8.03 4.75 2.00 0.82 #10-24 x .30 DP 10.63 5.31
L12 1.25 8.53 5.00 1.75 0.75 1/4-20 x .38 DP 13.06 6.53
L15 1.50 10.53 7.00 3.00 1.00 1/4-20 x .38 DP 15.75 7.88
BORE A B* C* D E F§ G
L10 25 204.0 120.7 50.8 20.9 M5 x 0.8 x 6DP 270.0 134.9
L12 32 216.7 127.0 44.5 19.1 M6 x 1.0 x 10DP 331.7 165.8
L15 40 267.5 177.8 76.2 25.4 M6 x 1.0 x 10DP 400.1 200.0
*Not the same as standard BC4 carrier Dimensions in millimeters
§Actuatoris longer than with standard BC4 carrier
BC4_14 1-800-328-2174
BC4 Long Carrier - All Sizes
1000 113.0
PERFORMANCE My
800 90.4
BENDING MOMENT
LONG CARRIER
600 STANDARD 67.8
(in-lbs)
(N-m)
400 45.2
200 22.6
0 0
BC410 BC412 BC415
1000 113.0
My 300 Mz 33.9
800 90.4
BENDING MOMENT
BENDING MOMENT
LONG CARRIER 250 LONG CARRIER 28.2
600 STANDARD 67.8 200 STANDARD 22.6
(in-lbs)
(in-lbs)
(N-m)
(N-m)
150 16.9
400 45.2
100 11.3
200 22.6
50 5.6
0 0 0 0
BC410 BC412 BC415 BC410 BC412 BC415
300 BORE Mz My (Standard)

MAXIMUM
My (Long)
33.9 BENDING MOMENT
Mx† Mz (Standard) Mz (Long)
MAX. LOAD
Fz†
SIZE
BENDING MOMENT
250 LONG CARRIER 28.2

L10 1.00 in 132 in.-lbs. 230 in.-lbs. 9 in.-lbs. 27 in.-lbs. 54 in.-lbs. 65 lbs.
200
L12 1.25STANDARD
in 318 in.-lbs. 22.6
583 in.-lbs. 36 in.-lbs. 120 in.-lbs. 161 in.-lbs. 115 lbs.
(in-lbs)
(N-m)
L15 1.50 in 575 in.-lbs. 1003 in.-lbs. 55 in.-lbs. 156 in.-lbs. 312 in.-lbs. 195 lbs.
150 16.9
100 11.3
50 5.6
0 BORE MAXIMUM
0 BENDING MOMENT MAX. LOAD
BC410
SIZE
BC412
My (Standard)
BC415
My (Long) Mx† Mz (Standard) Mz (Long) Fz†
L10 25mm 14.91 N-m 25.99 N-m 1.02 N-m 0.33 N-m 6.10 N-m 29.48 kg
†Mx Bending Moment and Fz (Maximum Load)
are the same for Standard and Long Carrier BC4.
BC4 Auxiliary Carrier - All Sizes 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com
AUXILIARY CARRIER ORDERING INFORMATION

Moments chart).
ORDER CODE
DW
(Auxiliary Carrier with piston)
The auxiliary carrier option substantially increases load carrying

and bending moments capacity over the standard single
carrier models. As a general rule, the auxiliary carrier option Determine your working stroke and your “D” dimension,
is highly recommended in vertical applications (My) if the then enter these into your configuration string. (Example:
distance from the carrier mounting surface to the load center BC415SK50.00DW15.00RT2) The configurator will calculate
of gravity (CG) exceeds the overall length of the carrier. For the overall length of the actuator.
the BC4 auxiliary carriers can only be ordered with “DW” an
internal piston. (BC2 & BC3 auxiliary carriers may be ordered
“DO” without a piston.)

auxiliary carrier.
DIMENSIONS
CL CL
CC + “D” + STROKE
BB “D” (Min.)
“D” MINIMUM
BORE SIZE BB CC
(with Piston)
06 0.625 16 3.15 79.9 6.30 159.8 4.26 108.2
10 1.00 25 3.94 100.2 7.88 200.4 5.30 134.6
12 1.25 32 4.87 123.7 9.74 247.4 6.23 158.2
15 1.50 40 5.88 149.4 11.81 300.0 8.00 203.2
BC4_16 1-800-328-2174
BC4 Auxiliary Carrier - All Sizes
PERFORMANCE
BENDING MOMENTS
"D" DISTANCE BETWEEN CARRIERS (mm)

102
152
203
254
305
356
406
457
508
102
152
203
254
305
356
406
457
508
4,000 452 800 90
3,500 “Mya” 395 700 “Mza” 79
Bending Bending
Moment Moment
3,000 339 600 68
415
BC
15
57
BC4
282 500
BENDING MOMENTS (in-lbs)
2,500
BENDING MOMENTS (in-lbs)
412
BENDING MOMENTS (N-m)
BENDING MOMENTS (N-m)

BC
2,000 226 400 45
1,500 169 300 34

412
0
C41
BC
B
Rates were
calculated with
1,000 113 the following 200 23
10 assumptions:
BC4 1.) Coupling
between carriers is
rigid. BC406
2.) Load is equally 11
500 56 distributed 100
BC406
between carriers.
3.) Coupling
device applies no
misalignment
loads to carriers. 0
0 0 0
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
"D" DISTANCE BETWEEN CARRIERS (in)
MAX. BENDING
“D” MINIMUM * MAX. LOAD
BORE SIZE MOMENT
(with Piston) Mx Fz
in mm in mm in-lbs N-m lbs kg
06 0.625 16 4.26 108.2 6 0.68 60 27.0
10 1.00 25 5.30 134.5 18 2.03 130 59.0
12 1.25 32 6.23 158.2 72 8.13 230 104.0
15 1.50 40 8.00 203.2 110 12.43 390 176.9
* “D” is distance between carriers “D” is
distance
between
carriers.
BC4 Single End Porting - 10, 12, 15 Sizes
Single End Porting SINGLE END PORTING ALLOWS THE GREATEST FLEXIBILITY
IN AIR HOOK UP.
ORDER CODE
This option allows you to run air lines to just one end of the
HD
BC4, simplifying air hook up. The Single End Porting option
for the BC410 is factory installed on the right side.
Not available for 06 (5/8" bore).
AIR FLOW DIAGRAMS

Main Main
Port Port
PISTON
Cross Cross
Port Standard Porting Port
(cross ports not functional)
Main Main
Port Port

inserted removed
Cross Cross
Port Ported From Left Side Port
Main Main
Port Port

removed inserted
Cross Cross
Port Ported From Right Side Port
Open Plugged
NOTE: Standard porting may be field converted to ported from left or ported from right.
For complete instructions refer to parts sheet.
BC4_18 1-800-328-2174
BC4 Foot Mounts - ALL Sizes 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com
FOOT MOUNT
For mounting other than flush. Foot mounts may be specified
on one or both ends of the cylinder.
ORDER CODE
FM_
DIMENSIONS
06, 10, 12, 15 Q
U
N
MK
R P J
H F
G A
T0L
T IC
-0-MA E
B
T S
L D
C
BORE A A
SIZE MIN. MAX. B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U
06 0.625 1.87 1.87 0.90 0.75 0.38 1.00 0.97 0.36 — 1.18 1.00 0.59 0.50 0.25 Ø .15 Thru (2) 0.70 0.30 0.38 0.06 0.25
10 1.00 2.19 2.54 0.98 1.10 0.55 1.10 1.21 0.55 10-24 0.43 1.85 1.60 0.92 1.00 0.50 Ø .27 Thru (2) 1.00 0.28 0.98 0.19 0.30
12 1.25 2.93 3.20 1.46 1.62 0.81 1.62 1.47 0.61 1/4-20 0.47 2.38 2.25 1.19 1.50 0.75 Ø .28 Thru (2) 1.00 0.40 1.00 0.19 0.38
15 1.50 3.38 3.83 1.64 1.81 0.91 1.81 1.74 0.68 1/4-20 0.47 2.72 2.50 1.36 1.50 0.75 Ø .28 Thru (2) 1.25 0.55 1.25 0.19 0.50
BORE A A
SIZE MIN. MAX. B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U
06 16 47.5 47.5 22.9 19.1 9.7 25.4 24.6 9.1 — 30.0 25.4 15.0 12.7 6.3 Ø 3.8 Thru (2) 17.8 7.6 9.7 1.5 6.35
10 25 55.6 64.5 24.9 27.9 14.0 27.9 30.8 14.0 M5 10 47.0 40.6 23.4 25.4 12.7 Ø 6.9 Thru (2) 25.4 7.0 24.9 4.8 7.62
12 32 74.3 81.3 37.1 41.1 20.6 41.1 37.3 15.5 M6 12 60.5 57.1 30.2 38.1 19.1 Ø 7.1 Thru (2) 25.4 10.2 25.4 4.8 9.65
15 40 85.9 97.3 41.7 46.0 23.1 46.0 44.2 17.3 M6 12 69.1 63.5 34.5 38.1 19.1 Ø 7.1 Thru (2) 31.8 14.0 31.8 4.8 12.70
BC4 Tube Supports - ALL Sizes 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com
TUBE SUPPORT Made of anodized aluminum, BC4 tube supports are
designed to attach to T-nuts inside the grooves which run
the length of the cylinder tube. Refer to the tube support
ORDER CODE graph to determine the number of tube supports required.
TS_
(_ = Number ordered) NOTE: Switches cannot be mounted on the same face
of the actuator as tube supports.
PERFORMANCE DIMENSIONS
Max Distance Between Supports (m) “L”
0.51
1.02
1.52
2.03
2.54
3.05
0
200 91
15
T IC
T0L
-0- A
M
150 68
A
LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
LOAD WEIGHT (kg)
12 B
100 45 C
D E
F
G
10
50 23
J
06 H
K L
0 0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Max Distance Between Supports (in.) “L”

W
M
L L
BORE
SIZE A B C D E F G H J K L M
06 0.625 0.12 1.69 1.38 0.84 0.69 0.50 0.25 0.75 1.00 1.50 2.00 Ø .15 Thru (4)
10 1.00 0.19 2.75 2.25 1.38 1.13 1.10 0.55 0.50 0.88 1.00 1.75 Ø .23 Thru (4)
12 1.25 0.30 3.50 2.84 1.75 1.42 0.90 0.45 0.50 1.00 1.00 2.00 Ø .28 Thru (4)
15 1.50 0.19 3.75 3.15 1.88 1.58 1.13 0.56 0.63 1.25 1.25 2.50 Ø .28 Thru (4)
BORE
SIZE A B C D E F G H J K L M
06 16 3.2 41.7 34.9 21.4 17.5 12.7 6.4 19.1 25.4 38.1 50.8 Ø 3.9 Thru (4)
10 25 4.8 69.9 57.1 35.1 28.7 27.9 14.0 12.7 22.2 25.4 44.4 Ø 5.8 Thru (4)
12 32 7.6 88.9 72.1 44.4 38.1 22.9 11.4 12.7 25.4 25.4 50.8 Ø 7.1 Thru (4)
15 40 4.8 95.3 80.0 47.8 40.1 28.7 14.2 16.0 31.8 31.8 63.5 Ø 7.1 Thru (4)
BC4_20 1-800-328-2174
www.tolomatic.com
FLOATING MOUNT BRACKET
For applications where a BC4 band cylinder is moving a load
that is externally guided and supported. An externally guided
load, not parallel to the BC4 band cylinder may result in
cylinder binding. The floating mount bracket compensates for
nonparallelism between the cylinder and the external guide.
(Floating mount brackets are not to be used in conjunction

with shock absorbers)
ORDER CODE
FL
L
K DIMENSIONS
N 06, 10, 12, 15
M A
Please Note: For Dimension “E” B
S and BC410 use 2 center holes
ØRBC406 C D E
BC412 and BC415 use 4 corner holes
G
T F
H
K
L MAX. HEIGHT
M N P J
øR S
T
C
T0L
- 0- A
TI
BORE
SIZE A B C D E F G H J K L M N P ØR S T
06 0.625 0.90 0.50 0.25 0.45 Ø .17 Thru (2) — 0.63 — 0.33 1.27 0.81 0.18 0.63 0.38 0.25 0.72 2.18
10 1.00 1.26 0.63 0.32 0.63 Ø .22 Thru (2) — 0.82 — 0.33 1.64 1.00 0.18 0.82 0.56 0.38 1.01 3.04
12 1.25 1.50 0.75 0.37 0.75 Ø .28 Thru (4) 0.50 1.09 1.00 0.44 2.18 1.50 0.41 1.09 0.99 0.44 1.49 4.10
15 1.50 1.50 0.75 0.38 0.75 Ø .28 Thru (4) 0.63 1.24 1.25 0.52 2.48 1.63 0.39 1.24 0.99 0.44 1.56 4.62
BORE
SIZE A B C D E F G H J K L M N P ØR S T
06 16 22.9 12.7 6.4 11.5 Ø 4.3 Thru (2) — 16.1 — 8.3 32.2 20.7 4.6 16.0 9.7 6.4 18.3 55.4
10 25 32.0 16.0 8.0 16.0 Ø 5.3 Thru (2) — 20.8 — 8.3 41.7 25.4 4.6 20.8 14.2 9.7 25.7 77.2
12 32 38.1 19.0 9.4 19.0 Ø 7.1 Thru (4) 12.7 27.7 25.4 11.2 55.4 38.1 10.4 27.7 25.1 11.2 37.8 104.1
15 40 38.1 19.0 9.7 19.0 Ø 7.1 Thru (4) 16.0 31.5 31.8 13.2 63.0 41.4 9.9 31.5 25.1 11.2 39.6 117.3
SWITCHES
QUICK-DISCONNECT
COUPLER - MALE END
SPECIFICATIONS
Open
None None
1 Amp at 0.5 Amp at
86°F [30°C] 140°F [60°C]
CABLE MIN. STATIC 0.630" [16mm]
BEND

Female coupler to flying lead distance is 197" [5m] also see Cable Shielding specification above
BLUE BROWN BLUE BROWN
CURRENT
Quick disconnect
Wiring
- + OLD
Quick disconnect
Wiring
BLACK
+
BLACK
SIGNAL
†
§
§§
BC4_22 1-800-328-2174
PERFORMANCE
600 1000 200
TRIAC
LOAD CURRENT (mA)

LOAD CURENT (mA)
500 800
400
REED FORM A 150
600
300
400 100
200 REED FORM C
RE
200 50 D REED FO
FOR
E
100
MC RM A
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0
CURRENT D.C (mA)

(+) BROWN
AC
THE NOTCHED
LOAD (+) REED COM
FACE OF THE
(-)
SURFACE AND
(+) REED MAGNET.
LOAD SWITCH TRIAC
(-) BLUE SWITCH
(-)

COMMON BROWN
THE NOTCHED
GROOVE TO
SWITCH. CONTACT
BROWN(+) (+)
HALL-EFFECT BLACK SWITCHES ARE
SWITCH SINKING
ANOTHER
Some actuators may require switchSIDE OF
mounting
(-) LOAD
(-)
LOAD
on a specific side of theACTUATOR.
assembly.
Call Tolomatic for details.
SENSING
DIMENSIONS SENSING
SURFACE
SURFACE
SENSING SIZE BORE A B C D E

SURFACE
C 06 0.625 0.39 0.55 0.84 0.50 1.25
C
10 1.000 0.22 - 1.47 0.50 1.25
B C
12 1.250 0.23 - 1.66 0.50 1.25
A A A
BC406 BC410 BC412 15 1.500 0.16 - 1.98 0.50 1.25
BC4M(M)06 BC4M(M)10 BC4M(M)12
SIZE BORE A B C D E
D
06 12 9.91 13.97 21.34 12.70 31.75
E 10 25 5.59 - 37.34 12.70 31.75
12 32 5.84 - 42.16 12.70 31.75
15 40 4.06 - 50.29 12.70 31.75
BC4 Shock Absorbers - All Sizes 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com
SHOCK ABSORBERS
Rodless cylinders with standard internal cushion offer
an effective method of decelerating loads. However, all
Tolomatic rodless cylinders are capable of carrying heavier
loads at higher velocities than the cylinder cushion can
absorb. Optional shock absorbers can be used to increase
the cylinder’s life and broaden the application range for the
cylinder model you have chosen.
A shock stop plate must be used in conjunction with the
BC4 shock to provide a stopping surface on the carrier.
ORDER CODE Typical shock absorber life varies between 1-2 million
SD_ or SH_ or SL_ cycles (depending on environment) appropriate preventative
maintenance should be considered in high cyclic
applications.
DIMENSIONS
A
B
C
D E
F
G H
N
L
M
J
K
SIZE BORE A B C D E F G H(min.) H(max.) J K L M N

06 0.625 3.89 2.25 1.13 0.72 0.50 0.25 #6-32 Thru (4) 2.25 2.79 3/8-32 UNF-2B 2.25 1.72 0.44 3.15
10 1.000 4.00 3.00 1.50 1.09 0.75 0.38 #10-24 Thru (4) 3.71 4.25 9/16-18 UNF-2B 3.03 2.18 0.50 3.94
12 1.250 4.00 3.18 1.58 1.31 0.75 0.37 1/4-20 Thru (4) 4.50 5.38 3/4-16 UNF THD 3.92 2.25 0.63 5.89
15 1.500 5.60 4.50 2.25 1.50 1.00 0.51 1/4-20 Thru (4) 4.50 5.38 3/4-16 UNF THD 4.50 3.02 0.63 6.65
SIZE BORE A B C D E F G H(min.) H(max.) J K L M N

06 16 98.8 57.2 28.6 18.3 12.7 6.4 #6-32 Thru (4) 57.2 70.9 M8 x 1.0 57.2 43.6 11.1 79.9
10 25 101.6 76.2 38.1 27.7 19.0 9.7 M5 x 0.8 Thru (4) 94.2 107.9 M14 x 1.5 77.0 55.4 12.7 100.1
12 32 101.6 80.8 40.4 33.3 19.0 9.4 M6 x 1.0 Thru (4) 114.3 136.7 M20 x 1.5 99.6 57.1 16.0 149.6
15 38 142.2 114.3 57.1 38.1 25.4 13.0 M6 x 1.0 Thru (4) 114.3 136.7 M20 x 1.5 114.3 76.7 16.0 168.9
BC4_24 1-800-328-2174
BC4 Shock Absorbers - All Sizes - PERFORMANCE
VELOCITY vs LOAD
BC406 BC410
LOAD (kg) LOAD (kg)
18.1
27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
18.1
27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
.5
.5
13.6
22.7
13.6
22.7
1.8
4.5
1.8
4.5
.9
.9
100 2.5 100 2.5
2.3 90 2.3
90 80 2.0 80 2.0
70 60 1.8 70 1.8
1.5 60 1.5

50 1.3

50 1.3

1.0
40 1.0 40
30 .8 30 .8
20 .5 20 .5
10 .25 10 .23 .25

.23 .20 9
8 9 .18
8 7 .18
.20
7 .15 6 .15
6 5 .13
5 .13 .10
4 .10 4
.08 3 .08
3
2 .05 2 .05
.03 1 .03
1
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80 100
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80 100
LOAD (lbs)
LOAD (lbs)
BC412 BC415
LOAD (kg) LOAD (kg)
18.1
27.2
40.8 36.3
45.4
18.1
22.7 27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
1.4
2.3
3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
.5
.5
13.6
22.7
31.7
90.7
13.6
90.7
1.8
4.5
1.8
2.7
4.5
.9
.9
200 5.1 200 5.1

100 2.5 100 2.5

80 90 2.3 2.0 80 90 2.3 2.0
60 70 1.8 1.5
60 70 1.8 1.5
50 1.3 50 1.3
40 1.0 40 1.0
30 .8 30 .8
20 .5 20 .5
.3 .23
9 108 9 10
.25
7 .20 .18 7 8 .20 .23
6 .15 6 .15 .18
5 .13 5 .13
4 .10 4 .10
3 .08 3 .08
2 .05 2 .05
1 .03 1 .03
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 200 2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 200
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80100 1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80100
LIGHT DUTY (Light load/High velocity)

NOTE: If final (or impact) velocity cannot be calculated
directly, a reasonable guideline to use is 2 x average velocity.
HEAVY DUTY (Heavy load/Low velocity)
AIR CUSHION DATA

lbf N
LOAD ______________________ in/sec mm/sec
lb kg
MOVE TIME sec. _____________
inch millimeters
ORIENTATION
CENTER
CENTER
OF GRAVITY
dz OF GRAVITY
dy
OR
Y
AT
d
d dZ
TU
x
d
R
AC
RIER UATO
ACT IER
x
RIER CAR
CAR
R
Y
UATO
xd
R
CAR dz
ACT
d
CENTER
OF GRAVITY
Lz
Vertical Z
Angled α __________ β
____________ X
Lz
CENTER Z
ACTUATOR
OF GRAVITY
Y FRONT
dx β VIEW
SIDE VIEW
CARRIER
z
d d
α
Y
OTHER ISSUES:
(i.e. Environment,
Temperature,

BC4_26 1-800-328-2174
a load bearing actuator diagonal line, a larger cylinder no internal cushion on the cushion capacity. On high-
considered. auxiliary carrier.) external stops is strongly
be complex. It is highly recommended.
5
assistance in selecting horizontal loads. required between carriers TUBE SUPPORT
3
chart). When ordered, for the model selected.
tional purposes only. EFFECT OF the actuator. weight and maximum distance
BENDING between supports.
1
MOMENTS
6
APPLICATION If the cylinder will guide and carriers.
REQUIREMENTS
4
DETERMINE OPTIONS
Band Cylinder or Linear Slide the cylinder selection. INTERNAL or ac Triac
must not exceed the capacity CAPACITY each have different standard
• Available pressure (PSI) limits of the cylinder selected. • Consult the Cushion Data chart
for the model selected. The features and options. Check the
• Orientation of load (lbs or kgs) charts are final or cushion you have selected.
• Velocity of load (in/sec or determine the distance from impact velocities. On • Shock Absorbers– if needed.
• Stroke length (in or mm) bracket. This measurement is used, be sure the actual, final • Floating Mount Bracket – use
HINT: Use Tolomatic sizing and needed to calculate the torque or impact velocity is known. If when lack of parallelism
selection software, download at: for bending moments. (Refer to the velocity is not known, use occurs between the cylinder
tolomatic.com Bending Moment chart for of limit switches with valve and an external guided and
each model.) deceleration circuits or shock supported load.
2
absorbers should be
Should the resulting maximum considered. NOTE: The BC205 • Single End Porting (BC3, BC4)
vs. Pressure charts. carrier/s or a larger cylinder bumpers. • Dual 180° Carrier (BC3)
should be considered.
(or load weight if force is not • Auxiliary Carrier Bending velocity and weight of the load.
operating pressure. If the The auxiliary carrier option diagonal lines, the internal
diagonal line, and if moments increases load carrying be used. If the point falls above
values listed for that model moments. Auxiliary carriers the velocity is not known, use
accommodate the application. an internal piston. (Auxiliary shock absorbers or select a
Tolomatic distributor if an 10-weight lubricant.
ADJUSTMENT (BC2,
prelubricated at the factory. To premature wear.
• Filtration use of external lubrication.
the cylinder heads carefully to lubricants to the air supply.
particular application. If there products. “Filtered air” extend service life of
are questions on proper means a level of 10 Micron PG-1 or equivalent.
adjustment, please consult or less. “Dry” means air supply is kept constant.

final (or impact) velocity. Rodless cylinders
VELOCITY

Start Time End
BC4_28 1-800-328-2174
Inch (U.S. Standard) SIZE 06 10 12 15 20 25 30 40
Auxiliary Carrier Option 6906-9023 6910-9023 6912-9023 6915-9023 6920-9023 6925-9023 6930-9023 6940-9023
Floating Mount Kits 6906-9004 6910-9004 6912-9004 6915-9004 6920-9004 6925-9004 6930-9004 6940-9004
Foot Mount Kits 1 6906-9003 6910-9003 6912-9003 6915-9003 6920-9003 6925-9003 6930-9003 6940-9003
Shock Abs. Field Retrofit Kit – Heavy Duty 2 6906-9006 6910-9020 6912-9020 6915-9020 6920-9020 6925-9020 – –
Shock Abs. Field Retrofit Kit – Lite Duty 2 6906-9005 6910-9005 6912-9005 6915-9005 6920-9005 6925-9005 – –
Shock Abs. Field Mount Kit (Hardware Only) 3 6906-9024 6910-9024 6912-9024 6915-9024 6920-9024 6925-9024 – –
Shock Stop Kit 4 6906-9019 6910-9019 6912-9019 6915-9019 6920-9019 6925-9019 – –
Shock Stop Kit (Long Carrier) 4 6906-9029 6912-9029 6912-9029 6915-9029 – – – –
Single End Porting 5 NA 6910-9018 6912-9018 6915-9018 6920-9017 6925-9017 Std. Std.
Tube Supports 6 6906-9002 6910-9002 6912-9002 6915-9002 6920-9002 6925-9002 6930-9002 6940-9002
Repair Kits 7, 8 RKBC406NP RKBC410NP RKBC412NP RKBC415NP RKBC420NP RKBC425NP RKBC430NP RKBC440NP
Seal Kits 9 6906-9022 6910-9022 6912-9022 6915-9022 6920-9022 6925-9022 6930-9022 6940-9022
Metric SIZE 06 10 12 15 20 25 30 40
Auxiliary Carrier Option 7906-90237910-9023 7912-9023 7915-9023 7920-9023 7925-9023 7930-9023 7940-9023
Floating Mount Kits 7906-90047910-9004 7912-9008 7915-9008 7920-9004 7925-9004 7930-9005 7940-9005
Foot Mount Kits 1 7906-90037910-9003 7912-9004 7915-9003 7920-9003 7925-9003 7930-9003 7940-9003
Shock Abs. Field Retrofit Kit – Heavy Duty 2 7906-90067910-9007 7912-9006 7915-9005 7920-9020 7925-9020 – –
Shock Abs. Field Retrofit Kit – Lite Duty 2 7906-90057910-9005 7912-9005 7915-9006 7920-9005 7925-9005 – –
Shock Abs. Field Mount Kit (Hardware Only) 3 7906-90247910-9024 7912-9024 7915-9024 7920-9024 7925-9024 – –
Shock Stop Kit 4 7906-90197910-9008 7912-9007 7915-9004 7920-9019 7925-9019 – –
Shock Stop Kit (Long Carrier) 4 7906-90297910-9029 7912-9029 7915-9029 – – – –
Single End Porting Taper (TP) 5 7910-9006 7912-9001 7915-9001 7920-9017 7925-9017
NA Std. Std.
Single End Porting Parallel (GP) 5 8910-9002 8912-9001 8915-9001 8920-9017 8925-9017
Tube Supports 6 7906-9002 7910-9002 7912-9002 7915-9002 7920-9002 7925-9002 7930-9002 7940-9002
Repair Kits (Taper Port “TP”) 7, 8 RKBC406TP RKBC410TP RKBC412TP RKBC415TP RKBC420TP RKBC425TP RKBC430TP RKBC440TP
Repair Kits (Parallel Port “GP”) 7, 8 RKBC406GP RKBC410GP RKBC412GP RKBC415GP RKBC420GP RKBC425GP RKBC430GP RKBC440GP
Seal Kits 9 6906-9022 6910-9022 6912-9022 6915-9022 6920-9022 6925-9022 6930-9022 6940-9022

DESCRIPTION CODE 1 Foot Mount Kit contains one bracket and mounting hardware.
Switch Kit, Reed, Form C, 5m BT 2 Shock Field Retrofit Kit contains one shock absorber, impact bolt,
Switch Kit, Reed, Form C, Male Conn. BM and mounting hardware.
Switch Kit, Reed, Form A, 5m RT 3 Shock Field Mount Kit contains one set of mounting hardware and
Switch Kit, Reed, Form A, Male Conn. RM impact bolt.
Switch Kit, Triac, Male Conn. CM 4 Shock Stop Kit contains shock plate and screws.
Switch Kit, Hall-effect, Sinking, 5m KT 5 Single End Porting Kit contains replacement head and plugs.
6 Contains one tube support and mounting hardware.
Switch Kit, Hall-effect, Sourcing, Male Conn. TM 7 Repair Kit contains End Caps, Bearing Rods, O-rings, U-cups,
NOTE: When kit is ordered female connector & all mounting hardware is Wear Rings, Cushion Seals, Band Inserts, Spring Clamps, Sealing
included Band and Dust Band.
8 When ordering repair kits, specify stroke as “SK” then indicate
Switch Ordering NOTES: the desired length in decimal inches after the order code indi-
cated above. EXAMPLE: RKBC410SK10.00
To order field retrofit switch and hardware kits for all Tolo- 9 Seal Kit contains End Caps, Bearing Rods, O-rings, U-cups, Wear
matic actuators: SW (Then the model and bore size, and type Rings, Cushion Seals, Band Inserts and Spring Clamps.
of switch required)
Example: SW B C 4 1 5 RT NA = Not Available
(Hardware and Form A Reed switch with 5 meter lead for 1.5" Std. = Standard Feature
bore BC4 band cylinder)
BC4 10 L NP SK100.250 DW6.0 TS3 FM2 SH2 BM2
MODEL AUXILIARY CARRIER (BC4_16) SHOCK ABSORBERS (BC4_24)

BC4 BC4 Band Cylinder DW Auxiliary carrier With *SD_ Shock hardware Only and
_ _._ _ “D” Distance between *SH_ Shock, Heavy duty and
BORE SIZE carriers in inches (SK) or number required
06 0.625" (16mm) millimeters (SM) *SL_ Shock, Light duty and
10 1.00" (25mm) (Same unit of measure as stroke length is required) number required
12 1.25" (32mm) Not available for 06 size *NOTE: When shock absorbers are
15 1.50" (40mm) MINIMUM “D” DISTANCE ordered cushion seals are removed.
BETWEEN CARRIERS
LONG CARRIER (BC4_14) with Piston
in mm
L Long carrier available for 06 4.26 108.2 SWITCHES (BC4_22)
10, 12, 15 sizes 10 5.30 134.6
LEAD LENGTH
DISCONNECT
12 6.23 158.2
QUANTITY
15 8.00 203.2
QUICK-
MOUNTING & PORTS *When ordering auxiliary carrier
CODE
option, enter the distance required TYPE
NP US standard mounting between carriers. The configurator
& NPT ports will calculate the overall length of QD RM
TP† Metric mounting with the actuator. Form A

no RT
REED
metric taper port
QD BM
GP† Metric mounting with Form C
metric parallel port no BT
5 meters
TUBE SUPPORTS (BC4_20) QD KM
HALL-EFFECT
† The metric version provides metric tapped holes Sinking
for mounting of the load to the carrier and of the TS_ Tube Support & number no KT
actuator to mounting surfaces & metric ports required QD TM
Sourcing
no TT
STROKE LENGTH & MOUNTING TYPE QD CM
T-NUTS TRIAC
SK _ _ . _ _ Stroke, enter desired stroke no CT
length in inches TN_ additional T-Nuts
SM† _ _ . _ _ Stroke, enter desired stroke (see individual dimensional
length in millimeters drawings for sizes)
NOTE: Actuator mounting threads and mounting
fasteners will be either inch or metric; PORTING OPTION
depending on how stroke length is indicated. FOOT MOUNT (BC4_19) HD Single End Porting
SK = inch mounting FM_ Foot Mount & number Not available for 06 size
SM = metric mounting required (1 or 2)
MAXIMUM STROKE
...SK ...SM FLOATING MOUNT (BC4_21)
SIZE in mm FL Floating Mount Bracket
06 206 5,232 Not compatible with shock absorbers
10 205 5,207
12 204 5,182
15 202 5,130 1 WEEK
BUILT-TO-ORDER
Not all codes listed are compati-
BC4_30 1-800-328-2174
LS LINEAR SLIDE
ABT
RODLESS CYLINDER
MXP
BC2
BC3
BC4
LS
MG
CC
CONTENTS
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_2
LS05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_4
PB
LS10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_6
Auxiliary Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_8
LS Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_10
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_11
ENGR
Proximity Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_13

Shock Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_14
Application Data Worksheet . . . . . . . . LS_15
Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_16
Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_17
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_18
LS - LINEAR SLIDE Endurance Technology features are
Adapted from the popular BC2, the Linear Slide features 2 precision steel guide rods integrated with the
ABT
extrusion to provide positive support of the load. This makes the Linear Slide more rugged and capable with
greater load capacity and higher bending moments. Built-to-order in stroke lengths up to 72 inches.
STAINLESS STEEL SEALING BAND SYSTEM FORMED END CAP LOW CARRIER HEIGHT
WIPER SEAL
MXP
• Fatigue resistant • Reduces overall actuator envelope

stainless steel bands • Keeps contaminants from • Large mounting area for high load
are specifically made entering the sealing area stability
to offer longer life and • Protects internal
will not elongate like components • T-Slots for mounting flexibility
elastomers
BC2
• Reduces maintenance
• Outer band keeps while increasing
out contaminants for productivity
extended performance
• Inner band provides
a smooth surface
BC3
for less seal wear

BC4
LS
STROKE
ADJUSTMENT
• End of stroke
• Integrated into design
MG
3-PORTED HEADS
• Single End Porting
CC
• Standard feature
PB

major stress points
• Heat treated carbon steel
ENGR
withstands the toughest

dynamic forces
• Strongest bracket design in
the industry assures long life
with less maintenance
LS_2 1-800-328-2174
STEEL GUIDE RODS
• Two precision
ground steel RETAINED DUST BAND
ABT
guide rods • Retained dust band keeps contaminants from entering
integrated the cylinder interior, protecting components for
with extrusion reduced maintenance and increased uptime
provides positive
support of load
MXP
RIGID BLACK-
BC2
ANODIZED EXTRUDED
ALUMINUM TUBE
• Stronger, stiffer tube retains
tolerance specs when chamber
is pressurized
BC3
• Keeps sealing band in place for
maximized air efficiency
• Tube supports are minimized
• Solid structural support
BC4
provides durability and long life
performance
NOTE: Boxed letters
LS
indicate ordering codes
OPTIONS
AUXILIARY CARRIER D W D O
MG
LOAD-BEARING CARRIER DESIGN • Substantially higher bending moment capacity
• Load and piston SUPPORTS M P
are independent • Used for intermediate support
- piston floats, • Flush with bottom of actuator
resulting in less to retain low profile
CC
friction and • Drop-in, adjustable mounting locations
longer seal life
• Bearings offer T-NUTS
• Used for intermediate support, combine with
consistently low Tube Supports or mount directly to surface
friction and long PB
wear; 1/2" bore SHOCK ABSORBERS SL SH
features composite bearings, 1" bore features precision • Smooth deceleration
linear ball bearings • Allows increased operating speed
ENGR
• Higher equipment productivity

• Integrated to carrier design
SWITCHES
• Available in Proximity, Reed, Hall-effect and Triac
disconnect couplers
LS05 Linear Slide Rodless Cylinder
PERFORMANCE
LS05 BEARING LIFE vs LOAD
LOAD (kg)
ABT
0 .45 .91 1.4 1.8 2.3 2.7 3.2 3.6 4.1 4.5
72 182.9
68 172.7
64 162.6
MXP
BEARING LIFE (millions of centimeters)

60 152.4
BEARING LIFE (millions of inches)

56 142.2
52 132.1
48 121.9
BC2
44 111.8
LS05 OPTIONS Page 40 101.6
Auxiliary Carrier LS_8
36 91.4
Proximity Sensors LS_13
Shock Absorbers LS_14 32 81.3
BC3
Switches LS_11
28 71.1
Supports LS_10
MORE INFORMATION Page 24 60.9
Application Guidelines BC4_32 20 50.8
Ordering LS_18
BC4
Selection LS_16 16 40.6

12 30.5
8 20.3
THEORETICAL FORCE vs PRESSURE 4 10.2
LS
0 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PRESSURE (bar) LOAD (lbs)
1.4 2.1 2.8 3.4 4.1 4.8 5.5 6.2 6.9
80 36.3
MG
70 31.8
60 27.2
FORCE (lbs)
50 22.7
FORCE (kg)
SPECIFICATIONS
CC
40 18.1
30 13.6
20 9.1
PB
10 4.5
0 0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 LS05 BENDING MOMENTS AND LOAD
PRESSURE (PSI)
ENGR

E
SIZE My Mx Mz Fz
U.S. 0.50 in 4.0 in-lbs 8.0 in-lbs 6.0 in-lbs 10.0 lbs
LS_4 1-800-328-2174
LS05 Linear Slide Rodless Cylinder 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com

U.S. Metric
RR A 0.32 8.1
B 0.50 12.7
ABT
C #10-32 PORTS M5 x 0.8
S D 1.82 46.1
E 3.63 92.2
PP QQ F 1.31 33.3
G 0.43 10.8
H 0.24 6.0
MXP
J 0.02 0.5
K 0.88 22.23
D W SHOCK TRAVEL Y (STROKE
ADJUSTMENT EITHER L 1.75 44.45
SS (MIN. SENSING DIRECTION, BOTH ENDS)
M 1.13 28.58
DISTANCE) LSMM05 ONLY
N 2.25 57.15
BC2
P 1.39 35.5
E CARRIAGE (2 PLACES BOTH SIDES, Q 2.78 70.6
D A ALL 4 PLUGGED)
R #10-24 x .38 DP M5 x 0.8 x 10 DP
C
S 1.50 38.1
C
L T 3.00 76.2
W 0.18 4.6
BC3
ZZ
X 2.69 62.9
A A Y 0.13 3.2
B Z 0.34 8.59
X STROKE X
STROKE + 2X AA 0.19 4.88
BB 0.06 1.57
BC4
YY (UPPER KK CC 0.16 3.96
T DD 0.33 8.43
HOLES, 2
CL JJ GG
PLACES BOTH
S BB EE 0.81 20.62
ENDS)
TT MM HH
TOL-O-MATIC
FF 1.63 41.28
GG 0.16 3.96
MINNEAPOLIS, MN
AA AA HH 0.33 8.43
F
LS
WW
G J JJ 0.94 23.83
Z
C (2 PLACES KK 1.88 47.63
K EE DD
H BOTH ENDS, TWO
LL LL 0.13 3.18
L OPEN THIS END, FF CC
R (LOWER TWO PLUGGED MM 0.28 7.14
M OPPOSITE END) SECTION A-A
HOLE,
N PP 1.00 25.4
MG
2 PLACES
BOTH ENDS) P QQ 0.50 12.7
Q RR .13 x .09 DP 3.18 x2.4 DP
SS 0.04 1
6-32
*SQUARE NUTS (M3x.5) 0.31 TT .25 Nominal 6.35 Nominal
(NOT TO SCALE)
(7.9) WW 0.50 12.7
0.31 (7.9) 0.11 (2.8)
YY #10-24 x .21 DP M5 x 0.8 x 5 DP
CC
ZZ 0.47 11.8
*NOTE: Four square nuts are provided with each linear slide for base INCHES MILLIMETERS
mounting. Additionally 2 square nuts are provided for 30” of stroke
and 2 for every 20” of stroke thereafter.
PB
SPECIFICATIONS
WEIGHT MAX. END-OF-STROKE
BORE MAX. TEMPERATURE STROKE
ENGR
PER UNIT OF STROKE POSITIONING

SIZE BASE PRESSURE RANGE ADJUSTMENT
STOKE LENGTH* ACCURACY
U.S. 0.50 in 1.2 lbs 0.15 lbs/in 72 in 100 PSI 20° to 140° F ±0.0005 in ±0.12 in per end
Metric 12 mm 0.54 kg 0.068 kg/mm 1829 mm 6.895 bar -7° to 60° C 0.0127 mm ±3.05 mm per end
LS10 Linear Slide Rodless Cylinder
PERFORMANCE
LS10 BEARING LIFE vs LOAD
LOAD (kg)
ABT
0 4.5 9.1 14 18 23 27 32 36 41 45
72 182.9
68 172.7
64 162.6
MXP
60 152.4
BEARING LIFE (millions of centimeters)

BEARING LIFE (millions of inches)
56 142.2
52 132.1
48 121.9
BC2
44 111.8
LS05 OPTIONS Page 40 101.6
Auxiliary Carrier LS_8 36 91.4
Proximity Sensors LS_13
Shock Absorbers LS_14 32 81.3
BC3
Switches LS_11 28 71.1

Supports LS_10
MORE INFORMATION Page 24 60.9
Application Guidelines BC4_32 20 50.8
Ordering LS_18
BC4
Selection LS_16 16 40.6

12 30.5
8 20.3
THEORETICAL FORCE vs PRESSURE 4 10.2
LS
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PRESSURE (bar) LOAD (lbs)
1.4 2.1 2.8 3.4 4.1 4.8 5.5 6.2 6.9
80 36.3
MG
70 31.8
60 27.2
FORCE (lbs)
FORCE (kg)
50 22.7
SPECIFICATIONS
CC
40 18.1
30 13.6
20 9.1
PB
10 4.5
0 0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 LS10 BENDING MOMENTS AND LOAD
ENGR
PRESSURE (PSI)
E
SIZE My Mx Mz Fz
LS_6 1-800-328-2174
LS10 Linear Slide Rodless Cylinder 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com

U.S. Metric
NN PP RR A 0.42 10.7
B 0.73 18.5
ABT
S C 1/8 NPT PORT G 1/8-28 Parallel
D 2.75 69.9
E 5.50 139.7
F 2.38 60.5
G 0.86 21.7
MXP
H 0.28 7.1
J 0.04 1.0
D W SHOCK TRAVEL Y (STROKE K 0.80 20.3
ADJUSTMENT EITHER
SS (MIN. SENSING DIRECTION, BOTH ENDS) L 1.59 40.4
DISTANCE)
M 1.75 44.5
N 3.50 88.9
BC2
E CARRIAGE (2 PLACES BOTH SIDES, P 2.13 54.1
D A ALL 4 PLUGGED) Q 4.25 107.9
C R 1/4-20 x .50 DP M6 x 1.0 x 12 DP
C
L S 2.38 60.5
T 4.75 120.7
BC3
ZZ W 0.43 10.9
A A X 3.89 98.8
B Y 0.25 6.4
X STROKE X Z 0.51 12.9
STROKE + 2X AA 0.39 9.8
BC4
BB 0.10 2.5
YY (UPPER T KK CC 0.31 7.9
HOLES, 2 JJ GG
PLACES BOTH
S
CL
BB DD 0.51 13.0
ENDS)
TT MM HH
EE 1.19 30.2
FF 2.38 60.3
TOL-O-MATIC
MINNEAPOLIS, MN
F AA AA GG 0.28 7.1
LS
WW HH 0.52 13.2
G J
Z JJ 1.00 25.4
C (2 PLACES EE KK 2.00 50.8
H K BOTH ENDS, TWO DD
L OPEN THIS END, LL FF LL 0.13 3.2
TWO PLUGGED CC
R (LOWER M SECTION A-A
HOLE,
OPPOSITE END) MM 0.44 11.1
N
MG
2 PLACES
BOTH ENDS) P NN 1.75 44.5
Q PP 2.00 50.8
RR .25 x .20 DP 6.35 x 5.1 DP
1/4-20
(M6x1) 0.50
SS 0.04 1.0
*SQUARE NUTS (12.7) TT .472 Nominal 12.0 Nominal
(NOT TO SCALE)
0.50 (12.7) 0.25 (6.3) WW 1.50 38.1
CC
YY 1/4-20 x .38 DP M6 x 1.0 x 9 DP
*NOTE: Four square nuts are provided with each linear slide for base INCHES MILLIMETERS
mounting. Additionally 2 square nuts are provided for 30” of stroke
and 2 for every 20” of stroke thereafter.
PB
SPECIFICATIONS
WEIGHT MAX. END-OF-STROKE
BORE MAX. TEMPERATURE STROKE
ENGR
PER UNIT OF STROKE POSITIONING

SIZE BASE PRESSURE RANGE ADJUSTMENT
STOKE LENGTH* ACCURACY
U.S. 1.00 in 5.2 lbs 0.4 lbs/in 72 in 100 PSI 20° to 140° F ±0.0005 in ±0.25 in per end
Metric 25 mm 2.36 kg 0.181 kg/mm 1829 mm 6.895 bar -7° to 60° C 0.0127 mm ±6.35 mm per end
LS Auxiliary Carrier - All Sizes
PERFORMANCE
The auxiliary carrier option substantially increases load
carrying and bending moments capacity over the standard
single carrier models. As a general rule, the auxiliary carrier
option is highly recommended in vertical applications (My) if
ABT
the distance from the carrier mounting surface to the load

center of gravity (CG) exceeds the overall length of the carrier.
Auxiliary carriers can be ordered with (DW) or without (DO)
an internal piston. (Auxiliary carriers without a piston have no
cushion on the cylinder end closest to the auxiliary carrier.)
MXP

auxiliary carrier.
BC2
BENDING MOMENTS
MOMENT LOAD vs. DISTANCE
“D” (mm)
102
127
152
178
203
229
254
279
305
330
356
381
406
432
457
483
508
533
559
584
610
635
LS05 AUXILIARY CARRIER LS10 AUXILIARY CARRIER

BC3
10,000 1,130
LOAD vs DISTANCE LOAD vs DISTANCE

9,000 1,017
“D” (Meters) “D” (Meters) 2.50" BORE
8,000 904
0 0.13 0.25 0.38 0.51 0.13 0.25 0.38 0.51 0.64 0.76
7,000 791
BC4
50 5.65 1000 113.0

Mya & Mza (in-lbs)
DW
Mya & Mza (N-m)

6,000 B C225 2.00" BORE 678
40 4.52 800 z 90.4
My/Mz (In.-Lbs.)
My/Mz (In.-Lbs.)
5,000 M 565
My/Mz (N-m)
DW
My/Mz (N-m)
0
BC22
z
3.39 600 67.8

M
30 452
4,000 My
LS
1.50" BORE
2.26 W My 45.2
3,000 20 BC215D 400 339
2,000 1.25" BORE 226

10 1.13 BC212DW200 22.6
1,000 BC210DW 1.00" BORE 113
0 0 0 0
MG
0 0 5 10 15 20 5 10 15 20 25 30 0
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
“D” (Inches) “D” (Inches)
“D” (in)
1.) Coupling between carriers is rigid. 2.) Load is equally distributed between carriers.
CC
3.) Coupling device applies no misalignment loads to carriers.
MAX. BENDING MOMENT MAX. LOAD

BORE SIZE “D” MINIMUM *
PB
My** Mx Mz** Fz
in mm in mm in-lbs N-m in-lbs N-m in-lbs N-m lbs kg
05 0.50 12 3.63 92.2 9.51 1.07 16.00 1.81 14.27 1.61 20 9.08
10 1.00 25 5.75 146.1 177.80 20.09 160.00 18.08 277.80 31.30 200 90.8
* “D” is distance between carriers
ENGR
** Loads calculated are at minimum “D”, for substantially higher My and Mz loads increase “D” and refer to graph above
LS_8 1-800-328-2174
LS Auxiliary Carrier - All Sizes
AUXILIARY CARRIER ASSEMBLY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT INFORMATION REGARDING AUXILIARY
CARRIER PLACEMENT
ABT
When an LS is ordered without shock absorbers, the
auxiliary carrier is always placed to the left (while facing the
ORDER CODES switch mounted or open port side) of the main carrier.
DO When an LS is ordered with shock absorbers, the auxiliary
MXP
(Auxiliary Carrier without piston)
carrier is always placed to the right (while facing the switch
DW
(Auxiliary Carrier with piston) mounted or open port side) of the main carrier.
AUXILIARY CARRIER MAIN CARRIER
BC2
ORDERING INFORMATION
Moments chart).
MAIN CARRIER AUXILIARY CARRIER
BC3
BC4
Determine your working stroke and your “D” dimension,
LS
then enter these into your configuration string. (Example:
LS10SK30.00DW8.00RT2) The configurator will calculate
the overall length of the actuator. Refer to page LS_18 for
complete LS ordering information.
MG
CC
PB
ENGR
LS Supports - All Sizes 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com
PERFORMANCE Always use configurated CAD solid model

DISTANCE BETWEEN SUPPORTS
LS05/LSMM05 LS10/LSMM10
ABT
10 100 .00
5"
LOAD WEIGHT (lbs.)
LOAD WEIGHT (lbs.)

9 90
8 80 .004
70
"
7
6 60 .003"
5 50
.00 .002"
.00
4 1" 40
MXP
2"
3 30
2 20 .001"
1 10
0 0
0 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 0 6 12 18 24 30 36 42
LENGTH BETWEEN SUPPORTS (inches) LENGTH BETWEEN SUPPORTS (inches)
BC2
Deflection Rates Tube supports recommended above this line.
MP SUPPORTS SQUARE NUTS

BC3
BC4
ORDER CODES
MP
(LS Supports)
LS
Base mounting linear slides may be accomplished by *NOTE: Four square nuts are provided with each linear
fastening directly to “T” slot nuts provided in the base of the slide for base mounting. Additionally 2 square nuts are
slide (shown at right) or by using the MP mounting plates. provided for 30” of stroke and 2 for every 20” of stroke
thereafter.
MG
DIMENSIONS H (2 PLACES)
TOLOMATIC
MINNEAPOLIS, MN
CC
A F C
B D
PB
E
BORE BORE
SIZE A B C D E F G HØ SIZE A B C D E F G HØ
05 0.50 0.38 0.75 1.60 3.30 3.60 0.25 1.60 0.156 05 12 9.7 19.1 41.4 82.6 92.2 6.4 39.6 3.96
ENGR
10 1.00 0.38 0.75 2.50 5.00 5.50 0.25 2.63 0.270 10 25 9.7 19.1 63.5 127.0 139.7 6.4 66.8 6.86
LS_10 1-800-328-2174
LS Switches - All Sizes
SWITCHES
ABT
QUICK-DISCONNECT
COUPLER - MALE END
MXP
SPECIFICATIONS
BC2
BC3
Open
None None
BC4
LS
MG
86°F [30°C] 140°F [60°C]
BEND
DYNAMIC Not Recommended
CC
RADIUS

PB
Female coupler to flying lead (part #2503-1025) distance is 197" [5m] also see Cable Shielding specification above
BLUE BROWN
+
BLUE BROWN
ENGR
CURRENT
Quick disconnect
Wiring
- OLD
Quick disconnect
Wiring
+
BLACK BLACK
SIGNAL
†
Shielded from the female quick disconnect coupler to the flying leads . Shield should be terminated at flying lead end .
§
§§
LS Switches - All Sizes
PERFORMANCE
600 1000 200
TRIAC
LOAD CURRENT (mA)

LOAD CURENT (mA)
500 800
400
REED FORM A 150
600
ABT
300
400 100
200 REED FORM C
RE
200 50 D REED FO
FOR
E
100
MC RM A
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0
CURRENT D.C (mA)
MXP

(+) BROWN
AC
THE NOTCHED
(+) REED FACE OF THE
BC2
LOAD COM
(-)
SURFACE AND
(+) REED MAGNET.
LOAD SWITCH TRIAC
BLUE
BC3
(-) SWITCH
(-)

COMMON BROWN
THE NOTCHED
BC4

BLUE ACTUATOR
GROOVE TO
SWITCH. CONTACT
BROWN(+) (+)
SWITCHES ARE
LS
HALL-EFFECT BLACK
SWITCH SINKING
ANOTHER SIDE OF
(-) (-) LOAD ACTUATOR .
LOAD
MG
DIMENSIONS SENSING SURFACE

.08"
[2.03mm]
CC
.93"
[23.6mm]
1.31"
1.05" [33.3mm]
PB
[26.7mm]
SENSING SURFACE .37" [9.4mm]

ENGR
LS_12 1-800-328-2174
LS Proximity Sensors - All Sizes
Proximity Sensor
This L.E.D. device senses end-of-stroke with one of two
normally open inductive d.c. proxim
ity sensors. NPN supplies
a sinking signal; PNP supplies a sourcing signal to a device
such as a programmable logic controller.
ABT
Ambient Temp.: -13° to 158° F., (-25° to 70° C.)
NEMA Encl. Rating: 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, 13
Lead Length: 6.56 feet (2.0m)
MXP
ORDER CODES
Max. Sensing Distance (LS05): .059” (1.5mm)
NP_, PN_
Max. Sensing Distance (LS10): .039” (1.0mm)
Wiring Diagrams
BC2
NPN Output Transition Circuit Load PNP Output Transition Circuit Load
(Brown) (Brown)
+V
4.7kΩ 100Ω +V
BC3
Tr
Load
(Black) (Black)
Main Main
Circuit Circuit
2.2Ω Tr 2.2Ω
Load
4.7kΩ
(Blue) (Blue) 100Ω
OV
BC4
OV
200mA Max. (Sink Current), 2V Max. (Residual Voltage) 200mA Max. (Source Current), 2V Max. (Residual Voltage)
NPN Output PNP Output
LS
NO NO
Target Present Target Present
Absent Absent
Load (between Operates Load (between Operates
black and blue) Releases black and blue) Releases
Logic (between H
MG
Logic (between H
brown and black) L brown and black) L
Operation On Operation On
indicator (LED) OFF indicator (LED) OFF
Short-Circuit Indication Resetting Short-Circuit Protection
CC
The load output immediately turns off and remains off To reset the short-circuit protection, repair the short. The
until the short-circuit protection is reset. short-circuit protection will then automatically reset.
DIMENSIONS PB
BORE SS ZZ
ENGR
SIZE in mm in mm in mm
05 0.50 12.7 0.04 1.02 0.46 11.68
10 1.00 25.4 0.04 1.02 0.40 10.16
ZZ
SS (MIN. SENSING DISTANCE)
LS Shock Absorbers - All Sizes 3D CAD available at
www.tolomatic.com
SHOCK ABSORBERS
ORDER CODE
SH_ or SL_ Rodless cylinders with standard internal cushion offer
an effective method of decelerating loads. However, all
ABT
Tolomatic rodless cylinders are capable of carrying heavier

loads at higher velocities than the cylinder cushion can
the cylinder’s life and broaden the application range for the
cylinder model you have chosen.
MXP

cycles (depending on environment). Appropriate
preventative maintenance should be considered in high
cyclic applications.
BC2
NOTE: Actuators ordered without selecting a shock absorber MUST have external stops. The LS does NOT have internal
bumpers or cushions.
BC3
DIMENSIONS
SIZE BORE W Y SIZE BORE W Y

BC4
05 0.375 0.18 0.13 05 12 4.6 3.2

10 0.625 0.43 0.25 10 25 10.9 6.4
W SHOCK TRAVEL Y (STROKE ADJUSTMENT
EITHER DIRECTION, BOTH ENDS)
LS
PERFORMANCE
VELOCITY vs LOAD
MG
LOAD (kg)
LS05 .91 1.8 2.7 3.6 4.5 9.1 18.1 27.2 36.3 45.4 LS10
LOAD (kg)
.45 1.4 2.3 3.2 4.1 6.8 13.6 22.7 31.8 40.8
18.1
27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
2.5
1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
100
.5
90 2.3
13.6
22.7
80 2.0
1.8
4.5
70
.9
1.8
60 1.52
CC
50 1.27 100 2.5

90 80 2.3
2.0
40 1.02 1.8
.76
70 60 1.5 LIGHT DUTY (Light
30 50 1.3
20 .51 30
40 1.0
.8 load/High velocity)
20 .5
10 .25
9 .23
8 .20
PB
10 9 .25
7
6
.18
.15 8
7
.23 .20
.18 HEAVY DUTY (Heavy
5 .13 6 .15
4 .10 4
5 .13
.10 load/Low velocity)
3 .08 3 .08
2 .05 2 .05
ENGR
1 .03 1 .03
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90
1 5 7 9 20 40 60 80 100
1 3 5 7 9 15 20 40 60 80 100 3
LS_14 1-800-328-2174

ABT
MXP
lbf N
LOAD ______________________ in/sec mm/sec
lb kg
BC2
MOVE TIME sec. _____________
inch millimeters
BC3
ORIENTATION
CENTER
CENTER
OF GRAVITY
dz OF GRAVITY
dy
OR
BC4
Y
AT
d
d dZ
TU
x
d
R
AC
RIER UATO
ACT IER
x
RIER CAR
CAR
R
Y
UATO
xd
R
CAR dz
ACT
d
CENTER
OF GRAVITY
LS
Lz
Vertical Z
Angled α __________ β
____________ X
Lz
CENTER Z
ACTUATOR
OF GRAVITY
Y FRONT
dx β VIEW
MG
SIDE VIEW
CARRIER
z
d d
α
Y
OTHER ISSUES:
CC
(i.e. Environment,
Temperature,
PB
ENGR

a load bearing actuator diagonal line, a larger cylinder no internal cushion on the cushion capacity . On high-
ABT
considered . auxiliary carrier .) external stops is strongly

be complex. It is highly recommended .
5
assistance in selecting horizontal loads . required between carriers TUBE SUPPORT
MXP
3
chart) . When ordered, for the model selected .
BC2
tional purposes only. EFFECT OF the actuator . weight and maximum distance
BENDING between supports .
1
MOMENTS
6
APPLICATION If the cylinder will guide and carriers .
BC3
REQUIREMENTS
4
DETERMINE OPTIONS
Band Cylinder or Linear Slide the cylinder selection . INTERNAL or ac Triac
CAPACITY
BC4
must not exceed the capacity each have different standard

• Available pressure (PSI) limits of the cylinder selected . • Consult the Cushion Data chart
for the model selected . The features and options . Check the
• Orientation of load (lbs or kgs) charts are final or cushion you have selected .
• Velocity of load (in/sec or determine the distance from impact velocities . On • Shock Absorbers– if needed .
LS
• Stroke length (in or mm) bracket . This measurement is used, be sure the actual, final • Floating Mount Bracket – use
HINT: Use Tolomatic sizing and needed to calculate the torque or impact velocity is known . If when lack of parallelism
selection software, download at: for bending moments . (Refer to the velocity is not known, use occurs between the cylinder
MG
tolomatic .com Bending Moment chart for of limit switches with valve and an external guided and
each model .) deceleration circuits or shock supported load .
2
absorbers should be
Should the resulting maximum considered . NOTE: The BC205 • Single End Porting (BC3, BC4)
CC
vs . Pressure charts . carrier/s or a larger cylinder bumpers . • Dual 180° Carrier (BC3)
should be considered .
• Auxiliary Carrier Bending velocity and weight of the load .
PB
(or load weight if force is not

operating pressure . If the The auxiliary carrier option diagonal lines, the internal
diagonal line, and if moments increases load carrying be used . If the point falls above
ENGR
values listed for that model moments . Auxiliary carriers the velocity is not known, use
accommodate the application . an internal piston . (Auxiliary shock absorbers or select a
LS_16 1-800-328-2174
LS Service Parts Ordering - ALL Sizes
Inch (U.S. Standard) Metric
SIZE 05 10 05 10
Support 1 0605-9010 0610-9010 5605-9010 5610-9010
Inductive DC Proximity Sensors - 10-24 volts NPN NO Sink2 0605-1023 0610-1023 0605-1023 0610-1023
ABT
Inductive DC Proximity Sensors - 10-24 volts PNP NO Source2 0605-1024 0610-1024 0605-1024 0610-1024
Switch Rail and Rail Hardware (specify stroke)3 0605-9100SK_ 0610-9100SK_ 0605-9100SK_ 0610-9100SK_
Shock Absorbers Field Retrofit Kit - Heavy Duty4,5 0605-9009 0610-9023 0605-9009 0610-9023
Shock Absorbers Field Retrofit Kit - Lite Duty4,5 0605-9008 0610-9022 0605-9008 0610-9022
T-Nuts (Each) 0605-1042 0610-1042 5605-1042 5610-1042
MXP
Configurated Repair Kit6 RKLS05NPSK_ RKLS10NPSK_ RKLS05TP(GP)SK_ RKLS10TP(GP)SK_
Configurated Repair Kit (Manufactured before May 1, 1998)6 RKLS05NPSK_ 0610-9033SK_ RKLS05SK_ 0610-9033SK_
BC2
CONFIG. CODE ORDERING Service Parts Ordering NOTES:
1 Support Kit contains one bracket and two screws
DESCRIPTION CODE
Switch Kit, Reed, Form C, 5m BT 2 Proximity sensors for the LS05 have 5mm thread size;
BC3
Switch Kit, Reed, Form C, Male Conn. BM LS10 have 8mm thread size
Switch Kit, Reed, Form A, 5m RT 3 When replacing an existing switch on an actuator manufactured
Switch Kit, Reed, Form A, Male Conn. RM BEFORE 7-1-1997 switch rail and hardware must be ordered stroke
Switch Kit, Triac, 5m CT length is required. Order switch using Configurator Code in table at
Switch Kit, Triac, Male Conn. CM left.
Switch Kit, Hall-effect, Sinking, 5m KT
BC4
4 Shock absorber kit includes one shock and mounting hardware
Switch Kit, Hall-effect, Sourcing, 5m TT 5 NOTE: Actuators ordered without selecting a shock absorber MUST
Switch Kit, Hall-effect, Sourcing, Male Conn. TM have external stops. The LS does NOT have internal bumpers or
NOTE: When kit is ordered female connector & all mounting hardware is included
cushions.
6 Repair Kit for LS contains external dust band, internal seal band,
wipers, end caps and internal soft seals. Stroke length must be
LS
included after number or code.
NA = Not Available
To order field retrofit switch and hardware kits for all Tolomatic
actuators: SW (Then the model and bore size, and type of switch
MG
required)
Example: SW L S 1 0 RT
(Hardware and Form A Reed switch with 5 meter lead for 1.0"
bore LS linear slide)
Replacing an existing switch on an actuator manufactured
BEFORE 7-1-1997
CC
Order using CONFIGURATOR CODE in table above
Also order SWITCH RAIL and RAIL HARDWARE
If replacing a quick-disconnect switch on an actuator manu-
factured BEFORE 7-1-1997 it will also be necessary to replace
or require the female-end coupler with the in-line splice
(see page ls_11)
PB
Adding a switch to an actuator manufactured without switches
Also order SWITCH RAIL and RAIL HARDWARE
ENGR
LS Ordering - All Sizes
1 WEEK
M O D E L , B O R E , S T R O K E O P T I O N S BUILT-TO-ORDER
L S 1 0 N P S K 5 5 . 2 5 0 D W 6 . 0 M P 3 S H 2 B M 2
ABT
MODEL & MOUNTING AUXILIARY CARRIER (LS_8) PROXIMITY SENSOR (LS_13)

LS LS Linear Slide DW Auxiliary carrier With NP_ Sinking type proximity sensor
piston & “D” distance (NPN)
DO Auxiliary carrier Without PN_ Sourcing type proximity sensor
MXP
BORE SIZE piston & “D” distance (PNP)

05 0.50" (12mm) _ _._ _ “D” Distance between
10 1.00" (25mm) carriers in inches (SK) or
millimeters (SM)
MINIMUM “D” DISTANCE SWITCHES (LS_11)
MOUNTING & PORTS
BC2
BETWEEN CARRIERS
NP US standard mounting in mm (Quantity desired follows ordering code)
& NPT ports 05 5.07 129 RM_ Reed Switch (Form A) with 5-meter
TP† Metric mounting with 10 5.17 131 lead/QD (Quick-disconnect)
metric taper ports RT_ Reed Switch (Form A) with 5-m lead
GP† Metric mounting with *When ordering auxiliary carrier BM_ Reed Switch (Form C) with 5-meter
BC3
metric parallel ports option, enter the distance lead/QD

required between carriers. The BT_ Reed Switch (Form C) with 5-m lead
† The metric version provides metric tapped holes configurator will calculate the overall
for mounting of the load to the carrier and of the KM_ Hall-effect Sinking Switch with 5-meter
length of the actuator.
actuator to mounting surfaces & metric ports lead/QD
KT_ Hall-effect Sinking Switch w/ 5-m lead
TM_ Hall-effect Sourcing Switch with
STROKE LENGTH & MOUNTING TYPE
BC4
SUPPORTS (LS_10) 5-meter lead/QD

SK _ _ . _ _ Stroke, enter desired stroke TT_ Hall-effect Sourcing Switch with
length in inches MP_ Support & number required
5-meter lead
SM† _ _ . _ _ Stroke, enter desired stroke CM_ TRIAC Switch with 5-meter lead/QD
length in millimeters *NOTE: Four square nuts are CT_ TRIAC Switch with 5-meter lead
NOTE: Actuator mounting threads and mounting provided with each linear slide for MDR Dual Magnet (Reed, Hall-effect, Triac)
LS
fasteners will be either inch or metric; base mounting. Additionally 2 square

depending on how stroke length is indicated. nuts are provided for 30” of stroke and
2 for every 20” of stroke thereafter.
SK = inch mounting
SM = metric mounting
MAXIMUM STROKE
MG
...SK ...SM SHOCK ABSORBERS (LS_14)

SIZE in mm
05 72 1,829 SH_ Shock, Heavy duty and
10 72 1,829 number required
SL_ Shock, Light duty and
Not all codes listed are compati- number required
CC

Tolomatic with any questions. NOTE: Actuators ordered without
selecting a shock absorber MUST have
See page BC4_16 for external stops. The LS does NOT have
application guidelines internal bumpers or cushions.
PB
ENGR
LS_18 1-800-328-2174
MG & MGS Magnetically Coupled
ABT
Rodless Cylinder/Slide
MXP
BC2
BC3
BC4
LS
MG
Contents
CC
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_2
MG Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_4
MG Specs, Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . MG_5
MGS Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_6
MGS Specs, Dimensions . . . . . . . . . MG_7 PB
MG Foot Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_8
MG Floating Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_9
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_10
MGS Proximity Sensor . . . . . . . . MG_12
ENGR
MGS Shock Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . MG_13

Application Data Worksheet . . . . . MG_15
MG Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . MG_16
MGS Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . MG_17
Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . MG_18
MG Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_19
MGS Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MG_20
Mag coupled cylinder Endurance Technology features are
TolOMatic… the rodless cylinder leader
designed for maximum durability to Deceleration
•Built-in shock
With magnetically coupled cylinders there is no mechanical absorber mounting
connection of the carrier to the piston. The fully enclosed actuator
• External bumpers Magnetic force
abt
ABT
body prevents contaminants from entering or escaping the
actuator body. The perfect choice for applications where there are standard connects Piston
environmental concerns. Features internal polyurethane bumpers bearing choice •̨End of stroke adjustment to carrier
for dampened end-of-travel impact, anodized aluminum heads •Rare earth magnets
and actuator block, and a field-repairable design to practically •Precision linear ball bearing or
create positive
eliminate maintenance downtime. • Sintered bronze connecton
MXP
MXP
Air or oil actuated to 100 PSIG. With no mechanical piston between
connection, the actuator block can be easily rotated for increased piston and
mounting flexibility. carrier
Multiple -
M G S Mag slide Ported head • 3 coupling strengths
blocks • Decouples at known
BC2
BC2
•Flexible air connection force (useful in a variety
to suit your application of applications)
• Wear bearing for long life
BC3
BC3
Hardened steel shafts
•Corrosion resistant, durable and Options - Cylinder
stable support system
Floating mount Bracket fl
BC4
BC4
• Compensates for non-parallelism between
cylinder and independently guided load
• Makes installation easier, increases actuator
Stainless steel tubing block bearing life
•Precision milled interior on these long Foot Mount F M
LS
LS
lasting, corrosion resistant tubes • Best mounting choice in most applications
• Made from plated stamped steel
anodized aluminum
carrier Switches
•Durable and corrosion resistant • Available in Reed, Hall-effect and Triac
field repairable design
MG
MG
engineered
• Precision milled • 15ft. cable with flying leads; available with quick-
•Unique in the industry disconnect couplers
elastomer wiper
• Durable and reliable •No leak construction corrosion resistant
• Stainless steel components with seals for use in
• Durable, long lasting material harsh environments
CC
CC
M G Mag cylinder Options - slide
Shock Absorbers SL SH
• Smoother deceleration
PB
PB
• Self-compensates for load changes
• Reduces need for equipment maintenance
Proximity sensor
• L.E.D. deivce senses end-of-stroke with one
ENGR
ENGR
Pneumatically or of two normally open inductive dc proximity
sensors.
Hydraulically
anodized aluminum heads powered Switches
•No leak construction • Available in Reed, Hall-effect and Triac
•Durable and corrosion resistant • 15ft. cable with flying leads; available with quick-
• Up to 100 PSI disconnect couplers
MG_2 1.800.328.2174 www.tolomatic.com MG_3

MG Magnetically Coupled Cylinder - All Sizes
PERFORMANCE
MGA, MGB, MGC THEORETICAL FORCE vs PRESSURE
abt
PRESSURE (bar)
1.4 2.1 2.8 3.4 4.1 4.8 5.5 6.2 6.9
ORDER CODES
80 36.3
MGA025, MGB025, MGC025
MXP
MGA038, MGB038, MGC038 70 31.8

MGA062, MGB062, MGC062
MGA100, MGB100, MGC100 60 RE 27.2
inch (U.S. Standard) BO
1"
FORCE (lbs)
FORCE (kg)
50 22.7
MG OPTIONS Page
Floating Mount Bracket MG_9
BC2
40 18.1
Foot Mounts MG_8
Switches MG_10 30 BOR
E 13.6
MORE INFORMATION Page 5/8"
Application Guidelines MG_18
20 9.1
Ordering MG_19 10 3/8" BORE 4.5
BC3
Selection MG_16 1/4" BORE

0 0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PRESSURE (PSI)
MAGNETIC COUPLING STRENGTH
BC4
“A” “B” “C”

Strength Strength Strength
100 45.4 TUBE DEFLECTION
LS
COUPLING FORCE (lbs)
COUPLING FORCE (kg)
80 36.3 STROKE LENGTH (mm)

1,016
1,270
1,524
1,778
2,032
508
762
60 27.2 .014 .356

MG
40 18.1 .012 .305
TUBE DEFLECTION (mm)

TUBE DEFLECTION (in)
.010 .254
20 9.1
CC
.008 .203
0 0
3/8" BORE
1/4" BORE
MGA025
MGA038
MGA062
MGA100
MGB025
MGB038
MGB062
MGB100
MGC025
MGC038
MGC062
MGC100
.006 .152
PB
5/8" BORE
1" BORE
.004 .102
NOTES REGARDING MAGNETIC COUPLING
.002 .051
ENGR
1) De-coupling will occur if coupling force is

exceeded.
20 30 40 50 60 70 80
2) All coupling forces listed are for horizontal
applications. For vertical applications, Tolomatic
STROKE LENGTH (in)
recommends using a 2-to-1 coupling force
safety factor.
MG_4 1.800.328.2174
3d cad available at
www.tolomatic.com
MG Magnetically Coupled Cylinder - All Sizes

SPECIFICATIONS
MGA, MGB, MGC BENDING MOMENT, WEIGHT, ETC.
Bore Base Max. Max. Bending MAX. TEMPERATURE
Magnet Size Weight Weight/unit Stroke Moment My PRESSURE RANGE
ABT
Code size in mm lbs kg lbs/in kg/mm in mm in-lbs N-m PSI bar °F °C
A 0.12 0.05
B 025 0.250 6.4 0.12 0.05 0.01 0.00018 26.00 660.4 3.00 0.339
20° -7°
C 0.13 0.06
100 6.895 to to
MXP
A 0.20 0.09 140° 60°
B 038 0.375 9.5 0.21 0.10 0.01 0.00018 32.00 812.8 4.00 0.452
C 0.24 0.11 F x D = My
F (force)
A 0.49 0.22
B 062 0.625 16 0.51 0.23 0.02 0.00036 60.00 1524.0 9.00 1.017 D (distance)
BC2
C 0.57 0.26
A 1.52 0.69
B 100 1.000 25 1.55 0.70 0.04 0.00071 80.00 2032.0 35.00 3.954
C 1.79 0.81
BC3
DIMENSIONS
STROKE +2B
BC4
G C
D M
F E L R N
ØK
Q
LS
P
S (NUT)
V
A H I J U T (HEAD)
MG
B STROKE B
BORE F G H I J K L M N P Q R S T U V
025 0.250 0.47 0.23 #5-40UNC x .18 0.20 0.39 Ø.31 #10-32 0.67 0.34 0.67 0.34 3/8-24UNF 0.56 0.56 0.41 0.21
CC
038 0.375 0.50 0.23 #5-40UNC x .18 0.31 0.63 Ø.44 #10-32 0.98 0.49 0.98 0.49 3/8-24UNF 0.56 0.56 0.41 0.21
062 0.625 0.67 0.23 #8-32UNC x .24 0.37 0.75 Ø.69 #10-32 1.38 0.69 1.38 0.69 3/8-24UNF 0.56 0.75 0.44 0.22
100 1.000 0.81 0.32 #10-32UNC x .25 0.62 1.25 Ø1.09 1/8 NPT 1.81 0.91 1.81 0.91 1-12UNF 1.25 1.25 0.50 0.25
BORE A B B* C C* D E *For “C strength” BORE A B B* C C* D E
PB
025 0.250 0.38 1.25 1.32 1.56 1.70 1.00 0.50 configurations only. 025 6.4 9.7 31.8 33.5 39.6 43.2 25.4 12.7
038 0.375 0.38 1.25 1.35 1.50 1.70 1.12 0.56 038 9.5 9.7 31.8 34.3 38.1 43.2 28.4 14.2
062 0.625 0.38 1.62 1.75 1.92 2.19 1.50 0.75 062 16 9.7 41.1 44.5 48.8 55.6 38.1 19.1
100 1.000 0.50 2.19 2.40 2.75 3.17 2.00 1.00 100 25 12.7 55.6 61.0 69.9 80.5 50.8 25.4
ENGR
BORE F G H I J K L M N P Q R S T U V
025 6.4 11.9 5.8 #5-40UNC x .18 5.1 9.9 7.9 #10-32 17.0 8.6 17.0 8.6 3/8-24UNF 14.2 14.2 10.4 5.3
038 9.5 12.7 5.8 #5-40UNC x .18 7.9 16.0 11.2 #10-32 24.9 12.4 24.9 12.4 3/8-24UNF 14.2 14.2 10.4 5.3
062 16 17.0 5.8 #8-32UNC x .24 9.4 19.1 17.5 #10-32 35.1 17.5 35.1 17.5 3/8-24UNF 14.2 19.1 11.2 5.6
100 25 20.6 8.1 #10-32UNC x .25 15.7 31.8 27.7 1/8 NPT 46.0 23.1 46.0 23.1 1-12UNF 31.8 31.8 12.7 6.4
MGS Magnetically Coupled Slide - All Sizes
PERFORMANCE
MGS THEORETICAL FORCE vs PRESSURE
abt
PRESSURE (bar)
1.4 2.1 2.8 3.4 4.1 4.8 5.5 6.2 6.9
80 36.3
MXP
ORDER CODES 70 31.8

MGS038, MGS062, MGS100 60 RE 27.2
inch (U.S. Standard) BO
1"
FORCE (lbs)
FORCE (kg)
50 22.7
MGS OPTIONS Page
Proximity Sensor MG_12 40
BC2
18.1
Shock Absorber MG_13
Switches MG_10 30 E 13.6
BOR
MORE INFORMATION Page 5/8"
20 9.1
Application Guidelines MG_18
Ordering MG_20 10 3/8" BORE 4.5
BC3
Selection MG_17
0 0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PRESSURE (PSI)
BC4
MAGNETIC COUPLING STRENGTH

LOAD vs STROKE
LS
70 31.8
STROKE(mm)
60 27.2
COUPLING FORCE (lbs)
0 508 1016 1524

COUPLING FORCE (kg)
50 22.7
50 1" LB
22.7
MG
LOAD(L)/SHAFT (lbs)
LOAD(L)/SHAFT (kg)
40 40 18.1
18.1
1" SB
30
3/8" BORE
13.6 30 13.6
CC
5/8" BORE
1" BORE
20 9.1 5/8" LB
20 9.1
10 4.5
5/8" SB
0 0 10 3/8" LB 4.5
PB
MGS038 MGS062 MGS100

3/8" SB
0 0
NOTES REGARDING MAGNETIC COUPLING 0 20 40 60
1) De-coupling will occur if coupling force is STROKE(in)
ENGR
exceeded.
SB = Sintered Bronze Bearings
2) All coupling forces listed are for horizontal LB = Linear Ball Bearings
applications. For vertical applications, Tolomatic
recommends using a 2-to-1 coupling force
safety factor. Also see formulae on page MG_12
MG_6 1.800.328.2174
3d cad available at
www.tolomatic.com
MGS Magnetically Coupled Slide - All Sizes

SPECIFICATIONS
Bore Max. MAX. TEMPERATURE
Size Base Weight Weight/unit Stroke PRESSURE RANGE
size in mm lbs kg lbs/in kg/mm in mm PSI bar °F °C
ABT
038 0.375 9.5 1.24 0.56 0.004 0.000071 30.00 762.0 20° -7°
062 0.625 16 3.14 1.42 0.130 0.002322 37.00 939.8 100 6.895 to to
100 1.000 25 4.89 2.22 0.180 0.003214 55.00 1397.0 140° 60°
MXP
DIMENSIONS SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW
C STROKE C H THREAD FROM OPP SIDE,
D F (4 PLACES) THRU DIA AND C'BORE FOR J
E VV G (2) PLACES EACH END.
BC2
WW
B K N
BC3
A L
P T (2 PLACES) P
W U (2 PLACES) S Q
V R (2 PLACES)
(STROKE ADJUSTMENT EITHER
DIRECTION, BOTH ENDS)
BC4
Y (BOTH ENDS)
Y (BOTH AA YY KK
ENDS) F (4 PLACES) Y (BOTH LL
Z ENDS) XX THRU
BB MM
JJ FF
CC NN
X PP
LS
HH
GG
EE DD SS RR
UU TT
QQ (4 PLACES, BOTH ENDS)
MG
Model Bore a b* C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W
MGS038 0.375 0.30 1.875 1.66 1.19 0.59 10-24 x .38 DP 0.38 1/4-20 x .50 DP #8 0.75 0.45 2.38
0.81 0.41 1.26 max. 0.63 0.25 .2495/.2500 x .20 DP 0.13 2.00 1.00
MGS062 0.625 0.44 2.375 2.06 2.00 1.00 10-24 x .38 DP 0.50 1/4-20 x .50 DP #10 1.06 0.52 3.12
1.03 0.50 1.14 max. 0.75 0.25 .2495/.2500 x .20 DP 0.13 2.75 1.38
MGS100 1.000 0.42 3.250 2.28 2.50 1.25 10-24 x .38 DP 0.63 1/4-20 x .50 DP #10 1.63 0.63 4.06
1.22 0.53 1.14 max. 0.75 0.25 .2495/.2500 x .20 DP 0.13 3.25 1.63
CC
Model X Y Z AA BB CC DD EE FF GG HH JJ KK LL MM NN PP QQ RR SS TT UU VV WW XX YY
MGS038 1.03 #10-32 Port 0.81 1.63 1.06
1.34 0.44 0.19 0.25 0.66 1.08 1.69 1.19 0.81 0.16 0.75 1.62 8-32 x .31 DP 0.56 0.75 1.44 0.47 2.47 0.44 M8-1 3/8-32 Thru,Ø.500x.31DP
MGS062 1.09 #10-32 Port 1.00 2.00 1.44
1.52 0.34 0.28 0.13 0.64 1.08 2.00 1.56 1.19 0.19 1.25 1.91 10-24 x .38 DP 0.44 0.75 1.94 0.59 3.25 0.69 M8-1 1/2-20 Thru,Ø.625x.33DP
MGS100 1.31 1/8-27 Port 1.00 2.00 1.69
1.75 0.34 0.28 0.13 0.81 1.31 2.34 2.08 1.47 0.09 1.13 2.22 10-24 x .38 DP 0.75 1.13 2.63 0.72 4.09 1.09 M8-1 9/16-18 Thru,Ø.688x.31DP
*Tolerance between dowel pins is ±.001" Above dimensions in inches
PB
Model Bore a b* C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W
MGS038 9.5 7.6 47.6 42.2 30.2 15.0 10-24 x .38 DP 9.7 1/4-20 x .50 DP #8 19.1 11.4 60.5
20.6 10.4 32.0 max. 16.0 6.4 .2495/.2500 x .20 DP 3.3 50.8 25.4
MGS062 15.9 11.2 60.3 52.3 50.8 25.4 10-24 x .38 DP 12.7 1/4-20 x .50 DP #10 26.9 13.2 26.2 12.7 29.0 max. 19.1
79.2 6.4 .2495/.2500 x .20 DP 3.3 69.9 35.1
MGS100 25.4 10.7 82.6 57.9 63.5 31.8 10-24 x .38 DP 16.0 1/4-20 x .50 DP #10 41.4 16.0 13.5 29.0 max. 19.1
31.0 103.1 6.4 .2495/.2500 x .20 DP 3.3 82.6 41.4
ENGR
Model X Y Z AA BB CC DD EE FF GG HH JJ KK LL MM NN PP QQ RR SS TT UU VV WW XX YY
MGS038 26.2 #10-32 Port 20.6 41.4 26.9
34.0 11.2 4.8 6.4 16.8 27.4 42.9 30.2 20.6 4.1 19.1 41.1 8-32 x .31 DP 14.2 19.1 36.6 11.9 62.7 11.2 M8-1 3/8-32 Thru,Ø.500x.31DP
MGS062 27.7 #10-32 Port 25.4 50.8 36.6
38.6 8.6 7.1 3.3 16.3 27.4 50.8 39.6 30.2 4.8 31.8 48.5 10-24 x .38 DP 11.2 19.1 49.3 15.0 82.6 17.5 M8-1 1/2-20 Thru,Ø.625x.33DP
MGS100 33.3 1/8-27 Port 25.4 50.8 42.9
44.5 8.6 7.1 3.3 20.6 33.3 59.4 52.8 37.3 2.3 28.7 56.4 10-24 x .38 DP 19.1 28.7 66.8 18.3 103.9 27.7 M8-1 9/16-18 Thru,Ø.688x.31DP
*Tolerance between dowel pins is ±.025mm Above dimensions in millimeters
3d cad available at
www.tolomatic.com
MG Foot Mount - All Sizes

Foot Mount
Foot mounts are an excellent mounting alternative. Made
from plated stamped steel, foot mounts are attached to
cylinder heads as shown in the dimension drawing, below.
abt
Foot mounts may be ordered for one or both ends of the

cylinder. Foot mounts can then be attached to almost any
surface at a 90° angle to provide solid support without
affecting stroke.
ORDER CODE
MXP
FM_
DIMENSIONS
BC2
BC3
STROKE + N J
STROKE + P 6xØL K
BC4
A TYP E
B TYP F
STROKE + C M
H
LS
STROKE + D G
BORE A B C C* D D* E F G H J K L M N N* P P*
025 0.250 1.13 0.56 2.06 2.20 3.06 3.20 1.50 0.75 1.16 0.72 0.50 0.25 Ø.17 0.06 1.49 1.89 3.36 3.23
038 0.375 1.13 0.56 2.06 2.26 3.06 3.26 1.50 0.75 1.16 0.72 0.50 0.25 Ø.17 0.06 1.49 1.95 3.36 3.29
MG
062 0.625 1.13 0.56 2.80 3.07 3.80 4.07 1.50 0.75 1.16 0.72 0.50 0.25 Ø.17 0.06 2.50 2.77 4.12 4.39
100 1.000 1.25 0.63 3.65 4.07 5.38 5.80 1.75 0.88 2.25 1.25 1.50 0.75 Ø.22 0.13 3.15 3.58 5.88 6.31
*For “C strength” configurations only.
BORE A B C C* D D* E F G H J K L M N N* P P*
CC
025 6.4 28.7 14.2 52.3 55.9 77.7 81.3 38.1 19.1 29.5 18.3 12.7 6.4 4.3 1.5 37.8 48.0 85.3 82.0
038 9.5 28.7 14.2 52.3 57.4 77.7 82.8 38.1 19.1 29.5 18.3 12.7 6.4 4.3 1.5 37.8 49.5 85.3 83.6
062 16 28.7 14.2 71.1 78.0 96.5 103.4 38.1 19.1 29.5 18.3 12.7 6.4 4.3 1.5 63.5 70.4 104.6 111.5
100 25 31.8 16.0 92.7 103.4 136.7 147.3 44.5 22.4 57.2 31.8 38.1 19.1 5.6 3.3 80.0 90.9 149.4 160.3
PB
Bore
Size Weight
size in mm lbs kg
025 0.250 6.4 0.07 0.032
ENGR
038 0.375 9.5 0.07 0.032

062 0.625 16 0.17 0.077
100 1.000 25 0.28 0.127
MG_8 1.800.328.2174
3d cad available at
www.tolomatic.com
MG Floating Mount Bracket - All Sizes

Floating Mount Bracket
The integral floating mount bracket is available for
ORDER CODE applications in which a load is externally guided and
FL supported and there is a need to compensate for non-
ABT
parallelism between the cylinder and the independently-
guided load.
Loads which are not parallel to the cylinder may result in the
cylinder binding if the floating mount bracket is not used.
Also, use of the floating mount is highly recommended to
MXP
provide easier set-up of guide/support system and to help
increase actuator block bearing life.
DIMENSIONS A
BC2
B U
C
D ±V
E
F
BC3
M K S
P
N J R
L
BC4
ØQ
G ±T
LS
H
BORE A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V
025 0.250 1.34 0.67 0.66 0.33 0.63 0.31 0.16 0.31 1.26 0.63 0.87 0.43 0.37 0.18 Ø.14 1.14 0.57 0.04 0.53 0.08
038 0.375 1.47 0.73 0.78 0.39 0.69 0.34 0.16 0.31 1.57 0.78 1.18 0.59 0.63 0.31 Ø.14 1.45 0.72 0.04 0.69 0.08
MG
062 0.625 1.88 0.94 1.12 0.56 0.79 0.39 0.19 0.38 2.09 1.05 1.64 0.82 0.75 0.38 Ø.19 1.99 0.99 0.04 0.93 0.08
100 1.000 2.50 1.25 1.50 0.75 1.14 0.57 0.31 0.62 2.60 1.30 2.07 1.03 1.25 0.63 Ø.248 2.44 1.22 0.06 1.20 0.08
BORE A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V
CC
025 6.4 34.0 17.0 16.8 8.4 16.0 7.9 4.1 7.9 32.0 16.0 22.1 10.9 9.4 4.6 3.6 29.0 14.5 1.0 13.5 2.0
038 9.5 37.3 18.5 19.8 9.9 17.5 8.6 4.1 7.9 39.9 19.8 30.0 15.0 16.0 7.9 3.6 36.8 18.3 1.0 17.5 2.0
062 15.9 47.8 23.9 28.4 14.2 20.1 9.9 4.8 9.7 53.1 26.7 41.7 20.8 19.1 9.7 4.8 50.5 25.1 1.0 23.6 2.0
100 25.4 63.5 31.8 38.1 19.1 29.0 14.5 7.9 15.7 66.0 33.0 52.6 26.2 31.8 16.0 6.3 62.0 31.0 1.5 30.5 2.0
Dimensions in millimeters PB
Bore
Size Weight
size in mm lbs kg
025 0.250 6.4 0.06 0.027
ENGR
038 0.375 9.5 0.08 0.036

062 0.625 16 0.18 0.082
100 1.000 25 0.33 0.150
MG & MGS Switches - All Sizes
SWITCHES
ABT
QUICK-DISCONNECT
COUPLER - MALE END
MXP

SPECIFICATIONS
BC2

BC3
Open
None None
BC4
LS

MG

1 Amp at 0.5 Amp at
86°F [30°C] 140°F [60°C]
CC
BEND

PB
Female coupler to flying lead (part #2503-1025) distance is 197" [5m] also see Cable Shielding specification above
BROWN BLUE BROWN
ENGR
BLUE
CURRENT
Quick disconnect
Wiring
- + OLD
Quick disconnect
Wiring
SIGNAL -
Reed Switch Life Expectancy: Up to
BLACK BLACK
†
SIGNAL +
§
§§
MG_10 1.800.328.2174
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
MG & MGS Switches - All Sizes

PERFORMANCE
600 1000 200
TRIAC
LOAD CURRENT (mA)

LOAD CURENT (mA)
500 800
400
REED FORM A 150
600
ABT
300
400 100
200 REED FORM C
RE
200 50 D REED FO
E
100 FOR RM A
MC
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0
CURRENT D.C (mA)
MXP
(+) BROWN THE NOTCHED

(+) AC
LOAD REED FACE OF THE
BC2
COM
(-) Max. THE SENSING
(-) LOAD
OR BLUE
SURFACE AND
BROWN INPUT MUST FACE
(+) REED TRIAC MAGNET.
LOAD SWITCH
BC3
BLUE SWITCH
(-)
(-)

COMMON BROWN
THE NOTCHED
BC4
BLUE ACTUATOR
GROOVE TO
SWITCH. CONTACT
BROWN(+) (+)
SWITCHES ARE
LS
HALL-EFFECT BLACK
HALL-EFFECT BLACK
SOURCING
SWITCH SINKING REQUIRED ON
BLUE (-) SWITCH BLUE (-) ANOTHER SIDE OF
LOAD
MG
MG Magnetically Coupled Cylinder
SENSING SURFACE D
DIMENSIONS A
B
E
10˚
CC
F G
H
PB
NOTE: TO AVOID SWITCH DAMAGE, C
SWITCH SHOULD BE POSITIONED
OPPOSITE ACTUATOR BLOCK ACTUATOR BLOCK
MOUNTING SURFACE. MOUNTING SURFACE
ENGR
BORE A B C D E F G H BORE A B C D E F G H
025 0.250 1.23 0.40 0.06 0.53 0.27 0.91 0.88 0.51 025 6.4 31.24 10.16 1.52 13.46 6.86 23.16 22.35 12.95
038 0.375 1.23 0.40 0.06 0.53 0.27 1.07 1.04 0.67 038 9.5 31.24 10.16 1.52 13.46 6.86 27.18 26.42 17.02
062 0.625 1.60 0.45 0.06 0.53 0.27 1.27 1.24 0.87 062 15.9 40.64 11.43 1.52 13.46 6.86 32.26 31.50 22.10
100 1.000 2.12 0.50 0.06 0.53 0.27 1.48 1.45 1.08 100 25.4 53.85 12.70 1.52 13.46 6.86 37.59 36.83 27.43
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
MGS Switches - All Sizes

MGS Magnetically Coupled Slide
SENSING
DIMENSIONS SURFACE A
BORE A
038 0.375 1.24 0.47
B
062 0.625 1.16 0.47

ABT
B 100 1.000 1.47 0.47

BORE A B
038 9.5 31.50 11.94
MXP
062 15.9 29.46 11.94

100 25.4 37.34 11.94
BC2
MGS Proximity Sensor

Proximity Sensor
This L.E.D. device senses end-of-stroke with one of two
BC3
normally open inductive d.c. proximity sensors. NPN supplies

a sinking signal; PNP supplies a sourcing signal to a device
such as a programmable logic controller.
Ambient Temp.: -13° to 158° F., (-25° to 70° C.)
BC4
NEMA Encl. Rating: 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, 13

Lead Length: 6.56 feet (2.0 m)
ORDER CODES
Max. Sensing Distance: 0.016" (0.4 mm)
NP_, PN_
LS
Wiring Diagrams
DIMENSIONS B
(MAX.)
MG
NPN Output Transition Circuit Load PNP Output Transition Circuit Load
(Brown) (Brown)
+V
4.7kΩ 100Ω +V Tr
Load
(Black) (Black)
Main Main
Circuit Circuit
2.2Ω Tr 2.2Ω
Load
CC
4.7kΩ
(Blue) (Blue) 100Ω
OV OV
200mA Max. (Sink Current), 2V Max. (Residual Voltage) 200mA Max. (Source Current), 2V Max. (Residual Voltage)
BORE B WEIGHT
SIZE in mm in mm lbs kg
NPN Output PNP Output
038 0.375 9.5 0.63 16.0 0.24 0.109
PB
NO NO
Target Present Target Present
Absent Absent 062 0.625 16 0.52 13.2 0.24 0.109
Load (between Operates Load (between Operates
black and blue) Releases
100 1.000 25 0.52 13.2 0.25 0.113
black and blue) Releases
Logic (between H Logic (between H
brown and black) L brown and black) L
ENGR
Operation On Operation On
indicator (LED) OFF indicator (LED) OFF
Short-Circuit Indication Resetting Short-Circuit Protection

The load output immediately turns off and remains off To reset the short-circuit protection, repair the short. The
until the short-circuit protection is reset. short-circuit protection will then automatically reset.
MG_12 1.800.328.2174
MGS Shock Absorbers - All Sizes
SHOCK ABSORBERS Magnetically coupled slides with standard internal bumpers
offer an effective method of decelerating loads. However,
magnetically coupled slides are capable of carrying heavier
loads at higher velocities than the internal bumpers can
ABT
the unit’s life and broaden the application range for the
magnetically coupled slide you have chosen.
cycles (depending on environment). Appropriate
preventative maintenance should be considered in high
MXP
cyclic applications.
ORDER CODE
CAUTION: In applications which result in a load
bending moment at deceleration, care should be taken
SD_ or SH_ or SL_
to decelerate the load rather than the carrier of the
BC2
(_ = Number
ordered) magnetically coupled slide.
BC3
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
DIMENSIONS
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
BC4
LS
A
MG
(MAX.)
BORE A WEIGHT
SIZE in mm in mm lbs kg
038 0.375 9.5 0.94 23.9 0.01 0.005
CC
062 0.625 16 2.48 63.0 0.02 0.009
100 1.000 25 2.63 66.8 0.04 0.018
PB
ENGR
MGS Shock Absorbers - All Sizes - PERFORMANCE
VELOCITY vs LOAD
MGS038 MGS062
LOAD (kg) LOAD (kg)
.91 1.8 2.7 3.6 4.5 9.1 18.1 27 36 45 .45 1.4 2.3 3.2 4.1 9.1 18.1 27 36 45
ABT
.45 1.4 2.3 3.2 4.1 6.8 13.6 23 32 41 .91 1.8 2.7 3.6 4.5 13.6 23 32 41
100 2.5 2.3
90 100 2.5
80 2.0 90 2.3
70 1.8 80 2.0

60 1.5 1.3 70 1.8
50 60 1.5

1.3
40 1.02 50

40 1.0
30 .76
30 .76
MXP
20 .51
20 .51
10 .25 .25 .23

9 .23 10
8 .20 9
7 .18 8 .20
.15 7 .18
6 6 .15
5 .13 5 .13
BC2
4 .10 4 .10
3 .08 3 .08
2 .05 2 .05
1 .03 1 .03
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90 2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90
BC3
1 3 5 7 9 15 20 40 60 80 100
1LOAD (Kgs.)
3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80 100
18.1
27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
.5
13.6
22.7
1.8
4.5
.9
100 2.5
MGS100 90 80
70 60
2.0
1.5
2.3
1.8
BC4
FINAL VELOCITY (Meters/sec.)

50 1.3
FINAL VELOCITY (in./sec.)
LOAD (kg) 40 1.0

.8
LIGHT DUTY (Light
18.1
27.2
31.7 36.3
40.8 45.4
30
1.4
2.3
2.7 3.2
3.6 4.1
9.1
NOTE: If
.5
20 .5
load/High velocity)
13.6
22.7
1.8
4.5
final (or impact)

.9
100 2.5 .25

80
90
2.0
2.3 10
8 9 velocity .23cannot
.20 be
70 1.8 7 .18
calculated
LS
60 1.5 6 .15
HEAVY DUTY (Heavy .13
50 1.3 5
4 directly,.08a .10
40 1.0
30 .8 3 load/Low velocity) reasonable.05
2
20 .5 guideline to use is
1 2 x average.03
10 .23 .25 Bumpers
MG
9 2 4 6 8 10 30 50velocity.
70 90
8 7 .20
.18 1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80 100
6 .15
5 .13 LOAD (Lbs.)
4 .10
3 .08
2 .05
CC
1 .03
2 4 6 8 10 30 50 70 90
1 3 5 7 9 20 40 60 80 100
LOAD (lbs)
PB
ENGR
MG_14 1.800.328.2174

ABT
MXP
lbf N
LOAD ______________________ in/sec mm/sec
lb kg
BC2
MOVE TIME sec. _____________
inch millimeters
BC3
ORIENTATION
Horizontal CENTER Side CENTER Horizontal Down
dz OF GRAVITY
dy
OF GRAVITY
BC4
Y
Y
d
x Z
x d
d d
x
dz
d
d
CENTER
OF GRAVITY
LS
Lz
Vertical Z
Angled a __________ b
CENTER ____________ X
OF GRAVITY Lz
Z
dx Y FRONT
β VIEW
MG
SIDE VIEW
z
d
dY α
OTHER ISSUES:
CC
(i.e. Environment,
Temperature,
PB
ENGR

MG: Mag Coupled Cylinder Selection Guidelines - All Sizes
EXTERNAL LOAD GUIDANCE AND SUPPORT
2 3
The process of selecting a DETERMINE Cross-reference the final
magnetically coupled cyl- SELECT COUPLING velocity and weight of the load.
inder for a given applica- If the intersection is below the
CYLINDER SIZE FORCE
ABT
diagonal lines, the internal

tion can be complex. It is • Consult the Theoretical Force REQUIREMENTS cushions on the actuator may
highly recommended that vs. Pressure charts. Use the following formula: be used. If the point falls above
you contact Tolomatic or • Cross-reference the load force F = .013 x Weight x Velocity2 the dashed diagonal line or if
a Tolomatic Distributor for (or load weight if force is not the velocity is not known, use
assistance in selecting Calculated value must be less
MXP
known) and the available deceleration circuits, external

the best actuator for your operating pressure. If the than the Magnetic Coupling shock absorbers or select a
intersection falls below the Strength values. larger cylinder with greater
application. The following (page MG_4)
overview of the selection diagonal line, and if moments cushion capacity. On high-
do not exceed maximum cyclic applications, use of
guidelines are for educa-
BC2
values listed for that model external stops is strongly

tional purposes only.
4
(see Step 3), the actuator will recommended.
DETERMINE
1
accommodate the application.
COMPILE If the intersection is above the INTERNAL NOTE: Magnetically coupled
CUSHION cylinders do not have internal
APPLICATION diagonal line, a larger cylinder
cushions. Heavier loads require
bore size should be CAPACITY
BC3
REQUIREMENTS external stops or shock

To determine the appropriate considered. • Consult the Cushion Data chart absorbers.
Magnetically Coupled Cylinder NOTE: Additional force may be for the model selected. The
model for an application, compile required to obtain the necessary velocities listed on the cushion
the following information: acceleration for vertical or charts are final or cushion
BC4
horizontal loads. impact velocities. On

• Available pressure (PSI) applications where the internal
• Weight of load (lbs. or kgs.) cushions or bumpers are to be
used, be sure the actual, final
• Orientation of load (lbs. or or impact velocity is known. If
kgs.) the velocity is not known, use
LS
• Velocity of load (in./sec. or of limit switches with valve

mm/sec.) deceleration circuits or shock
absorbers should be
• Stroke length (in. or mm) considered.
MG
CC
PB
ENGR
MG_16 1.800.328.2174
MGS: Mag Coupled Slide Selection Guidelines - All Sizes
1 5 6
COMPILE diagonal line, a larger cylinder DETERMINE THE DETERMINE
APPLICATION bore size should be BEARING ROD COUPLING
considered.
REQUIREMENTS LOAD CAPACITY FORCE
ABT
To determine the appropriate NOTE: Additional force may be Determine whether the Load REQUIRED
Magnetically Coupled Slide for an required to obtain the necessary Weight and Stroke Length will be • Consult the Mag Coupling
application, compile the following acceleration for vertical or within the load capacity for the Strength chart (page MG_6). If
information: horizontal loads. bearing rods. the load value is less than the
MXP
coupling force for the chosen
3
• Available pressure (PSI) Cross reference the load weight
KEEP UNDER and stroke on the Load Weight actuator, it may be used for the
• Weight of load (lbs. or kgs.) application. If the load value is
MAXIMUM vs. Stroke chart for the selected
greater than the coupling force
• Orientation of load (lbs. or STROKE LENGTH bore size. (Page MG_6) If the
for the chosen actuator, select
kgs.) There are specific maximum intersection falls below the curve,
BC2
the cylinder will accommodate a larger actuator.
• Velocity of load (in./sec. or stroke lengths for each model.
the application requirements. If
7
mm/sec.) MGS038: 30.00”
MGS062: 37.00” the intersection falls outside the DETERMINE
• Stroke length (in. or mm) MGS100: 55.00” curve, consult the chart of a INTERNAL
larger bore size that will BUMPER
2 4
BC3
accommodate the required load
DETERMINE weight and stroke for your CAPACITY
SELECT NATURE OF application. • Consult the Cushion Data chart
CYLINDER SIZE LOAD AND THE (Bumper Data for Magnetically
• Consult the Theoretical Force The weight on the bearing rods Coupled Slides page MG_14) for
EFFECT OF causes them to bend or deflect the model selected. The
BC4
vs. Pressure charts.
BENDING slightly over their length. This velocities listed on the cushion
• Cross-reference the load force MOMENTS deflection is increased for longer charts are final or cushion
(or load weight if force is not If the actuator will guide and rods and/or higher weights on impact velocities. On
known) and the available support a load located directly the bearing block. For proper applications where internal
operating pressure. If the over the center of carrier, bending operation, rod deflection must not bumpers are to be used, be
LS
intersection falls below the moments will not be a factor in exceed .30". sure the actual, final or impact
diagonal line, and if moments the actuator selection. velocity is known. If the velocity
do not exceed maximum Magnetically Coupled Slides is not known, use of limit
values listed for that model perform best that way. See the switches with valve
(see Step 3), the actuator will Bending Moments Formulae deceleration circuits or shock
MG
accommodate the application. below if your application requires absorbers should be
If the intersection is above the the load to be away from center considered.
of the carrier.
CC
“L” MOMENT “Mx” MOMENT “My” / “Mz” MOMENT
BENDING MOMENTS
Loading Equation Data L = W L = WB F or G = 2L = WB
2 A D
BORE A D F G
MODEL W W W PB
SIZE (in.) (in.) (lbs.) (lbs.) B
MGS038 3/8" 1.44 1.13 14.00 11.00
MGS062 5/8" 1.94 1.50 40.00 32.00
MGS100 1" 2.62 2.00 90.00 72.00 B D
ENGR
(See MGS Load vs Stroke graph on page MG_6)

A
L should be below curve for the corresponding slide on the “Load vs.
Loading Equation Key Stroke” chart (for sintered bronze or linear bearings - Mag Coupled Slides).
A = Distance between shaft centers L = Load per shaft (lbs.) F = Max. bearing sliding load (linear
B = Distance from load center to center W = Payload weight (lbs.) bearings) (lbs.)
of nearest shaft (in.); determined by D = Axial distance between center of G = Max. bearing sliding load (sintered
application bearings (in.) bronze bearings) (lbs.)
ABT

MXP
10-weight lubricant.
BC2
ADJUSTMENT (BC2,
BC3

prelubricated at the factory. To
The factory prelubrication of premature wear.
BC4

Adjust the cushion needles in • Filtration dispense “Food Grade”
the cylinder heads carefully to use of external lubrication.
lubricants to the air supply.
LS

free deceleration for your dry, filtered air in our
particular application. If there products. “Filtered air”
are questions on proper means a level of 10 Micron
supply is kept constant. PG-1 or equivalent.
adjustment, please consult or less. “Dry” means air
MG

CC

Velocity calculations for all rodless final (or impact) velocity. Rodless cylinders
PB
Final (impact)
VELOCITY
ENGR

Start Time End
MG_18 1.800.328.2174
MG Ordering - ALL Sizes
MGC 062 SK58.250 FM2 FL BM2
ABT
MODEL & MAG COUPLING STROKE LENGTH SWITCHES (MG_10)
MGA Low coupling strength SK _ _._ _ Enter desired stroke length
LEAD LENGTH
DISCONNECT
mag coupled cylinder in decimal inches
QUANTITY
MGB Medium coupling strength
MXP
QUICK-
MAXIMUM STROKE
CODE
mag coupled cylinder
MG_ TYPE
MGC High coupling strength
mag coupled cylinder SIZE in mm
025 26.00 660.4 QD RM
Form A
038 32.00 812.8 no RT

REED
BORE SIZE 062 60.00 1,524.0 BM
BC2
QD
025 0.25” (6.4mm) 100 80.00 2,032.0 Form C
no BT
038 0.375” (9.5mm)
5 meters
QD KM
HALL-EFFECT
062 0.625” (16mm) Sinking
FOOT MOUNT (MG_8) no KT
100 1.00” (25mm)
FM_ Foot Mount & number QD TM
BC3
required (1 or 2) Sourcing
no TT
QD CM
FLOATING MOUNT (MG_9) TRIAC
no CT
FL Floating Mount Bracket
BC4
MG Service Parts Ordering - ALL Sizes
LS
CONFIG. CODE ORDERING SIZE 025 038 062 100
Floating Mount Kit 2402-9005 2403-9005 2406-9005 2410-9005
DESCRIPTION CODE Foot Mount Kit1 2402-9011 2402-9011 2402-9011 2410-9011
MG
Switch Kit, Reed, Form C, 5m BT
Switch Kit, Reed, Form C, Male Conn. BM
Switch Kit, Reed, Form A, 5m RT
Switch Kit, Reed, Form A, Male Conn. RM Service Parts Ordering NOTES:
1 Foot Mount Kit contains two (2) brackets.
Switch Kit, Triac, Male Conn. CM
CC
Switch Kit, Hall-effect, Sinking, 5m KT _ = numeric entry required
Switch Kit, Hall-effect, Sourcing, Male Conn. TM
NOTE: When kit is ordered female connector & all mounting hardware is PB
included

ENGR
of switch required)
Example: SW M G C 0 6 2 RT
(Hardware and Form A Reed switch with 5 meter lead for
0.625" bore Mag coupled cylinder)
MGS Ordering - ALL Sizes
MGS 062 SK28.250 LB SL2 BM2

ABT
MODEL BEARING SELECTION SWITCHES (MG_10)

MGS Mag coupled slide SB Sintered Bronze Bearing
LEAD LENGTH
DISCONNECT
LB Linear Ball Bearings
QUANTITY
MXP
QUICK-
BORE SIZE
CODE
038 0.375” (9.5mm) PROXIMITY SENSOR TYPE
062 0.625” (16mm) (MG_12) QD RM
100 1.00” (25mm) NP_ Sinking type proximity Form A

no RT
REED
sensor (NPN) QD BM
BC2
PN_ Sourcing type proximity Form C

STROKE LENGTH no BT
sensor (PNP)
5 meters
QD KM
HALL-EFFECT
SK _ _._ _ Enter desired stroke length Sinking
in decimal inches no KT
SHOCK ABSORBERS QD TM
MAXIMUM STROKE (MG_13) Sourcing
BC3
MG_ no TT
SIZE in mm SL_ Light duty shock absorber QD CM
038 30.00 762.0 SH_ Heavy duty shock absorber TRIAC
no CT
062 37.00 939.8
100 55.00 1,397.0
BC4
MGS Service Parts Ordering - ALL Sizes

LS
SIZE 038 062 100

Mounting Hardware & FE conn. included Shock Absorbers Light Duty 2403-1062 2406-1063 0910-1479
DESCRIPTION CODE Shock Absorbers Heavy Duty 0605-1006 2406-1062 0910-1480
Switch Kit, Reed, Form C, 5m BT NPN Sinking Proximity Sensor 2410-1048 2410-1048 2410-1048
Switch Kit, Reed, Form C, Male Conn. BM PNP Sourcing Proximity Sensor 2410-1053 2410-1053 2410-1053
MG
Switch Rail 2403-8888 2406-8888 2410-8888

Switch Kit, Reed, Form A, Male Conn. RM Magnet 2410-9020 2410-9020 2410-9020
CC

NOTE: When kit is ordered female connector & all mounting hardware is included

To order field retrofit switch and hardware kits for all
PB
Tolomatic actuators: SW (Then the model and bore

size, and type of switch required)
Example: SW M G S 0 6 2 RT
(Hardware and Form A Reed switch with 5 meter
lead for 0.625" bore Mag coupled slide)
ENGR
MG_20 1.800.328.2174
CC CABLE CYLINDER
RODLESS CYLINDER
CONTENTS
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_2
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_4
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_5
Double Acting Cable Cylinder . . . . . . . CC_6
CC05, CC07, CC10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_7
CC15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_8
CC20, CC25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_9
CC30, CC40, CC52 . . . . . . . . . . . CC_10
CC50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_11
Single Acting Cable Cylinder . . . . . . CC_12
SA07, SA10, SA15 . . . . . . . . . . . CC_13
SA20, SA25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_14
SA30, SA40, SA52, SA50 . . . . . CC_15
Double Purchase Cable Cylinder . . . . CC_16
DP15, DP20, DP25 . . . . . . . . . . . CC_17
DP30, DP40, DP52 . . . . . . . . . . . CC_18
Track Cable Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_19
TC05, TC07, TC10 . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_20
TC15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_21
Automatic Tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_22
CC07,10,15,20,25 . . . . . . . . . . . CC_23
CC30,40,52,50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_24
CC/Brake Combination . . . . . . . . . . . CC_25
CC15, CC20, CC25 . . . . . . . . . . . CC_26
CC30, CC40, CC52 . . . . . . . . . . . CC_27
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_28
CC Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . CC_30
CC/Brake Selection Guidelines . . . . CC_32
TC Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . CC_35
CC Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . CC_36
Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_38
Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_39
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_40
CABLE CYLINDER Endurance Technology features are
Tolomatic invented the first ever rodless cylinder in 1956 - the cable cylinder. First designed into the bagger/sealer used in the flour industry
the cable cylinder continues to power applications in the 21st century. Built-to-order in stroke lengths up to 282 inches.
HIGH STRENGTH TUBE STEEL CLEVIS

• High-strength, •High strength material
lightweight, black resists deformation
anodized aluminum • Cable adjustment points
or steel
• Threaded holes for load
• Creates chamber attachment
for pneumatic or
hydraulic pressure
and protects piston The Tolomatic double-acting C C DOUBLE
cable cylinder is a versatile ACTING
space saver, available in all 9 CABLE
bore sizes. Enjoy cost savings CYLINDER
over conventional rod cylinders in strokes over four feet
without experiencing rod buckle.
PORTING CHOICES These cylinders can be isolated from any work area
with extended cable lengths and achieve
•Choose from 2 or 3 port heads strokes of up to 60 feet in length.
ALUMINUM PISTON
• High-strength,
lightweight aluminum
• Pulls the cables
when actuated
by pneumatic or
hydraulic pressure
UNIQUE GLAND SEALS

• T ight seal for cables
to pass through
DIE CAST LOCATE REMOTELY
• Easy installation
HEAD ASSEMBLY •Cylinder can be located away
• High-strength, lightweight from work area. Useful in • Snap In/Out
anodized aluminum harsh environments and if cable seals or
• Protects piston and creates space/weight are limited encapsulated gland
chamber for pneumatic or seals depending on
hydraulic pressure bore size
CC_2 1.800.328.2174
S A SINGLE ACTING
CABLE CYLINDER
• Use in vertical applications
when double acting cable
cylinder is not required
MIL SPEC CABLES
• Can be positioned
• Field proven to provide horizontally and achieve
millions of cycles of vertical movement
uninterrupted service
•Nylon jacketed aircraft
cables manufactured under
Mil Spec. MiL-W-83420D
DP DOUBLE PURCHASE
CABLE CYLINDER
• Doubles the velocity and
stroke capacity of cable
cylinder without increasing
space requirements
• Stroke lengths up to 120
feet (36.6m)
• Isolates cylinder from harsh
environments
OPTIONS
AUTO TENSIONER
• Maintains proper cable tension
• Maximizes service life of both cable and seals
T C TRACK CABLE CALIPER DISC BRAKE HM HN

CYLINDER
• Best mounting choice in most applications
STEEL TUBE
• For extra strength & use in harsh environments
3 PORTED HEAD
•Guides and supports load • For convenient air connection
• Precision linear ball bearings on
hardened ground steel shafts
SWITCHES
• Available in Reed and Triac
disconnect couplers
SEALS OF VITON® MATERIAL V

• Long lasting seal option
• High temperature applications
EXTRA CABLE XA XB

• To remotely locate cable cylinder
CC Cable Cylinder
APPLICATIONS
Tolomatic invented the first ever rodless cylinder in 1956 - the
cable cylinder. First designed into the bagger/sealer used
in the flour industry the cable cylinder continues to power
applications in the 21st century. The cable cylinder has been a
key component in the following industries:
• Packaging •Metal Processing
•Automotive •Paper and Textiles
•Food & Beverage •Medical
•Material Handling & •Electronics
Conveying •Printing
•Plastic Injection Molding •Many Others
CC_4 1.800.328.2174
CC Cable Cylinder
PERFORMANCE
CABLE CYLINDER THEORETICAL FORCE VS PRESSURE
PRESSURE (bar)
10.3
11.0
11.7
12.4
13.1
13.8
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.4
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.2
6.9
7.6
8.3
9.0
9.7
.7
2,000 907
1,800 817
0
CC5
1,600 726
1,400 635
0
C C3
1,200 544
40
FORCE (lbs)
CC
FORCE (kg)
1,000 454
800 363
*
600 CC52 272
5
400 CC2 181
CC20
200 91
CC15
CC10
CC07
CC05
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
PRESSURE(PSI)
PRESSURE (PSI)
*CC52 up to 500 psi
CC Double Acting Cable Cylinder - All Sizes
FEATURES AND OPTIONS
The Tolomatic double-acting cable cylinder is a versatile

space saver, available in all 9 bore sizes. Enjoy cost savings
over conventional rod cylinders in strokes over four feet with
out experiencing rod buckle.
ORDER CODES These cylinders can be isolated from any work area with
CC05, CC07, CC10 extended cable lengths. Contact Tolomatic to achieve
CC15, CC20, CC25, CC30 strokes of up to 60 feet in length.
CC40, CC52, CC50
inch (U.S. Standard)
Order
CC OPTIONS Page CC05 CC07 CC10 CC15 CC20 CC25 CC30 CC40 CC52 CC50
Code
Auto Tensioner w/ one 1" Stroke Unit HI, HJ CC_22 – OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP –
Auto Tensioner w/ two 1" Stroke Units HI, HJ CC_22 – OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP –
Auto Tensioner w/ one 2" Stroke Unit HK,HL CC_22 – – – – OP OP OP OP OP OP
Auto Tensioner w/ two 2" Stroke Units HK,HL CC_22 – – – – OP OP OP OP OP OP
Caliper Disc Brake HM, HN CC_25 – – – OP OP OP OP OP OP OP
Switches (DC Reed & Triac) (several) CC_28 OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP
Aluminum Tube ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST
Steel Tube (Switches NOT available) S – – OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP
Seals of Viton® Material V – OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP
3 Ported Heads HG OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP
Application Guidelines CC_36 ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST
Cushion Needle Adjustment CC_38 – ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST
Ordering CC_40 ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST
Selection CC_30 ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST
Caliper Disc Brake Option Selection CC_32 – – – OP OP OP OP OP OP OP
Fixed Orifice Cushions CC_38 – ST ST – – – – – – –
Adjustable Cushions CC_38 – – – ST ST ST ST ST ST ST
Single Ported Head ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST
– = Not Available OP = Optional ST = Standard
CC_6 1.800.328.2174
Double Acting Cable Cylinder - CC05, CC07, CC10
OVERALL UNIT SPECIFICATIONS
CC05 CC07 CC10
THEORETICAL FORCE CUSHION DATA
BORE SIZE in 0.50 0.75 1.00
vs PRESSURE
in 54 138 282
MAX STROKE
mm 1372 3505 7163 FINAL VELOCITY (mm/sec)
1016
1524
2032
2540
lb 1.38 1.38 1.38
Steel Alum. Steel Alum.
127
178
254
508
25
76
BASE kg 0.63 0.63 0.63 100 45.4
80 36.3
WEIGHT lb NA NA 1.49 60 27.2
kg NA NA 0.68 40 CC10 18.1
WEIGHT lb per in 0.011 0.034 0.043

PER g per mm 0.197 0.606 0.768 20
CC07
9.1
LOAD (lbs)
LOAD (kg)
UNIT OF lb per in NA NA 0.125
STROKE g per mm NA NA 2.244
10 4.5
7 3.2
MAX PSI 100 100 100 5 2.3
PRESSURE bar 6.9 6.9 6.9 3 1.4
°F 140 140 140
MAX TEMP
°C 60 60 60
MAX FORCE lb 19.4 43.5 77.9 1 .5
OUTPUT N 86.3 193.5 346.5 1 3 5 7 10 20 40 60 80 100
TUBING SPECIFICATIONS
CC05 CC10CC07 CC10 NOTE: The CC05 cylin-
DEAD in 1.11 1.311.18 CC07 der does not have
LENGTH* mm 28.2 33.3 30 CC05 cushions.
WALL in 0.0937 0.125
0.125
THICKNESS mm 2.38 3.175
3.175
Alum or
MATERIAL Alum. Alum.
in 60 60
Steel
72
DIMENSIONS
Steel Alum.
TUBE mm 1524 1524 1829 1/8 NPT PORT EACH HEAD 1.84 (46.7)
SUPPORT .28 (7.1) A
SPAN in NA NA 78
mm NA NA 1981 .75
(19.1)
*Add to stroke length to determine overall length 1.87 (47.5)
2.93 (74.4)
1.06
(26.9) 1.13 (28.7) .81 (20.6)
CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
.75 (19.1)
CC05 CC07 CC10
in 0.0468 0.0468 0.0468 Ø1.59 (40.4) .58 (14.7) .12 (3.0)
WIRE DIA Ø.09 (2.3)
mm 1.189 1.189 1.189 .62 (15.7)
Ø.21 (5.3)
in 0.0937 0.0937 0.0937 x .28 (7.1) - SLOT [4] 1.25 (31.7) .81
NYLON O.D. (20.6)
mm 2.38 2.38 2.38 .51 (13.0) .25 (6.4) .50 (12.7) 1/4-28 NF-2A
STRAND
7x7 7x7 7x7
CONFIGURATION 1.03 1.37
(26.2) (34.8)
TENSILE lb 270 270 270
STRENGTH kg 122.47 122.47 122.47 .70 (17.9) 1.0 (25.4) 2.50 (63.5)
PROOF-LOAD in-lb 15 15 15 1.56 (39.6) Ø.20 (5.1) [2]
TORQUE N-m 1.69 1.69 1.69 *STROKE + B .31
(7.9)
*STROKE + 5.0 (127.0)
PRETENSIONING in-lb 2.5 2.5 2.5
TORQUE N-m 0.28 0.28 0.28 *If M option (magnet) is ordered add 1.62" (41.2mm) to the overall length CC05 CC07 CC10
A Ø.63 (16.0) Ø1.00 (25.4) Ø1.25 (31.8)
B 3.38 (85.8) 3.43 (87.1) 3.43 (87.1)
Dimensions in inches, in parentheses ( ) dimensions in millimeters
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
Double Acting Cable Cylinder - CC15
CC15
THEORETICAL FORCE vs CUSHION DATA
BORE SIZE in 1.50 PRESSURE
in 280
MAX STROKE
mm 7112 PRESSURE (bar) FINAL VELOCITY (mm/sec)
1016
1524
2032
2540
lb 5.12
127
178
254
508
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.4
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.2
6.9
25
76
.7
180 81.7
BASE kg 2.32 1000 454
800 363
WEIGHT lb 5.27 160 72.6
600 272
kg 2.39 140 63.5 400 181
WEIGHT lb per in 0.063
PER g per mm 1.1259 120 54.4
200 90.7
FORCE (lbs)
LOAD (kg)
FORCE (kg)
LOAD (lbs)
UNIT OF lb per in 0.181 100 45.4
STROKE g per mm 3.2322 100 45.4
80 36.3
MAX PSI 100 70 31.8
PRESSURE bar 6.9 60 27.2 50 22.7
°F 140 30 13.6
MAX TEMP 40 18.1
°C 60
MAX FORCE lb 174 20 9.1
OUTPUT N 774.0 10 4.5
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 1 3 5 7 10 20 40 60 80 100
TUBING SPECIFICATIONS PRESSURE (PSI) FINAL VELOCITY (in/sec)

CC15 CC15
DEAD in 3.40
LENGTH* mm 86.4
WALL in 0.125
THICKNESS mm 3.175
MATERIAL
Alum. or DIMENSIONS
Steel Ø 1.75
1/4 NPT PORTS / 0.43 (10.9)
4.50 (114.3) EACH HEAD
in 84 (44.5)
Steel Alum.
TUBE mm 2134 3.50

SUPPORT 5.16
(88.9)
SPAN in 90 (131.1) 1.625 (41.3)
mm 2286 2.00 (50.8)
1.25 (31.8) 0.25 1.12
*Add to stroke length to determine (6.4) (28.4) Ø.18
(4.6)
overall length 1.75
0.75
(19.1)
(44.5)
1.62 0.75
CABLE SPECIFICATIONS 0.87 1.25
0.75
(41.1) (19.1) Ø 3.43 (87.1)
3/8-24 UNF-2A (19.2) (31.8)
CC15 3.00 (76.2)
(19.1)
in 0.0937 5/16-18 UNC x 1.00 DP [2]

WIRE DIA CUSHION ADJ. SCREW 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 0.25
mm 2.380 Ø.28 (7.1) THRU [4] 3/8-16 UNC-2B [2] (12.7) (6.4)
1.00 (25.4) 0.50 (12.7) 1.00 (25.4)
in 0.187
NYLON O.D. 2.25
mm 4.750 (57.2) 1.75
2.62 (44.5)
STRAND (66.5)
7x7
CONFIGURATION 0.50
0.75 2.00 (50.8) [2] 0.25 (6.4) (12.7)
TENSILE lb 920 (19.1) [2] 5.57 (141.5)
STRENGTH kg 417.30 *STROKE + 8.90 (226.1)
PROOF-LOAD in-lb 45 *STROKE + 12.40 (315.0)
TORQUE N-m 5.08 *If M option (magnet) is ordered add .375" (9.5 mm) to the overall length
PRETENSIONING in-lb 8 Dimensions in inches, in parentheses ( ) dimensions in millimeters

TORQUE N-m 0.90
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
CC_8 1-800-328-2174
Double Acting Cable Cylinder - CC20, CC25
CC20 CC25
THEORETICAL FORCE vs CUSHION DATA
BORE SIZE in 2.00 2.50 PRESSURE
vs PRESSURE
in 281 281
MAX STROKE
mm 7137 7137 PRESSURE (bar) FINAL VELOCITY (mm/sec)
11.0
12.4
13.8
lb 12.44 12.9
1016
1524
2032
2540
1.4
2.8
4.1
5.5
6.9
8.3
9.7
127
178
254
508
1000 4448
25
76
BASE kg 5.64 5.85 1000 454
WEIGHT 900 4003 800 363
lb 12.9 13.48 272
600
kg 5.85 6.11 800 3559
181
400
WEIGHT lb per in 0.083 0.103 700 3114
FORCE (N)
PER g per mm 1.482 1.839
FORCE (lbf)
200 90.7
600
LOAD (kg)
2669
LOAD (lbs)
UNIT OF lb per in 0.236 0.292
STROKE g per mm 4.214 5.214 500 2224 100 45.4
31.8
MAX PSI 200 200 400 1779
70
50 22.7
PRESSURE bar 13.8 13.8 300 1334
°F 140 140 30 13.6
MAX TEMP 200 890
°C 60 60
MAX FORCE lb 618 972 100 445
OUTPUT 4.5
N 2749 4324 10
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 1 3 5 7 10 20 40 60 80 100
TUBING SPECIFICATIONS PRESSURE (PSI) CC25
CC20 CC25 CC20
DEAD in 3.00 3.00
LENGTH* mm 76.2 76.2
WALL in 0.125 0.125
THICKNESS
MATERIAL
mm 3.175
Alum or
3.175
Alum or DIMENSIONS
Steel Steel 2.12 6.00 (152.4)
(53.8) 3.88 (98.6)
in 90 96 1.13 (28.7)
Steel Alum.
TUBE 0.56 (14.2) A 1/2 NPT PORT / 3.62 (91.9)

mm 2286 2438 EACH HEAD
SUPPORT
SPAN in 96 108 4.75
(120.7) 3.50 7.25
mm 2438 2743 (88.9) 1.75 (44.5) (184.2)
*Add to stroke length to determine overall 0.38 (9.7)
2.12 (53.8) 0.88 (22.4)
2.12 (53.8) 2.00 (50.8)
length 0.88 (22.4)
Ø 4.50 OVER CABLE Ø.25 (6.34) 1.25 (31.8)
CABLE SPECIFICATIONS 1.88
(47.8) 6.50 (165.1)
CC20 CC25 1.62
4.87 (123.7) (41.1)
in 0.125 0.125 2.50 5.25 (133.4)
WIRE DIA (63.5)
2.38 (60.5)
mm 3.175 3.175 1.13 (28.7) 1.13 (28.7) Ø.34 (8.6) MTG.
HOLES [12] PER HEAD
in 0.250 0.250 0.38 (9.7) [2]
NYLON O.D. 0.75 (19.1) 1.50 (38.1)
mm 6.350 6.350 1.13 (28.7) 1.62
4.00 1.75 (41.1) 3.25
STRAND (101.6) (44.5) (82.6)
7 x 19 7 x 19
CONFIGURATION
0.25 (6.4) MIN. [2] 2.00
TENSILE lb 2000 2000 5/8-18 UNF-2B [2] (50.8)
3.62 CUSHION ADJ. SCREW
STRENGTH kg 907.18 907.18 (91.9) 3/8-24 UNF-2B [2]
* STROKE + 10.25 (260.4)
PROOF-LOAD in-lb 115 115 * STROKE + 15.00 (381.0)
TORQUE N-m 12.99 12.99 *If M option (magnet) is ordered add 0.375" (9.5 mm) to the overall length CC20 CC25
PRETENSIONING in-lb 46.0 73.0 Dimensions in inches, in parentheses ( ) dimensions in millimeters
A Ø2.25 (57.2) Ø2.75 (69.9)
TORQUE N-m 5.20 8.25
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
Double Acting Cable Cylinder - CC30, CC40, CC52
CC30 CC40 CC52
THEORETICAL FORCE CUSHION DATA
BORE SIZE in 3.00 4.00 2.50 vs PRESSURE
in 280 279 280
MAX STROKE
mm 7112 7087 7112 PRESSURE (bar) FINAL VELOCITY (mm/sec)
lb 18.69 20.75 12.44
1016
1524
2032
2540
10.3
13.8
17.2
20.7
24.1
27.6
31.0
34.5
127
178
254
508
1.4
6.9
25
76
BASE kg 8.48 9.41 5.64 680
2000 907
1500
WEIGHT lb 19.45 22.09 12.9
52
kg 8.82 10.02 5.85
CC30
CC
1000 454
lb per in 0.12 0.159 0.081
CC40
WEIGHT 700 318
PER g per mm 2.143 2.839 1.446 1000 454
FORCE (lbs)
FORCE (kg)
500 227
LOAD (lbs)
LOAD (kg)
UNIT OF lb per in 0.334 0.459 0.236
STROKE g per mm 5.965 8.197 4.214 300 136
MAX PSI 200 100 500

500 227
PRESSURE bar 13.8 6.9 34.5
°F 140 140 140 100 45.4
MAX TEMP
°C 60 60 60 80 36.3
60 27.2
MAX FORCE lb 1398.4 1248.9 1532.4 0 1 3 5 7 10 20 40 60 80 100
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
OUTPUT N 6220 5555 6816 FINAL VELOCITY (in/sec)
PRESSURE (PSI) CC30
CC40
TUBING SPECIFICATIONS CC52
CC30 CC40 CC52
DEAD in 3.50 4.50 3.00
LENGTH* mm 88.9 114.3 76.2
WALL
THICKNESS
in 0.125
mm 3.175
0.125
3.175
0.125
3.175 DIMENSIONS 6.44 (163.6)
5.88 (149.4) 2.00
1/2 NPT PORT 4.88 (50.8)
Alum or Alum or Alum or A EACH HEAD (124.0)
MATERIAL
Steel Steel Steel
in 102 108 96
Steel Alum.
5.81
TUBE mm 2591 2743 2438 3.56 (147.6)
SUPPORT (90.4) 4.06 8.81
SPAN in 120 132 96 (103.1) (223.7)
2.38
mm 3048 3353 2438 (60.4) Ø.31 (7.9)
5.88 3.00
*Add to stroke length to determine overall length (149.4) 1.00 (25.4) (76.2)
1.62
Ø 5.63 (143.0) (41.2) 5.25 5/8 -18 UNF-2A 1.75 (44.5)
OVER CABLE (133.4)
CABLE SPECIFICATIONS 3.06 STROKE + D 1.62 2.00
CC30 CC40 CC52 (77.7) 0.75 1.50 (41.2) (50.8)
(19.1) (38.1) 0.31 (7.9)
in 0.187 0.187 0.187
WIRE DIA
mm 4.750 4.750 4.750 3.25 4.00
(82.5) (101.6)
in 0.312 0.312 0.312
NYLON O.D. 3/8-24 UNF-2B [2]
mm 7.925 7.925 7.925 2.00
2.50 Ø.34 (8.6)
E (50.8) CUSHION SCREW (63.5) MTG. HOLES
STRAND
7 x 19 7 x 19 7 x 19 *STROKE + B
CONFIGURATION *STROKE + C
1.81
(46.0)
TENSILE lb 4200 4200 4200 CC30 CC40 CC52
STRENGTH kg 1905 1905 1905 *If M option (magnet) is ordered add .375" (9.5 mm) to the overall length
A Ø3.25 (82.6) Ø4.25 (108.0) Ø2.25 (57.2)
PROOF-LOAD in-lb 210 210 210 B 13.87(352.3) 14.87 (377.7) 13.87 (352.3)
TORQUE N-m 23.73 23.73 23.73 C 17.50 (444.5) 18.50 (469.9) 17.50 (444.5)
D 11.38 (289.1) 12.38 (314.5) 11.38 (289.1)
PRETENSIONING in-lb 105 187.5 115 Dimensions in inches, in parentheses ( ) dimensions in millimeters
E 7.75 (196.9) 8.25 (209.6) 7.75 (196.9)
TORQUE N-m 11.86 21.19 12.99
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
DIMENSIONAL: CC30, CC40, CC52
CC_10 1.800.328.2174
Double Acting Cable Cylinder - CC50
CC50
THEORETICAL FORCE vs
BORE SIZE in 5.00 PRESSURE
in 134
MAX STROKE
mm 3404 PRESSURE (bar)
BASE lb 30.75 NOTE: The CC50 cylin-
Alum.
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.4
4.2
4.8
5.6
6.2
6.9
der does not have
.7
WEIGHT 2000 907
kg 13.95
WEIGHT 1800 817
cushions.
lb per in 0.202
PER
Alum.
1600 736
UNIT OF
STROKE g per mm 3.786
1400 635
MAX PSI 100
FORCE (lbs)
FORCE (kg)
1200 544
PRESSURE bar 6.9
1000 454
°F 140
MAX TEMP
°C 60 800 363
MAX FORCE lb 1919 600 272
OUTPUT N 8536
400 181
200 91
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
TUBING SPECIFICATIONS PRESSURE (PSI)
CC50 CC50
DEAD in 6.00
LENGTH* mm 152.4
WALL in 0.125
THICKNESS mm 3.175
MATERIAL Alum. DIMENSIONS
TUBE in 166.8 9.69 (246.1) 1.06 (26.9) 3/4NPT PORT EACH HEAD
Alum.
1.88
SUPPORT (47.8)
SPAN mm 4237 Ø 5.25 (133.4)
*Add to stroke length to determine 7.50

overall length (190.5)
5.50
(139.7) 2.50 (63.5)
4.50 10.50 (266.7)
(114.3) 6.00 2.50
1.25 (31.8) (63.5) 1.50 (38.1)
(152.4)
CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
3.00 (76.2) 3.31
CC50 Ø 6.06 (153.9) Ø.38 (9.7) (84.1)
in 0.25 Ø 6.38 (162.1) 3/4-16UNF-2A
WIRE DIA OVER CABLE STROKE + 25.38 (644.7)
mm 6.350
Ø.406 (10.31) STROKE + 15.12 (384.1)
in 0.375 THRU
NYLON O.D.
mm 9.525 3.00 1.00 (25.4)
(76.2) 2.25 (57.2)
STRAND
7 x 19 4.50
CONFIGURATION 6.00 (152.4) (114.3)
TENSILE lb 7000 2.00 (50.8)
STRENGTH kg 3175.13 1.81 (46.0)
1.50
(38.1)
3.63 2.00
PROOF-LOAD in-lb 325 (92.2) 1/2-20 UNF-2B [2] (50.8)
TORQUE N-m 36.72 1.50 (38.1) 5.00 (127.0) 10.19 (258.8)
PRETENSIONING in-lb 180 Dimensions in inches, in parentheses ( ) dimensions in millimeters

TORQUE N-m 20.34
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
SA Single Acting Cable Cylinder - All Sizes
When a standard double-acting cable cylinder is not

necessary in vertical applications, Tolomatic single-acting
cable cylinders provide a cost savings advantage. Ideal for
vertical lifting applications, these cylinders may be positioned
ORDER CODES horizontally and still achieve a vertical movement. Tolomatic
SA07, SA10, SA15 single-acting cylinders are available in 8 bore sizes ranging
SA20, SA25, SA30 from 3/4-inch to 5 inches with optional switches.
SA40, SA52, SA50
Order
SA OPTIONS Page SA07 SA10 SA15 SA20 SA25 SA30 SA40 SA52 SA50
Code
Switches (DC Reed & Triac) (several) CC_28 OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP
Aluminum Tube ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST
Steel Tube (Switches NOT available) S – OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP
Seals of Viton® Material V OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP
3 Ported Heads HG OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP OP
Application Guidelines CC_36 ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST
Cushion Needle Adjustment CC_38 ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST
Ordering CC_40 ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST
Selection CC_30 ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST
Fixed Orifice Cushions CC_38 ST ST – – – – – – –
Adjustable Cushions CC_38 – – ST ST ST ST ST ST ST
Single Ported Head ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST
NOTE: See corresponding CC (double actting cable cylinder) for performance, tubing and
cable specifications Page CC_7 to Page CC_11
CC_12 1.800.328.2174
Single Acting Cable Cylinder - SA07, SA10, SA15 3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
SA07, SA10
DIMENSIONS OVERALL UNIT SPECIFICATIONS

SA07 SA10
.28 (7.1) BORE SIZE in 0.75 1.00
1/8-27 NPT .21 (5.3)
in 138 282
MAX STROKE
.82 mm 3505 7163
(20.8) MAX PSI 100 100
1.57 1.09 1.50 PRESSURE
1.88 (39.9) (27.7) (38.1) bar 6.9 6.9
2.32 (47.8) MAX FORCE lb 43.5 77.9
(58.9) OUTPUT N 193.5 346.5
B
8-32 x 1.75 UNC
NOTE: Additional specifications
1.03 MOUNTING BOLTS BRACKET SUPPLIED Page CC_7
.79 (20.1) (26.2) .41 (10.4) BY CUSTOMER
STROKE + 1.44 (36.6)
.25 (6.4) 2x Ø.21 (5.3) x .28 (7.1) SLOT 1/4-28UNF-2A

A
1.56 1.38 1.035

(39.6) (35.1) (26.4) SA07 SA10
A Ø 1.00 (25.4) Ø 1.25 (31.8)
.31 (7.9) B 0.50 (12.7) 0.63 (16.0)
*STROKE + C BRACKET C 3.62 (92.0) 3.81 (96.8)
SUPPLIED BY
Dimensions in inches, in parentheses ( ) dimensions in millimeters *If M option (magnet) is ordered add D to the overall length CUSTOMER D 1.46 (37.1) 1.62 (41.2)
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
SA15 WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
DIMENSIONS 1/4-20 UNC x 2.00

MOUNTING BOLTS
1.68
(42.7) 0.84
BREATHER PORT 0.84
1/4 NPT PORT .44 (11.2) (21.3) (21.3)
3.50 (88.9) 2.50

(63.5)
1.62
4.41 2.38 (41.1)
(112.0) (60.4)
1.68 (42.7)
3/8-24 UNF-2A 0.75 1.25 (31.8)
1.62 (41.1) (19.1)
Ø 3.43 (87.1) 0.97 (24.6) BRACKET SUPPLIED 1.25

PULLEY O.D. 2.00 BY CUSTOMER (31.8)
2.50
(50.8) (63.5)
1.75 2.75
(44.4) (69.9)
STROKE + 3.72 (94.5)
Ø.28 (7.1) [2] SA15
5/16-18 UNC-2B
.88 (22.4) BORE SIZE in 1.50
.50 (12.7) Ø 1.75 (44.5) in 280
MAX STROKE
mm 7112
2.25
(57.2) 1.75 MAX PSI 100
(44.4) PRESSURE bar 6.9
MAX FORCE lb 174
.25 (6.4) OUTPUT N 774.0
.50 (12.7) .75 (19.0) NOTE: Additional specifications
4.50 (114.3) Page CC_8
*STROKE + 7.64 (194.1)
*If M option (magnet) is ordered add .375" (9.5 mm) to the overall length
Single Acting Cable Cylinder - SA20, SA25, SA30, SA40, SA52 3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
SA20, SA25
DIMENSIONS 1/2 NPT PORT

0.92 REF.
(23.4)
C
D
BREATHER PORT E
1.28 (32.5) 0.75 (19.0)
A B
3.88 (98.6)
F H
J G I
6.00
3.50 3.0 (76.2) (152.4)
(88.9)
5/8-18 UNF-2A
2.13 (54.1) 0.20 (5.1)
1.75 (44.5)
0.63 (16.0) 1.25 (31.8) 2.00 5/16 - 18 x 2.25 (57.2)
(50.8) MOUNTING BOLTS
0.87 (22.1) 1.63 (41.4)
4.00 1.13 (28.7) SA20 SA25
3.63 (92.2)
(101.6)
STROKE + 3.43 (87.1) A Ø 2.25 (57.2) Ø 2.75 (69.9)
B 1.06 (26.9) 1.23 (31.2)
OVERALL UNIT SPECIFICATIONS *STROKE + 10.01 (254.3)
C 3.00 (76.2) 3.50 (88.9)
SA20 SA25
BORE SIZE in 2.00 2.50 Ø.34 (8.7) 0.38 (9.7) D 2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8)
in 281 281 E 2.12 (53.8) 2.47 (62.7)
MAX STROKE F 1.06 (26.9) 1.23 (31.2)
mm 7137 7137
MAX PSI 200 200 3.25 1.63 (41.4) G 2.12 (53.8) 2.47 (62.7)
(82.6)
PRESSURE bar 13.8 13.8 H 1.50 (38.1) 1.75 (44.5)
MAX FORCE lb 618.5 971.9 0.25 (6.4) I 3.25 (82.55) 3.50 (88.9)
OUTPUT N 2751 4323 0.56 (14.2) BRACKET SUPPLIED J 4.75 (120.7) 4.87 (123.7)
2.50 2.38 BY CUSTOMER
NOTE: Additional specifications (63.5) (60.5)
Page CC_9 6.00 (152.4) *If M option (magnet) is ordered add .375" (9.5 mm) to the overall length
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
SA30, SA40, SA52 WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
DIMENSIONS 0.91 REF.

(23.1)
E
BREATHER PORT F
.56 (14.2) G
4.06 (103.1) 0.75 H
1/2 NPT PORT A (19.1)
2.66 (67.6) 4.88 (124.0)
5.81
(147.6) FE
3.56 I H G
(90.4)
B 5/16 - 18 x 2.38 (60.5)
5/8-18 UNF-2A MOUNTING BOLTS
2.00 (50.8)
2.66 (67.6) 2.38 (60.5)
.63 (16.0) 1.13 (28.7)
3.94
.87 (22.1) 1.63 (41.4) (100.1) SA30 SA40 SA52
4.50 STROKE + C
(114.3) A Ø3.25 (82.6) Ø4.25 (108.0) Ø2.25 (57.2)
*STROKE + D B -.13 (3.3) +.63 (16.0) -.16 (4.1)
.38 (9.7) C 3.69 (93.7) 4.25 (108.0) 3.72 (94.5)
Ø.34 (8.6) [12]
D 11.50 (292.1) 12.55 (318.8) 11.50 (292.1)
E 4.00 (101.6) 5.00 (127.0) 3.00 (76.2)
4.00 3.25
(101.6) (82.6) F 2.80 (71.1) 3.53 (89.7) 2.12 (53.8)
G 1.40 (35.6) 1.77 (45.0) 1.06 (26.9)
1.63 (41.4) H 2.00 (50.8) 2.50 (63.5) 1.50 (38.1)
BRACKET SUPPLIED I 7.31 (185.7) 7.81 (198.4) 6.81 (76.2)
2.50 (63.5) 2.69 (68.3) BY CUSTOMER
7.00 (177.8)
*If M option (magnet) is ordered add .375" (9.5 mm) to the overall length

SA30 SA40 SA52 Dimensions in inches, in parentheses ( ) dimensions in millimeters
BORE SIZE in 3.00 4.00 2.50
in 280 279 280
MAX STROKE
mm 7112 7087 7112
MAX PSI 200 100 500
MAX FORCE lb 1398.4 1248.9 1532.4 NOTE: Additional specifications
OUTPUT N 6220 5555 6816 Page CC_10
CC_14 1.800.328.2174
Single Acting Cable Cylinder - SA50 3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
SA50
DIMENSIONS 1.06 (26.9)

3/4 NPT PORT
BREATHER PORT
1.98 (50.3)
1.88 (47.8) 1.25 (31.8)
Ø 5.25 (133.4)
7.50
(190.5) 6.00 (152.4)
5.50
(139.7)
2.50 (63.5) 3.00 (76.2)
4.50
(114.3) 6.00 (152.4)
1.25 (31.8)
Ø 6.06 (153.9)
3.31 2.50 3/4-16UNF-2A
Ø 6.38 (162.1) OVER CABLE (84.1) (63.5)
7.82 (20.0)
STROKE + 7.82 (198.6)
STROKE + 16.94 (430.3)
Ø.406 (10.31) THRU SA50
BORE SIZE in 5.00
3.00 in 134
(76.2) MAX STROKE
2.25 (57.2) mm 3404
6.00 (152.4) MAX PSI 100
4.50 (114.3) PRESSURE bar 6.9
MAX FORCE lb 1919
OUTPUT N 8536
1.50 (38.1) 1.81
(46.0)
Dimensions in inches, in parentheses ( ) dimensions in millimeters NOTE: Additional specifications
3.63 (92.2)
9.69 (246.1) Page CC_11
Double Purchase Cable Cylinder - All Sizes
The Tolomatic double purchase cable cylinder doubles

the velocity and stroke capacity of double-acting cylinders
without increasing space requirements. Available in 5 bore
sizes, these cylinders can extend stroke lengths up to 120
feet with considerable cost-saving advantages and they can
be placed away from hostile environments.
NOTE: Pulleys and cables used on double purchase

cable cylinders are always from the next smaller model size.
ORDER CODES
NOTE: For double purchase applications, select a bore
DP15, DP20, DP25
DP30, DP40, DP52
size that will accommodate twice the load force.
Order
DP OPTIONS Page DP15 DP20 DP25 DP30 DP40 DP52
Code
Auto Tensioner w/ one 1" Stroke Unit HI, HJ CC_22 OP OP OP OP OP OP
Auto Tensioner w/ two 1" Stroke Units HI, HJ CC_22 OP OP OP OP OP OP
Auto Tensioner w/ one 2" Stroke Unit HK,HL CC_22 – OP OP OP OP OP
Auto Tensioner w/ two 2" Stroke Units HK,HL CC_22 – OP OP OP OP OP
Caliper Disc Brake HM, HN CC_25 OP OP OP OP OP OP
Switches (DC Reed & Triac) (several) CC_28 OP OP OP OP OP OP
Aluminum Tube ST ST ST ST ST ST
Steel Tube (Switches NOT available) S OP OP OP OP OP OP
Seals of Viton® Material V OP OP OP OP OP OP
3 Ported Heads HG OP OP OP OP OP OP
Application Guidelines CC_36 ST ST ST ST ST ST
Cushion Needle Adjustment CC_38 ST ST ST ST ST ST
Ordering CC_40 ST ST ST ST ST ST
Selection CC_30 ST ST ST ST ST ST
Caliper Disc Brake Option Selection CC_32 OP OP OP OP OP OP
Fixed Orifice Cushions CC_38 – – – – – –
Adjustable Cushions CC_38 ST ST ST ST ST ST
Single Ported Head ST ST ST ST ST ST
CC_16 1.800.328.2174
Double Purchase Cable Cylinder - DP15, DP20, DP25 3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
DP15
DIMENSIONS STROKE + 17.5 (444.50)

2.00 (50.8)
STROKE + 14.00 (355.6) 1/4-20 x 4-1/2" [4]
7.00 (177.8) 4.50 (114.3) 2.25 (57.2)
0.44 (11.2)
1/4 NPT PORT EACH HEAD 0.75 1.75 (44.5)
(19.1) 0.88
6.09 (154.7) 7.00 (177.8) (22.4)
Ø 1.75 (44.5)
3.50
(88.9) 1.62 (41.1)
2.00 (50.8) Ø.19 (4.7) 0.75

1.62 (41.1) (19.1) 7.25
(184.2)
0.25 (6.4)
1.5 (38.1) 0.38 (9.7)
5/16-18 x 1" [2] 3/8-24 UNF - 2A Ø 1.50 (38.1) 0.75 (19.1) 1/4-28 UNF - 2A
Ø.09 (2.3)
Ø.20 (5.1) [2] 0.25 (6.4)
0.50 (12.7)
4.45 (113.0) 1/2 STROKE STROKE 1/2 STROKE 4.45 (113.0) 1.00 (25.4)
0.81 (20.6)
STROKE x 2 1.41 (35.8)
MOUNTING BRACKET SUPPLIED BY CUSTOMER; OVERALL UNIT SPECIFICATIONS
CABLE TAKE-UP NEEDED DP15
8.18 (207.8) BORE SIZE in 1.50
in 280
3.18 (80.8) 1.81 MAX STROKE
(46.0) ( )
Dimensions in inches, in parentheses mm 7112
dimensions in millimeters PSI 100
MAX
1.25 (31.8) PRESSURE bar 6.9
MAX FORCE lb 174 NOTE: Additional specifications
OUTPUT N 774.0 Page CC_8
DP20, DP25
DIMENSIONS STROKE + 21.25 (539.8)

STROKE + 16.50 (419.1)
3.25 (82.6) Ø.34 (8.6)
6.00 (152.4) 0.56 (14.2) MTG. HOLES [16]
3.88 (98.6) 1.62 (41.1)
3.62 (91.9) A 1/2" NPT PORT EACH HEAD 2.5 1.12 (28.4)
(63.5)
1.25 (31.7)
2.12 (53.8) 3.50 (88.9)

1.75 (44.5) 4.75
0.87 (22.2) (120.6)
2.12 (53.8) 1.50 (38.1) Ø.25 (6.4) 11.62
0.25 (6.4) (295.1)
Ø.19 (4.8) Ø 3.25 (82.6) [4] 10.37
3.25 (82.6)
(263.4)
6.34 (161.0) 2.00 5/8-18 UNF-2A 3.00 (76.2)
(50.8) 1.25 (31.8)
8.25 (209.6) 0.62 (15.7)
Ø.62 (15.7)
5.12 (130.0) 1/2 STROKE 3/8-24 UNF-2A

2.00 (50.8) 1.0 (25.4)
3/8-16 UNC-2B
STROKE x 2
MTG. BRACKET BY CUSTOMER
CABLE TAKE-UP NEEDED 5.12 (130.0) 2.38 (60.5)
11.56 (293.6)
3.81 (96.8) 3.88 (98.6)
2.25 DP20 DP25 DP20 DP25
(57.2)
BORE SIZE in 2.00 2.50 A Ø 2.25 (57.2) Ø 2.75 (69.9)
in 281 281
MAX STROKE
mm 7137 7137
Dimensions in inches, in parentheses ( ) dimensions in millimeters PSI 100 100
MAX
PRESSURE bar 6.9 6.9
MAX FORCE lb 618.5 971.9 NOTE: Additional specifications
DIMENSIONAL: DP20, DP25 OUTPUT N 2751 4323 Page CC_9
Double Purchase Cable Cylinder - DP30, DP40, DP52
3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
DP30, DP40, DP52 WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
DIMENSIONS
STROKE + 27.12 (688.8)
STROKE + 21.00 (533.4)
7.00 Ø.34 (8.6) [16]
(177.8)
1/2 NPT PORT EACH HEAD 1.13 3.25(82.6)
3.93 1.62
(99.8) (28.7) 4.88 (124.0) (41.3)
DIMENSION "A"
2.50 1.81
(63.5) (46.0) 1.75
(44.5)
2.65 2.00 4.06

(67.3) (50.8) (103.1) 5.81
1.00 (25.4) (147.6)
2.65 1.50 (38.1)
(67.3)
0.31 (7.9)
Ø.31 (7.9)
4.25 5/8-18 UNF-2A 13.43
(108.0) (341.1)
8.12 (206.2) Ø 4.25 (108.0) [4] Ø.25 (6.4)
10.50 (266.7)
5/8-18 UNF-2A
Ø.62 (15.7)
2.00
5.70 1/2 STROKE 2.00 (50.8) (50.8)
(144.8) 1.50
STROKE x 2 (38.1)
3/8-24 UNF-2B 5.70 (144.8)
MOUNTING BRACKET BY CUSTOMER; CABLE 2.86
TAKE-UP NEEDED. (72.6)
14.00 (355.6)
4.75 4.62
(120.7) (117.3)
2.50 DP30 DP40 DP52

(63.5) A Ø3.25 (82.6) Ø4.25 (108.0) Ø2.25 (57.2)
2.38
(60.4) OVERALL UNIT SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions in inches, in parentheses ( ) dimensions in millimeters DP30 DP40 DP52
BORE SIZE in 3.00 4.00 2.50
in 280 279 280
MAX STROKE
mm 7112 7087 7112
MAX PSI 200 100 500
NOTE: Additional specifications MAX FORCE lb 1398.4 1248.9 1532.4
Page CC_10 OUTPUT N 6220 5555 6816
CC_18 1.800.328.2174
TC Track Cable Cylinder - All Sizes
Tolomatic track cable cylinders provide a pre-packaged, pre-

engineered guide and support system for greater bearing
surface and larger load capacities.
An aluminum bearing block guides and supports loads on
precision linear ball bearings with hardened ground steel
shafts. Available in 4 bore sizes with automatic tensioners
ORDER CODES and caliper disc brake options on selected models.
TC05, TC07, TC10, TC15
TC OPTIONS Order Code Page TC05 TC07 TC10 TC15

Auto Tensioner w/ one 1" Stroke Unit HI, HJ CC_22 – OP OP OP
Auto Tensioner w/ two 1" Stroke Units HI, HJ CC_22 – OP OP OP
Caliper Disc Brake HM, HN CC_25 – – – OP
Switches (DC Reed & Triac) (several) CC_28 OP OP OP OP
Aluminum Tube ST ST ST ST
Steel Tube (Switches NOT available) S – – OP OP
Seals of Viton® Material V – OP OP OP
3 Ported Heads HG OP OP OP OP
Application Guidelines CC_36 ST ST ST ST
Cushion Needle Adjustment CC_38 – ST ST ST
Ordering CC_40 ST ST ST ST
Selection CC_30 ST ST ST ST
Caliper Disc Brake Option Selection CC_32 – – – OP
Fixed Orifice Cushions CC_38 – ST ST –
Adjustable Cushions CC_38 – – – ST
Single Ported Head ST ST ST ST
TC Track Cable Cylinder - TC05, TC07, TC10
LOAD WEIGHT vs STROKE TC05, TC07, TC10 OVERALL UNIT SPECIFICATIONS
TC05 TC07 TC10
(3/8" Dia. Rods at 0.30" Deflection) BORE SIZE in 0.50 0.75 1.00
NOTE: Rod in 67.00 78.00 78.00
MAX STROKE
STROKE (mm) deflection must mm 1701.8 1981.2 1981.2
PSI 100 100 100
1067
1219
1372
1524
1676
1829
1981
not exceed .30 MAX
152
305
457
610
762
914
0
inches PRESSURE bar 6.9 6.9 6.9

MAX FORCE lb 19.4 43.5 77.9
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LOAD
60 27.2 OUTPUT N 86.3 193.5 346.5
NOTE: Additional specifications
50 22.7 Page CC_7
LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
LOAD WEIGHT (kg)

40 18.1
30 13.6
20 9.1 NOTE: Moderate bending moments are

acceptable, so long as the moment load
10 4.5 does not exceed 190 inch-pounds.
The diagrams at right, illustrate how this
0 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 is calculated.
STROKE (in)
LOAD DISTRIBUTION
CENTER OF GRAVITY
OF LOAD TO BE NOTE: Moderate bending moments are
WITHIN THIS AREA acceptable. The moment load must not Fz (Load)
.50
CL
exceed 30 inch-pounds for the 1/2 -, 3/4 - and
1-inch bore cylinders. D (Distance)
The diagrams, illustrate how this is calculat-

ed.
Fz x D ≤ 30 in.-lbs.
DIMENSIONS TC05 TC07 TC10

#10-24 x .25 (6.4) DP [2] A 0.625 1.000 1.250
Ø.21 (5.3) x .28 (7.1) SLOT [4]
.50 (12.7) mm 15.88 25.40 31.75
1/4-28 UNF-2A
Ø.09 (2.3) .25 (6.4) B 5.260 5.326 5.322
mm 133.60 135.28 135.18
1.03
1.37 (34.8) (26.2)
1.56 (39.6)
C 3.44 3.46 3.48
mm 87.4 87.9 88.4
.51 .31 (7.9) D 2.93 2.96 2.93
(13.0) C .25 (6.4)
1.84
.81 (20.6) mm 74.4 75.2 74.4
2.00 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8)
(46.73) E 6.870 6.936 6.932
STROKE + B mm 174.50 176.17 176.07
.62 (15.7) 1.18 (30.0) Ø.375 (9.4)
Ø 1.59 (40.4)
.75 (19.1)
D 1.06 (26.9)
.75 (19.1) 3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
1.88 (47.8)
1/8-27 NPT PORT .28 (7.1) A

EACH HEAD
STROKE + E
CC_20 1.800.328.2174
TC Track Cable Cylinder - TC15
LOAD WEIGHT vs STROKE TC15 OVERALL UNIT SPECIFICATIONS
(5/8" Dia. Rods at 0.30" Deflection) BORE SIZE
CC15
in 1.50
NOTE: Rod in 78
STROKE (mm) MAX STROKE
deflection must mm 1981.2
1067
1219
1372
1524
1676
1829
1981
not exceed .30 MAX PSI 100
152
305
457
610
762
914
0
160 72.6 inches PRESSURE bar 6.9

150 68.0
MAX FORCE lb 174
140 63.5
OUTPUT N 774.0
130 59.0
120 54.4 NOTE: Additional specifications
110 49.9 Page CC_8
LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
LOAD WEIGHT (kg)

100 45.4
90 40.8
80 36.3
70 31.8
60 27.2
50 22.7
40 18.1
30 13.6
20 9.1
10 4.5
0 0
0 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78
STROKE (in)
LOAD DISTRIBUTION
CENTER OF GRAVITY
OF LOAD TO BE NOTE: Moderate bending moments are
Fz (Load)
WITHIN THIS AREA acceptable. The moment load must not
.62
CL
exceed 190 inch-pounds for the 1-1/2 bore D (Distance)
cylinder.
The diagrams, illustrate how this is calculat-
ed.
Fz x D ≤ 190 in.-lbs.
DIMENSIONS 5/16-18 UNC x 1.00 (25.4) DP [2]

3/8-24 UNF-2A
3/8-16 UNC x .44 (11.2) DP [2]
Ø.28 ( 7.1) THRU [4] .50 1.25
(12.7) CUSHION ADJUSTING SCREW (2) (31.7)
.50 (12.7)
2.25 1.75 .87 (22.2)
(57.2) (44.5)
2.62 (66.5)
Ø.18 (4.6) 1.65

1.75 .25 (6.4) 2.00 .75 (19.1)
(44.5) 3.25 (82.6) (41.9) .62 (15.7)
(50.8)
7.0 (177.8)
4.50 (114.3) 3.31 (84.1)
Ø.625 (15.7) 1.50 (31.8) Ø 3.43 (87.1)
1.62 (41.1)
.75 (19.1) 5.16
(131.1)
2.37 (60.2)
1.63 (41.4) 3.53
(89.7) 3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
Ø 1.75 (44.5)
1/4 - 18 NPT PORT EACH HEAD
.43 (10.9)
STROKE + 10.48 (266.2)
STROKE + 13.92 (353.6)
CC Automatic Tensioner - All Sizes
AUTOMATIC TENSIONER Automatic tensioners are required when a cylinder’s stroke length is
beyond the maximum stroke length for full manual cable adjustment
for that bore size. The AT unit keeps the cable rigid and ensures maxi-
mum service life of both the cable and gland seals. AT units are also
recommended for vertical lifting or severe, high-cyclic applications.
The standard automatic tensioner unit has a 1-inch stroke, providing
2 inches of cable take-up. A 2-inch stroke AT unit may be installed on
a cylinder, providing 4 inches of cable take-up. Refer to the tables
below for tensioner stroke options
on available bore sizes.
ORDER CODE
HI, HJ, HK, HL
MAXIMUM STROKE LENGTHS FOR CYLINDERS WITH AUTO TENSIONERS

NOTE: A cable cylinder should be completely proof-loaded and preten- the table below. (For more information on proof-loading and preten-
sioned with either the Torque Method or the Field Method in order for sioning, please see page CC_36)
the auto tensioner to achieve the maximum stroke lengths shown in
STROKE LENGTHS IN INCHES BASED ON CYLINDER’S MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE

STROKE OPTIONS CC05 CC07 CC10 CC15 CC20 CC25 CC30 CC40 CC50 CC52
Auto Tensioner with one 1" stroke unit NA 134.4 134.4 361.2 260.4 159.6 243.6 134.4 NA 266.8
Auto Tensioner with two 1" stroke units NA 252.0 252.0 579.6 369.6 266.8 344.4 193.2 NA 327.6
Auto Tensioner with one 2" stroke unit NA NA NA NA 369.6 266.8 344.4 193.2 468.0 327.6
Auto Tensioner with two 2" stroke units NA NA NA NA 524.4 322.8 487.2 277.2 714.0 472.8
Above Dimensions in inches
STROKE LENGTHS IN METERS BASED ON CYLINDER’S MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE

STROKE
OPTIONS CC05 CC07 CC10 CC15 CC20 CC25 CC30 CC40 CC50 CC52
NA 3.41 3.41 9.17 6.61 4.05 6.19 3.41 NA 6.78NA 6.40 6.40
14.72 9.39 6.78 8.75 4.91 NA 8.32NA NA NA NA 9.39
6.78 8.75 4.91 11.89 8.32
NA NA NA NA 13.32 8.20 12.37 7.04 18.14 12.01
Above Dimensions in METERS
NOTE: Tube couplers are required on cable cylinders with strokes over 280 inches (7.11m).
Maximum stroke lengths in the above table can be extended by using NOTE: When using an AT unit in an application where the cylin-
the percentage of the pressure differential between the cylinder’s der is loaded in only one direction, it is recommended to have
actual operating pressure and the maximum operating pressure. the AT unit located so the load direction of travel is away from
the AT unit. On vertical applications, the AT unit should be located
Example: If the cylinder selected is a CC15
on the bottom.
(11/2-inch bore) with one 1-inch stroke AT unit:
Actual PSI: 80
Max. PSI: 100 AUTO TENSIONER PRESSURE SETTINGS
Differential: 20% FOR MODEL % OF LOAD PRESSURE
20% x 361.2 in. (maximum stroke) = 72.24 in.
72.24 in. + 361.2 in. = 433.44 in. (36.12 feet)
All AT units should be plumbed with a separate, regulated non-fluctu-
ating pressure source which is a set percentage of the actual cylinder
operating pressure. These are listed in the table at the right.
CC_22 1.800.328.2174
CC Automatic Tensioner - CC07, CC10, CC15, CC20, CC25 3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
DIMENSIONS
AT FOR CC07, CC10 AT FOR CC15
1/8 NPT PORT 1/4 NPT PORT
3.26 (82.80) 1/8 NPT PORT

2.03 (51.6) 1/8 NPT PORT
1.38
Ø 2.25 (35.1)
2.93 1.38 (57.2) 1.25 (31.8)
(74.4) (35.1)
Ø 2.25 3.32 (84.3)

(57.2) 5.75 (146.1)
8.50 (215.9)
0.75 (19.1)
4.69 (119.1)
6.38 (162.1) Ø.28 (7.1) THRU [6] 0.50 (12.7) CUSHION SCREW
2.85 (72.39) 2.87 (72.4)
1.56 2.62 1.75

1.25 (39.6) (66.5) (44.5) .87
(31.8) (22.1)
.63 (16.0)
0.25
Ø.28 (7.1) 3.00 1.75 (6.4)
THRU [4] (76.2) (44.5)
Ø .23 THRU [2]
9.57 (243.1)
ADD TO STROKE LENGTH
ATCC07
CC10FOR CC20, CC25
8.87 (225.3)
8.87 (225.3)
CC15 16.41 (416.8)
1/4 NPT PORT 1/2 NPT PORT
2.18
(55.4)
5.00
(127.0)
2.50
(63.5)
1.68
(42.7)
4.88 DIMENSIONAL: CC15AT
(123.7)
A
B
MODEL A B MODEL A B
1" Stroke Tensioner 5.66" 12.16" 1" Stroke Tensioner 143.8mm 308.9mm
2" Stroke Tensioner 6.66" 13.16" 2" Stroke Tensioner 169.2mm 334.3mm
5.00 3.25 (82.6)

(127.0)
1.62
2.50 (41.1)
(63.5)
1.25
(31.8)
Ø .34 (8.6) 1.25 (31.8) CUSHION ADJ. SCREW

CC20 20.66 (524.8)

CC25 20.66 (524.8)
SPACE AND WEIGHT REQUIREMENTS SPACE AND WEIGHT REQUIREMENTS

MODEL DEAD LENGTH (in)* WEIGHT (lbs) MODEL DEAD LENGTH (mm)* WEIGHT (kg)
CC07 8.87 1.06 CC07
CC10 8.87 1.06
DIMENSIONAL: CC20AT,
CC10
CC25AT225
225
0.48
0.48
CC15 16.41 2.76 CC15 417 1.25
*Add dead length to
CC20 20.66 8.41 stroke length to deter- CC20 525 3.81
mine overall cylinder
CC25 20.66 8.41 length CC25 525 3.81
CC Automatic Tensioner - CC30, CC40, CC52, CC50 3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
DIMENSIONS
AT FOR CC30, CC40, CC52
1/2 NPT PORT
1/4 NPT PORT C
6.00
(152.4)
3.00
(76.2)
2.50 5.88
(63.5) (149.4)
A
MODEL A B C MODEL A B C
1" Stroke Tensioner 6.38" 14.12" 3.01" 1" Stroke Tensioner 162.1mm 358.6mm 76.5mm
2" Stroke Tensioner 7.38" 15.12" 3.50" 2" Stroke Tensioner 187.5mm 384.0mm 88.9mm
2.50 (63.5)
1.25 (31.8)
6.00
(152.4) 3.25
(82.6)
3.00
(76.2)
Ø .34 (8.6)
1.62 (41.1) B
CC30 23.88 (606.6)

CC40 24.88 (632.0)
CC52 23.88 (606.6)
AT FOR CC50 CC30AT, CC40AT, CC52AT

DIMENSIONAL:
3/4NPT PORT 1.06 (26.9)
10.50
(266.7)
7.00
(177.8)
3.50
(88.9)
8.38 (212.9)
4.00
8.00 (101.6)
(203.2)
4.50
(114.3)
2.25
(57.2)
1.81
(46.0) Ø .41 (10.3)
1/4 NPT PORT 3.63
(92.2)
4.31 (109.5)
20.07 (509.08)
Dimensions in inches, in parentheses ( ) dimensions in millimeters ADD TO STROKE LENGTH

CC50 33.75 (857.3)
SPACE AND WEIGHT REQUIREMENTS SPACE AND WEIGHT REQUIREMENTS

MODEL DEAD LENGTH (in)* WEIGHT (lbs) MODEL DEAD LENGTH (mm)* WEIGHT (kg)
DIMENSIONAL: CC50AT
CC30 23.88 14.36 CC30 607 6.51
CC40 24.88 14.36 CC40 632 6.51
*Add dead length to
CC52 23.88 14.36 stroke length to deter- CC52 607 6.51
mine overall cylinder
CC50 33.75 23.68 length CC50 857 10.74
CC_24 1.800.328.2174
CC Cylinder/Brake Combinations - All Sizes
CALIPER DISC BRAKE Caliper disc brakes can be used to add holding force in horizontal
applications and aid in deceleration at the end of stroke. Caliper disc
brakes must be used with an automatic tensioner to function properly.
See page CC_32 for selection information and braking formulae.
NOTE: Tolomatic’s H20DARC is used on all available models. See part
numbers below:
CC15 CC20 CC25 CC30 CC40 CC52
Brake Number 0728-0010 0728-0010 0728-0010 0728-0010 0728-0010 0728-0010
Disc & Hub No. 0801-0008 0801-0010 0801-0010 0801-0010 0801-0010 0801-0010
See catalog 9900-4009 for detailed information on brakes and discs.
ORDER CODE
HM, HN
DYNAMIC TORQUE STATIC TORQUE

H-20 BRAKE with 6-5⁄16" DISC H-20 BRAKE with 6-5⁄16" DISC
(FOR CC15, CC20, CC25, CC30, CC40, CC52) (FOR CC15, CC20, CC25, CC30, CC40, CC52)
PRESSURE (bars) PRESSURE (bars)
13.8
27.6
41.4
55.2
68.9
13.8
27.6
41.4
55.2
68.9
3500 395 2000 226
3000 339
DYNAMIC TORQUE (Newton-meters)
STATIC TORQUE (Newton-meters)

DYNAMIC TORQUE (Inch-Pounds)
STATIC TORQUE (Inch-Pounds)
1500 169
2500 282
2000 65⁄16" 226

1000 113
1500 169 65⁄16"
1000 113
500 56
500 56
0 0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 0 200 400 600 800 1000
PRESSURE (PSI) PRESSURE (PSI)
CC Cylinder/Brake Combinations - CC15, CC20, CC25 3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
DIMENSIONS
CYLINDER/ BRAKE COMBINATION FOR CC15
STROKE + 17.82 (452.6)
STROKE + 16.41 (416.8)
1/8-NPT BRAKE PORT
5.75 (146.1) STROKE + 8.91 (226.3)
1/4-18-NPTF PORT EACH HEAD
1/8-27 NPT PORT Ø 1.75 (44.5)
3.99
(101.4)
1.38 1.63
(35.1) 5.12 (130.0) 2.00 (50.8) (41.4)
0.25 1.12
(6.4) (28.4) Ø.18 7.10
(4.6) (180.3)
3.32 (84.3)
.87 1.25 Ø 6.32 (160.5)
8.50 (215.9) (22.1) (31.8) 0.75
0.75 (19.1) (19.1)
3.00
3/8-24 UNF-2A (76.2) 3/8-16 UNC-2B [2]
4.03
(102.4)
CUSHION ADJUSTMENT SCREW
2.03
STROKE + 6.91 (175.5) 0.25 (51.6)
Ø.28 (7.1) THRU [6] (6.4)
0.50 (12.7) 1.00 (25.4) 0.50 (12.7)
2.25
Ø 2.25 1.75 (57.2)
(57.2) (44.5)
0.25
3.00 1.75 (6.3) 0.37
(76.2) (44.5) (9.4)
9.57 (243.1)
STROKE + 16.41 (416.7)
CYLINDER/ BRAKE COMBINATION FOR CC20, CC25

1/2 NPT PORT EACH HEAD 6.00 (152.4) 1/8 NPT BRAKE PORT
3.88 (98.6) 1.75
3.62 (91.9) (44.5)
A
2.18
(55.4)
7.38
5.00 3.50 (187.5)
(127.0) 3.00 (88.9) 4.88
0.38 (9.7) (76.2) (124.0)
2.50 2.00
(63.5) (50.8)
2.5
1.68 4.88 (63.5)
(42.7) (124.0) Ø.25 (6.35)
B 6.50 (165.1) 0.88 1.25
1.25 (31.8) 1.88 (47.8)
1.62 (41.1) (22.4) (31.8)
5.25 (133.4)
4.00
Ø.34 (8.6) MTG. (101.6)
HOLES [12] PER HEAD 1.62 2.03
(41.1) (51.6)
0.75 (19.1) 1.50 (38.1)
2.50 4.00
(63.5) 3.25 (101.6)
2.50 (82.6)
(63.5)
3/8 -24 UNF [2]
1.25 (31.8) 2.00
2.50 5/8 -18 UNF [2] (50.8)
CUSHION ADJ. SCREW
(63.5)
STROKE + 10.25 (260.4)
STROKE + 12.75 (323.9)
STROKE + 15.00 (381.0)
STROKE + C
MODEL A B C MODEL A B C
CC20 w/ 1" Stroke Tensioner Ø 2.25" 5.66" 20.66" CC20 w/ 1" Stroke Tensioner Ø 57.2mm 143.8mm 524.7mm
CC_26 1.800.328.2174
CC Cylinder/Brake Combinations - CC30, CC40, CC52 3D CAD AVAILABLE AT
WWW.TOLOMATIC.COM
DIMENSIONS
CYLINDER/ BRAKE COMBINATION FOR CC30, CC40, CC52
7.00 2.00
6.44 (177.8) (50.8)
(163.6)
3.01 1/2 NPT PORT 4.88 1/8-NPT BRAKE PORT
DIMENSION "A" (124.0)
(76.5) EACH HEAD
1/4 NPT PORT
4.90
(124.5)
6.00 3.56 5.81
(152.4) (90.4) 4.06 (147.6)
(103.1)
2.38 8.81
3.00 (60.4) Ø.31 (7.9)
(76.2) (223.7)
1.00 3.00
2.50 (25.4) (76.2)
5.88
(63.5) (149.4) 1.62
(41.2) 5.25 5/8 -18 UNF-2A
Ø 6.31 (160.3) DISC 1.75
B (133.4) (44.5)
3.06 4.00 (101.6)

(77.7)
0.75 1.50 0.31 (7.9) 1.62 (41.2)
2.03 (51.6) 2.00 (50.8)
(19.1) (38.1)
6.00
(152.4) 3.25 4.00
(82.5) (101.6)
3.00
(76.2)
2.00 3/8 -24 UNF-2B 1.25
8.25 CUSHION SCREW Ø.34 (8.6)
(209.6) (50.8) (31.8) 1.81 MTG. HOLES
2.50 (63.5) (46.0)
STROKE + C
STROKE + D
STROKE + E
MODEL A B C D E MODEL A B C D E
CC30 w/ 1" Stroke Tensioner Ø 3.25" 6.38" 13.87" 17.50" 23.89" CC30 w/ 1" Stroke Tensioner Ø 82.6mm 162.1mm 352.3mm 444.5mm 609.1mm
CC, SA, DP, TC Switches - All Sizes
SWITCHES
QUICK-DISCONNECT
COUPLER - MALE END
SPECIFICATIONS
Open
None None
86°F [30°C] 140°F [60°C]
BEND

Female coupler to flying lead distance is 197" [5m] also see Cable Shielding specification above
BLUE BROWN BLUE BROWN
CURRENT
Quick disconnect
Wiring
- + OLD
Quick disconnect
Wiring
BLACK
+
BLACK
SIGNAL
†
Shielded from the female quick disconnect coupler to the flying leads . Shield should be terminated at flying lead end .
§
§§
CC_28 1.800.328.2174
CC, SA, DP, TC Switches - All Sizes
PERFORMANCE
600 1000 200
TRIAC
LOAD CURRENT (mA)

LOAD CURENT (mA)
500 800
400
REED FORM A 150
600
300
400 100
200 REED FORM C
RE
200 50 D REED FO
FOR
E
100
MC RM A
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0
CURRENT D.C (mA)

(+) BROWN
AC
THE NOTCHED
LOAD (+) REED COM
FACE OF THE
(-)
SURFACE AND
(+) REED MAGNET.
LOAD SWITCH TRIAC
(-) BLUE SWITCH
(-)

COMMON BROWN
THE NOTCHED
GROOVE TO
DIMENSIONS
BROWN(+) (+)
BROWN(+) (+)
SWITCH. CONTACT
TOLOMATIC IF
HALL-EFFECT BLACK
MODEL BORE A* SWITCHES
B C ARE T
SOURCING HALL-EFFECT BLACK CCM05 0.50 0.81 REQUIRED
1.09 0.35 ON0.31
SWITCH SINKING
BLUE (-) SWITCH BLUE (-) LOAD
CCM07 0.75 0.81 ANOTHER
1.09 0.35 SIDE
0.31 OF
(-) (-) ACTUATOR .
LOAD CCM10 1.00 1.12 1.65 0.35 0.31
CCM15 1.50 1.56 2.15 0.35 0.31
T CCM20 2.00 2.08 2.65 0.35 0.31
CCM52 2.00 2.08 2.65 0.35 0.31
CCM25 2.50 2.75 3.15 0.35 0.31
CCM30 3.00 3.25 3.65 0.35 0.31
SENSING CCM40 4.00 4.25 4.65 0.35 0.56
SURFACE CCM50 5.00 5.25 5.65 0.35 0.56
Above dimensions in inches
C *Inside Dimension ±.06"
MODEL BORE A* B C T
CCM05 0.50" 20.57 27.69 8.76 7.87
B A
CCM07 0.75" 20.57 27.69 8.76 7.87
NOTE: HALL-EFFECT SWITCHES ARE NOT AVAILABLE FOR CABLE CYLINDERS CCM10 1.00" 28.45 41.91 8.76 7.87
SWITCHES ARE NOT AVAILABLE FOR CABLE CYLINDERS WITH STEEL TUBE CCM15 1.50" 39.62 54.61 8.76 7.87
DEAD LENGTH WILL INCREASE ON MOST MODELS, SEE BELOW CCM20 2.00" 52.83 67.31 8.76 7.87
CCM52 2.00" 52.83 67.31 8.76 7.87
CCM25 2.50" 69.85 80.01 8.76 7.87
MODEL CCM05 CCM07 CCM10 CCM15 CCM20 CCM52 CCM25 CCM30 CCM40 CCM50 CCM30 3.00" 82.55 92.71 8.76 7.87
SAM07 SAM10 SAM15 SAM20 SAM52 SAM25 SAM30 SAM40
BORE 0.50" 0.75" 1.00" 1.50" 2.00" 2.00" 2.50" 3.00" 4.00" 5.00" CCM40 4.00" 107.95 118.11 8.76 14.22
SPACE REQUIREMENTS - IN. 1.62 1.62 1.62 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0 CCM50 5.00" 133.35 143.51 8.76 14.22
ADD DEAD LENGTH
TO STROKE LENGTH MM 41.2 41.2 41.2 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 0 Above dimensions in millimeters
*Inside Dimension ±1.5mm
CC: Cable Cylinder Selection Guidelines - All Sizes
EXTERNAL LOAD GUIDANCE AND SUPPORT
The process of select- NOTE: Additional force may be FULL MANUAL
ing a cable cylinder for required to obtain the necessary CABLE ADJUST- Example: If the cylinder selected is
acceleration for vertical or hori-
a given application can
zontal loads.
MENT (CC ONLY) a CC15 (11⁄2 - inch bore):
be complex. It is highly Once you have selected the prop- Actual PSI: 80
3
recommended that you er bore size for your application Max. PSI: 100
contact Tolomatic or a DETERMINE and determined the cylinder’s
Tolomatic Distributor INTERNAL cushion capacity, you need to Differential: 20%
for assistance in select- CUSHION determine the physical stroke 20% x 126 in. (maximum stroke)
CAPACITY length limitation of the cylinder. = 25.2 in.
ing the best actuator for Refer to the table below to find 25.2 + 126 = 151.2 in. (12.6
• Consult the Cushion Data chart
your application. The for the model selected. The the bore size selected and its feet)
following overview of velocities listed on the cushion maximum stroke length.
the selection guidelines charts are final or cushion NOTE: Maximum recommended 2. If your required stroke length
are for educational pur- impact velocities. On applica- stroke length for full manual is still more than the increased
poses only. tions where the internal cush- cable adjustment is the maximum stroke length determined from
ions or bumpers are to be stroke length at which the cables
1
option “1.”, an automatic ten-
COMPILE used, be sure the actual, final can be properly proof-loaded, sioner (AT) or multiple tension-
APPLICATION or impact velocity is known. If pretensioned and maintained at ers may be required.
the velocity is not known, use the required tension by manually
REQUIREMENTS of limit switches with valve adjusting the clevis terminal lock For maximum stroke lengths
To determine the appropriate deceleration circuits or shock when using auto tensioners, refer
nuts. Maximum stroke length is
Cable Cylinder for an application, absorbers should be consid- to the chart on page CC_22.
based on the cylinder’s maximum
compile the following information: ered. Cross-reference the final pressure rating. NOTE: When using auto tension-
• Available pressure (PSI) velocity and weight of the load. ers, the cylinder’s cables must be
If the intersection is below the If the stroke length for your appli-
• Weight of load (lbs. or kgs.) cation falls within the maximum proof-loaded and pretensioned
diagonal lines, the internal before pressure is applied to the
cushions on the actuator may stroke length for full manual
• Orientation of load (lbs. or AT unit. Refer to Application
be used. If the point falls above cable adjustment, your model
kgs.) Guidelines on page CC_36 for
the dashed diagonal line or if selection is complete. (Refer to
• Velocity of load (in./sec. or graph on page CC_31.) proper proof-loading and preten-
the velocity is not known, use sioning methods.
mm/sec.) deceleration circuits, external IMPORTANT NOTE: Once a cylin-
• Stroke length (in. or mm) shock absorbers or select a der is installed in an application, Auto tensioners are strongly rec-
larger cylinder with greater but before putting it into service, ommended for vertical lifting
2
cushion capacity. On high- the cables must be proof-loaded applications and severe, high-
cyclic applications, use of and pretensioned for proper cyclic applications even when the
SELECT external stops is strongly rec- operation. Refer to Application cylinder’s stroke is within the
CYLINDER SIZE ommended. Guidelines on page CC_36 for maximum stroke length at full
• Consult the Theoretical Force proof-loading and pretensioning manual cable adjustment.
vs. Pressure charts. NOTE: The 1/2-inch and 5-inch
methods.
5
cable cylinders and all sizes of
• Cross-reference the load force magnetically coupled cylinders do If your stroke length is beyond CONSIDER
(or load weight if force is not not have internal cushions. the maximum stroke lengths OPTIONS
known) and the available oper- shown, you have two options
ating pressure. If the intersec- The 1/2-inch cable cylinder can
handle only very light inertial available. Avialable options for cable cylin-
tion falls below the diagonal ders include:
line, and if moments do not loads (5 pounds or less). Heavier 1. Increase the maximum stroke
loads require external stops or • Auto Tensioner
exceed maximum values listed length of the selected cylinder
shock absorbers. • Caliper Disc Brake
for that model (see Step 3), the size by the percentage of the
• Switches (DC Reed & Triac)
actuator will accommodate the pressure differential between
4
• Steel Tube (Switches NOT available)
application. If the intersection DETERMINE THE the cylinder’s actual operating
• Seals of Viton® Material
is above the diagonal line, a pressure and the cylinder’s
MAXIMUM maximum rated operating
• 3 Ported Heads
larger cylinder bore size should STROKE
be considered. pressure.
LENGTHS FOR
CC_30 1.800.328.2174
CC: Cable Cylinder Selection Example
3 5
The procedure for selection of cable cylin- DETERMINE INTERNAL CONSIDER
der and magnetically coupled cylinder are CUSHION CAPACITY OPTIONS
very similar. For illustrative purposes, This application will use Form C dc
charts for the CC10 model are used in • Consult the Cushion Data Chart Reed switches to signal other units in this
this example. for the model selected. automated system.
1
In this example the calculated value for The final configurated string will appear as
COMPILE the final velocity and the load intersect at follows:
APPLICATION the line for the internal cushions capacity.
Thus the CC10 will work for this applica- CCM10SK68.000HIBM2
REQUIREMENTS
tion.
• Available pressure 80 psi
• Weight of load 30 lbs. CUSHION DATA
• Orientation of load horiz. FINAL VELOCITY (mm/sec)
10''per sec
1016
1524
2032
2540
127
178
254
508
• Final velocity* of load
25
76
68''
100 45.4
80 36.3
• Stroke length 60 27.2
40 CC10 18.1
*2x average velocity, see page CC_38
2
20 9.1
CC07
LOAD (lbs)
LOAD (kg)
10 4.5
SELECT CYLINDER 7 3.2
SIZE 5 2.3
3 1.4
• Consult the Theoretical Force vs.

Pressure charts. 1 .5
1 3 5 7 10 20 40 60 80 100
• Cross-reference the load force and the FINAL VELOCITY (in/sec)
available operating pressure. In this
4
example a CC07 would accommodate DETERMINE THE CC MAXIMUM
this load at the available PSI. MAXIMUM STROKE STROKE LENGTHS
LENGTHS FOR FULL For Full Manual Cable Adjustment
THEORETICAL FORCE MANUAL CABLE
MAX
vs PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT BORE PRESSURE MAX STROKE
(CC ONLY) in PSI bar in mm
• Consult the chart at right. CC05 0.50 100 6.89 20.40 518.2
CC07 0.75 100 6.89 20.40 518.2
In our example we are using 80 PSI, the
CC10 1.00 100 6.89 20.40 518.2
chart indicates a maximum of 100 PSI,
so we can calculate the maximum CC15 1.50 100 6.89 126.00 3200.4
stroke length with manual adjustment: CC20 2.00 200 13.79 159.60 4053.8
1.20 x 20.4" = 24.48" CC25 2.50 200 13.79 100.80 2560.3
CC30 3.00 200 13.79 151.20 3840.5
Our stroke length is 68" so it will require
CC40 4.00 200 13.79 84.00 2133.6
the automatic tensioner option.
CC50 5.00 100 6.89 222.00 5638.8
CC52 2.00 500 34.47 134.40 3413.8
CC: Caliper Disc Brake for Cable Cylinder Selection Guidelines
CALIPER DISC BRAKE
ORDER CODE
HM, HN
DETERMINE THE LOAD CONFIG 2. Calculate the unbalanced cylinder Carefully note conditions:
URATION AND THE HOLDING force (Fc) only if pressure is applied
CAPACITY OF THE BRAKE when braking. If pressure is removed Ftr = W
a
− Sinϑ − (f cos ϑ ) , Horizontal or
g Load rising
The following steps will help determine the prior to braking, go on to 3.
adequate stopping time and distance for the Fc = Pc x Ac a
cable cylinder equipped with a caliper disc Ftr = W + Sinϑ − (f cos ϑ ) , Load falling
g
brake under various conditions and loads. 3. Calculate the tangential braking a
1. Select the bore size of the cable cyl- force required. This is (Ftr) when
pressure is removed prior to brak-
Fta = Fc + W
g
− f , Horizontal loads
inder based on load to be moved.
Determine load pressure. Set regulator ing, or (Fta) when pressure is still a Incline
applied when braking. Refer to = Fc + W − Sinϑ − (f cos ϑ ) , load rising
at 25% above load pressure (Pc). g
illustrations in Figure 1.
a
= Fc + W − 1 , Vertical load rising
NOMENCLATURE g
a = Deceleration, in/sec2 V = Velocity of load, in/sec.
g = Deceleration due to gravity = 386.4 in/sec2 W = Weight of load, lbs.
In the above expressions (a) can be
f* = Coefficient of friction of sliding load We = Equivalent Load, lbs.
calculated from:
fc = Coefficient of friction between cable and We = W (Sin ϑ + f cos ϑ) V2 V
a= or , In./Sec.2
sheave ϑ = Angle of inclination 2S T
Fc = Unbalanced cylinder force, lbs.
Fta = Tangential braking force required with
( )
q = 0° for horizontal
q = 90° for vertical
pressure still applied when braking, lbs. Rs = Root radius of sheave groove, inches 4. Calculate the tension required in
Ftr = Tangential braking force required with Pc = Load Pressure, PSI brake side cable at the time of
pressure removed prior to braking, lbs. Ac = Area of cable cylinder bore, in2 braking.
Ltr = Tension in cable of brake side half while Pt = Load Pressure, PSI
Ftr
braking with pressure removed, lbs.
A t = Area of tensioner cylinder, in2 L tr = , lbs.; Pressure removed
Lta = Tension in cable of brake side half while 0.369 while braking
braking with pressure applied, lbs. Pba = Brake pressure setting. Pressure applied while
Fta
Ltrm = Maximum tension in cable with pressure
braking, PSI L ta= , lbs.; Pressure applied
Pbr = Brake pressure setting. Pressure removed while 0.369 while braking
removed while braking, lbs.
braking, PSI
Ltam = Maximum tension in cable with pressure
applied while braking, lbs. *Customer must precisely determine coefficient of
S = Stopping distance, inches friction (f), if this value is used.
T = Stopping time, seconds
CC_32 1.800.328.2174
CC: Caliper Disc Brake for Cable Cylinder Selection Guidelines
HORIZONTAL LOADS VERTICAL LOADS** and INCLINED LOADS **Generally not
recommended,
(Caliper must be mounted at top) consult factory
Pressure Removed Before Braking —

Bidirectional Pressure Removed Prior to Braking —
Load Rising or Falling
Ltr
Ltr
Ltr 2L
w Pt = tr , PSI
At
2L tr W
Pt = , PSI
At W
Cos θ
θ
Sin θ
Pressure Applied When Braking —

Load Moving
Pressure Applied When Braking —
Lta Load Rising
w Lta
2 [L ta− We] Lta
Pt = , PSI
2[L ta − We] At
Pt = , PSI W
At
W
Figure 1
5. Calculate tensioner pressure Vertical or Inclined Loads: 9. If pressure is removed prior to

setting, (Pt) based on type of load L trm= L tr + We, lbs.; Pressure removed braking, check to see if brake can
configuration. See Figure 1 and prior to braking and hold the load if application is
Table 1 load rising or falling either vertical or inclined.
L tam= L ta, lbs.; Pressure still applied when
braking and load rising The brake can
hold the load if:
6. Calculate maximum tension in 7. Carefully check that (Ltrm) or .369 L tr ≥ We
the cable with pressure (Ltam) does not exceed 60% of
removed prior to braking (Ltrm) the cable tensile strength*. If they
or with pressure applied when exceed the 60% figure, either
*Refer to Cable Specifications in the
braking (Ltam). double-acting cable cylinder section of
stopping time or stopping dis- this catalog for cable tensile strengths.
tance has to be increased. Repeat
Horizontal Loads: steps 1- 7. Table 1
Ltrm= Ltr + We, lbs.; Pressure removed prior At; in2 Rs; in. Ac; in2
to braking bidirectional 8. Calculate the brake operating CC07 2.30
L tam= L ta, lbs.; Pressure applied when braking pressure. See Table 1 CC10 2.30
and load moving toward caliper CC15 2.30 1.531 1.767
Pbr = .113 [L trRs], PSI; Pressure removed CC20 11.96 2.00 3.142
L tam= L ta + 2We, lbs.; Pressure applied when prior to braking
braking and load moving CC25 11.96 2.00 4.909
away from caliper. CC30 16.20 2.50 7.069
Pba = .113 [L taRs], PSI; Pressure still applied CC40 16.20 2.50 12.566
when braking
CC52 16.20 2.50 3.142
CC50 27.05

AVAILABLE AIR PRESSURE _____ (U.S. Standard) (Metric)
lbf N (U.S. Standard) (Metric)
LOAD ______________________ in/sec mm/sec
lb kg (U.S. Standard) (Metric)
MOVE TIME sec. _____________
LOAD CENTER OF dx ______
GRAVITY DISTANCE dy ______ NO. OF CYCLES _____________
inch millimeters
ORIENTATION
Horizontal CENTER Side Horizontal Down

dz OF GRAVITY CENTER
OF GRAVITY
dy
Y
d
x Z
x
d
d d
Y
x d
dz
d
CENTER
OF GRAVITY
L
Vertical Angled a __________ Z bz
CENTER ____________ X
OF GRAVITY Lz
Z
Y
dx
SIDE VIEW FRONT
β VIEW
z
d
α
dY
OTHER ISSUES: (i.e.
Environment,
Temperature,
Fax (1-763-478-8080) or call Tolomatic (1-800-328-2174) with the above information. We will
provide any assistance needed to determine the proper actuator.
CC_34 1.800.328.2174
TC: Track Cable Cylinder Selection Guidelines - All Sizes
1 5 6
COMPILE diagonal line, a larger cylinder DETERMINE THE DETERMINE
APPLICATION bore size should be BEARING ROD INTERNAL
considered.
REQUIREMENTS LOAD CAPACITY CUSHION
To determine the appropriate NOTE: Additional force may be Determine whether the Load CAPACITY
Track Cable Cylinder for an required to obtain the necessary Weight and Stroke Length will be • Consult the Cushion Data chart
application, compile the following acceleration for vertical or within the load capacity for the (Cushion Data for Track Cable
information: horizontal loads. bearing rods. Cylinders page CC_7 to
CC_11) for the model
3
• Available pressure (PSI) Cross reference the load weight
KEEP UNDER and stroke on the Load Weight selected. The velocities listed
• Weight of load (lbs. or kgs.) on the cushion charts are final
MAXIMUM vs. Stroke chart for the selected
or cushion impact velocities.
• Orientation of load (Vertical, STROKE LENGTH bore size. (Page CC_20,
On applications where internal
Horizontal, Incline or Remote) There are specific maximum CC_21) If the intersection falls
within the curve, the cylinder will cushions are to be used, be
• Velocity of load (in./sec. or stroke lengths for each model. sure the actual, final or impact
TC05: 67.00" accommodate the application
mm/sec.) velocity is known. If the velocity
TC07: 78.00" requirements. If the intersection
• Stroke length (in. or mm) falls outside the curve, consult is not known, use of limit
TC10: 78.00" switches with valve
TC15: 282.59" the chart of a larger bore size
2
that will accommodate the deceleration circuits or shock
4
required load weight and stroke absorbers should be
SELECT DETERMINE for your application. considered.
CYLINDER SIZE NATURE OF
The weight on the bearing rods
• Consult the Theoretical Force LOAD AND THE causes them to bend or deflect
vs. Pressure charts. EFFECT OF slightly over their length. This
• Cross-reference the load force BENDING deflection is increased for longer
(or load weight if force is not MOMENTS rods and/or higher weights on
known) and the available If the actuator will guide and the bearing block. For proper
operating pressure. If the support a load located directly operation, rod deflection must not
intersection falls below the over the center of carrier, bending exceed .30 of an inch.
diagonal line, and if moments moments will not be a factor in
do not exceed maximum the actuator selection. Track
values listed for that model Cable Cylinders perform best that
(see Step 3), the actuator will way. See the Bending Moments
accommodate the application. Formulae below if your
If the intersection is above the application requires the load to
be away from center of the
carrier.
“L” MOMENT “Mx” MOMENT “My” / “Mz” MOMENT

BENDING MOMENTS
Loading Equation Data L = W L = WB F or G = 2L = WB
2 A D
BORE A D F G
MODEL W W W
SIZE (in.) (in.) (lbs.) (lbs.) B
TC05 1/2" 1.09 1.0 14.00 –
TC07 3/4" 1.09 1.0 14.00 –
TC10 1" 1.09 1.0 14.00 – B D
TC15 1-1/2" 1.68 2.31 90.00 – A
Loading Equation Key

A = Distance between shaft centers. L = Load per shaft (lbs.). F = Max. bearing sliding load (linear
B = Distance from load center to center W = Payload weight (lbs.). bearings) (lbs.)
of nearest shaft (in.); determined by D = Axial distance between center of G = Max. bearing sliding load (sintered
application. bearings (in.). bronze bearings) (lbs.)
CC Cable Cylinder Application Guidelines - All Sizes
1
PROOF-LOADING AND THE TORQUE METHOD
PRETENSIONING
CABLES 1. Tighten the clevis terminal lock nuts equally with 3. Loosen the lock nuts to remove tension (but
a torque wrench to the values listed under Proof- tight enough to eliminate any slack).
Once installed, but before putting in ser- loading torque in the Proof-loading, Pretensioning
4. Re-torque clevis terminal lock nuts equally with a
vice, the cables on the cylinder should be table below.
torque wrench to the total preten-sioning figures
proof-loaded and pretensioned to ensure 2. Let tightened nuts sit for 30 seconds. listed in the table below.
that they are rigid for the maximum ser-
vice life of the cylinder. PROOF-LOADING AND PRETENSIONING TORQUE OF CABLES
CC Proof-loading Pretensioning Starting Torque of Total Pretensioning
+Nuts on Terminals =
Model Torque Torque Torque
Improper cable tension causes
excessive side loading of the
gland seal which causes
CC05 15 in.-lbs. 1.69 N-m 2.5 in.-lbs. 0.28 N-m 10 in.-lbs. 1.13 N-m 12.5 in.-lbs. 1.41 N-m
premature gland wear & leakage
Proof-loading and pretensioning involve
removing the two types of stretch in the
cable by adjusting the clevis terminal lock
nuts.
• Proof-loading – When cables are manu- THE FIELD METHOD
factured, individual wires and strands
are laid in position but left slightly loose. The Field Method simplifies Proof-loading and 3. Upon pressurizing, one cable will become
When subjected to proof-loading the Pretensioning the cable cylinder by combining the tight while the other will become slack.
wires align themselves, tighten and con- two processes. Manually adjust out the slack with a wrench
on the clevis terminal lock nut.
structional stretch in the cable is elimi- 1. Block the load some distance from the end of
nated. stroke to keep the piston from bottoming. 4. Release the pressure, block the load on the
other side and repeat steps 1 through 3. When
2. Apply a pressure that is 15% to 20% higher
• Pretensioning– Elastic stretch in cable is these steps are done, turn down the regulator
than the actual load pressure.
inherent in the wire itself. It is removed pressure to the normal operating pressure and
NOTE: Load pressure is defined as the pres- remove the block.
when subjected to pretensioning.
sure required to move the load. When the load
There are two ways to proof-load and pre- is stopped externally, before the piston bot-
toms, the relief valve or regulator setting
tension a cylinder’s cables — The Torque becomes the load pressure.
Method or The Field Method. These two
methods are explained at right. Either
BLOCKING MECHANISM LOAD
method may be used. TIGHTEN HERE SLACK IN CABLE
All cables should be checked periodically

from a preventative maintenance stand-
point. When installing new cable assem-
blies proof-load and pretension using
these same methods.
15-20% HIGHER THAN LOAD PRESSURE
CC_36 1.800.328.2174
CC Cable Cylinder Application Guidelines - All Sizes
2
DETERMINING
SPECIAL
CABLE STRIP
LENGTHS CL
PISTON
CL
CLEVIS PITCH DIA.
A
W SSTROKE “P” CUT CABLE LENGTH = L+STROKE
When an application requires a
specialized cable length, use D
the dimensional table and illus-
trations to determine the prop- Y L + B+STROKE
er cable length. X Z
L + C+STROKE
P W X Y Z STRIP A B C D L(std) + Stroke

MODEL
in. mm. in. mm. in. mm. in. mm. in. mm. in. mm. in. mm. in. mm. in. mm. in. mm. in. mm.
CC05 1.500 38.1 1.687 42.8 1.350 34.3 1.406 35.7 1.687 42.8 0.328 8.3 0.093 2.4 0.234 5.9 0.375 9.5 0.437 11.1 4.68 118.9
CC07 1.500 38.1 1.687 42.8 1.350 34.3 1.406 35.7 1.687 42.8 0.328 8.3 0.093 2.4 0.234 5.9 0.375 9.5 0.437 11.1 4.68 118.9
CC10 1.500 38.1 1.687 42.8 1.350 34.3 1.406 35.7 1.687 42.8 0.328 8.3 0.093 2.4 0.234 5.9 0.375 9.5 0.437 11.1 4.68 118.9
CC15 3.250 82.6 4.452 113.1 4.325 109.9 3.725 94.6 4.452 113.1 0.468 11.9 0.187 4.7 0.343 8.7 0.420 10.7 0.828 21.0 12.50 317.5
CC20 4.250 108.0 5.125 130.2 4.688 119.1 3.426 87.0 5.125 130.2 0.620 15.7 0.250 6.4 0.641 16.3 0.540 13.7 1.060 26.9 14.25 362.0
CC25 4.250 108.0 5.125 130.2 4.688 119.1 3.426 87.0 5.125 130.2 0.620 15.7 0.250 6.4 0.641 16.3 0.540 13.7 1.060 26.9 14.25 362.0
CC30 5.312 134.9 5.687 144.4 5.000 127.0 3.601 91.5 5.687 144.4 0.844 21.4 0.312 7.9 0.500 12.7 0.195 5.0 1.100 27.9 17.00 431.8
CC40 5.312 134.9 6.187 157.1 5.000 127.0 4.315 109.6 6.187 157.1 0.844 21.4 0.312 7.9 0.500 12.7 0.195 5.0 1.100 27.9 17.50 444.5
*CC50 6.000 152.4 9.370 238.0 8.630 219.2 7.820 198.6 9.370 238.0 *1.300 33.0 0.375 9.5 1.000 25.4 0.500 12.7 1.930 49.0 *25.05 636.3
CC52 5.312 134.9 5.702 144.8 5.000 127.0 3.850 97.8 5.702 144.8 0.844 21.4 0.312 7.9 0.500 12.7 0.195 5.0 1.100 27.9 17.00 431.8
*For CC50, Orders shipped prior to Oct. 31, 2017 are STRIP 1.180 in [30.0 mm] and L(std) 24.55 in [623.6 mm]
3
• External Lubricators
LUBRICATION External lubrication should be We recommend a non-detergent,
GUIDELINES utilized for maximum service life 20cP @ 140˚F 10-weight lubricant.
of pneumatic cable cylinders. Optimum conditions for standard cyl-
All Tolomatic cable cylinders require inter-
nal lubrication unless specified. To ensure Lubrication must be maintained in a inder operation are +32˚ to +125˚F
maximum cylinder life, the following constant supply or the results will (+0˚ to 51.6˚C).
guidelines should be followed. be a dry cylinder prone to
• Sanitary environments
premature wear.
• Filtration Oil mist lubricators must dispense
We recommend the use of dry, fil- “Food Grade” lubricants to the air
Oil lubricators, (mist or drop) should
tered air in our products. “Filtered supply. Use fluids with ORAL LD50
supply a minimum of 1 drop per 20
air” means a level of 10 Micron or toxicity ratings of 35 or higher
standard cubic feet per minute to the
less. “Dry” means air should be free such as Multitherm® PG-1 or
cylinder. As a rule of thumb, double
of appreciable amounts of moisture. equivalent. Demanding conditions
that rate if water in the system is
Regular maintenance of installed fil- can require a review of the applica-
suspected. Demanding conditions
ters will generally keep excess mois- tion.
may require more lubricant.
ture in check.
The following conditional cylinder . As a rule of thumb,
general guidelines for use of the system is suspected .
Tolomatic actuators . Since all Demanding conditions may
applications have their own require more lubricant .
Tolomatic, Inc . or your local detergent, 20cP @ 140˚F
Tolomatic distributor if an 10-weight lubricant .
the selection process . are +32˚ to +150˚F (+0˚ to
CUSHION NEEDLE 65 .5˚C) .
ADJUSTMENT (BC2,
LUBRICATION filters will generally keep lubrication . External
GUIDELINES excess moisture in check . lubricants must be
prelubricated at the factory . To premature wear .
be followed . provide optimal
• Filtration use of external lubrication .
the cylinder heads carefully to lubricants to the air supply .
particular application . If there products . “Filtered air” extend service life of
are questions on proper means a level of 10 Micron PG-1 or equivalent .
adjustment, please consult or less . “Dry” means air supply is kept constant .
Tolomatic, Inc . should be free of Oil lubricators, (mist or drop) require a review of the
appreciable amounts of should supply a minimum of application .
moisture . Regular 1 drop per 20 standard

final (or impact) velocity . Rodless cylinders
final velocity and average velocity . For the stroke . Therefore this acceleration
example: Stroking a 100-inch BC3 model must be considered (see diagram) .
VELOCITY
of 100 inches per second . To properly Average

determine the inertial forces for is to use 2 x average velocity .
Start Time End
CC_38 1.800.328.2174
CC, SA, DP, TC Service Parts Ordering - ALL Sizes
CABLE ASSEMBLIES1 AND CONFIGURATED REPAIR KIT2
REPAIR KITS2 PART NUMBERS ORDERING EXAMPLE:
Find the appropriate part number for the OPTION MODEL, BORE STROKE
specific model and specify that part num-
ber with your stroke length when ordering. RK CC V M 07 SK42.5
MODEL CABLE ASSY. REPAIR KITS Where RK is the Repair Kit code, CCVM is the Cable
CC05 CACC05 RKCC05 Cylinder Code with seals of Viton® material, 07 is the .75”
TC05 CATC05 RKTC05 bore and SK 42.5 indicates a stroke length of 42.5 inches.
CCM05 CACCM05 RKCCM05
TCM05 CATCM05 RKTCM05
CC07 CACC07 RKCC07
SA07 CASA07 RKSA07 Service Parts Ordering NOTES:
TC07 CATC07 RKTC07
CCM07 CACCM07 RKCCM07 1 Cable Assemblies contain: one Cable Assembly (specify stroke).
SAM07 CASAM07 RKSAM07 2 Repair Kits contain: two Cable Assemblies (specify stroke) and all
TCM07 CATCM07 RKTCM07 wearable seals required to rebuild the cylinder.
CC10 CACC10 RKCC10
SA10 CASA10 RKSA10
TC10 CATC10 RKTC10
SAM10
TCM10
CASAM10
CATCM15
RKSAM10
RKTCM10
SWITCH ORDERING
CC15 CACC15 RKCC15
DP15 CADP15 RKDP15
SA15 CASA15 RKSA15
TC15 CATC15 RKTC15 DESCRIPTION CODE
CCM15 CACCM15 RKCCM15 Switch Kit, Reed, Form C, 5m BT
DPM15 CADPM15 RKDPM15 Switch Kit, Reed, Form C, Male Conn. BM
SAM15 CASAM15 RKSAM15 Switch Kit, Reed, Form A, 5m RT
TCM15 CATCM15 RKTCM15 Switch Kit, Reed, Form A, Male Conn. RM
CC20 CACC20 RKCC20 Switch Kit, Triac, 5m CT
DP20 CADP20 RKDP20 Switch Kit, Triac, Male Conn. CM
SA20 CASA20 RKSA20 NOTE: When kit is ordered female connector & all mounting hardware is included
DPM20 CADPM20 RKDPM20
SAM20 CASAM20 RKSAM20
CC25 CACC25 RKCC25
DP25 CADP25 RKDP25 Switch Ordering NOTES:
SA25 CASA25 RKSA25 To order field retrofit switch and hardware kits for all Tolomatic
CCM25 CACCM25 RKCCM25 actuators: SW (Then the model and bore size, and type of switch
DPM25 CADPM25 RKDPM25 required)
SAM25 CASAM52 RKSAM25 Example: SWCCM15RT
CC52 CACC52 RKCC52 (Hardware and Form A Reed switch with 5 meter lead for 1.5"
DP52 CADP52 RKDP52 bore cable cylinder)
SA52 CASA52 RKSA52
CC30 CACC30 RKCC30
DP30 CADP30 RKDP30
SA30 CASA30 RKSA30
CC40 CACC40 RKCC40
DP40 CADP40 RKDP40
SA40 CASA40 RKSA40
CC50(ALL) CACC50 RKCC50
SA50(ALL) CASA50 RKSA50
Cable Cylinder Ordering - CC, SA, DP, TC - All Sizes
END #1
END #2
CC V _ M 15 SK125.250 HJ HG RT2 XA_._ XB_._
MODEL STROKE LENGTH SWITCHES (CC_28)

CC Double Acting Cable Cylinder SK _ _._ _ Enter desired stroke length
LEAD LENGTH
SA
DISCONNECT
Single Acting Cable Cylinder in decimal inches
QUANTITY
DP Double Purchase Cable Cylinder
QUICK-
TC Track Cable Cylinder NOTE: Strokes over 281" (7137mm)
CODE
require Tube Couplers. Consult
Tolomatic for lead time. Max. stroke TYPE
length varies by model and bore size, QD RM
see dimensions page for specification. Form A
SEALS
After code enter

RT
quantity desired
no
REED
5 meters
V Seals of Viton® material QD BM
Form C
no BT
HEAD OPTIONS (CC_22 & QD CM
CC_25)
TRIAC
TUBING no CT
Single-ported heads are standard on
S Steel Tube
all cylinders.
Not available for 05, 07
Enter head options for [END #1,
or 50 size
right end] and/or [END #2, left end]
Switches cannot be used
of the cylinder EXTRA CABLE
with steel tubing XA for extra beyond standard in inches
– – standard single port head
1,3HG 3-ported head XB for extra beyond standard in inches
HI 1" auto tensioner assembly
SWITCH MAGNET 3HJ 1" auto tensioner assembly
M Internally Mounted Magnet with 3-ported head
Required for use with switches HK 2" auto tensioner assembly
Magnet will increase dead 3HL 2" auto tensioner assembly
length of CC, SA & DP actuator with 3-ported head
(see page CC_29) 2HM caliper disc brake assembly
2,3HN caliper disc brake assembly
with 3-ported head
1Only head option available for single-
BORE SIZE acting cylinders
05 0.50" (16mm) 25 2.50" (63mm) 2Autotensioner assembly required on
07 0.75" (19mm) 30 3.00" (76mm) one end of the cylinder
10 1.00" (25mm) 40 4.00" (100mm) 3Cushions are removed on all 3-ported heads
12 1.25" (32mm) 50 5.00" (127mm)
15 1.50" (40mm) 52 2.00" [500 PSI]
20 2.00" (50mm) (50mm)

CC_40 1.800.328.2174
PB, PB2 Rod cylinder
ABT
Slides
MXP
BC2
BC3
BC4
LS
MG
Contents
CC
PB Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_2
PB & PB2 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_3
PB Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_4
PB Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_6
PB Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_6 PB
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_8
PB2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_9
PB2 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_10
PB2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_11
ENGR
PB2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_12

Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_14
Application Data Worksheet . . . . . PB_16
Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_17
Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . PB_18
Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_19
Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_20
PB Power-block Endurance Technology features are
The Power Block rod cylinder slide features two precision steel guide rods with composite bearings to provide
abt
positive support of the load. The Power Block withstands heavy side loads making it a great choice for conveyor
line stops and load lifting applications. Built-to-order in stroke lengths up to 3 inches.
internal bumper
durable bearing • Made of urethane
COMPOSITE BEARINGS composite to
MXP
• Thin profile allows use of prolong cylinder

oversize guide rods
Dovetail Slots life and reduce
•For easy switch mounting noise
• Best choice for impact
use or high contaminant
environments
BC2
BC3
BC4
Nickel-Plated

Shafts
• Shafts up to 0.625"
Durable
LS
diameter
design
•Tough, lightweight
mounting flexibility extruded aluminum
in a low profile
•Threaded
MG
package
holes for
plated base or side
mounting
steel
tooling
plate
CC
• Threaded bolt
thru holes for
tooling plate
mounting Options
Stop Collar / Bumper Kit
PB
• Includes 2 stop collars and 1/4" thick

polyurethane external bumpers to help absorb
impact shock
Dual Tooling Plate

ENGR
• Added flexibility for many applications
Switches
disconnect couplers
PB_2 1.800.328.2174
PB & PB2 Rod Cylinder Slides - All Sizes
PERFORMANCE
THEORETICALAND
FORCE vs PRESSURE STROKE LENGTHS
POWER-BLOCK POWER-BLOCK2 EXTEND FORCE
PRESSURE (bar) STROKE (mm)
ABT
102
127
152
.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.4 4.2 4.8 5.6 6.2 6.9
25
51
76
1000 4448
0
800 3559
600
PB252
2669
06 PB
MXP
400 1779
10
PB232
BC2
200 890
17
BC3
PB220 445
100 PB20, 20
80 PB217 356
PB17,
60 267
FORCE (lbs.)
BC4
PB2
FORCE (N)
40 178 08
PB210
PB10,
LS
20 89 10
PB208
17
MG
10 PBO6 44
8 36
6 27
20
CC
4 18
32 PB
2 8.9
52
1 4.4
ENGR
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
PRESSURE (PSI) STROKE (in)
PB Power-Block Rod Cylinder Slide - 06, 10 Sizes
PERFORMANCE
THEORETICAL FORCE vs PRESSURE Max. Load Weight vs Stroke Length
PRESSURE (bar) Xs-STROKE LENGTH (mm)
13 25 38 51 64 76
abt
.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.4 4.2 4.8 5.6 6.2 6.9 10 4.5
30 13.6
W
PB1
25 11.3 8 0 MA 3.6
W-LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
W-LOAD WEIGHT (kg)

X LO
AD W
ND EIGH
20 TE 9.1 T
MXP
X 2.7
FORCE (lbs)
FORCE (kg)
0E CT
1 RA
Xs
PB T
15 RE 6.8 PB06
10 MAX
PB 4 LOAD 1.8
WEIG
10 EX TEND 4.5 HT
PB06
ACT
RETR 2 .9
PB06
BC2
5 2.3
0 0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 .5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
PRESSURE (PSI) Xs-STROKE LENGTH (in)
BC3
BC4
BENDING MOMENTS LOAD WEIGHT vs VELOCITY

(USING INTERNAL BUMPERS)
Xs-STROKE LENGTH (mm) W-LOAD WEIGHT (kg)
13 25 38 51 64 76 .91 1.81 2.72 3.63 4.54
10 1.13 40 1016
LS
V-LOAD VELOCITY (mm/sec)

V-LOAD VELOCITY (in/sec)
8 .90
Mx MOMENT (in-lbs)
Mx MOMENT (N-m)
PB1
0 MA 30 762
X LO
6 AD W .68
MG
EIGH
T
Mx Xs 20 PB1
0 MA 508
X LO
4 PB06 .45 AD W
MAX PB0 EIGH
LOAD 6 MA T
WEIG 10 X LO 254
HT .23 AD W
2 EIGH
CC
0 0 0 0
0 .5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 0 2 4 6 8 10
Xs-STROKE LENGTH (in) W-LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
PB
Force vs. Pressure MAX. Load WEIGHT vs Bending Moments Load vs velocity
Force vs Pressure performance data STROKE Length Max. Moment for composite bear- Do not exceed Max. Load curve.
ENGR
applies to models with composite Do not exceed Max. Load curve. ings is based on 200 million linear Max. Load for Power-Block is based
bearings. Max. Load for composite bearings is inches of travel. on 200 million linear inches of
based on 200 million linear inches travel.
of travel.
PB_4 1.800.328.2174
PB Power-Block Rod Cylinder Slide - 17, 20 Sizes
PERFORMANCE
PRESSURE (bar) Xs-STROKE LENGTH (mm)
ABT
.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.4 4.2 4.8 5.6 6.2 6.9 13 25 38 51 64 76
125 56.7 25 11.3
45.4 20
PB2
0 MA
W 9.1
W-LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)

100
W-LOAD WEIGHT (kg)

X LO
N D AD W
D XTE EIGH
EN T 17 E T
MXP
FORCE (lbs)
FORCE (kg)
75 XT RAC PB T 34.0 15 6.8
Xs
E T C PB1
20
PB 20 R
E
RETRA 7 MA
17 X LO
50 PB PB 22.7 10
AD W
4.5
EIGH
T
25 11.3 5 2.3
BC2
0 0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 .5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
BC3
BC4
Xs-STROKE LENGTH (mm) W-WEIGHT (kg)
13 25 38 51 64 76 2.3 4.5 6.8 9.1 11.3
40 4.52 40 1016
LS
30 3.39 30 762
MOMENT (in-lbs)
PB20
MOMENT (N-m)
MAX
LOAD
Mx HT Xs
WEIG
MG
PB2
20 2.26 20 0 MA 508
X LO
AD W
PB1 EIGH
PB17 MAX LOAD 7 MA T
WEIGHT X LO
10 1.13 AD W 254
10
EIGH
CC
T
0 0 0 0
0 .5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 0 5 10 15 20 25
Xs-STROKE LENGTH (in) W-WEIGHT (lbs)
PB
ENGR
of travel.
PB Power-Block Rod Cylinder Slide - All Sizes
SPECIFICATIONS
WEIGHT STROKE MAX. TEMPERATURE
BORE SIZE
BASE PER UNIT OF STOKE LENGTH PRESSURE RANGE
abt
in mm lbs kg lbs kg in mm PSI bar °F °C

06 0.375 9.5 0.26 0.1 0.18 0.08 0.5, 1.0, 13, 25,
10 0.625 16.0 0.53 0.2 0.30 0.14 1.5, 2.0 38, 51 20 -7
100 6.895 to to
17 1.062 27.0 1.08 0.5 0.57 0.26 1.0, 2.0, 25, 51, 140 60
MXP
20 1.250 31.8 1.56 0.7 0.88 0.40 3.0 76
PB
Options
Stop Collar / Bumper Kit
BC2
• Includes 2 stop collars and 1/4" thick

polyurethane external bumpers to help
absorb impact shock
ORDER CODES Dual Tooling Plate

BC3
PB06, PB10, PB17, PB20

• Added flexibility for many applications
PB OPTIONS Page
Stop Collar/Bumper PB_6 Switches
Dual Tooling Plate PB_6
BC4
• 15ft. cable with flying leads; available with

Switches PB_14 quick-disconnect couplers
Application Guidelines PB_18
Ordering PB_20
Selection PB_17
LS
A
DIMENSIONS B
MG
C
JJ THREAD FROM D E See dimensions
OPP SIDE, THRU DIA page PB_7
AND C'BORE FOR NOT ON
KK SOCKET HEAD PB06
CAP SCREW (4)
F+ 2 X
CC
HH FROM OPP SIDE (2) STROKE

G+
Q+ STROKE
STROKE
H
PB
P+
N STROKE J
PP (2) FROM
BOTH ENDS M K
L
V+
LL (4) STROKE W NN (2)
ENGR
U MM (4)
R X CC FF GG
S
AA DD EE +
T Y Z BB STROKE
PB_6 1.800.328.2174
3d cad available at
www.tolomatic.com
PB Power-Block Rod Cylinder Slide - All Sizes

DIMENSIONS
PB06 PB10 PB17 PB20
Model
BORE 0.375 9.5 0.625 16.0 1.013 27.0 1.25 31.8 See drawing
ABT
A 1.688 42.9 2.250 57.2 3.125 79.4 3.688 93.7 page PB_6
B 0.219 5.6 0.297 7.5 0.375 9.5 0.438 11.1
C 1.250 31.8 1.656 42.1 2.375 60.3 2.813 71.5
D 0.500 12.7 0.656 16.7 0.844 21.4 1.000 25.4
MXP
E 0.688 17.5 0.938 23.8 1.438 36.5 1.688 42.9
F 2.370 60.2 2.853 72.5 3.070 78.0 3.198 81.2
G 1.375 34.9 1.672 42.5 1.781 45.2 1.833 46.6
BC2
H 0.156 4.0 0.219 5.6 0.188 4.8 0.219 5.6
J 0.273 6.9 0.335 8.5 0.460 11.7 0.460 11.7
K 0.125 3.2 0.156 4.0 0.250 6.4 0.250 6.4
L 1.625 41.3 2.188 55.6 3.063 77.8 3.625 92.1
BC3
M 0.031 0.8 0.031 0.8 0.031 0.8 0.031 0.8
N 0.688 17.5 0.875 22.2 1.063 27.0 1.063 27.0
P 0.688 17.5 1.063 27.0 0.656 16.7 1.000 25.4
Q 0.500 12.7 0.625 15.9 0.563 14.3 0.563 14.3
BC4
R 0.891 22.6 1.063 27.0 1.484 37.7 1.688 42.9
S 0.406 10.3 0.500 12.7 0.609 15.5 0.781 19.8
T 0.125 3.2 0.141 3.6 0.156 4.0 0.219 5.6
U 0.594 15.1 0.750 19.1 1.125 28.6 1.188 30.2
LS
V 0.500 12.7 0.625 15.9 0.563 14.3 0.563 14.3
W 0.688 17.5 0.875 22.2 1.063 27.0 1.063 27.0
X 0.828 21.0 1.000 25.4 1.422 36.1 1.623 41.2
Y 0.031 0.8 0.031 0.8 0.031 0.8 0.031 0.8
MG
Z 0.156 4.0 0.188 4.8 0.219 5.6 0.313 8.0
AA 0.469 11.9 0.500 12.7 0.688 17.5 0.844 21.4
BB 0.750 19.1 1.250 31.8 1.750 44.5 2.000 50.8
CC 0.563 14.3 0.688 17.5 1.000 25.4 1.063 27.0
CC
DD 0.913 23.2 1.281 32.5 1.429 36.3 1.449 36.8
EE 0.466 11.8 0.450 11.4 0.500 12.7 0.540 13.7
FF 0.250 6.4 0.375 9.5 0.500 12.7 0.625 15.9 PB
GG 0.734 18.6 0.875 22.2 1.203 30.6 1.406 35.7 *Dowel Pins
.1875/.1865 4.8/4.7 x .1875/.1865 4.8/4.7 x .2500/.2490 6.4/6.3 x 6.4 2500/.2490 X 6.4/6.3 x 6.4 Ø.002 M
HH*
X .22 DP 5.6 DP X .22 DP 5.6 DP X .25 DP DP .25 DP DP
Ø.051 M
JJ 6-32 X .38" (9.5) DP 8-32 X .38" (9.5) DP 1/4-20 X .25" (6.4) DP 5/16-18UNC X .50 (12.7)" DP
ENGR
KK #4 #6 #10 1/4
LL 6-32 X .25" (6.4) DP 8-32 X .38" (9.5) DP 10-24 X .44" (11.2) DP 5/16-18 X .50" (12.7) DP
MM 6-32 THRU 8-32 THRU 10-24 THRU 5/16-18 THRU
NN 10-32 UNF 10-32 UNF 1/8-27 NPT 1/8-27 NPT
PP 6-32UNC X .22" (5.6) DP 8-32UNC X .28" (7.1) DP 10-24UNC X .34" (8.6) DP 5/16-18UNC X .38" (9.7) DP
PB & PB2 Rod Cylinder Slides - All Sizes
APPLICATIONS
Material Handling Material Handling
abt
MXP
BC2
A pick and place application for moving Vacuumized sheet transfer application.
product between conveyors.
Customer Challenge: Customer Challenge:

BC3
A manufacturer of consumer electronic A manufacturer of battery chargers

equipment needed a method to move needed a method of taking sheet metal
finished product from one conveyor to off of pallets and placing onto the
another quickly without damage or waste. assembly line. Speed is critical and end-
of-stroke position must be consistent,
BC4
Application thus, Tolomatic pneumatic products were

chosen for this system.
Requirements:
• Fast response, throughput of 20
products per minute Application
LS
• Consistent positioning
Requirements:
• Fast response, 1 part must be
• End-of-stroke adjustment to reoriented and moved each 3 seconds
accommodate varying product lines
• Movement from end-of-stroke to end-
MG
of-stroke with consistent positioning

Tolomatic Solution: • Low cost
This side mounted BC3D Band Cylinder
with dual 180° option provides the motion • End-of-stroke adjustment
along the X axis and support for the PB2
CC
rod cylinder slide which provides the

Tolomatic Solution:
Y axis motion. In this application dual
This application uses a Tolomatic PB2
vacuum cups are used, however they are
Rod Cylinder Slide, attached to a BC3
often replaced with a gripper unit with
Band Cylinder with adjustable shocks.
PB
custom tooled fingers for product that

This actuator assembly moves the
does not present a smooth flat surface.
vacuum grid attachment that holds the
sheet metal.
Result:
ENGR
This continuing customer is pleased with

Result:
the durability, price and delivery that the
The BC3 and PB2 has long-lasting
BC3 and PB2 actuators manufactured by
durability for reliable performance at the
Tolomatic provide.
required speed. This continuing customer
is pleased with the price and delivery that
Tolomatic provides.
PB_8 1.800.328.2174
PB2 Power-block 2 Endurance Technology features are
The Power Block 2 rod cylinder slide features two precision steel guide rods with linear ball High Pressure capable
or composite bearings to provide positive support of the load. The Power Block 2 withstands
ABT
heavy side loads making it a great choice for conveyor line stops and load lifting applications. •Designed for pressures up to 150 PSI
Built-to-order in stroke lengths up to 6 inches. (10.3 bar) with a 10,000,000 cycle rating
piston magnet
internal bumpers •Piston magnet is
a standard feature
MXP
• Made of urethane allowing sensor
composite to mounting whenever
prolong cylinder required
life and reduce
noise
BC2
Large shafts
BC3
• Shafts up to 1.25" diameter
BC4
Durable
design
LS
•Tough, lightweight
extruded aluminum
in a low profile
package
MG
durable bearing options
LINEAR BALL BEARINGS
•Low friction, long life
• Best tooling plate accuracy
plated
CC
steel mounting flexibility
tooling COMPOSITE BEARINGS
plate •T-slots and • Thin profile allows use of
threaded oversize guide rods
• Threaded bolt holes
PB
thru holes for for base • Best choice for impact
tooling plate mounting use or high contaminant
mounting environments
ENGR
Options
Switches
disconnect couplers
PB2 Power-Block2 Rod Cylinder Slide - 08, 10, 17 Sizes
PERFORMANCE
W
abt
PRESSURE (bar) BEARING TYPE

0 0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.4 4.1 4.8 5.5 6.2 6.9 Linear Composite
90 40.8 50 PB217 22.7
40
80 XT
E ND
36.3 30 Xs PB210
PB208
18.1
13.6
7E
MAX. W-LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)

21
MAX. W-LOAD WEIGHT (kg)

70 PB 31.8 20 13.6
MXP
T
60 AC 27.2
ETR
FORCE (lbs)
FORCE (kg)
50 217 22.7 10 4.5 4.1
PB 98 3.6
7
40 18.1 6 2.7 3.2
5 2.3
D
30 EXTEN 13.6 4 1.8
BC2
PB210 CT 3 1.4
20 RETRA
PB2108 EXTEND 9.1
PB20 2 0.9
10 TRACT 4.5
PB208 RE
0 0 1 0.5
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6
BC3

BC4

W-WEIGHT (kg)
Xs
LS
2.27 4.54 6.80

x BEARING TYPE
Linear Composite 40 18.1
50 PB217 5.65
PB210
30 PB208 3.39

30 13.6
Mx MAX. MOMENT (in-lbs)

Mx MAX. MOMENT (N-m)
MG
10 1.131.02 PB21
9 20 7 MA 9.1
7 0.79 PB X LO
210 AD W
5 0.56 PB MA EIGH
208 XL T
3 MA OA 4.5
CC
0.34 XL D
10 OA WE
IGH
D WE T
IGH
T
1 0.11 0 0
0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 0 5 10 15
Xs-STROKE LENGTH (in) W-WEIGHT (lbs)
PB
ENGR
of travel.
PB_10 1.800.328.2174
PB2 Power-Block2 Rod Cylinder Slide - 20, 32, 52 Sizes
PERFORMANCE
W
ABT
PRESSURE (bar)
0 0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.4 4.1 4.8 5.5 6.2 6.9
900 408 400 BEARING TYPE
Linear Composite
181
800
EN
D 363
300
200
PB252
PB232 Xs 90.7
136
XT PB220
W-MAX. LOAD WEIGHT (kg)

W-MAX.LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
700 2E 318 90100 45.4
MXP
B2
5
CT 70 80 36.3 40.8
600 P RA 272 50 60 27.2 31.8
22.7
R ET 40 18.1
FORCE (lbs)
252
FORCE (kg)
30 13.6
500 PB 227 20 9.1
400 181 10 4.5 4.1
9 8 3.6 3.2
TEND 76
BC2
300 EX 136 2.7 2.3
PB232 54
1.8
200 RA CT 91
RET 3 1.4
PB232 ND 2 0.9
100 PB 22 0 EX TE 45
T
PB220 RETRAC 1 0.5
0 0 1* 2* 3 4 5 6
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Xs-STROKE LENGTH (in)
BC3
PRESSURE (PSI)
*PB220, PB232 and PB252 - 1" Stroke and PB252 - 2" Stroke are
units with one set of bearings.
BC4
W-LOAD WEIGHT (kg)

Xs
LS
13.6
18.1
22.7
27.2
31.8
36.3
45.4
54.4
BEARING TYPE
x
2.3
4.5
6.8
9.1
Linear Composite
400 PB252 45.2 40 18.1
300 PB232 33.9
PB220
Mx MAX. MOMENT (in-lbs)
90100 11.3 10.2

Mx MAX. MOMENT(N-m)
30 13.6
70 7.91
MG
50 5.65
30 3.39 PB25
2 MAX
20 PB LOAD
WEIG
9.1
22 PB2 HT
10 1.131.02 0M 32 M
9 AX AX L
7 0.79 OAD
5
LO W EIGH
0.56 AD
CC
10 WE T 4.5
3 0.34 IGH
T
1 0.11
1* 2* 3 4 5 6 0 0
0 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 100 120
Xs-STROKE LENGTH (in) W-LOAD WEIGHT (lbs)
PB
*PB220, PB232 and PB252 - 1" Stroke and PB252 - 2" Stroke are
units with one set of bearings.
ENGR
of travel.
PB2 Power-Block2 Rod Cylinder Slide - All Sizes
SPECIFICATIONS LB = Linear Bearing CB = Composite Bearing
SIZE 08 10 17 20 32 52 IMPACT LOADING

BEARING LB CB LB CB LB CB LB CB LB CB LB CB (Composite Bearings ONLY)
BORE in 0.50 0.63 1.06 1.25 2.00 3.25
Mass 1 w v2
abt
SIZE mm 12.7 15.9 27.0 31.8 50.8 82.6 Applied KE= /2 – g

lbs 0.62 0.65 0.86 0.90 At This
0.5" Point
NA KE = Energy
(13mm) kg 0.28 0.29 0.39 0.41
lbs 0.70 0.75 0.97 1.03 1.97 2.32 2.79 3.32 4.85 5.59 10.92 11.74 w = Weight in Lbs.
1.0"
g = 32.2 Ft./sec.2
MXP
(25mm) kg 0.32 0.34 0.44 0.47 0.89 1.05 1.27 1.51 2.20 2.54 4.95 5.33 (gravitational constant )
1.5" lbs 0.78 0.85 1.08 1.17 v = Ft./sec. (velocity)
NA
(38mm) kg 0.35 0.39 0.49 0.53
STROKE & WEIGHT
2.0" lbs 0.86 0.95 1.19 1.30 2.38 2.88 3.87 4.36 6.43 6.95 12.57 13.63
(51mm) kg 0.39 0.43 0.54 0.59 1.08 1.31 1.76 1.98 2.92 3.15 5.70 6.18 In applications such as conveyor stops impact
BC2
lbs 1.03 1.16 1.42 1.57 2.80 3.43 4.49 5.14 5.48 8.03 15.71 16.57 loading may be a factor. The table below gives
3.0"
(76mm) the maximum KE energy for each of the PB2
kg 0.47 0.53 0.64 0.71 1.27 1.56 2.04 2.33 2.49 3.64 7.13 7.52
models. Use the above equation to determine
4.0" lbs 1.20 1.35 1.64 1.84 3.21 3.40 5.11 5.92 8.20 9.12 17.36 18.46 the KE for your application. Your result should
(102mm) kg 0.54 0.61 0.74 0.83 1.46 1.54 2.32 2.69 3.72 4.14 7.87 8.37 not exceed the maximum KE for the PB2
BC3
5.0" lbs 3.63 4.54 5.72 6.71 9.08 10.20 19.00 20.36 model you select.
(127mm) kg 1.65 2.06 2.59 3.04 4.12 4.63 8.62 9.24
NA
6.0" lbs 4.04 5.09 6.34 7.49 9.97 11.28 20.64 22.25 BORE SIZE MAX. “KE”
(152mm) kg 1.83 2.31 2.88 3.40 4.52 5.12 9.36 10.09 in mm in-lbs N-m
BC4
STROKE in 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 08 0.500 12.7 1.08 0.12
LENGTH mm 13, 25, 38, 51, 76, 102 25, 51, 76, 102, 127, 152 10 0.625 15.9 5.64 0.64
MAX. PSI 100 17 1.063 27.0 17.88 2.02
PRESSURE bar 6.895 20 1.250 31.8 40.80 4.61
TEMP. °F 20 to 140 32 2.000 50.8 129.60 14.64
LS
RANGE °C -7 to 60 52 3.250 82.6 285.60 32.27
DIMENSIONS See dimensions

K (4) X
MG
V OPTIONAL page PB_13

AA CC P W SWITCH
KK
E
CC
MM MA U C
“T”-SLOTS
Z
TF D
B
PB
.394" K (2) MODEL STROKE H L

NN PB208 1" BB J
"T"-SLOTS PB210 1"
Y N
PB217 1"
PB217 2" S EE G + STROKE
FF
ENGR
R
JJ TAPPED HOLE THRU
CENTERED ON HH
HH GG
T-SLOT NUTS
PB_12 1.800.328.2174
3d cad available at
www.tolomatic.com
PB2 Power-Block2 Rod Cylinder Slide - All Sizes

DIMENSIONS
Size 08 10 17 20 32 52
Bore 0.500 (12.7) 0.625 (15.9) 1.125 (27.0) 1.250 (31.8) 2.000 (50.8) 3.250 (82.6)
A 2.190 55.6 2.380 60.5 3.380 85.9 4.440 112.8 5.440 138.2 7.280 184.9 See drawing
B 0.33 8.4 0.39 9.9 0.55 14.0 0.72 18.3 0.81 20.6 0.89 22.6 page PB_12
ABT
C 1.53 38.9 1.59 40.5 2.28 57.9 3.00 76.2 3.81 96.9 5.50 139.7
D 1.120 28.4 1.220 31.0 1.200 30.5 1.610 40.9 1.670 42.4 2.110 53.6
E 1.969 50.0 2.126 54.0 2.992 76.0 3.937 100.0 4.882 124.0 6.535 166.0
F 0.031 0.8 0.031 0.8 0.047 1.2 0.031 0.8 0.031 0.8 0.047 1.2
G 1.738 44.1 1.795 45.6 1.881 47.8 1.834 46.6 2.297 58.3 2.693 68.4
MXP
H 0.063 1.6 0.063 1.6 0.063 1.6 0.082 2.1 0.063 1.6 0.063 1.6
J 0.38 9.7 0.38 9.7 0.38 9.7 0.38 9.7 0.50 12.7 0.63 16.0
K #8-32x.34DP (4) #10-24x.38DP (4) 1/4-20x.44 DP (4) 5/16-18 x .44 DP (4) 3/8-16 x .56 DP (4) 1/2-13 x .75 DP (4)
L 0.60 15.2 0.55 14.0 0.52 13.2 0.53 13.5 0.58 14.7 0.69 17.5
M 2.25 57.2 2.44 62.0 3.47 88.1 4.50 114.3 5.50 139.7 7.37 187.2
N 0.47 11.9 0.50 12.7 0.52 13.2 0.53 13.5 0.58 14.7 0.69 17.5
BC2
P 0.87 22.0 0.91 23.0 0.95 24.0 1.02 26.0 1.14 29.0 1.54 39.0
R 1.11 28.2 1.33 33.8 1.72 43.7 2.06 52.3 2.48 63.0 3.77 95.8
S 0.52 13.2 0.67 17.0 0.83 21.1 1.03 26.2 1.23 31.2 1.89 48.0
T 0.15 3.8 0.16 4.1 0.31 7.9 0.33 8.4 0.36 9.1 0.49 12.4
U 1.890 48.01 2.047 51.99 2.756 70.00 3.780 96.01 4.724 119.99 6.299 159.99
BC3
V 0.551 14.00 0.630 16.00 1.024 26.01 1.181 30.00 1.575 40.01 2.362 59.99
W 0.16 4.1 0.19 4.8 0.24 6.1 0.35 8.9 0.37 9.4 0.57 14.5
X 0.88 22.4 1.00 25.4 1.50 38.1 1.88 47.8 2.38 60.5 3.50 88.9
Y #8-32 Thru (4) #10-24 Thru (4) 1/4-20 Thru (4) 5/16-18 Thru (4) 3/8-16 Thru (4) 1/2-13 Thru (4)
Z 10-32UNF (2) 10-32UNF (2) 1/8 NPT (2) 1/8-27 NPT (2) 1/4-18 NPT (2) 3/8-18 NPT (2)
AA 0.14 3.6 0.16 4.1 0.24 6.1 0.28 7.1 0.31 7.9 0.42 10.7
BC4
BB 0.05 1.3 0.08 2.0 0.18 4.6 0.06 1.5 – – – –
0.5 0.591 15.01 0.669 16.99 NA
CC - STROKE LENGTH
1.0 1.378 35.00 1.457 37.01 1.575 40.01 1.181 30.00 1.378 35.00 1.575 40.01
1.5 1.772 45.01 1.850 46.99 NA
2.0 2.165 54.99 2.244 57.00 2.362 59.99 2.165 54.99 2.362 59.99 2.559 65.00
LS
3.0 3.150 80.01 3.228 81.99 3.346 84.99 3.150 80.01 3.346 84.99 3.543 89.99
4.0 4.134 105.00 4.213 107.01 4.331 110.01 4.134 105.00 4.331 110.01 4.528 115.01
5.0 5.315 135.00 5.118 130.00 5.315 135.00 5.512 140.00
NA
6.0 6.299 159.99 6.102 154.99 6.299 159.99 6.496 165.00
EE 0.08 2.0 0.17 4.3 0.08 2.0 0.09 2.3 0.03 0.8 0.12 3.0
0.5 2.67 67.8 2.86 72.6 NA
MG
FF - Linear Bearing /
1.0 3.17 80.5 3.36 85.3 4.14 105.2 3.17 80.5 3.43 87.1 4.19 106.4
Stroke Length
1.5 3.67 93.2 3.86 98.0 NA

2.0 4.17 105.9 4.36 110.7 5.14 130.6 5.67 144.0 6.06 153.9 5.19 131.8
3.0 5.17 131.3 5.36 136.1 6.14 156.0 6.67 169.4 7.06 179.3 8.44 214.4
4.0 6.17 156.7 6.36 161.5 7.14 181.4 7.67 194.8 8.06 204.7 9.44 239.8
CC
5.0 8.14 206.8 8.67 220.2 9.06 230.1 10.44 265.2
NA
6.0 9.14 232.2 9.67 245.6 10.06 255.5 11.44 290.6
0.5 2.67 67.8 2.86 72.6 NA
Bearing / Stroke Length
1.0 3.17 80.5 3.36 85.3 4.14 105.2 3.92 99.6 4.43 112.5 4.94 125.5
FF - Composite
1.5 3.67 93.2 3.86 98.0 NA

2.0 4.17 105.9 4.36 110.7 5.14 130.6 5.67 144.0 6.06 153.9 5.94 150.9
PB
3.0 5.17 131.3 5.36 136.1 6.14 156.0 6.67 169.4 7.06 179.3 8.44 214.4
4.0 6.17 156.7 6.36 161.5 7.14 181.4 7.67 194.8 8.06 204.7 9.44 239.8
5.0 8.14 206.8 8.67 220.2 9.06 230.1 10.44 265.2
NA
6.0 9.14 232.2 9.67 245.6 10.06 255.5 11.44 290.6
GG 0.22 5.6 0.22 5.6 0.25 6.4 0.25 6.4 0.41 10.4 0.41 10.4
ENGR
HH 0.66 16.8 0.66 16.8 0.75 19.1 0.75 19.1 0.94 23.9 0.94 23.9
JJ 10-24 10-24 1/4-20 1/4-20 5/16-18 5/16-18
KK - LB 0.250 6.35 0.375 9.53 0.500 12.70 0.625 15.88 0.750 19.05 1.000 25.40 LB = Linear
Shaft Bearing
Ø CB 0.375 9.53 0.500 12.70 0.750 19.05 0.875 22.23 1.000 25.40 1.250 31.75
MM 0.781 19.8 1.438 36.5 2.125 54.0 3.000 76.2 3.625 92.1 5.188 131.8 CB = Composite
NN 0.73 18.5 0.50 12.7 0.67 17.0 0.75 19.1 0.94 23.9 1.09 27.7 Bearing
PB & PB2 Switches - All Sizes
SWITCHES
ABT
QUICK-DISCONNECT
COUPLER - MALE END
MXP

SPECIFICATIONS
BC2

BC3
Open
None None
BC4
LS

MG

1 Amp at 0.5 Amp at
86°F [30°C] 140°F [60°C]
CC
BEND

PB
Female coupler to flying lead distance is 197" [5m] also see Cable Shielding specification above
BROWN BLUE BROWN
ENGR
BLUE
CURRENT
Quick disconnect
Wiring
- + OLD
Quick disconnect
Wiring
SIGNAL -
Reed Switch Life Expectancy: Up to
BLACK BLACK
†
SIGNAL +
§
§§
PB_14 1.800.328.2174
PB & PB2 Switches - All Sizes
PERFORMANCE
600 1000 200
TRIAC
LOAD CURRENT (mA)

LOAD CURENT (mA)
500 800
400
REED FORM A 150
600
ABT
300
400 100
200 REED FORM C
RE
200 50 D REED FO
E
100 FOR RM A
MC
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0
CURRENT D.C (mA)
MXP
(+) BROWN THE NOTCHED

(+) AC
LOAD REED FACE OF THE
BC2
COM
(-) Max. THE SENSING
(-) LOAD
OR BLUE
SURFACE AND
BROWN INPUT MUST FACE
(+) REED TRIAC MAGNET.
LOAD SWITCH
BC3
BLUE SWITCH
(-)
(-)

COMMON BROWN
THE NOTCHED
BC4
BLUE ACTUATOR
GROOVE TO
SWITCH. CONTACT
BROWN(+) (+)
SWITCHES ARE
LS
HALL-EFFECT BLACK
HALL-EFFECT BLACK
SOURCING
SWITCH SINKING REQUIRED ON
BLUE (-) SWITCH BLUE (-) ANOTHER SIDE OF
LOAD
MG
DIMENSIONS
MODEL BORE A B C
PB208, PB210 PB217, PB220 PB208 0.500 0.50 1.25 0.25
PB232, PB252 PB210 0.625 0.50 1.25 0.26
CC
PB217 1.063 0.50 1.25 0.52
PB220 1.250 0.50 1.25 0.48
PB232 2.000 0.50 1.25 0.64
AB PB252 3.000 0.50 1.25 0.85 PB
AB
MODEL BORE A B C
PB208 12.70 12.70 31.75 6.35
ENGR
C PB210 15.88 12.70 31.75 6.60

C
PB217 27.00 12.70 31.75 13.21
PB220 31.75 12.70 31.75 12.19
PB232 50.80 12.70 31.75 16.26
SENSING SURFACE
SENSING SURFACE PB252 76.20 12.70 31.75 21.59
Application Data Worksheet W
Xs Mx Xs
STROKE LENGTH _____________ FORCES APPLIED W ______
inch (SK ) millimeters TO TOOLING PLATE
ABT

(U.S. Standard) (Metric) APPLIED TO TOOLING PLATE
REQUIRED THRUST FORCE _____ in-lbs N-m
MXP

lbf N
LOAD ______________________ in/sec mm/sec
lb kg
BC2

MOVE TIME sec. _____________
TO TOOLING dz ______ per minute per hour
PLATE CENTER
BC3
inch millimeters
(U.S. Standard) (Metric) Vertical Vertical Down
CENTER
ORIENTATION OF GRAVITY
dx
Horizontal
CENTER dz
BC4
OF GRAVITY dY
dx
dz
dY
z
dY d
dx
LS
Horizontal Side CENTER

OF GRAVITY
CENTER
OF GRAVITY Angled a __________ b ____________
dx Lz Lz
Z Z
dz
MG
dY X Y
SIDE VIEW
FRONT
β VIEW α
OTHER ISSUES:
CC
(i.e. Environment,
Temperature,
PB
ENGR

PB_16 1.800.328.2174
Rod Cylinder Slide Selection Guidelines - PB & PB2 - All Sizes
5
The process of selecting a load bear- larger rod cylinder slide bore size should be DETERMINE INTERNAL
ing actuator for a given application considered. BUMPER CAPACITY
can be complex. It is highly recom- NOTE: Additional force may be required to [POWER-BLOCK2 ONLY]
ABT
mended that you contact Tolomatic obtain the necessary acceleration for vertical • Consult the Load vs Velocity Data Chart for
or a Tolomatic Distributor for assis- or horizontal loads. the Power-Block model selected. The
tance in selecting the best actuator velocities listed on the charts are final or
3
for your application. The following DETERMINE EFFECT OF bumper impact velocities.
overview of the selection guidelines LOAD VS. EXTENDED
MXP
• Cross-reference the final velocity and
are for educational purposes only. LENGTH weight of the load. If the intersection is
• Consult the Max. Load Weight vs Stroke below the diagonal lines, the internal
1
Length Chart for the Tolomatic rod cylinder bumpers on the Power-Block2 may be
used. If the point falls above the dashed
COMPILE APPLICATION slides.
BC2
diagonal line or if the velocity is not known,
REQUIREMENTS • Cross-reference the load weight and the select a larger rod cylinder slide. On high-
To determine the appropriate extended length. If the intersection falls cyclic applications, use of external stops is
Tolomatic rod cylinder slide for an application, below the maximum load line, and if strongly recommended.
compile the following information: moments do not exceed maximum values
6
listed for that model (see Step 4), the rod
BC3
• Available pressure (PSI) cylinder slide will accommodate the
• Weight of load (lbs. or kgs.) application. If the intersection is above the
diagonal line, a larger rod cylinder slide CONSIDER OPTIONS
• Orientation of load (lbs. or kgs.) bore size should be considered. • Switches– dc Reed, Hall-effect, or ac Triac
• Velocity of load (in./sec. or mm/sec.) - (All Models)
BC4
4
• Stroke length (in. or mm) DETERMINE NATURE OF • Bumpers and Stop Collars -
Use the Application Data Worksheet on page
LOAD AND THE EFFECT (Power-Block)
PB_16 OF BENDING MOMENTS • Dual Tooling Plate (Power-Block)
If the rod cylinder slide will guide and support
LS
a load located directly on center of the tooling
plate, bending moments will not be a factor in
SELECT ROD CYLINDER the rod cylinder slide selection.
SLIDE SIZE NOTE: the maximum load weight “W” must
• Consult the Theoretical Force vs. Pressure not exceed the capacity limits of the rod
MG
graphs cylinder slide selected.
NOTE: Graphs for PB are on pages PB_4 to • Bending Moments
5 and PB2 are on pages PB_10 to 11.
For off center or side loads, determine the
• Cross-reference the load force (or load distance from the center of mass of the
CC
weight if force is not known) and the load to the center of the tooling plate. This
available operating pressure. If the measurement is needed to calculate the
intersection falls below the diagonal line, torque for bending moments.
and if moments do not exceed maximum
values listed for that model (see Step 4) the Should the resulting maximum bending
moment exceed figures indicated on the
PB
Tolomatic rod cylinder slide will
accommodate the application. If the chart, a larger rod cylinder slide should be
intersection is above the diagonal line, a considered.
ENGR
ABT

MXP
10-weight lubricant.
BC2
ADJUSTMENT (BC2,
BC3

prelubricated at the factory. To
The factory prelubrication of premature wear.
BC4

Adjust the cushion needles in • Filtration dispense “Food Grade”
the cylinder heads carefully to use of external lubrication.
lubricants to the air supply.
LS

free deceleration for your dry, filtered air in our
particular application. If there products. “Filtered air”
are questions on proper means a level of 10 Micron
supply is kept constant. PG-1 or equivalent.
adjustment, please consult or less. “Dry” means air
MG

CC

Velocity calculations for all rodless final (or impact) velocity. Rodless cylinders
PB
Final (impact)
VELOCITY
ENGR

Start Time End
PB_18 1.800.328.2174
PB & PB2 Service Parts Ordering - ALL Sizes
PB: Power-Block Rod Cylinder Slide Inch (U.S. Standard)
SIZE 06 10 17 20
Reed Switch Magnet1 2506-9003 2510-9003 2517-9003 2520-9003
Hall-effect Switch Magnet1 2506-9004 2510-9004 2517-9004 2520-9004
ABT
BP: Stop Collar / Bumper Kit2 2506-9002 2510-9002 2517-9002 2520-9002
PB2: Power-Block2 Rod Cylinder Slide Inch (U.S. Standard)
MXP
SIZE 08 10 17 20 32 52
TN: T-Nuts 3410-1013 3410-1013 3415-1013 3415-1013 3420-1013 3420-1013
BC2
CONFIG. CODE ORDERING Service Parts Ordering NOTES:
1 One Each
DESCRIPTION CODE
2 Kit includes: 2 (two) stop collars and 2 (two) 1/4” thick polyure-
BC3
Switch Kit, Reed, Form C, 5m BT
thane external bumpers to help absorb impact shock
Switch Kit, Reed, Form C, Male Conn. BM
Switch Kit, Reed, Form A, Male Conn. RM
BC4
NOTE: When kit is ordered female connector & all mounting hardware is
included
LS
MG
of switch required)
Example: SW P B 1 0 RT
(Hardware and Form A Reed switch with 5 meter lead for
0.625" bore PB Rod Cylinder Slide)
AFTER 7-1-1997
CC
Order using PART NUMBER in table above
BEFORE 7-1-1997
If replacing a quick-disconnect switch on an actuator manu- PB
factured BEFORE 7-1-1997 it will also be necessary to replace
or require the female-end coupler with the in-line splice
(see page PB_13)
ENGR
PB & PB2 Ordering - All Sizes
M ODEL , B O R E , S T R OKE , B e ar i n g O P TION S
PB_ 20 SK30 __ DP BP BM2

abt
Model & Mounting SWitches (PB_14)

PB Power Block Rod (Quantity desired follows ordering code)
Cylinder Slide-
inch (U.S. Standard) RM_ Reed Switch (Form A) with 5-meter
MXP
lead/QD (Quick-disconnect)
PB2 Power Block2 Rod RT_ Reed Switch (Form A) with 5-m lead
Cylinder Slide- BM_ Reed Switch (Form C) with 5-meter
inch (U.S. Standard) lead/QD
BT_ Reed Switch (Form C) with 5-m lead
*KM_ Hall-effect Sinking Switch with 5-meter
BC2
PB Bore Size PB2 Bore Size lead/QD

06 0.38” (10mm) 08 0.50” (13mm) *KT_ Hall-effect Sinking Switch w/ 5-m lead
*TM_ Hall-effect Sourcing Switch with
10 0.63” (16mm) 10 0.63” (16mm)
5-meter lead/QD
17 1.13” (27mm) 17 1.13” (27mm) *TT_ Hall-effect Sourcing Switch with
20 1.25” (32mm) 20 1.25” (32mm) 5-meter lead
BC3
32 2.00” (51mm) CM_ TRIAC Switch with 5-meter lead/QD

52 3.25” (83mm) CT_ TRIAC Switch with 5-meter lead
*MDR Dual Magnet (Reed, Hall-effect, Triac)
* Not available for 05 size
Stroke Length
BC4
SK _ _ Enter desired stroke length from the code number

in the table below
Order Code
Stroke PB PB2 STOP COLLARS/BUMPERS
Length 06 10 17 20 08 10 17 20 32 52 (PB ONLY)
LS
0.5" (13mm) 05 05 05 05 BP For Bumpers/Stop Collars

1.0" (25mm) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
1.5" (38mm) 15 15 15 15
2.0" (51mm) 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Dual tooling Plate
3.0" (76mm) 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 (PB only)
MG
4.0" (102mm) 40 40 40 40 40 40 DP For Dual Tooling Plate

5.0" (127mm) 50 50 50 50
6.0" (152mm) 60 60 60 60
T-NUTS (PB2 only)
CC
TN_ For T-Nuts, indicate number

Bearing type required
PB PB2
Composite Bearings LB Linear Bearings
- NO Entry Required CB Composite Bearings
PB

ENGR
PB_20 1.800.328.2174
Engineering Resources
ABT
MXP
BC2
BC3
BC4
LS
MG
CC
PB
ENGR
Contents
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENGR_2
Conversion Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENGR_7
Terms / Conditions of Sale . . . . . . ENGR_9
Glossary
A the use of a different, more steel balls that roll easily in This band cylinder, intro-
complex chemical bath and a race. duced in 1995, incorporates
Acceleration
results in a thicker, rougher, a ball bearing system in the
The change in velocity as a Band Cylinder
extremely brittle coating of carrier for high performance.
function of time. Acceleration A the name for a rodless
abt
aluminum oxide.
usually refers to increasing cylinder using Tolomatic’s bc4 band cylinder
velocity, and deceleration to Auxiliary Carrier unique band retention sys- Introduced in 1996, the BC4
decreasing velocity. An option for band cylinders tem. Band cylinders feature is an economical choice for
or linear slides that increases a central slot. A band-type supported loads.
Accuracy
MXP
the load capacity of the cylinder uses a bracket

A measure of the difference Bending Moment
cylinder as well as increasing directly mounted to the
between expected position Equivalent torque produced
the capacity of bending mo- cylinder piston to transmit
and actual position. by a force displaced by a
ment about the Y axis. Note: force. The bracket passes
known distance from the
Actuator internal cushion will not between two bands which
BC2
carriage.
A mechanism for moving or work when auxiliary carrier then seal the cylinder. The
controlling something indi- ordered without piston, it will inner sealing band creates a Breakaway
rectly instead of by hand. be necessary to add external tight metal to metal seal with The minimum amount of
shock absorbers. the internal diameter of the force or pressure required to
ADJUSTABLE SHOCK
BC3
ABSORBERS cylinder bore. An outer dust cause the initial movement

Average Velocity
Used on BC2 an BC3 band band keeps dust and grit of a given device such as a
Velocity calculations for all
cylinders to decelerate heavy away from the sealing band. cable cylinder piston, a brake
rodless cylinders need to
loads at high velocities. Tolo- Elastomer strips provide a piston, or a rotary actuator
differentiate between final
matic offers light and heavy positive, non-magnetic lock. through a full stroke.
BC4
velocity and average veloc-

duty shock absorbers. The Tolomatic models include:
ity. For example: Cycling British Thermal Unit
sizing and selection software BC2, BC3, BC4 (BTU)
a 100 inch BC3 model in
will automatically choose one direction in one second Bar The amount of heat required
the correct either light duty yields an average velocity The SI Metric unit of pressure to raise the temperature of
LS
or heavy duty as required. of 100 inches per second. equal to one million Dynes one pound of water by one
When shock absorbers are To properly determine the per square centimeter. The degree Fahrenheit.
used on the cylinder internal inertia forces for cushion- bar is used to measure both Buna-N
cushions are not operational. ing, it is important to know pneumatic and hydraulic A widely used copolymer
Note: Shock absorber is most
MG
the final (or impact) velocity. pressure. One Bar is equal to (artificial rubber) used for
effective when stopping load Rodless cylinders acceler- 14.5038 pounds per square making seals. Buna-N seals
at its center of gravity. ate and decelerate at each inch. It is also nearly equiva- should never be used with
Ambient Temperature end of the stroke. Therefore lent to one atmosphere of automotive brake fluid.
The temperature of the this acceleration must be pressure.
CC
cooling medium, usually air, considered. If final velocity C

Base Mount
immediately surrounding the cannot be calculated directly,
Base mounting linear slides Cable
motor or another device. a reasonable guideline is to
may be accomplished by A wire rope made of twisted
use 2X average velocity.
Anodizing fastening directly to “T” slot strands of material. In the
PB
Protective treatment for alu- Axial Loading nuts provided in the base of case of cable cylinders,
minum that involves subject- A load with a force directed the slide or by using the base cables are made of strands
ing the metal to electrolytic along an axis, such as a mounting. of galvanized steel which are
action in a chemical bath, shaft. twisted together in bundles
BC2 BAND CYLINDER
ENGR
to create a protective film of The second generation of of seven strands each. These
aluminum oxide with a very B bundles, in turn, are twisted
the original band cylinder,
smooth finish. The process Ball Bearing introduced in 1986. around each other. The
is similar to that of hardcoat- A bearing where the journal resulting cable is coated with
ing, but the latter involves turns upon loose, hardened BC3 BAND CYLINDER an extruded nylon covering.
ENGR_2 1.800.328.2174
Glossary
Cable Assembly Coefficient of Friction Cycle stroke of cable cylinders.
A sub-assembly consisting of The measurement of fric- 1) A sequence of operations
Dual 180 Carrier
the cable ferrules, terminals tion of one object sliding that is repeated regularly.
Option for the BC3 that gives
and gland seals. across another. Symbolized 2) The time it takes for one
greater bending moments
ABT
by the Greek letter Mu (m) such sequence to occur.
Cable Cylinder without using a larger actua-
it is defined as the tangent
A rodless cylinder using Cycle Rate tor.
of the angle of repose of a
cables to transmit force from The total number of times
static body. The coefficient is Dual Magnet
a piston. a complete motion is made
expressed in decimal values Option for BC2 with two
MXP
from start and return to start
Cable Cylinder Repair Kit (clean iron on clean iron is magnets, one on each side of
in a specific period of time.
A sub-assembly consisting 1.0, while metal on solid the carrier.
of two cable assemblies and rubber may range from 1.0
D Dust Band
the internal seals (two piston up to 4.0). When objects are
Part of Tolomatic’s unique
BC2
seals, two cushion seals and wet, the coefficient of friction Dead length
Dead length is the part of band retention system, the
two tube-sealing O-rings) decreases.
the band cylinder or linear external band.
required to keep a cable
Configurator slide required for mounting
cylinder operational.
Name given to the software and mechanisms. The overall
E
BC3
Caliper Disc Brake that uses the configuration length of a band cylinder External Cushions
A form of brake, used to re- string to give instructions or linear slide is the stroke Shock absorbers of some
tard, stop or hold action. The to the factory with correct length plus the dead length. sort used to decelerate the
brake is called a “caliper” specifications to create your load on a rodless cylinder in
because it is mounted over built-to-order actuator. Deceleration
BC4
cases where the load is too
a rotating disc to which it The opposite of acceleration.
CONFIGURATOR STRING heavy to make use of the cyl-
applies a friction member Deceleration means dimin-
A series of code letters and inder’s internal cushions.
(puck) to slow, stop or hold ished velocity or slowing
numbers that Tolomatic down. External Stops
the disc.
uses to create built-to-order Stops used on the outside of
LS
Carrier actuators. Deflection
a vane-type rotary actuator
Attached to band cylinder or A measurement of the
Constraint to limit the rotation of the
linear slide with bearing sys- amount of bend under the
Guided and supported in a unit short of the unit’s full
tem the carrier supports and weight of a load, such as that
particular direction, through cycle.
MG
moves the load. Tolomatic to which a load-supporting
the use of an external guid- rod or cable is subject.
options include: Auxiliary F
ance and bearing system.
carrier, Dual 180 carrier (BC3 Die-Cast
only), Long Carrier (BC4 Cushion Final Velocity
A metal-forming process Velocity calculations for all
only). A means of slowing down similar to injection-molding
CC
a cylinder piston at the end rodless cylinders need to
CENTER of GRAVITY for plastic. In Die-Casting, differentiate between final
of its stroke by using an molten metal (usually alumi-
(Center of Mass) The point at velocity and average veloc-
exhaust port with an orifice num) is injected into a mold
which the entire weight of a ity. For example: Cycling
small enough to restrict the under pressure.
body may be considered as a 100 inch BC3 model in
PB
velocity at which the pres-
concentrated so that if sup- Double-Acting Cable one direction in one second
sure fluid is exhausted.
ported at this point the body Cylinder yields an average velocity
would remain in equilibrium CUSTOM PRODUCTS Cable cylinder that applies of 100 inches per second.
in any position. These products don’t resem- equal force in two directions. To properly determine the
ENGR
ble any of the products seen inertia forces for cushion-

Clevis Double-Purchase cable
in the Tolomatic catalogs. ing, it is important to know
The name given to the Cylinder
Tell us your performance the final (or impact) velocity.
U-shaped cable connecting Cable cylinder that uses
requirements, we can build a Rodless cylinders acceler-
bracket on a Tolomatic cable additional cable and pulleys
custom product for you. ate and decelerate at each
cylinder. to double the velocity and
Glossary
end of the stroke. Therefore Head torque between two other between the piston and mov-
this acceleration must be A metal component mounted machine parts. ing carrier.
considered. If final velocity at each end of a rodless
Keyway Magnetic Coupling Force
cannot be calculated directly, pneumatic cylinder. With a
An axially-located groove in The force created between
abt
a reasonable guideline is to cable cylinder, the head has

the length of a shaft along the piston magnets and the
use 2X average velocity. a pulley, ports, mounting
which a key may be located. moving carrier (measured in
holes and provides sealing.
Floating Mount (band pounds).
cylinders, Magnetically On a Band Cylinder, the head Kinetic Energy
coupled Cylinders) provides tube sealing, fluid The ability to do work based Modified Standard Prod-
MXP
An option for use in applica- ports and mounting holes. on motion. It is found by ucts
tions where the load is not multiplying half the mass by Tolomatic can easily accom-
Hub modate your special needs.
guided and supported by the the square of the velocity.
A means of attaching a Our standard products are
Tolomatic actuator, or when
sprocket, pulley or disc to a often customized with extra
L
BC2
compensating for nonparal-

shaft. mounting holes, different
lelism. Limit Switch materials and other requests.
Foot Mount I A switch that is actuated This can often be done within
A mounting plate that at- by some part or motion of our normal 5 day production
Inch-Pound
a machine or equipment to
BC3
taches a cylinder head to A unit of measure of torque. time. We welcome modifica-

mount the cylinder to a flat alter the electrical circuit as- tions as well as completely
It is derived from a given
surface at a 90° angle. sociated with it. new custom products.
force in pounds acting at
Force a given radius in inches Linear Slide
N
BC4
An agency or influence that if (pounds multiplied by inches A rodless cylinder using the
applied to a free body results = inch-pounds). An inch- same unique band retention Needle Bearing
chiefly in an acceleration of pound is 1/12th of a foot- system as the band cylinder. A type of roller bearing where
the body and sometimes in pound. Inch-pounds may be The Linear Slide uses a wider the journal turns on small-
elastic deformation and other converted to the SI Metric extrusion with steel shafts diameter, hardened needle-
LS
effects. equivalent of Newton-meters and bearings for additional like rollers which roll easily in
by multiplying them by load support. Tolomatic a metal race.
4 PORTED HEAD 0.1129848. Newton-meters model: LS
The BC2 features standard 3 may be converted to inch-
Load O
ported heads but can be or- pounds by multiplying them
MG
dered with an additional 4th A mass or weight supported O-Ring

by 8.850748.
port in the underside of the by the carrier (rodless cyl- A ring of synthetic rubber
head for additional mounting Inertia inders) or tooling plate (rod with a circular cross-section,
flexibility. A measure of an object’s cylinder slides). used as a gasket or seal.
resistance to a change
CC
Friction Long Carrier

in velocity. The larger an P
Resistance to relative mo- An option available for the
object’s inertia, the larger the
tion between two bodies in torque required to accelerate
BC4 the long carrier increas- Parallel Port
contact, such as steel sliding es the My and Mz moment Metric versions of the BC2,
or decelerate it. Inertia is a
load capacity. It also gives a BC3, BC4 and LS have the
PB
on steel. function of an object’s mass

larger mounting surface and choice of parallel port and
and shape.
H virtually eliminates chatter taper port.
K for vertical cantilever loads.
Hall-effect D.C. Switch Piston
ENGR
A magnetically-controlled Key M A sliding component moved

transistor switch controlling A demountable machine part, by fluid pressure. It usu-
DC power. It has no mov- Magnetically Coupled ally consists of a short,
which, when assembled into Actuator
ing parts and theoretically a keyseat, provides a posi- solid metal cylinder within a
unlimited contact life. Rodless cylinder and slides cylindrical vessel in which it
tive means for transmitting featuring a magnetic couple moves back and forth.
ENGR_4 1.800.328.2174
Glossary
Port generated by the cylinder’s tached to its piston to trans- Shock Absorbers
In pneumatic units, the area piston. mit force. Tolomatic models A self contained hydraulic
to make connection to air include: RCS and PB2. device commonly used on
lines that supply power to the Q rodless cylinders, rodless
Rodless Cylinder
ABT
actuator. In electrical units: Quad Ring slides and rod cylinder slides
An actuator that contains
a connecting unit between a A sealing ring of synthetic to decelerate heavy loads at
the stroke within the cylin-
data link and a device. rubber which has 4 sealing high velocities.
der itself. Tolomatic models
Pounds Per Square Inch lobes and is capable of seal- include: BC2, BC3, BC4, LS, Signal
or PSI
MXP
ing in two directions. MG, MGS, CC, SA, DP, and TC. The event, phenomenon, or
A measurement of pressure electrical quantity that con-
in the U.S. customary sys- R Roller Bearing
veys information from one
tem. By way of comparison, An anti-friction device
Reed Switch point to another.
the weight of the atmosphere consisting of a journal which
Tolomatic’s Form A Reed
BC2
(one atmosphere) is 14.7 rests on free-rolling, hard- Single-Acting Cable
Switch is an LED-equipped ened cylinders in a race. Cylinder
pounds per square inch,
0.5 ampere switch consist- Cable cylinder that applies
at sea level. It is used to
ing of ferromagnetic blades S force in one direction and
express pressure in both
brought into contact when a uses gravity (generally) to
pneumatic and hydraulic-
magnet passes nearby. Reed Schematic
BC3
return to home position.
powered systems. In the SI
switches are used for signal- A diagram of a circuit in
Metric system, pressure is which symbols illustrate Single End Porting
ling position only.
measured in Bars. To covert circuit components. Single end porting simplifies
PSI to Bars, take the PSI Relative Humidity air hook up, allows running
Seal
BC4
figure and multiply it by A ratio that indicates the air lines to just one end of
0.0689476. amount of water vapor in the An object used to retain air the actuator. Unless other-
air. It is usually expressed as pressure, water, hydraulic wise specified single end
Pressure fluid or oil in a vessel. In the
a percentage. At any tem- porting is factory installed on
The force or thrust exerted Tolomatic product line, seals
perature, it is the amount of the right side of the actuator.
LS
over a surface divided by
water vapor in the air, divided are made of an elastomer, Available for the BC3 and
its area. In the U.S. custom-
by the amount that would be which is any of a variety of BC4.
ary system, pressure is synthetic rubber compounds.
present at saturation.
expressed as Pounds per Snap-In Seal®
Square Inch (PSI). In the SI RMS (Root Mean Square) Sealing Band A unique method of install-
MG
Metric system, it is ex- An industry-accepted The stainless steel strap ing seals in cable cylinder
pressed in Bars. standard for measuring the which is part of Tolomatic’s heads without using tools.
smoothness of a surface fin- unique band retention sys- It includes a plastic washer,
Proximity Sensor tem, the internal band.
ish. Under a microscope, all which, when pulled into a
An LED-equipped device for
CC
surface finishes have peaks Shielding cable cylinder head cable
sensing end-of-stroke on cyl-
and valleys. The more peaks The practice of confining the port, snaps into a groove and
inder slides. Proximity sen-
and valleys, the rougher electrical field around a con- holds the seal arrangement
sors supply either a sourcing
the finish and the higher the ductor to the primary insula- in place.
signal or a sinking signal to
RMS value. The smaller the tion of the cable by putting
PB
a device such as a program- Solid State Devices
RMS number, the smoother a conducting layer over and/ Electronic components that
mable logic controller.
the finish. or under the cable insula- control electron flow through
Pulley tion. (External shielding is a
Rockwell solid materials (e.g., transis-
A sheave or small wheel with conducting layer on the out-
ENGR
Industry-accepted standard tors, diodes, or integrated

a grooved rim used with a side of the cable insulation.
for definition of hardness. circuits).
cable cylinder to change the Strand or internal shielding is
direction and point of ap- Rod Cylinder a conducting layer over the Stroke length
plication of the pulling force A cylinder using a rod at- wire insulation.) Stroke length is the distance
Glossary
that the carrier and its load BC3 and BC4 the T-Nuts, that ac relays and solenoids if a VITON®
will move on the band cylin- are needed for the brackets, protection circuit is used and A DuPont Chemical Co.
der or linear slide. must also be ordered. if current and voltage limits trademark for a fluorocarbon
are observed. rubber used in high tempera-
Surge Taper Port
ture applications. At Tolomat-
abt
A transient variation in the Metric versions of the BC2, Tube Deflection

ic, Viton® is used for seals in
current or potential at a point BC3, BC4 and LS have the Due to the nature of loads
high temperature situations
in the circuit. choice of parallel port and and aluminum extrusions
and for brakes designed to
taper port. tube deflection will occur
Switch Magnets be operated with non-flam-
MXP
if cylinder (linear slide) is

Located on the carrier or pis- Tensile Strength mable hydraulic fluids such
supported only on the ends
ton magnets are needed for The greatest longitudinal as phosphate-ester.
without tube supports at rec-
switches to sense position stress a substance can bear
ommended intervals along Volt
of carrier. On the BC3 and without permanent deforma-
length of cylinder. Unit of electromotive force. It
BC2
BC4 the switch magnet is a tion.

is the difference of potential
standard feature, attached to Tube Supports
Terminal required to make a current of
the piston. On the BC2 and Optional accessory for band
A threaded device attached one ampere flow through a
LS the switch magnet is only cylinders and linear slides
to the end of a cable cylinder resistance of one ohm.
included if switch is ordered. (base mount) to prevent tube
BC3
assembly for convenience

Magnets are easily inserted deflection. Voltage
in making connections and
into carrier for field retrofit- The term most often used
adjustments. One terminal is
ting. U in place of electromotive
attached to the piston, while
U-Cup force, potential, potential
SWITCH MAGNETS (DUAL) the other is attached to the
BC4
A synthetic rubber compo- difference, or voltage drop.

The BC2 optionally can have bracket (clevis).
nent with lips along its inner It describes the electric
dual switch magnets, one on
Tolerance and outer circumferences pressure that exists between
each side of the carrier.
A specified allowance for giving a cross-section the two points and is capable of
Switches error from a desired or mea- appearance of the letter producing a flow or cur-
LS
For signaling position sured quantity. “U”. When under pressure, rent when a closed circuit is
Tolomatic has 5 different the lips flare out, providing connected between the two
Torque
switches available. These a tight seal in one direction points.
A force that produces
switches are available with and minimal drag from the
rotation. A turning or twist- Voltage Rating
a 5 meter lead, or with a
MG
ing force. (From the Latin non-pressurized side. The maximum voltage at
quick-disconnect connector
torquere - to twist. Also the Units which a given device may
and 5 meter lead.
root word for torture.) U.S. customary: A system of be safely maintained during
System weights and measures based continuous use in a normal
Track Cable Cylinder
A collection of units com- manner. It is also called
CC
A cable cylinder with hard- on the pound and inches.

bined to work as a larger Metric: A decimal system of working voltage.
ened ground shafts and a
integrated unit having the weights and measures based
guided carrier within linear W
capabilities of all of the sepa- on the kilogram and meter.
bearings, giving the cylinder
rate units. Watt
the ability to guide and sup-
PB
port moderate work loads. V A unit of power or a rate of

T doing work. The power dissi-
Triac ac Reed Switch Value
T-Nuts A number that represents a pated by a one ohm resistor
For intermediate support, These switches are designed with one ampere of current is
ENGR
for signaling end-of-stroke computed or assigned quan-

tube support brackets can tity; or, a number contained one watt.
be mounted to the BC2, BC3, position to devices such as
programmable controllers. in a data table or data file
and BC4 models. For the word.
They can be used to operate
ENGR_6 1.800.328.2174
Conversion Tables
To convert from A to B, multiply by entry in table
B B
Length Mass
in ft yd mm cm m gm kg slug lb(m) oz(m)
in 1 0.0833 0.028 25.4 2.54 0.0254 gm 1 0.001 6.852 x 10-5 2.205 x 10-3 0.03527
ABT
ft 12 1 0.333 304.8 30.48 0.3048 kg 1000 1 6.852 x 10-2 2.205 35.274
A
yd 36 3 1 914.4 91.44 0.914 slug 14590 14.59 1 32.2 514.72
A
mm 0.03937 0.00328 0.00109 1 0.1 0.001 lb(m) 453.6 0.45359 0.0311 1 16

cm 0.3937 0.03281 0.0109 10 1 0.01 oz(m) 28.35 0.02835 1.94 x 10-3 0.0625 1
MXP
m 39.37 3.281 1.09 1000 100 1
BC2
B
Pressure lbs/sqr ft lbs/sqr in N/sqr m N/sqr mm

atm bar millibar (PSF) (PSI) (NSM) (NSMM)
Abbreviated terms
atm 1 1.01325 1013.25 2,116.22 14.6454 101,325 0.101325
bar 0.986923 1 1000 2088.54 14.5037 100,000 0.1
atm = atmosphere (STD)
BC3
millibar 0.000987 0.001 1 2.08854 0.014504 100 0.0001 C = Celsius
cm = centimeter
A
PSF 0.000473 0.000479 0.478803 1 0.006944 47.88 0.000048

PSI 0.068046 0.068948 68.94757 144 1 6,894.757 0.006895 F = Fahrenheit
BC4
NSM 0.00001 0.00001 0.01 0.020885 0.000145 1 0.000001 ft = foot
NSMM 98,692 10 10,000 20885.43 145.0377 1,000,000 1 g = gravity
gm = gram
gm(f) = gram force
LS
B hp = horse power
Force
lb(f) N dyne oz(f) kg(f) gm(f) in = inch
lb(f) 1 4.4482 4.448 x 105 16 0.45359 453.6 kg = kilogram
N 0.22481 1 100,000 3.5967 0.10197 101.97
MG
kg(f) = kilogram force
dyne 2.248 x 10-6 0.00001 1 3.59 x 10-5 1.02 x 10-6 0.00102
kw = Kilowatt
A
oz(f) 0.0625 0.27801 2.78 x 104 1 0.02835 28.35

lb(f) = pound force
kg(f) 2.205 9.80665 980,665 35.274 1 1000
gm(f) 2.205 x 10-3 0.0098 980.665 0.03527 0.001 1
lb(m) = pound mass
CC
min = minute
mm = millimeter
m = meter
B
PB
N = Newton
Power hp hp
Watts KW (US customary) (Metric) ft-lb/s in-lb/s oz(f) = ounce force
Watts 1 1x 10-3 1.34 x 10-3 1.36 x 10-3 0.74 8.88 oz(m) = ounce mass
kw 1000 1 1.34 1.36 738 8880 rad = radians
ENGR
hp
(US customary)
746 0.746 1 1.01 550 6600 rpm = revs per minute
A
hp (Metric) 736 0.736 0.986 1 543 6516 rps = revs per second
ft-lb/s 1.36 1.36 x 10-3 1.82 x 10-3 1.84 x 10-3 1 12 s = seconds
in-lb/s 0.113 1.13 x 10-4 1.52 x 10-4 1.53 x 10-4 8.3 x 10-2 1 sqr = square
Conversion Tables
To convert from A to B, multiply by entry in table
B
Torque
dyne-cm gm-cm oz-in kg-cm lb-in N-m lb/ft kg/m
dyne-cm 1 1.019 x 10-2 1.416 x 10-5 1.0197 x 10-6 8.850 x 10-7 10-7 7.375 x 10-6 1.019 x 10-6
abt
gm-cm 980.665 1 1.388 x 10-2 .001 8.679 x 10-4 9.806 x 10-5 7.233 x 10-5 10-5
oz-in 7.061 x 104 72.007 1 7.200 x 10-2 6.25 x 10-2 7.061 x 10-3 5.208 x 10-3 7.200 x 10-4
kg-cm 9.806 x 105 1000 13.877 1 0.8679 9.806 x 10-2 7.233 x 10-2 0.001
A
lb-in 1.129 x 106 1.152 x 103 16 1.152 1 0.112 8.333 x 10-2 1.152 x 10-2
MXP
N-m 107 1.019 x 104 141.612 10.197 8.85 1 0.737 0.102

lb-ft 1.355 x 107 1.382 x 104 192 13.825 12 1.355 1 0.138
kg-m 9.806 x 107 105 1.388 x 103 100 86.796 9.806 7.233 1
BC2
Inertia note: Mass inertia = wt. inertia B

g
(Rotary) lb-ft-s2 or
gm-cm2 oz-in2 gm-cm-s2 kg-cm2 lb-in2 oz-in-s2 lb-ft2 kg-cm-s2 lb-in-s2 slug-ft-s2
BC3
gm-cm2 1 5.46 x 10-2 1.01 x 10-3 38,992 3.417 x 10-4 1.41 x 10-5 2.37 x 10-6 1.01 x 10-4 8.85 x 10-7 7.37 x 10-4
oz-in2 182.9 1 0.186 0.182 0.0625 2.59 x 10-2 4.34 x 10-4 1.86 x 10-4 1.61 x 10-4 1.34 x 10-5
gm-cm-s2 980.6 5.36 1 0.9806 0.335 1.38 x 10-2 2.32 x 10-3 38,992 8.67 x 10-4 7.23 x 10-5
kg-cm2 1,000 5.46 1.019 1 0.3417 1.41 x 10-2 2.37 x 10-3 1.019 x 10-3 8.85 x 10-4 7.37 x 10-5
BC4
lb-in2 2.92 x 103 16 2.984 2.925 1 4.14 x 10-2 6.94 x 10-3 2.96 x 10-3 2.59 x 10-3 2.15 x 10-4
A
oz-in-s2 7.06 x 104 386.08 72 70.615 24.13 1 0.1675 7.20 x 10-2 6.25 x 10-2 5.20 x 10-3
lb-ft2 4.21 x 105 2,304 429.71 421.4 144 5.967 1 0.4297 0.3729 3.10 x 10-2
kg-cm-s2 9.8 x 105 5.36 x 103 1,000 980.66 335.1 13.887 2.327 1 0.8679 7.23 x 10-2
LS
lb-in-s2 1.129 x 104 6.177 x 103 1.152 x 103 1.129 x 103 386.08 16 2.681 1.152 1 8.33 x 10-2
lb-ft-s2 1.355 x 107 7.41 x 104 1.38 x 104 1.35 x 104 4.63 x 103 192 32.17 13.825 12 1
MG
Angular B Temperature
Velocity deg/s rad/s rpm rps °F = (1.8 x °C) + 32
deg/s 1 1.75 x 10-2 0.167 2.78 x 10-3 °C = .555 x (°F -32)
rad/s 57.3 1 9.55 0.159
CC
rpm 6 0.105 1 1.67 x 10-2

rps 360 6.28 60 1
PB
Linear B Gravity
Velocity in/min ft/min in/sec ft/sec mm/sec m/sec (Acceleration Constant)
in/min 1 0.0833 0.0167 1.39 x 10-3 0.42 4.2 x 10-4 g = 386 in/sec2 = 32.2 ft/sec2 = 9.8 m/sec2
ENGR
ft/min 12 1 0.2 0.0167 5.08 5.08 x 10-3

in/sec 60 5 1 0.083 25.4 0.0254
A
ft/sec 720 60 12 1 304.8 0.3048

cm/sec 23.62 1.97 0.3937 0.0328 10 0.01
m/sec 2362.2 196.9 39.37 3.281 1000 1
ENGR_8 1.800.328.2174
Terms / Conditions of Sale
1. ORDER ACCEPTANCE. All orders ment. Any addition to an out- Claims for shortages or other ONE YEAR FROM DATE OF
or services are subject to accep- standing order will be accepted at errors must be made, in writing, SHIPMENT BY Tolomatic, Inc. IF
tance in Minnesota by the written prices in effect when the addition within ten (10) days to Tolomatic, WITHIN SUCH PERIOD ANY SUCH
approval of an authorized official of is made. Inc. and any additional expense PRODUCT SHALL BE PROVED TO
Tolomatic, Inc. Any such order shall of the method or route of ship- Tolomatic, Inc.’s SATISFACTION TO
4. MINIMUM BILLING. Orders
ABT
be subject to these Terms and ment specified by Purchaser shall BE SO DEFECTIVE, SUCH
Conditions of Sale, and acceptance amounting to less than $35.00 net be borne by the Purchaser. PRODUCT SHALL EITHER BE
shall be conditioned on Purchaser’s will be billed at $35.00 REPAIRED OR REPLACED AT
assent to such conditions. 9. SHIPPING SCHEDULES. All quot- Tolomatic, Inc.’s OPTION.
5. TAXES. Any Manufacturer’s Tax, ed shipping schedules are approxi-
Purchaser’s assent shall be deemed Retailers Occupation Tax, Use Tax,
given unless Purchaser shall mate and will depend upon prompt THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT APPLY:
Sales Tax, Excise Tax, Duty, receipt from Purchaser of confirming
expressly notify Tolomatic, Inc. in
MXP
Customer, Inspection or Testing Fee, copy of Purchase Order. Dimensional a.
TO PRODUCT NOT
writing to the contrary within five (5) MANUFACTURED BY Tolomatic,
days after receipt of acknowledg- or any other tax, fee or charge of any drawings and specifications submit-
nature whatsoever, imposed by any ted by Tolomatic, Inc. to Purchaser Inc. WITH RESPECT TO PRODUCT
ment to confirmation of an order. NOT MANUFACTURED BY
government authority, on or mea- for approval must be returned to
2. CANCELLATION AND CHANGES. No sured by any transactions between Tolomatic, Inc. within 10 working Tolomatic, Inc. THE WARRANTY
order accepted by Tolomatic, Inc. may Tolomatic, Inc. and Purchaser shall days, with approval granted, and any OBLIGATIONS OF Tolomatic, Inc.
be modified in any manner by Purchaser be paid by the Purchaser in addition exceptions noted, in order to avoid SHALL IN ALL RESPECTS
BC2
unless agreed to in writing, by an autho- to the prices quoted or involved. In delay in manufacturing schedules. CONFORM AND BE LIMITED TO
rized official of Tolomatic, Inc. Order the event Tolomatic, Inc. shall be THE WARRANTY ACTUALLY
cancellations, including reductions to required to pay any such tax, fee or Orders which include penalty EXTENDED TO Tolomatic, Inc. BY
order quantities, and changes shall be charge, Purchaser shall reimburse clauses for failure to meet shipping ITS SUPPLIER.
governed by the following: therefore. schedules will not be acceptable,
except in those cases specifically b. TO PRODUCT WHICH SHALL HAVE
a. Any standard product order 6. TERMS OF PAYMENT. Net BEEN REPAIRED OR ALTERED BY
BC3
approved in writing by the General
scheduled for shipment within five invoice amount is due within 30 Manager of Tolomatic, Inc. PARTIES OTHER THAN Tolomatic,
(5) working days of purchaser’s days from date of invoice subject Inc. SO AS, IN Tolomatic, Inc.’s
request to cancel or modify will be to credit approval. A 2% per month Tolomatic, Inc. shall not be liable for JUDGMENT, TO AFFECT THE SAME
shipped as previously acknowl- service charge shall apply to all damage as a result of any delay due ADVERSELY, OR
edged and purchaser agrees to invoices not paid within 30 days. to any cause beyond Tolomatic,
Inc.’s reasonable control, including, c.
TO PRODUCT WHICH SHALL
accept shipment and payment All clerical errors are subject to HAVE BEEN SUBJECT TO
BC4
responsibility, in full, at the price correction. Any invoice in not paid without limitation, an Act of Nature;
NEGLIGENCE, ACCIDENT, OR
agreed upon. within 60 days will subject that act of Purchaser; embargo, or other
DAMAGE BY CIRCUMSTANCES
account to an immediate shipping government act, regulation or
b. “Customer Special” orders sched- BEYOND THE CONTROL OF
hold. request; fire; accident; strike; slow
uled for shipment within twenty Tolomatic, Inc. OR TO IMPROPER
down; war; riot; flood; delay in trans-
(20) working days of purchaser’s OPERATION MAINTENANCE OR
7. F.0.B. POINT. All sales are F.0.B. portation; and inability to obtain nec-
request to cancel or modify will be STORAGE, OR TO OTHER THAN
Tolomatic, Inc.’s facility in essary labor, materials or manufac-
NORMAL USE AND SERVICE.
LS
shipped as previously acknowl- Hamel, Minnesota, unless quot- turing facilities. In the event of any
edged and purchaser agrees to ed otherwise. such delay, the date of delivery shall THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES
accept shipment and payment be extended for a period equal to ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF
responsibility, in full, at the price 8. DELIVERY. Delivery of product(s) the time loss by reason of the delay. ALL OTHER EXPRESS AND
agreed upon. by Tolomatic, Inc. to a carrier shall The acceptance of the product IMPLIED WARRANTIES
constitute delivery to Purchaser, when delivered shall constitute a WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT
c. All work in connection with
and regardless of freight payment,
MG
“Customer Special” orders, waiver of all claims for damages NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED
not covered under Paragraph title and all risk or loss or damage caused by any such delays. WARRANTIES OF
b, will be stopped immediately in transit shall pass to Purchaser at MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
that time. 10. RETURN OF PRODUCT. No FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
upon notification, and pur- product may be returned without
chaser agrees to reimburse Should shipment be held beyond Tolomatic, Inc. SHALL NOT BE
first obtaining a Return Goods SUBJECT TO ANY OTHER
Tolomatic, Inc. for all work-in- scheduled date, upon request of Authorization form and confirming
process and any materials or Purchaser, product will be billed OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES
CC
memorandum from Tolomatic, Inc. WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO
supplies used, or for which and Purchaser agrees to accept Product, if accepted for credit, PRODUCT MANUFACTURED OR
commitments have been made any charges for warehousing, shall be subject to a minimum SUPPLIED BY Tolomatic, Inc. OR
by Tolomatic, Inc. in connec- trucking and other expenses as service charge of 35% of the SERVICE RENDERED BY IT.
tion therewith. may be incident to such delay. invoice price and all transportation
3. QUOTATIONS AND PRICES. charges shall be prepaid by the 12. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE.
Great care is taken by Tolomatic,
Written quotations automatically Purchaser; however, assembled Tolomatic, Inc. shall not, under any
PB
Inc. in crating its product.
expire 30 calendar days from the products classified as “special,” circumstances, be liable for conse-
Tolomatic, Inc. cannot be held such as Cable Cylinders and other
date issued unless terminated quential damages.
responsible for breakage after hav- products which have been modi-
sooner by written notice. (Verbal ing received “In Good Order”
quotations expire, unless accept- fied or built as “Customer 13. SERVICE CHARGES. Should the
receipts from the transporting car- Specials,” are not returnable to Purchaser request the service of any
ed in writing, the same day.)
rier. All claims for loss and damage Tolomatic, Inc. erector, demonstrator or service
ENGR
All published prices and discounts must be made by Purchaser to the man (except as specifically provided
are subject to change without carrier within 14 days from receipt 11. WARRANTY. Tolomatic, Inc., for and included in the price of the
notice. In the event of a net price of goods. Tolomatic, Inc. will assist WARRANTS PRODUCT product) such service will be ren-
change, the price of product(s) on insofar as practical in securing sat- MANUFACTURED BY IT TO BE FREE dered at the rate outlined in the
order will be the price in effect on isfactory adjustment of such claims FROM DEFECTS IN MATERIAL AND schedule of field service charges in
the date of order acknowledg- wherever possible. WORKMANSHIP FOR A PERIOD OF effect at the date of request.
The Tolomatic Difference Expect More From the Industry Leader:
INNOVATIVE FAST ACTUATOR YOUR MOTOR LIBRARY SUPERIOR

PRODUCTS DELIVERY SIZING HERE SERVICE
Tolomatic designs The fastest delivery Online sizing that Match your motor Easy to access CAD Our people make
and builds the of catalog products... is easy to use, with compatible files available in the difference!
best standard Electric products accurate and always mounting plates the most popular Expect prompt,
products, modified are built-to-order up-to-date. Find a that ship with any formats to place courteous replies
products & unique in 15 or 20 days; Tolomatic electric Tolomatic electric directly into your to all of your
custom products Pneumatic & Power actuator to meet actuator. assembly. application and
for your challenging Transmission your requirements. product questions.
applications. products in 5 days.
Also Consider These Other Tolomatic Products:

Electric Products
Rod & Guided Rod Style Actuators,
High Thrust Actuators, Screw & Belt
Drive Rodless Actuators, Motors,
Drives and Controllers
“Foldout” Brochure #9900-9074
Pneumatic Products
Rodless Cylinders: Band Cylinders,
Cable Cylinders, Magnetically
Coupled Cylinders/Slides; Guided Power Transmission Products
Rod Cylinder Slides Gearboxes: Float-A-Shaft®, Slide-Rite®;
“Foldout” Brochure #9900-9075 Disc Cone Clutch; Caliper Disc Brakes
“Foldout” Brochure #9900-9076
Certified site: Hamel, MN
USA CHINA EUROPE

3800 County Road 116 Tolomatic Automation Products Tolomatic Europe GmbH
Hamel, MN 55340, USA (Suzhou) Co. Ltd. Elisabethenstr. 4 & 8
Phone: (763) 478-8000 (ServoWeld® inquiries only) D-65428 Rüsselsheim
Fax: (763) 478-8080 No. 60 Chuangye Street, Building 2 Germany
Huqiu District, SND Suzhou
Toll-Free: 1-800-328-2174 Phone: +49 6142 17604-0
Jiangsu 215011 - P.R. China
sales@tolomatic.com EuropeSales@tolomatic.com
www.tolomatic.com Phone: +86 (512) 6750-8506
Fax: +86 (512) 6750-8507
ServoWeldChina@tolomatic.com
All brand and product names are trademarks or registered appear in this document. Tolomatic reserves the right to change
trademarks of their respective owners. Information in this docu- the design or operation of the equipment described herein and
ment is believed accurate at time of printing. However, Tolomatic any associated motion products without notice. Information in
assumes no responsibility for its use or for any errors that may this document is subject to change without notice.
Visit www.tolomatic.com for the most up-to-date technical information
© 2019 Tolomatic 201902190750 LITERATURE NUMBER: 9900-4000_11

Catalogo Tolomatic

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Catalogo Tolomatic

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Pneumatic Products

Single End Porting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_18

S1-1Solid Bearing Features . . . . . . . . . MXP_4

Mxp band cylinder

Shock Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_21

Selection .Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_24

Application Data Worksheet . . . . . . . BC3_23

Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC3_24

N Moment and Load Capacity . . . . MXP_10

S Moment and Load Capacity . . . . . MXP_12

contents P Moment and Load Capacity . . . . MXP_14

Load Deflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_16

BC4 BAND CYLINDER

S Solid Bearing Dimensions . . . . MXP_26

Cushion & Shock Absorber . . . . . . . MXP_18

Tube Clamp Requirements . . . . . . . MXP_19

N Internal Bearing Dimensions . . . . MXP_21 BC406 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_6

Adjustment Procedures . . . . . . . . . . MXP_40 rodless CylInder Auxiliary Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_16

Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MXP_41

Single End Porting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_18

Foot Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_19

Tube Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_20

BC2 BAND CYLINDER Contents

Floating Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_21

Shock Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_24

Carrier Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_5

Application Data Worksheet . . . . . . . BC4_26

BC2 Solid Bearing

Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_27

Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_28

Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC4_29

Foot Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_17

Auxiliary .Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_14

Floating Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_18

Shock Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BC2_22

Proximity Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_13

Shock Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_14

CC Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . CC_30

Application Data Worksheet . . . . . LS_15

CC/Brake Selection Guidelines . . . CC_32

Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS_16

TC Selection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . CC_35

Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . BC4_32 CC Application Guidelines . . . . . . . CC_36

Mag Coupled Cylinder & Slide

PB, PB2 Rod cylindeR

MG Specs, Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . MG_5

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MG_2 contentS

PB2 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_10

MG .Foot .Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MG_8 PB Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_6

MGS Proximity Sensor . . . . . . . . MG_12

MGS .Shock .Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . MG_13 PB2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_11

PB2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_11

MGS Shock Absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . MG_13

PB2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PB_12

Application Data Worksheet . . . . . MG_15

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_4 EnginEEring rEsourcEs

Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_5 Conversion Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENGR_7

Double Acting Cable Cylinder . . . . . . CC_6 Terms / Conditions of Sale . . . . . . ENGR_9

CC05, CC07, CC10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_7

CC20, CC25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_9

. . . . .CC30, .CC40, .CC52 . . . . . . . . . . . . CC_10

Single .Acting .Cable .Cylinder . . . . . . CC_12

CC30, CC40, CC52 . . . . . . . . . . . CC_10

Double .Purchase .Cable .Cylinder . . . . . . CC_16